Home

Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual, GFK

1. pe penser sw i234567 ix x x PROGRAMMABLE 2 x x CONTROLLER X GOSED BASE 10 SLOT EXPANSION FH E EH Eu X P NON CPU SLOTS NON CPU SLOTS EE TE Bin ELE gt n T o Gy POWER 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 SUPPLY I Figure 3 7 IC693CHS392 10 Slot Expansion Baseplate Remote Baseplates Figures 3 8 and 3 9 There can be no more than 700 feet of cable connecting all baseplates in a system that uses Remote baseplates A Remote baseplate cannot stand alone It must be connected to a system that has a CPU The CPU can be in a PLC or in a Personal Computer that is equipped with a Personal Computer Interface Card see Chapter 11 Remote capability is facilitated by the Remote baseplate s built in isolation between the 5 volt logic supply used by the I O modules residing in the Remote baseplate and the supply for the interface circuit associated with the I O Bus Expansion Interface Isolation helps prevent problems associated with unbalanced ground conditions Maximum number of Remote baseplates allowed per system depends on the type of CPU they are used with For CPUs 331 340 and 341 the maximum is 4 For CPUs numbered 350 and higher the maximum is 7 Each remote baseplate has a 25 pin female D type Expansion connector mounted at its right end for
2. NON CPU SLOTS gt Figure 3 9 IC693CHS393 10 Slot Remote Baseplate 03560 Chapter 3 Baseplates 3 9 I O Bus Expansion Cables Five prewired I O Bus Expansion cables are available from GE Catalog numbers and lengths of these cables are listed in the following figure You can build custom cables to suit the needs of your application if cable lengths other than those listed are required Refer to the Cables chapter for detailed information on cable type and connectors Note that the same cables can be used with both Expansion and Remote baseplates however the cables used in a remote expansion system must use the cable type described in the Cables chapter FEMALE CONNECTOR CT Figure A 5 3 6 26 FOOT u j CABLES C EL MALE MALE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR FigureB gt 50 FOOT C 1 I CABLE J MALE MALE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Catalog Number Length 1C693CBL300 3 feet 1 meter continuous shield 1C693CBL301 6 feet 2 meters continuous shield 1C693CBL302 50 feet 15 meters continuous shield with built in terminator this is not a Wye cable 1C
3. Figure 9 5 Model CSE311 or CSE313 5 Slot Embedded CPU Baseplate L3 LJ L3 L3 L 3 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER 245450 STS ZPU 00000000000000 00000000000000 USER PROGRAM AND REGISTER VALUES MAY BE LOST IF POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN 1 HOUR POWER o SUPPLY Figure 9 6 Model CSE323 10 510 Embedded CPU Baseplate 03560 Chapter 9 State Logic Products 9 9 Model CSE331 and CSE340 Modular CPUs The CSE 331 CPU IC693CSE331 and CSE 340 IC693CSE340 CPUs are single slot modules which must be installed in slot one labeled CPU 1 of a CPU baseplate IC693CHS391 or IC693CHS397 An illustration of the State Logic CPU modules is shown below STATE LOGIC CPU ET Figure 9 7 CPU Models CSE 331 or CSE 340 The CSE 331 and CSE 340 CPU modules provide the same functionality as the models CSE 311 313 and 323 and offer several more advanced features such as more I O points and more User Program memory See the table at the end of this chapter to compare CPU specifications Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 L CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply The 15 pin D connector provides the connection to an RS 485 compatible serial port The connection is made from th
4. Figure 1 4 I O Module Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 03560 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER BASE 5 SLOT CAUTION USER PROGRAM AND REGISTER VALUES MAY BE LOST IF POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN 1 HOUR NON CPU SLOTS Series 90 30 High Capacity Power Supply Power Supply Figure 1 5 Assembling the System Chapter 1 Overview of the Series 90 30 PLC 12345678 B12345678 12345678 B12345678 5 m ja 1 2 B3 B5 B7 At k 12345678 B12345678 12345678 B12345678 A3 m AS 7 A8 B1 lat E E a1 m Fata l6 jaa l7 2 IBS ps B1 7 B2 1 Ba 2 5 B3 B4 B7 BS Be B7 Modules
5. Figure 3 4 IC693CHS397 5 Slot Modular CPU Baseplate Co I 1 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER BASE 10 SLOT CAUTION NON CPU SLOTS NON CPU SLOTS USER PROGRAM AND REGISTER VALUES MAY BE LOST IF POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN POWER CPU I SUPPLY L 1 L 1 L 1 L 1 L 1 L 1 ZO wZ u xtn Figure 3 5 10693CH 391 10 Slot Modular CPU Baseplate 3 6 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Expansion Baseplates Figures 3 6 and 3 7 There can be no more than a total of 50 feet 15 meters of cable interconnecting Expansion baseplates and the CPU baseplate An Expansion baseplate cannot stand alone It must be connected to a system that has a CPU The CPU can be in a PLC or in a Personal Computer that is equipped with a Personal Computer Interface Card see Chapter 11 Maximum number of Expansion baseplates allowed per system depends on the type of CPU they are used with For CPUs 331 340 and 341 the maximum is 4 For CPUs numbered 350 and higher the maximum is 7 Each Expansion baseplate has a 25 pin female D type I O Bus Expansion connector mounted at its right end for connection to other baseplates Available in two versions 5 sl
6. 7 4 Discrete Relay Output Module Protection eesseseseeeeeeereeenene 7 4 High Density 32 Point Discrete Module Features seen 7 4 Wiring Methods for 32 Point Discrete I O Modules sees 7 6 Modules with Single 50 Pin Connector eee 7 6 Modules with Dual 24 Pin Connectors eseeeseeseeseeneeeeeneenennen ennt 7 7 Analog Module Features tree red tne Ree eph e De etes 7 8 Wiring Methods for Analog Modules seen 7 9 Analog Input Module Wiring Methods eene 7 9 Analog Output Module Wiring essere 7 10 Module Power Supply Current Draw essen 7 10 03560 xiii Contents Chapter 8 xiv I O Module Wire Routing esses enne a 7 1 Grouping Modules to Keep Wires Segregated ssssssssssseeeeeeree 7 11 IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver Module essere 7 12 ee RON e HR HEN Eats 7 12 DYM Specifications eee bete rete diede sette aede uto dede o 7 13 pulses sicud tiere ad Bein Td men en 7 13 enl Wn cT 8 1 Third Party Option Modules and the Accompany Program sese 8 Option Modules Discussed in this Chapter 8 IC693CMM301 Genius Communications Module GCM sees 8 2 Stat
7. 4 14 Table 5 1 CPU Firmware and PROM Configurations cccccccessessseesseeseeeeseseseeeseeeseenseesseeenseenseeneesseeess 5 6 Table 5 2 EPROM and EEPROM Catalog Numbers essere nnns 5 9 T ble 5 3 Series 90 30 CPU Capacities RE deed 5 10 Table 5 4 Range and Size of User References for CPU Models 311 341 5 11 Table 5 5 Range and Size of User References for CPU Models 350 through 374 5 12 Tuble5 5 Port T R5232 ea etes ieee neta Id eae 5 22 TADS Dake Port 2 6 485 uude epis im enata tetuer mete satu cse e ctu d aede 5 22 Table 7 1 IC693DVM300 Specifications nennen enne nnne enne enne 7 13 Table 7 2 IC693DVM300 Connections 7 14 Table 7 3 Series 90 30 Discrete I O Modules eesssesssseseeeeseeneeeennennen rennen nnne 7 15 Table 7 4 Series 90 30 Analog I O Modules sess 7 16 Table 8 1 Comparison of TCM302 and 303 8 39 Table 9 1 System Specifications for Series 90 30 State Logic CPUS esssseeeeeee 9 12 Table 10 1 Series 90 30 Cable Cross Reference essere enne nnne 10 1 Table 10 2 Expansion Port Pin Assignments cccccscessessseesseeeeeeseceseeeseeeenecesecnsecnseesaceceaeenseenseenaeents 10 25 Table 10 3 Wire List for 32 Point
8. B12A12 Length 10 3 meters Connector Fujitsu FCN 365S024 AU Figure 10 28 IC693CBL310 Cable 10 42 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Table 10 4 Wire List for 24 Pin Connectors Cables Pin Number Pair Wire Color Code Pin Number Pair Wire Color Code Al 1 BLACK Bl T BLUE A2 1 WHITE B2 7 WHITE A3 2 BROWN B3 8 VIOLET A4 2 WHITE B4 8 WHITE A5 3 RED B5 9 GRAY A6 3 WHITE B6 9 WHITE A7 4 ORANGE B7 10 BROWN 8 4 WHITE B8 10 BLACK 9 5 YELLOW 11 10 5 WHITE 11 BLACK All 6 GREEN 12 ORANGE 12 6 WHITE 12 BLACK B ROW 9 NOTE Each pair of wires should be tied together with heat tubing for identification purposes For example a piece of heat shrink tubing should be placed around the BLACK and WHITE wire pair Pair 1 that connect to Pins A1 and A2 etc Replacement Obsolescence Information GFK 0356Q This cable became obsolete and was replaced by cable IC693CBL315 now obsolete also The only difference between these two cables is in the wire color coding When cable IC693CBL315 became obsolete the replacement for these cables became IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328 Cables IC693CBL310 315 have straight connectors Cables 1C693CBL327 328 have right angle connectors The right angle connectors require less depth in front of
9. 8 43 Power Supply Requirement esses enne 8 43 Memory R quirem nt enn ere rte etes eaae eo eve dp Ey e Pared 8 43 Config ration n xr cette etr t a het ede eed 8 43 Ordering Information eee t re E eH AD oes 8 43 Documentation 4 Le Oe derive wana ei 8 43 Sate Logic PRODUCES e e 9 1 State Logic OVervieWw x oai en rere te e i ae E EO dead a rei nes ee eere RUP I ead 9 State Logic Products ascen t e n D E HERI 9 1 Baseplates and Power Supply I O and Option Modules sss 9 1 Contents Contents Chapter 10 AD693CMM301 State Logic Serial Communications Module SCM 9 2 D sCEDpLUOl e eee b RE naan 9 2 OK DED 9 2 Reset Button deiode te i e ES 9 2 Serial Connector aatem ied nb Rete I AL eee 9 3 Cable Inforimationz rete e id Pt we einen detis 9 3 State Logic SCM Documentation sssssesseseeeseeeeneenne nennen enne 9 3 IC693SL P300 State Logic Processor Module ssessseeeeeeeeee 9 4 Description iieu aenn oweedteedien ih E de eod eiie iih ie HR ires 9 4 SEP Features atento eai d e he e eee hts a 9 5 MGI ONY a I etd Saves tunics 9 5 Tinstalll ation EE 9 5 Status Eight 2d iion a ee ed eae Uae dene leat I 9 6 PUSHDULLOD tert A stays
10. C9 OD A lesee note pep Fe ae ip Figure H 7 1693ACC333 TBQC Terminal Block Note The neutral row terminals labeled with the letter N are provided for wiring convenience Their use is optional They are electrically isolated from the numbered terminals You may use them as is or jumper them to a numbered terminal Refer to GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual for wiring diagrams of the modules Mounting These terminal blocks are mounted on a standard user supplied 35 mm DIN rail Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q Components Terminal Block Quick Connect Components for 32 Point Modules The 32 point modules do not require a new faceplate since they are equipped with a dual connector faceplate as a standard feature Since each module has two 24 pin connectors they each require two cables and two terminal blocks Also since the modules two connectors are oriented differently see example in figure below the two cables are different One is called a right side cable and the other a left side cable Note These terminal blocks will not work with the 32 point I O modules that have 50 pin connectors A1234 5678 1234 5678 C1234 5678 01234 5678 5 12 VDC POS NEG LOGIC 3 0 mA Pt at 5VDC 8 5 mA Pt at 12VDC Pin B12 Pin B1 Left Side Conn
11. STATUS Fuse Indicator nee B1234 IONS Hinged Cover Front View OUTPUT Module Type OUTPUT Color Bar RELAY N O 2 AMP Q Q Indicates o Q of Module Pilot B 0 4 piot Q Removable Emargenc Removable Q E TE Insert Q Pump 1 ON Board e lt Hinged Cover Oa Pump 2 ON Q o Connection 2 Diagram on Motor Starter 1 Back of Insert Z MotorStarter 2 Kart Q 4 5 User can Write CR2 D 5 Signal Names Q Front of Insert CR3 ots xem Aumas LO sos Q SOL 2 bo SOL 3 44A726782 015 SOL 4 FOR USE WITH Module Catalog Figure 7 1 Example of Series 90 30 Standard Density Discrete Output Module 03560 Chapter 7 Input Output Modules 7 3 Wiring Standard Density 16 Point or Less Discrete Modules There are three basic wiring methods m Direct Method Run the wires from the field devices switches relays etc directly to the screws on the modules terminal boards m Terminal Strip Method Mount a terminal strip inside the control enclosure and wire from the terminal strip to the modules terminal boards Then wire field devices to the terminal strip m Terminal Block Quick Connect Assembly Method The Terminal Block Quick Connect Assembly has three pieces a faceplate a cable and a terminal block The faceplate snaps onto an I O module in place of its normal terminal board This faceplate has a conne
12. eese eerte eee eene eene eene neta aa enu 13 1 Troubleshooting Features of Series 90 30 Hardware sese 13 1 Indicator Lights LEDs and Terminal Board 13 1 Module LED Indicators essent 13 2 Troubleshooting Features of Programming Software sess 13 3 Ladder Screens tdatitapedubin titt 13 3 Configuration Screens viene arden anni e cmt E tete eet ai ge ea ces 13 3 Eault T bles o ta eee pei MEE 13 3 System Status References siete ni iP D HERE UTI e OT Miren 13 3 Reference Tables se eG 13 4 Override teat re wed teeth a etatis 13 4 Sequential Event Recorder SER DOIO functional instruction 13 4 Replacing tenti crea EES 13 5 Series 90 30 Product enne nnne nnns 13 5 Module Euse Eistar i eee eite ene me e i 13 6 Spare Replacement Parts ee te te E Ma een ee Leg Eee dude 13 7 Preventive Maintenance Suggestions essen enne 13 8 Getting Additional Help and Information 13 9 Serial Ports and Cables reae nasa eL Ces Da PR ask uo eee A 1 RS 422 ntetfaCe Stereo eee P debet oleae acres aeos 1 Cable and Connector Specifications essen A 2 Series 90 PLC Serial Pott Co ether e deter eani re EISE A 3 Workmaster Serial
13. 10 22 Description insofern D UR EE A edd 10 22 Cable Lengths annee eR eR eed 10 22 Function of Cables rms ier RR p n d RE On ter 10 22 Connecting the Cables cse nete da e e ehe eant 10 23 Important Notes About I O Bus Expansion 1 10 23 Cable Application Suggestions sss 10 23 Using Standard Cables nli atem uet aei b eed 10 23 Using Gustom Built ete ee eh 10 24 Building Custom Length I O Bus Expansion Cables sess 10 24 Two Types of Custom Built Cables sse 10 24 Components Needed to Build Custom Length I O Bus Expansion Cables 10 24 Expansion Port Pin Assignment c cccccesceeseeeseeeseeeseceeceseeceeeseenseenseeeseeseeeaees 10 25 Expansion Bus Termination esses nennen 10 25 Shield Treatment nane oap bien indigere 10 26 Alert for Users of Early Remote Baseplate Versions eee 10 26 Making 100 Shielded Cable esee 10 27 Wiring Diagrams canes e EN e ede 10 28 Application Examples ong 10 31 Expansion System Cable Connections essen 10 31 Remote and Expansion System Cable Connection 10 31 IC693CBL303 Hand Hand Programmer and Converter IC690A CC900 Cable 10 33 Function of cable iet en REP RR UP DRE ER GARS 10 33 Cable
14. 2 Analog ooo o 1 cepsaresoons Comer 24 VDC Tap pom 5 o ICS9SMDL340 input Modide 5 jm ny o 1 IC9SMDL2A0 pst Modis IC69SMDLHIOOupuModste SSCS a DAMM a IC693MDL930 IC693MDL930 Relay Out Mod Out IC693MDL930 Relay Mod Totals milliamps 3 s P Watts 6 41 10 99 4 5 Total Watts 22 32 Example 2 Series 90 30 Model 351 Modular CPU 10 slot baseplate CESCH Modular CPU mese 20 __ C ICOACCHON o _ jus ice wLGNOAwbgOuu Analog apt Mesa HS Comer m SS pu Module uo pur m 1 IC693MDL940 Relay Mod IC693MDL940 Relay Out Mod Out Mod Totals milliamps w Boo Watts 11 68 8 11 j 24 Total Watts 23 03 Scan Sweep Time Calculation Scan or Sweep time is the time it takes the PLC CPU to perform all of its tasks one time Scan time contribution is the amount of time added to the PLC scan by the software and hardware components of the system For systems that may be time sensitive this factor should be made part of the design specification To help avoid timing issues the theoretical scan time should be calculated so that appropria
15. RS 422 RS 232 PORT PORT Figure 11 4 IC690ACC901 Series 90 SNP Port to RS 232 Adapter Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Programmer Hardware Products IC693PRG300 Hand Held Programmer HHP Some models of the Series 90 30 PLC can be programmed with the GE Hand Held Programmer HHP The HHP uses the Statement List Language With the HHP you can develop debug and monitor logic programs monitor data tables and configure PLC and I O parameters Note The user logic program in Series 90 30 CPU numbers 350 and above cannot be viewed or edited with the Hand Held Programmer You must use Logicmaster 90 30 Control VersaPro or Logic Developer PLC programming software with those CPUs The HHP connects to the CPU serial port through a 15 pin D type connector on the Series 90 30 PLC power supply in the CPU baseplate The physical connection is through a 6 foot 2 meters long cable IC693CBL303 This cable also provides power connections to the HHP and provides a signal that tells the PLC that an HHP is attached The HHP can be connected or disconnected while the PLC is powered up The HHP does not require communications parameter configuration in order to communicate with a PLC This makes it useful for troubleshooting a communications problem between a PC and the PLC SERIES 90 30 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
16. sss 2 16 Additional Modules with Shield Grounding Requirements 2 16 General Wiring Guidelines essen eene enne enne 2 17 Discrete I O Module Connection Methods essere 2 18 Connections to I O Module Terminal Boards eene 2 18 Terminal Block Quick Connect Installation for 16 Point Discrete Modules 2 19 Installation of 32 Point Discrete 50 Pin Connector Modules 2 19 Using Weidmuller 912263 Terminal Block eee 2 19 Using a Generic Terminal Block or Strip eee 2 20 Direct ee HE 2 20 Installation of Discrete 32 Point Dual 24 Pin Connector Modules 2 20 Using a 4 insedit Mies 2 20 ix Contents Chapter 3 With a Generic Terminal Block Strip 2 20 Direct Method enar e rete edd e 2 21 General Wiring Methods for Analog Modules sse 2 21 Analog Input Module Wiring Methods sse 2 21 Using a Generic Terminal Block or 2 21 Direct Method eren idee peg apis 2 21 TBQC not Recommended for Analog Modules sse 2 22 Analog Output Module Wiring 2 22 General espe ne ts 2 22 Using a Generic Terminal Blo
17. a44838A Weidmuller 912263 Terminal Block 123 45 678 9 Top Mounts on i DIN Rail view Figure 7 4 50 PIN 32 Point I O Module Connection Method 7 6 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Modules with Dual 24 Pin Connectors Three choices are available for connecting these modules m Connect to a pair of Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC terminal blocks IC693ACC337 using a pair of GE cables Three lengths of cables are available 20 0 5 meter 3 feet 1 meter 6 feet 2 meters The cables come in right hand and left hand types because the connectors on the modules are oriented differently see figure 7 2 For details on the terminal blocks and cables please see Appendix J m Connect to user supplied terminal block strip or directly to I O field devices using a pair of 10 foot 3 meter GE interface cables These cables have 24 pin connectors on one end for connecting to the module and stripped tinned leads on the other for wiring to a terminal block strip or I O devices Cable IC693CBL327 is for the left side and IC693CBL328 is for the right side These cables are useful if you have to run your wiring through conduit that is too small for a connector to fit through or if you need a cable longer than six feet
18. deser de ree 9 6 hrurniwae MCCC 9 7 Cable Information e a a E E enne 9 7 Hardware Specific tiohs innnan a E E a E a ieai 9 7 State Logic Processor SLP Documentation cccccccseceseeeteeeteeeseeeseeeseeneeeeeeseees 9 7 State Logic CPUS 9 8 Features of State Logic o aaa 9 8 Model CSE311 CSE313 and CSE323 Embedded CPU Baseplates 9 9 Model CSE331 and CSE340 Modular CPUs sess 9 10 CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply 9 11 Configuring the State Logic CPUS sesessssssssssesseeeeeeeneeeee nee 9 11 State Logic CPU Firmware PROM Configurations eee 9 13 State Logic CPU Data Sheets tei tette ted retener e 9 13 CSE311 Catalog Number 693 8 311 9 14 CSE313 Catalog Number IC693CSE313 9 15 CSE323 Catalog Number IC693CS E323 9 16 CSE331 Catalog Number 693 8 331 9 17 CSE340 Catalog Number IC693CS E340 9 18 CAD OS 10 1 Cable Data EC 10 7 IC647CBL704 Workstation Interface to Series 90 CPU SNP Port Cable 10 8 Eunction of cable tet ee eee RR UI Pera 10 8 IC6
19. 3 20 Baseplate Comparison Table cccccscccssccssecesseeseceseeeseeeseeesaeceseceeeeeecseeseseseseenaeees 3 22 SUP Qe re M 4 1 Power Supply Categorie Sensini io ieiet E eene nnne nnns 4 1 Power Supply Feature Comparison sess 4 1 AC DC Input Power Supplies noose E eere 4 2 IC693PWR321 Standard Power Supply 120 240 VAC or 125 VDC Input 4 2 IC693PWR330 High Capacity Power Supply 120 240 VAC 125 VDC Input 4 4 Field Wiring Connections for the AC DC Input Power Supplies 4 5 Isolated 24 VDC Supply Output Connections 4 6 DC Input Only Power Supplies essen nennen nnns 4 7 IC693PWR322 Standard Power Supply 24 48 VDC Input eese 4 7 Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR322 4 8 IC693PWR328 Standard Power Supply 48 VDC 4 10 Calculating Input Power Requirements for 693 328 4 11 Input Power Current Calculation for IC693PWR328 Power Supply 4 12 IC693PWR331 High Capacity Power Supply 24 VDC 4 13 Current Derating for Higher Temperatures 4 14 Calculating Input Power Requirements for 693 4 15 Field Wiring Connections to the DC
20. SHIELDED CONNECTIONS 244932 TWISTED INSIDE D CONNECTORS PiN PAIRS sof a eo Ga e 50 17 RD 15 R2 n ti XXL SERIES 90 ISOLATED ersi 10 CMM REPEATER TERM 22 lt gt E gt PORT CONVERTER 11 11 1 BRICK TERM 23 OR GND 7 11 2 150 OHMS 11 11 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN FEMALE MALE FEMALE NOTE WHEN WIRING RS 422 485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THE TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN A DAISY CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BELOW MASTER CMM SLAVE 1 CPU BUILT IN PORT CMM SLAVE 2 THE TRANSMISSION LINE ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON THE CMM IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINAL STRIPS OR OTHER TYPES OF CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF A SWects 2 ISOLATED REPEATER CONVERTER BRICK USED AS CONVERTER 25 PIN FEMALE SW ON J2 ISOLATED REPEATER CONVERTER BRICK USED AS A REPEATER 25 PIN 25 PIN Iu 2 MALE FEMALE TO OTHER DEVICES MAXIMUM OF 8 DEVICES ON A MULTIDROP TERMINATE THE RD B SIGNAL ONLY AT END OF MULTIDROP CABLE TERMINATE CONNECTION ON FIRST AND LAST DROPS ONLY ON THE CMM INSTALL JUMPER TO CONNECT INTERNAL 120 OHM RESISTOR ON THE ISOLATED REPEATER CONVERTER INSTALL 150 OHM RESISTOR SUPPLIED ON THE CMM311 ONLY PORT
21. essen nennen enne H 2 Table I 1 Connector and Cable Specifications ssssssessesseeseeeeeee eene enne I 2 Table K 1 Standard ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange Codes K 1 Table K 2 AWG to Metric Wire Size Conversion eseessesseeeeeeeerenren nennen nennen enne nnns K 2 Table K 3 Celsius to Fahrenheit COnversion ccccccesccsssessseesseeeseceseceseeesceesseceaeceseeseeseeecsaeeeeeneeeseeneeeas K 3 Table K 4 General Conversions sss K 4 Table K 5 Length Equivalents eee greet e ote tee t K 5 T ble K 6 Area Equivalents reet rtp a Pi er e oet ered eae K 5 Table K 7 Volume Equivalents T cete eet ere i en e er e HR REO Rd K 6 Table K 8 Volume Equivalents II nnne nnne enne enne nns K 6 03560 xxxi Chapter Overview of the Series 90 30 PLC 1 The Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller PLC is a member of the GE Series 90 PLC family The Basic Parts of a Series 90 30 PLC The Series 90 30 PLC is very versatile because 1 it is programmable and 2 it is assembled from a wide variety of modular plug together components Therefore by choosing the correct components and developing an appropriate program the PLC can be used for an almost unlimited variety of applications Although there are many choices of individual hardware components to use
22. sse 8 31 Figure 8 20 Communications Control Module essent nnne nennen 8 34 Figure 8 21 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module 8 35 Figure 8 22 IC693TCM302 303 Temperature Control Module TCM eee 8 37 Figure 8 23 IC693PTM100 101 Components essesseesseeeeeeeenenenennne nnne enne nnne nennen enne 8 41 Figure 8 24 IC693PTM100 101 Component Mounting esses ener nnne 8 42 Figure 9 1 AD693CMM301 State Logic Serial Communications Module sess 9 2 Fig re 9 2 ICO03CBL305S WYE de bo basa diede pend erben nati 9 3 Figure 9 3 IC693SLP300 State Logic Processor Module for Series 90 30 9 4 Figure 9 4 State Logic Processor Module User Details essere 9 6 Figure 9 5 Model CSE311 or CSE313 5 Slot Embedded CPU Baseplate sese 9 9 Figure 9 6 Model CSE323 10 Slot Embedded CPU Baseplate seen 9 9 Figure 9 7 CPU Models CSE 331 or CSE 340 nenne nne nnne nnne 9 10 Figure 9 8 Serial Port Connector cccccccccesccssscesscesscesseceseceseceseceeesseeceaecnseceseesssesaeceseseseesseeseecsseseseenseees 9 11 Figure 10 1 Serial Port to Work Station Interface Board Cable Connection sss 10 8 Figure 10 2 Series 90 PLC to Workmaster II Serial Cable een 10 9 Figure
23. 03560 MODEL 311 313 5 SLOT MODEL 313 10 SLOT MODEL 331 340 341 and 350 351 352 360 363 364 5 Slot CPU MODEL 331 340 341 and 350 351 352 360 363 364 10 Slot CPU MODEL 331 340 341 and 350 351 352 360 363 364 5 Slot Expansion MODEL 331 340 341 and 350 351 352 360 363 364 10 Slot Expansion Figure 12 2 Allowable Location of Modules DISCRETE INPUT OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT OUTPUT HIGH SPEED COUNTER PROCESSOR GENIUS COMMUNICATIONS ENHANCED GENIUS COMM MOTION MATE APM300 DSM302 VO LINK INTERFACE GENIUS BUS CONTROLLER ETHERNET INTERFACE TEMPERATURE CONTROL DISCRETE INPUT OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT OUTPUT HIGH SPEED COUNTER PROCESSOR GENIUS COMMUNICATIONS ENHANCED GENIUS COMM MOTION MATE APM300 DSM302 VO LINK INTERFACE GENIUS BUS CONTROLLER ETHERNET INTERFACE TEMPERATURE CONTROL DISCRETE INPUT OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT OUTPUT HIGH SPEED COUNTER PROCESSOR GENIUS COMMUNICATIONS ENHANCED GENIUS COMM MOTION MATE APM300 DSM302 VO LINK INTERFACE PCM ADC CMM SLP GENIUS BUS CONTROLLER ETHERNET INTERFACE TEMPERATURE CONTROL DISCRETE INPUT OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT OUTPUT HIGH SPEED COUNTER PROCESSOR GENIUS COMMUNICATIONS ENHANCED GENIUS COMM MOTION MATE APM300 DSM302 VO LINK INTERFACE GENIUS BUS CONTROLLER ETHERNET INTERFACE TEMPERATURE CONTROL PCM ADC SLP DISCRETE INPUT OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT OUTPUT HIGH SPEED COUNTER PROCESSOR GENIUS COMMUNICATIONS ENHAN
24. SERIAL PORT CONNECTOR TO CPU SERIAL PORT Figure 11 5 Hand Held Programmer for the Series 90 30 PLC 03560 Chapter 11 Programmer Hardware Products 11 5 Pin Assignments for the Isolated Repeater Converter Table C 1 Isolated Repeater Converter Pin Assignments J1 RS 422 Port 25 pin female connector J2 RS 422 RS 232 Port eae female connector asen a Seo bowen 1 1 2 NC 2 SD Send Data RS 232 3 NC 3 RD Receive Data RS 232 4 NC 4 RTS Request to Send RS 232 5 NC 5 CTS Clear to Send RS 232 6 NC 6 NC 7 OV Ground Connection 7 OV Ground Connection 8 CTS B Clear to Send Optional Termination 8 CTS B Clear to Send Optional Termination 9 CTS A Clear to Send Optional Termination 9 CTS A Clear to Send Optional Termination 10 CTS B Clear to Send 10 RTS B Request to Send 11 CTS A Clear to Send 11 RTS A Request to Send 12 RTS B Request to Send 12 CTS B Clear to Send 13 RTS A Request to Send 13 CTS A Clear to Send 14 RD B Receive Data 14 SD B Send Data 15 RD A _ Receive Data 15 SD A Send Data 16 SD A Send Data 16 RD A _ Receive Data 17 SD B Send Data 17 RD B _ Receive Data 18 NC 18 RD A Receive Data Optional Termination 19 NC 19 RD B Receive Data Optional Termination 20 NC 20 NC 21 NC 21 NC 22 RD B _ Receive Data 22 SD B Send Data Optional Termination 23 RD A _ Re
25. SERIES 90 30 SERIES 90 30 GENIUS COMMUNICATIONS BUS coo zoo 7 7 SERIES 90 70 Figure 8 3 Example of Genius Communications Network GCM Documentation For detailed information on the Genius Communications Module including installation instructions refer to GFK 0412 the Series 90 30 Genius Communications Module User s Manual 03560 Chapter 8 Option Modules 8 3 8 4 IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius Communications Module GCM The Enhanced Genius Communications Module GCM IC693CMM302 is an intelligent module that provides automatic global data communications between a Series 90 30 PLC and up to 31 other devices on a Genius bus The GCM can be located in any standard Series 90 30 CPU baseplate expansion baseplate or remote baseplate However for most efficient operation it is recommended that the module be installed in the CPU baseplate since the sweep impact time of the GCM module depends on the model of PLC and the baseplate where it is located Note if a GCM module is present in a system GCM modules cannot be included in the system Multiple GCM modules can be installed in a Series 90 30 PLC system with each GCM having its own Genius bus serving up to 31 additional devices on the bus For example this allows a Series 90 30 PLC with three GCM modules to exchange global data
26. When assembled the system will look like this J HIGH CAPACITY POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER Figure 1 6 A Basic System An assembly of baseplate and modules such as this one is called a Rack What else would be needed to make this basic system functional To make this basic system functional you would need W Mounting Safe secure mounting for the PLC in a protective enclosure W Wiring This includes properly installed incoming power to the power supply as well as wiring from the I O modules to field devices such as switches sensors solenoids relays etc Program An application program for the PLC to run This is developed with GE PLC programming software What if the application requires more than five modules You could use a 10 slot baseplate shown in the next picture Ai2s4se78 At234s6T8 Ai2345678 A12345078 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 1234567 12 456 B12345678 B12345678 I O Bus Expansion Connector Figure 1 7 Ten Slot Rack 1 6 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 What if the application requires more than ten modules You can add one or more Expansion or Remo
27. ceeeee creen creen eere nenne F 1 COV ELVIS Wa ioo nte ETRAS ORE AME Ene vehe F 1 Information Required nennen enne enne nnne nnne F 1 Procedure iactare e ARUBA HR He dn F 2 Step 1 Basic Method to Calculate Module Dissipation sees F 2 Step 2 Calculation for PLC Power F 3 Step 3 Output Calculations for Discrete Output F 3 Step 4 Input Calculations for Discrete Input Modules sese F 4 Step 5 Final Calculation tre her ieri emt edt eee a ehe ees F 6 Other Information Related to Enclosure Sizing sse F 6 Catalog Number to Publication Cross Reference eere G 1 General System Information sse enne G 2 Analog VO Modules monada ea e a aE Ea Ea a E re oie TRTE a G 2 Base plates lt 7 E G 2 Communications Modules 0 ccceccessecesecseeeseesececeeaeeseesecseeesecsececesaeceeeeaeeeecesecaeeeeeeaees G 3 Contents xxi Contents Appendix H Appendix I xxii CPU Modules CPU311 CPU341 terne nenne G 3 CPU Modules CPU350 CPUS374 iio RE ERG ERU G 4 Digital Valve Driver Module sese enne G 5 Discrete VO Modules ee er tete reete ei ee ein e ee i ee de censeo G 5 Genius Modules ennenen a n a e aa o enairat lae G 6 ieu WI RR RI
28. 4ifusing a 311 313 or 323 CPU 8 ifusing a 331 340 or 341 CPU 79 if using a 360 364 CPU Please see the section Maximum Number of Modules Per System for data W Types of Option Modules The PCM ADC CMM and SLP modules can only work in a Modular CPU baseplate Use of these modules therefore rules out the use of Embedded CPUs 311 313 323 See the section Location of Modules in the PLC Racks for more information Performance as shown in the CPUs chapter the CPU350 364 CPUs use a more powerful microprocessor than the lower numbered CPUs For applications where higher performance is required one of these would be a good choice For math intensive applications the CPU352 with its built in math coprocessor would give the best performance For Ethernet applications the CPU364 with its built in Ethernet interface provides faster performance than separate CPU and Ethernet modules This is because the separate modules have to communicate over the PLC backplane which is slower than the CPU364 s internal path For a similar reason when using serial communications the CPUs 351 352 and 363 using Ports 1 and 2 perform faster than a separate serial communications module IC693CMM311 and CPU combination W Extended features The IC693CPU364 has a built in Ethernet interface which would eliminate the need for a separate Ethernet module This would save a PLC slot The CPU351 CPU352 and CPU353 each have
29. RTD Input S 5 A External Power Input Re Hel for Output Relays e 2 2 Input Connector 3 24 He Output Connector 3 94 ois 4412 M 94 5 5 24 6 oles 6 heke T 24 7 a 1 8 19 10 Figure 8 22 1 693 302 303 Temperature Control Module TCM Connections Field devices thermocouples relays RTD and external power for output relays are connected to the module using a pair of plug in connectors which are supplied with the module These connectors have captive screw terminals for ease of connecting field wiring The signal name for each terminal is labeled on the module s front cover next to each connector as shown in the drawing above For example Channel 8 connections are labeled 8 and 8 on each connector Input connections are on the left hand connector and output connections are on the right hand connector Chapter 8 Option Modules 8 37 8 38 LED Indicators W External Power This green LED is normally ON indicating that the module is receiving power If this LED is OFF it may indicate that the TCM s internal fuse is open W R Run This green LED is normally ON When there is an internal module fault this LED will alternately flash with the red Fault F LED Fault This red LED is normally OFF This light flashes upon module
30. CTS B 8 TOY 8 RTSB cTs B 8 x 14 RTS B CTS A 15 ey M 15 RTS A CTS A 15 6 RTS A 5V 5 5 5V amp 5 5 H 5 5V GND 7 7 GND x GND 7 q 7 GND SHLD 1 1 SHLD 1 SHLD 52 2 52 oa Se PS P4 P 5VDC To device x lt gt lt I gt requiring Ground external ET anag RT 9 power 9 RT RD B 11 7 11 RD B RD A 10 e Note Do not daisy chain 5VDC pins e 10 RD A SD B 13 13 SD B SD A 12 12 SD A CTS B 8 8 CTS B CTS A 15 15 CTS A RTS B 14 14 RTS B RTS A 6 4 6 RTS A 5V 5 5 5V GND 7 7 GND SHLD 1 1 SHLD Slave Device lt gt lt 2 lt To Other Slave Devices Maximum of 8 devices on a multidrop To Other Slave Devices Slave Device Maximum of 8 devices on a multidrop Specifications Mechanical RS 485 Installation Hardware Electrical Voltage Supply Typical Current Ground Isolation Conformance Operating Temperature Baud Rate 15 pin D shell male for direct mounting to serial port on the programmable controller 15 pin D shell female for communication cable Two MG thread connector thumbscrews Recommended torque 8 in lbs 0 9 Newton meter These are supplied with Isolator Two user supplied 6 32 4mm thread panel m
31. eerte tetuer Lee e Fere e ep ke i A 4 5 232 6 485 E 7 IC690ACC901 Miniconverter enne A 7 IC690ACC900 Obsolete Converter sess A 7 Serial Cable Diagrams it nen Peer ee ue ar eg i A 8 RS 232 Point to Point Connections A 8 RS 422 Point to Point entente 10 Multidrop Connections nnne A 10 IC690ACC900 Converter dem B 1 uci P B 1 deter ere pletri re EUR 1 Location in System dnce Re eee abt i ees e B 2 tete edt 2 Cable Description ssi eee lee rrt teet ete n eis rtt eds B 3 RS 232 Interface Pin Assignments cccccccscesssessecsecceseeescecseeceseeeeeeseeseneeeseenseeess B 4 RS 422 RS 485 Interface Pin Assignment sese B 5 IIBER B 6 T mper Configurations nera mel ies o a REE E E tes E B 7 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G 03560 Contents Example of Cable Configurations essen nnne B 9 IC655CCM690 Isolated Repeater Converter eere eere eerte eere C 1 Description of the Isolated C 1 Logi
32. essere 10 22 Figure 10 16 How to use Split Ring Ferrules for Foil and Braided Cable Shield 10 26 Figure 10 17 Point To Point Cable Wiring for Continuous Shield Custom Length Cables 10 28 Figure 10 18 Point To Point Cable Wiring Diagram for Applications Requiring Less Noise Immunity10 28 Figure 10 19 Earlier Versions of Remote Baseplate Custom WYE Cable Wiring Diagram 10 29 Figure 10 20 Current Remote baseplate IC693CHS393 399 Custom Wye Cable Wiring Diagram 10 30 Figure 10 21 Example of Connecting Expansion Baseplates sess 10 31 Figure 10 22 Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates sss 10 32 Figure 10 23 Wiring Connections for IC693CBL303 and Custom Built 10 34 Figure 10 24 Hand Held Programmer Cable Connection to a Series 90 30 10 34 Figure 10 25 Wye Cable mete e ete oinnia t e P ue e ERU REDE at ee ton eve 10 35 Figure 10 26 Wye Cable Connections cccceccsscssesesceseeeeeeseesececeesecneesecsecesesaeccecsecseeeaecseeeneeaeeaeeneeas 10 36 Figure 10 27 32 Point I O Module to Weidmuller Terminal Block Assembly 10 39 Fig re 10 28 0693C BE310 Cable susto dpud OR d Usi Lab Qo kr EDAD Rd oe buie 10 42 Figure 10 29 Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front
33. 03560 IC693PCM300 Installation Configuration User s Guide GFK 0255 1C693PCM301 Programming Options IC693PCM311 5 bis d Programming PCOP Development Software GFK 0487 Modes yer Programming MegaBasic GFK 0256 Programming C Language GFK 0771 PCM C Function Library Reference GFK 0772 PCM Quick Reference Guide GFK 0260 PCOP Quick Reference Guide GFK 0657 TERMF Quick Reference Guide GFK 0655 1C693PTM100 Installation configuration user s guide GFK 1734 Power Transducer Module Not available until late 1999 PTM Not available until late 1999 Power Supply Modules All Series 90 30 Power Supply Modules 1C693PWRxxx Installation GFK 0356 Configuration Options Configuration HHP GFK 0402 Configuration LM90 GFK 0466 Configuration Control GFK 1295 Configuration VersaPro GFK 1670 Configuration CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer PLC GFK 1868 Programming Device IC693PRG300 Hand Held Programmer User s Manual using the HHP for configuration and programming GFK 0402 State Logic Products IC693CSE311 Installation Configuration User s Guide GFK 1056 IC693CSE313 Programming Options IC693CSE323 ECLiPS English Control Language GFK 0732 IC693CSE331 OnTOP User s Guide GFK 0747 IC693CSE340 OnTOP Troubleshooting Manual GFK 0750 State Logic CPUs AD693SLP300 Installation Configuration User s Guide GFK
34. 30 I O LINK Interface User s Manual GFK 0641 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual GFK 0664 Series 90 30 PLC Axis Positioning Module Programmer s Manual GFK 0685 Series 90 Programmable Controllers Flow Computer User s Manual GFK 0695 Series 90 30 Enhanced Genius Communications Module User s Manual GFK 0726 Series 90 30 PLC State Logic Processor User s Guide GFK 0732 Series 90 30 PLC ECLiPS User s Manual GFK 0747 Series 9077 30 PLC OnTOP User s Guide GFK 0750 OnTop for Series 90 30 State Logic Program User s Manual GFK 0781 Motion MateTM APM300 for Series 90 30 PLC Follower Mode User s Manual GFK 0823 Series 90 30 I O LINK Master Module User s Manual GFK 0828 Series 907M 30 Diagnostic System User s Manual GFK 0840 Motion Mate APM300 for Series 90 30 PLC Standard Mode User s Manual GFK 0867 GE Product Agency Approvals Standards General Specifications GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications GFK 1028 Series 90 30 I O Processor Module User s Manual GFK 1034 Series 90 30 Genius amp Bus Controller User s Manual GFK 1037 Series 90 30 FIP Remote I O Scanner User s Manual GFK 1056 Series 90 30 State Logic Control System User s Manual GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 30 PLC Station Manager Manual GFK 1179 Series 90 PLC Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards GFK 1464
35. 30V computer grade Extra flexible construction is recommended for short lengths Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 IMPORTANT DO NOT USE TERMINAL STRIPS OR OTHER TYPES OF CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION LINE WHEN WIRING A MULTIDROP SERIAL DATA CONFIGURATION Cables 10 WORKMASTER OR WORKMASTER Il MAKE CONNECTIONS SHIELDED INSIDE D CONNECTORS SERIES 2 TWISTED WSI PAIRS 4 90 PLC RD A RD B SD A SD B RTS A RTS B CTS A CTS B RT ov SHIELD r1 TI LI 1g r1 TI LI ran pog 37 PIN p e n E t 15 PIN CONNECTOR CONNECTOR 2 000BROo0oN2o UP TOA MAXIMUM OF 4 000 FEET SERIES 1 200 METERSK 90 PLC RD A RD B SD A SD B RTS A RTS B NOTE CTS A WHEN WIRING RS 422 485 MULTIDROP CTS B 1 1 CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THE TRANS RT MISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CON ov FIGURING THE CABLE IN A DAISY CHAIN SHIELD FASHION AS SHOWN BELOW 2 o0o0 ooN2o 15 PIN CONNECTOR WORKMASTER PLC 1 SERIES PLC3 PLC2 90 PLC RD A RD B SD A SD B RTS A RTS B CTS A CTS RT ov SHIELD ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON THE PLC IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMI NAL STRIPS OR OTHER TYPES OF CON NE
36. 6 2 Battery Replacement Memory Protection Factors sess 6 3 The Importance of Backing up Your 6 3 Factors Affecting Battery Life esses 6 4 Low Battery Warning Methods eese eene 6 4 Operating Without a Memory Backup Battery sess 6 6 RAM Memory Battery Backup Connection Path essere 6 8 Super Capacitor Memory Backup c ccccessccssscesscesseesseceseeeseeeseeeeseceaecnseeeeesesesneeneeesaes 6 8 Maintaining RAM Memory During Storage or Shipment of a 6 9 Modular CRU er ee I te Ee os e e eo batte e 6 9 Embedded CPUs 2 t ER te tte e nie eret et birgt nt 6 9 Battery Accessory Kit IC693ACC315 ssssssssseseeeeeeeen eene 6 9 Battery Accessory Kit Installation 6 10 External Battery Module IC693A C302 sssssssssesseseeeeeeee nennen nnne 6 10 Batteries in Power Supplies on Expansion or Remote Racks esses 6 11 Chapter 7 Input Output don urea oS ph Ee ed pep ee eva ean 7 1 Basic VO Module O ete eee ko edente 7 1 Dis rete V O Modules ia ORTI UD E EDD an 7 2 Discrete I O Module Point 7 2 Standard Density Discrete I O Module Features 7 2 Wiring Standard Density 16 Point or Less Discrete
37. CPU Type Total Baseplates per System Load Required from Power Supply Processor Speed Processor Type Operating Temperature Typical Scan Rate User Program Memory maximum Discrete Input Points I Discrete Output Points Q Discrete Global Memory G Internal Coils M Output Temporary Coils T System Status References S Register Memory R Analog Inputs AI Analog Outputs AQ System Registers for reference table viewing only cannot be referenced in user logic program Timers Counters Shift Registers Built in Ports Communications Override Battery Backed Clock Interrupts Type of Memory Storage Catalog Number IC693CPU341 Single slot CPU module 5 1 CPU baseplate 4 expansion and or remote 490 milliamps from 5 VDC supply 80C188XL 0 to 60 degrees C 32 to 140 degrees F ambient 0 3 milliseconds per 1K of logic boolean contacts 20 MegaHertz 512 1024 bits 256 bits 128 bits S SA SB SC 32 bits each 9999 words 1024 words 256 words 16 words SR gt 2000 1 uses connector on PLC power supply Supports SNP SNP X slave protocols Requires CMM module for SNP SNP X master CCM or RTU slave support PCM module for RTU master support LAN Supports multidrop Also supports Ethernet FIP Profibus GBC GCM GCM option modules RAM and optional EPROM or EEPROM for early versions Starting with hardware version IC693CPU341 J and firmware Release 4 61 o
38. CPU374 Catalog Number IC693CPU374 5 40 CPU type Processor speed Single slot CPU module with embedded Ethernet Interface 133 MHz Ps Processor Type Embedded 586 RE o Typical Scan Rate 0 15 milliseconds per 1K of logic boolean contacts srat CPU 374 Type of Memory Storage RAM and Flash P User Memory total 240KB 245 760 Bytes Note Actual size of available user in program memory depends on the amounts configured for R AI AQ configurable word memory types RESTART Discrete Input Points I 2 048 fixed Discrete Output Points Q 2 048 fixed pes Discrete Global Memory G Internal Coils 9M Output Temporary Coils T 1 280 bits fixed 4 096 bits fixed 256 bits fixed 128 bits S SA SB SC 32 bits each fixed Configurable 128 to 32 640 words Configurable 128 to 32 640 words Configurable 128 to 32 640 words System Status References S 10 100 ETHERNET Register Memory R Analog Inputs AI Analog Outputs 10 100 ETHERNET System Registers SR 28 words fixed Timers Counters 72 000 depends on available user memory Battery Backed Clock Yes Battery Back Up Number of months with no power 1 2 months for internal battery installed in the power supply 15 months with external battery IC693ACC302 Load Required from Power Supply 7 4 watts of 5VDC High Capacity power supplies recommended EZ Program St
39. Control System Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual GFK 0826 Field Control Distributed I O and Control System I O Modules User s Manual Chapter 8 Option Modules 8 9 IC693BEM340 FIP Bus Controller FBC Module The Series 90 30 PLC FIP Factory Instrumentation Protocol Bus Controller catalog number IC693BEM340 is used to interface a FIP I O serial bus to a Series 90 30 PLC Series 90 70 PLC Series 90 70 PLC Optional Redundant FIP I O Bus FIP I O Bus Field Control Station FIP Bus Interface Unit FIP Inter face Module Generic Up to 8 Field Control Device PLI IST See Remote I O Rack Series 90 30 PLC shown Li Remote I O Nest ult Optional Expansion Rack Figure 8 6 Example of FIP I O System Configuration A FIP bus is used primarily for I O control It also is used to store configuration data to remote devices and to report faults Devices that can be on a FIP bus in a Series 90 30 PLC system include Series 90 70 PLC interfaced to a FIP bus by a FIP Bus Controller W Field Control Stations Field Control I O modules that are interfaced to the bus via a FIP Bus Interface Unit BIU W Remote Drops Series 90 30 I O racks that are interfaced to the bus via FIP Remote I O Scanner Modules Each remote drop can include one 5 or 10 slot main rack one 5 or 10
40. There are three jumper locations on the converter board for selection of user options Each jumper position has three pins as shown in the following illustration These jumper positions labeled JP2 JP3 and JP4 are accessed by removing the square plastic cover on the top of the converter Configuration can be changed as required by carefully removing one or more of the jumpers with a pair of needle nose pliers and placing it on the desired pair of pins Refer to the description of these selectable jumper positions in the following table and place the jumper on the selected pair of pins The pin numbers are 1 2 and 3 Default jumper locations are indicated by a rectangle around the pins to be jumpered for each position The default pin numbers are and 2 LL RS 422 RS485 RS 232 Figure B 5 Location of Jumpers for User Options GFK 0356Q Appendix IC690ACC900 Converter B 7 8 Table 3 Jumper Configuration for RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter Jumper Label Jumper Description Position JP2 DCD 3 Default position 1 and 2 is used when the device communicating with the PLC does not supply the Carrier Detect signal JP2 forces the DCD signal active on the RS 485 port 1 Use jumper positions 2 and 3 if the device does supply the Carrier Detect signal This allows the programming device to control DCD JP3 MODEM 3 Default position 1 and 2 is used when an attached Mo
41. 1 meter Figure 8 23 1693PTM100 101 Components 03560 Chapter 8 Option Modules 8 4 Dimensions PTMPM Standard size Series 90 30 module mounts in a Series 90 30 baseplate PTMIM Interface module Approximately 4 5 114 mm long by 3 76 mm wide It is mounted on a standard 35 mm DIN rail IC693CBL340 Approximately 19 0 5 Meter long Interface cable IC693CBL341 Approximately 39 1 Meter long Interface cable PTMPM Indicator LEDs F Fault This RED LED when OFF indicates that there are no interface faults When ON either steady or flashing it indicates that one or more of three possible faults is present 1 Phase A input not present 2 over range condition on one or more inputs voltage or current values too high and 3 phase polarity fault Each of these three fault signals has a I status bit in the PLC W R Running This Green LED when ON indicates that the module is running functioning properly When OFF it indicates a module failure General Mounting Information It is recommended the PTMPM modules be mounted in a slot at or near the end of the PLC and that the PTMIM be mounted to the panel to the side of the PLC the PTMIM mounts on a standard DIN rail This will keep the power wiring to the PTMIM physically separated from PLC signal wiring thus reducing the opportunity for noise coupling The PTMIM ground requirements must be strictly adhered to refer to the u
42. 12 6 DARK BLUE BLACK B12 12 LIGHT GREEN BLACK B ROW seo sat pic ARow 12 NOTE Each wire pair has a solid color wire and that same color wire with a black tracer For example Pair 1 has a solid brown wire paired with a brown wire with a black tracer Replacement Obsolescence Information Cable IC693CBL315 now obsolete also replaced cable IC693CBL310 when that cable became obsolete The only difference between these two cables is in the wire color coding When cable IC693CBL315 became obsolete the replacement for these cables became IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328 Cables IC693CBL310 315 have straight connectors Cables IC693CBL327 328 have right angle connectors The right angle connectors require less depth in front of the PLC so allow the use of a smaller enclosure in some applications Connector Depth for IC693CBL315 The following illustration shows the space required in front of the PLC when this cable is connected to a module The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should allow for the depth added by this connector GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 51 PLC Side View 1 5 2 5 Typical Figure 10 32 Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC 10 52 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables IC693CBL316 Serial Cable 9 Pin D Shell to RJ 11 Connector Description The IC693CBL3106
43. 422 RS 485 to RS 232 converter IC690ACC900 Cable Specifications The prewired cable 1C693CBL303 is 6 feet 2 meters long Ifa different length cable is required for connection to the converter refer to the information below for specifications and wiring information This information is essential if you intend to build your own cable The recommended cable types for this cable are listed below and depend on the length of the cable Specifications for IC693CBL303 Prewired cable Connectors 15 pin male D Subminiature Type Canon DAI5S solder pot Same connector is on both ends Hood 207470 1 connector shell AMP 207871 1 Kit includes 2 metric screws and 2 screw clips Cable Type Belden 9508 AWG 24 22 mm Cable Length 6 feet 2 meters Wire Types for Custom Cables Cable Length Catalog Number 30 feet 10m 22 36mm Belden 9309 gt 30 10m feet to 22 36 mm Same as for 30 feet In addition the 5 VDC logic power source for the 980 feet 300m converter cannot be supplied by the PLC It must be provided by an external power supply connected to the 5V and SG pins at the converter end of the connector The 5V pin at the PLC connector must not be connected to the cable The 5V and SG connections from the power supply must be isolated from its own power line ground connection Be sure that there is no connection between the external supply and the PLC except the SG cable connection 1 Cata
44. Figure 11 2 Figure 11 3 Figure 11 4 Figure 11 5 Figure 11 6 Figure 12 1 Figure 12 2 Figure 12 3 Figure 12 4 Figure 12 5 WSI Board for the Workmaster II Computer essen 11 2 Location of WSI in a Series II 90 30 PLC System sess 11 2 Example of IC690ACC900 Converter Connection essere 11 3 IC690ACC901 Series 90 SNP Port to RS 232 Adapter sse 11 4 Hand Held Programmer for the Series 90 30 PLC sss 11 5 Example of PCIF Interface to Series 90 30 I O ssssssssssssesseeeeeeeeneenenen 11 7 Hard Wired MCR Circuit Example nennen enne 12 9 Allowable Location of Modules sess nre nrnnns 12 19 Series 90 30 1 eene enne nenne nnne entes 12 20 Recommended PLC Mounting Orientation eesesessesseeeeeeeeeennenn enne nnne 1221 Derated PLC Mounting Orientation cccccccccsscesseceseeeseeeseeeseeceseceseceeeseeeseeeeeseceaeesseesseees 12 21 Figure 13 1 Relationship of Indicator Lights to Terminal Board Connections esses 13 1 Figure 1 Series 90 PLC RS 422 Serial Port Connector Configuration see A 3 Figure 2 Workmaster RS 232 Serial Port Connector Configuration esee A 4 Figure 3 IBM AT XT Serial Port ener 5 Figure 4
45. HAND HELD PROGRAMMER SETM RSTM IMR SET RST ONDTR UPCTR NOT BLK DUCI L Eca FUNC T s R SLOT 4 FOR MEMORY CARD SERIAL PORT CONNECTOR TO CPU SERIAL PORT Figure 11 5 Hand Held Programmer for the Series 90 30 PLC 03560 Chapter 11 Programmer Hardware Products HHP Features The HHP has a sealed type keypad with tactile feedback and 42 keys arranged in a matrix of six keys across by seven keys down It has a two line by 16 character LCD display screen HHP Memory Card IC693ACC303 The HHP has a slot for a removable memory card which provides a means for non volatile off line program storage and restoration The memory card can only be used with CPU numbers 311 through 341 CPU numbers 350 and above do not support either the HHP or the memory card The memory card plugs into a connector accessed through a slot on the lower right side of the HHP see previous figure HHP Modes of Operation The HHP functionality is basically divided into four modes of operation that are selected through a key sequence on the keypad Program Mode Allows you to create change monitor and debug Statement List logic This mode also allows read write and verify functions with the memory card EEPROM or flash memory Protection Mode Provides a way to control access to protection of certain PLC functions incl
46. IC693CBL329 330 331 332 333 334 Cables 24 Pin I O Faceplate Connector to Terminal Block Connector acere eeu e nete e P Coe A e ee de 10 62 DeSCEDLUOED zu pce tecti tee hen torte edt 10 62 Connector Depth ee ee Re p a qc mH arii 10 63 APPLICATIONS ene euet hcc 10 64 IC693CBL340 341 Interface Cables sese 10 65 Documentation n eletti PLN Uo Scenes Meet testa 10 67 Programmer Hardware Products eee e eee ee eee eee e seen 11 1 Products Discussed in this Chapter sessi 11 1 IC640WM1310 320 Work Station Interface Boards ees 11 2 Replacing Workmaster Computers sess 11 3 IC690ACC900 RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter sse 11 3 IC690ACC901 Miniconverter 11 4 IC693PRG300 Hand Held Programmer 11 5 HHP Features ets aer b ab PURA p E Dee tu 11 6 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Chapter 12 03560 Contents HHP Memory Card IC693ACC303 esses 11 6 HHP Modes of Operation e m NR ete eR RN 11 6 Docurmentation a edo enne eae eret ED 11 6 IC693PIF301 400 Personal Computer Interface PCIF Cards 11 7 IC655CCM590 Isol
47. Option Modules Discussed in this Chapter 03560 IC693CMM301 Genius Communications Module GCM IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius Communications Module GCM IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Controller GBC IC693BEM340 FIP Bus Controller FBC IC693BEM330 FIP Remote I O Scanner IC693APU301 302 Motion Mate Axis Positioning Module APM IC693DSM302 Motion Mate Digital Servo Module DSM302 IC693DSM314 Motion Mate Digital Servo Module DSM314 1C693 APU300 High Speed Counter HSC Module IC693BEM320 I O Link Interface Module IC693BEM321 I O Link Master Module IC693APU305 I O Processor Module 1C693CMM321 Ethernet Interface Module IC693PCM300 301 311 Programmable Coprocessor Module PCM IC693CMM311 Communications Control Module CCM IC693ADC311 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor ADC Module IC693TCM302 Temperature Control Module TCM IC693PTM100 Power Transducer Module IC693CMM301 Genius Communications Module GCM The Genius Communications Module I1C693CMM301 for the Series 90 30 PLC provides global communications on a Genius Communications bus between Series 90 30 PLCs and or other GE PLCs Series 90 70 Series Six and Series Five PLCs can communicate on this bus through their respective Genius Bus Controllers The Genius Communications bus is a token passing peer to peer noise immune network optimized to provide high speed transfer of real time control data Up to eight Series 90 30 PLC CPUs in any combination can com
48. Recorder Embedded No No No No No Yes Yes Ethernet Interface Denotes features supported in CPU firmware release 9 0 and later Details of 350 374 CPU Advanced Features Upgrading Older CPUs Older versions of the CPU firmware do not support some of the features in the table above see table footnote These features may be added to older 350 360 CPUs by upgrading them to CPU firmware version 9 0 or later The 363 and 364 CPUs were equipped with firmware version 9 0 when released as new products No hardware changes are required for this upgrade For more information on the subject of upgrading see the heading CPU Firmware Upgrades earlier in this chapter Memory Configurable Memory Starting with CPU firmware version 9 0 the 351 374 CPUs have 240K of user configurable memory The CPU350 has 32K of fixed memory The configurable memory feature lets you specify the amount of R and AQ word memory Discrete memory I Q 96M etc sizes are not configurable Word memory can be configured from 128 to 32 640 words in 128 word increments which gives 255 possible sizes The amount of memory available for a user program depends on how much is configured for word memory Note Configurable Memory has limited support in Logicmaster Version 9 02 and later limited to 16K R words 8K AI words and 8K AQ words and full support in Control Version 2 2 and later VersaPro all versions and CIMPLICITY Machine E
49. The RS485 Port Isolator supports both port to port and multi drop configurations Figure E 4 For installation information refer to section 3 of the Serial Communications User s Manual GFK 0582 One configuration not covered in the User s Manual is the case where the Isolator is powered by a source other than the host port This configuration is used to prevent an interrupt in communications if the host system requires a power cycle It also prevents power loss to equipment using the port for power For this you will need to build a custom cable as shown in Figure E 5 Terminate at first Master PLC and last drop only Slave Device Make connectons 15 pin port inside D connectors 9 RT 11 RD B 10 RD A 13 SD B 12 SD A 8 CTS B 15 CTS A 14 RTS B 6 RTS A 1 SHLD 5 5V 7 GND XU TED Slave Device l 15 X in port X 9 RT soapy 44 RD B 10 RD A 13 SD B 12 SD A 8 CTS B M 15 CTS A TT 14 RTS B 6 RTS A X XX 1 SHLD 5 5V SS OUS 7 GND Slave Device RT 9 Twisted Pairs SD B 13 n SD A 12 RD B 11 RD A 10 RTS B 14 RTS A 6 5 8 CTS A 15 e 2 lt 0 xX DX 15 pin Male D connector Isolator sv 5 GND 7 E 15 pin Female D connector LX X
50. 0 25 PIN MALE FEMAL Metallized Metallized NOTE Cables TWISTED SHIELDED PAIRS DIODT DIOCLK DIOCLK DRSEL DRSEL DRPERR DRPERR 8 DRMRUN 9 DRMRUN 2 DPFRAME 3 DPFRAME 1 1 1 1 EXPANSION BASEPLATE 1 1 1 1 1 1 I CONNECTOR 25 PIN LE Metallized Shell SHIELD DRAIN NOT CONNECTED CUT PIN 1 HERE FACTORY MADE WYE 1 i 1 i CABLE FROM UPSTREAM 1 RACK 1 1 1 1 I 1 J 25 PIN 25 PIN MAI MALE FEMALE Metallized Shell Metallized Shell Bold dashed line shows continuous 100 shielding when metallized shell connectors are plugged together Figure 10 19 Earlier Versions of Remote Baseplate Custom WYE Cable Wiring Diagram Note Chapter 10 Cables In remote baseplates IC693CHS393E and earlier and IC693CHS399D and earlier it is necessary to remove pin 1 of the mating cable where the cable plugs into the baseplate This means that when using a factory made Wye cable IC693CBL300 you must break pin 1 out of the male end where it plugs into the remote baseplate before using it with one of these baseplates Custom built Wye cables for these baseplates should be built using Figure 10 20 See the section Alert to Users of Early Remote Baseplate Versions for more details 10 29 Remote basepla
51. 10 feet 3 meters with an 8 external shield pigtail C693CBL320 3 feet 1 meter with an 8 external shield pigtail For building custom length cables the 24 pin I O cable connector is available in three different kits solder eyelet receptacle crimp wire receptacle and IDC ribbon receptacle The terminal block is Weidmuller RD25 910648 or equivalent must be compatible with the I O cable IC693CBL311 319 317 320 see Chapter 10 for details Motion Mate APM Module Documentation See the following manuals for detailed information on Power Mate APM Modules GFK 0840 Motion Mate APM for Series 90 30 PLC Standard Mode User s Manual GFK 0781 Motion Mate APM for Series 90 30 PLC Follower Mode User s Manual GFK 0664 Series 90 PLC APM Programmer s Manual Related servo manual GFK 1581 SL Series Servo User s Manual Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 IC693DSM302 Motion Mate Digital Servo Module DSM302 The Motion Mate DSM302 is a high performance two axis motion control module that is highly integrated with the logic solving and communications functions of the Series 90 30 PLC In digital mode this module controls GE digital servos Beginning with firmware version 1 40 this module has the ability to control servos with an analog command input such as the GE SL Series Servos or third party analog servos Status LEDs
52. 11 7 Planning your system 12 1 PLC basics 1 1 Customer service 2 1 hotline 2 1 mounting orientation 12 21 PLC mounting mounting orientation 12 21 Point to point RS 232 connections A 8 Point to point RS 422 connections A 10 Port 8 11 Port expansion Cables for PCM ADC CMM 10 35 Port expansion cable 10 35 Port Isolator overview 11 8 Port serial CPU351 352 353 5 22 Port serial Series 90 A 3 Ports ethernet interface AAUI 8 30 firmware upgrade 8 30 serial ethernet interface 8 30 station manager port 8 30 Posts terminal board 2 7 Power supply 24 vdc output connections 2 27 24 48 VDC input 4 7 48 VDC input 4 10 AC power source connections 2 23 AC DC input 4 2 Backup battery location 4 20 comparison table 12 6 Feature comparison 4 1 field wiring to DC input supply 4 15 field wiring to standard AC DC supply 2 23 4 5 high capacity 120 240 VAC or 125 VDC 4 4 high capacity 24 VDC input 4 13 isolated 24 vdc supply connections 4 6 4 15 load calculation 12 12 load capacity 12 12 load ratings 3 19 location in baseplate 4 2 mounting orientation 3 19 serial port connector location of 4 19 5 3 9 11 standard 120 240 VAC or 125 VDC 4 2 temperature 3 19 12 21 Power Supply DC input only 4 7 Power supply capacities dc supply 4 7 4 10 4 13 high capacity AC DC supply 4 4 standard AC DC supply 4 2 Power supply output voltages 4 17 Power supply rating effect of mounting pos
53. 24 VDC Number Description 5 VDC Power Isolated IC693MDL643 24 VDC Positive Logic FAST 16 Point Input 5 120 IC693MDL644 24 VDC Negative Logic FAST 16 Point Input 5 120 IC693MDL645 24 VDC Pos Neg Logic 16 Point Input 80 125 IC693MDL646 24 VDC Pos Neg Logic FAST 16 Point Input 80 125 IC693MDL652 24 VDC Pos Neg Logic 32 Point Input 5 IC693MDL653 24 VDC Pos Neg Logic FAST 32 Point Input 5 IC693MDL654 5 12 VDC TTL Pos Neg Logic 32 Point 195 440 a m IC693MDL655 24 VDC Pos Neg 32 Point Input 195 224 IC693MDL730 2 24 VDC Positive Logic 2A 8 Point Output 55 IC693MDL731 2 24 VDC Negative Logic 2A 8 Point Output 55 IC693MDL732 2 24 VDC Positive Logic 0 5A 8 Point Output 50 IC693MDL733 2 24 VDC Negative Logic 0 5A 8 Point Output 50 IC693MDL734 25 VDC Pos Neg Logic 6 Point Output 90 IC693MDL740 2 24 VDC Positive Logic 0 5A 16 Point Output 110 IC693MDL741 2 24 VDC Negative Logic 0 5A 16 Point Output 110 IC693MDL742 2 24 VDC Pos Logic ESCP 1A 16 Point Output 130 IC693MDL750 2 24 VDC Negative Logic 32 Point Output 21 IC693MDL751 2 24 VDC Positive Logic 32 Point Output 21 IC693MDL752 5 24 VDC TTL Negative Logic 0 5A 32 Point 260 IC693MDL753 2 24 VDC Positive Logic 0 5A 32 Point Output 260 IC693MDL930 Relay N O 4A Isolated 8 Point Output 6 70 IC693MDL931 Relay N C and Form C 8A Isolated 8 Point Out 6 110 IC693MDL940 Relay N O 2A 16 Point Output 7 13
54. 5 5 Uses of PROM devices in the 90 30 CPUs sese 5 5 Contents xi Contents CPU Emi Wares sees edite P RAE I ERN VUE ENT PEN iter ES 5 6 Determining CPU Revision Levels 1 5 7 EPROM and EEPROM User Program Storage Options sese 5 8 Comparing EPROM and EEPROM Features esee 5 8 Procedure for Creating an 5 9 Fl sh Memoron eee i ete in e ee atm ee dte 5 9 Series 90 30 CPU Capacities ir iet dee RI need dece ea 5 10 User Memory Addresses References cccccccsseeseeetseeesceseeeeeeceeesseeeeeesaeeneenseees 5 10 Difference Between a Memory Address and a 5 10 User Memory Reference Types enne 5 11 Application Program Compatibility 5 12 CPU Time of Day TOD Clock 5 12 Breaktree SNP Protocol 5 enitn n 5 13 350 39 SC BUS Eee oer te ENERO NERA reditu 5 13 Compatibility With Hand Held Programmer HHP and Memory Card 5 13 350 374 CPU Advanced Features nnne aai na inh 5 14 Details of 350 374 CPU Advanced 5 14 Hardware Features of the 350 364 CPUsS essere 5 18 CPU350 and CPU360 Hardware Features sss 5 18 CPU Firmware Upgrad
55. 8 6 compatibility hand held monitor 8 7 Logicmaster 90 30 20 micro software 8 7 Series 90 30 PLC 8 7 Series Six plc 8 7 datagrams 8 9 diagnostics 8 8 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q 03560 global data operation 8 9 number in system 8 7 status LEDs 8 3 8 5 8 7 COM 8 3 8 5 8 7 OK 8 3 8 5 8 7 Genius bus scan 8 8 Genius Comm Module GCM 8 2 Genius hand held monitor 8 6 8 8 Genius I O blocks 8 8 Global data 8 6 8 9 receiving 8 9 sending 8 9 Ground bracket CPU351 352 figure 2 15 Ground conductor installation 2 11 Ground connections equipment 2 12 programming device 2 13 safety and reference 2 12 shield ground 2 14 Ground wire CPU363 364 figure 2 16 Grounding procedures 2 11 Baseplate 2 12 CPU shield 2 14 Module shield 2 14 Option modules 2 16 Programmer 2 13 system 2 11 H Hand held monitor Genius compatibility 8 7 Hand held monitor Genius 8 6 Hand held programmer CPU compatibility 5 13 features of 11 6 GBC configuration 8 8 modes of operation 11 6 Hand held Programmer function with FIP I O nest 8 12 Hand Held Programmer Cable data sheet 10 33 general description 11 5 Hand held programmer cable description of 10 33 Hardware load requirements 12 12 Heat dissipation calculating 12 17 Help from GE 13 9 HHP 11 5 Cable data sheet 10 33 High capacity AC DC power supply Index Index illustrati
56. August 2002 03560 03560 Serial Ports and Cables IC690CBL705 OR EQUIVALENT RS 232 RS 422 RS 422 RS 232 SHIELDED PAIRS CONVERTER MAKE CONNECTIONS IC690ACC900 INSIDE D CONNECTORS SLAVE STATION CN DCD A DCD B RD A RD B SD A SERIES 90 70 CPU RS 422 PORT WORKMASTER RS 232 PORT uueEoouowM 2oouN umeROoo2O0NoN 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE RS 2322 5 422 PORT PORT LAST STATION PowER 5V NOTE SOURCE WHEN WIRING RS 422 485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THE FOR TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN A CONVERTER lov DAISY CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BELOW MASTER CONVERTER _ SLAVESTATION LAST STATION PLC 15 PIN CONNECTOR SERIES 90 30 LOCATED ON POWER SUPPLY SERIES 90 70 LOCATED ON THE CPU BOARD WN N w N ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON THE PLC ITIS NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINAL STRIPS TO OTHER TYPES OF A CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION LINE 15 PIN 15 PIN TO OTHER PLC s MALE FEMALE TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA RD SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING
57. BACK UP BATTERY Figure 4 6 Series 90 30 48 VDC Input Power Supply IC693PWR328 4 10 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Table 4 9 Specifications for IC693PWR328 Power Supply Nominal Rated Voltage 48 VDC Input Voltage Range 38 to 56 VDC Input Power 50 watts maximum at full load Inrush Current 4A peak 100 ms maximum Output Power 5 VDC 15 watts maximum 24 VDC Relay 15 watts maximum 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts maximum NOTE 30 watts maximum total all three outputs Output Voltage 5 VDC 5 0 VDC to 5 2 VDC 5 1 VDC nominal 24 VDC Relay 24 to 28 VDC 24 VDC Isolated 21 5 VDC to 28 VDC Protective Limits Overvoltage 5 VDC output 6 4 to 7 V Overcurrent 5 VDC output 4 A maximum Holdup Time 14 ms minimum Standards Refer to data sheet GFK 0867B or later version for product standards and general specifications Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR328 The following graph is a typical 48 VDC power supply efficiency curve A basic procedure for determining efficiency of the 48 VDC power supply follows the figure 50 4 45W 40 AVERAGE 30 INPUT POWER WATTS 10 5 10 15 20 25 30 TOTAL OUTPUT POWER WATTS Figure 4 7 Typical Efficiency Curve for IC693PWR328 Power Supply Note Start up surge at full load is 4 amps for 250 milliseconds maximum 03560 Chapter 4 Power Supplies 4 11 Input Power Current Calculat
58. Besides satisfying code requirements wire color coding makes testing and troubleshooting safer faster and easier m Green or green with stripe Ground m Black Primary AC m Red Secondary AC m Blue DC m White Common or neutral m Yellow Secondary power source not controlled by the main disconnect Alerts maintenance personnel that there may be power present from an external source even 1f the equipment is disconnected from its main power source Wire Routing To reduce noise coupling among PLC wires it is recommended you keep electrically noisy wiring such as AC power wiring and Discrete Output Module wiring physically separated from low level signal wiring such as DC and Analog Input module wiring or communications cables This can be accomplished by grouping separately where practical the following categories of wiring m AC power wiring This includes the AC input to the PLC power supply as well as other AC devices in the control cabinet m Analog Input or Output Module wiring This should be shielded to further reduce noise coupling See the Series 90 30 I O Module Specifications Manual GFK 0898 for details m Discrete Output Module wiring These often switch inductive loads that produce noise spikes when switched off m DC Input Module wiring Although suppressed internally these low level inputs should be further protected against noise coupling by observing these wiring practices m Communications Cables W
59. CPU323 Catalog Number IC693CPU323 CJ I l RUM Ph l POWER 2 3 4 5 o SUPPLY o o o Lil L 1 1 Discrete Input Points I 320 maximum combined inputs outputs Coll Temporary Cols System Status References S Register Memory AR Analog Oupus 6A System Registers for reference table viewing 16 words SR only cannot be referenced in user logic program Timers Counters 340 145124 Shift Registers yes Built in Ports 1 uses connector on PLC power supply Supports SNP slave and SNP X slave protocols Communications LAN Supports multidrop Also supports Ethernet FIP Profibus GBC GCM GCM option modules Type of Memory Storage RAM and optional EPROM or EEPROM PCMICCM Compatibilty 5 30 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 CPU331 Catalog Number IC693CPU331 CPU Type Single slot CPU module Total Baseplates per System 5 1 CPU baseplate 4 expansion and or remote Load Required from Power Supply 350 milliamps from 5 VDC supply Processor Speed 10 MegaHertz Processor Type 80188 Operating Temperature 0 to 60 degrees C 32 to 140 degrees F ambient Typical Scan Rate 0 4 milliseconds per 1K of logic boolean contacts User Program Memory maximum 16K Bytes Discrete Input Points I 512 Discrete Output Points Q 512 Discrete Global Memory G 128
60. Connector on the faceplate of the APM This connector is available under catalog number IC693ACC317 This connector has a solder eyelet receptacle and is part of an accessory kit Optionally other types of the 24 pin connector for different physical connections are also available Catalog numbers for these connectors and their associated parts are listed in the following table The list includes catalog numbers for three types of connectors solder pin crimp pin and ribbon cable Each accessory kit contains enough components D connectors backshells contact pins etc to assemble ten single ended cables of the type specified for each kit Table 10 5 Catalog Numbers for 24 Pin Connector Kits Vendor Bis Number Number Description IC693ACC316 N 361J024 AU Solder eyelet receptacle Solder Eyelet Type Crimp Typo Note Wire for cables is 12 twisted pairs 24 AWG 0 22mm Additional tools from Fujitsu are required to properly assemble the crimped contact and ribbon cable type connectors The solder eyelet connectors as provided in IC693ACC316 do not require any special tooling Crimped Contact Connectors as provided in IC693ACC317 require Hand Crimping Tool FCN 363T T005 H Contact Extraction Tool FCN 360T T001 H Ribbon Cable Connectors as provided in IC693ACC318 require Cable Cutter FCN 707T T001 H Hand Press FCN 707T T101 H Locator Plate FCN 367T T012 H These tools need to be ordered from an authorized
61. GND 5 5 GND 1 DCD 6 DSR 4 DTR MINICONVERTER IBM PC AT RS 232 PORT 9 PIN 9 PIN CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Figure D 2 Miniconverter to PC AT 244983 PIN PIN TXD 2 3 RXD RXD 3 2 TXD CTS 7 4 RTS RTS 8 5 CTS GND 5 7 GND 8 DCD 6 DSR 20 DTR MINICONVERTER WORKMASTER II RS 232 PORT IBM PC XT PS 2 9 PIN 25 PIN CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Figure D 3 Miniconverter to Workmaster Il PC XT PS 2 Appendix D 690 901 Miniconverter Kit D 3 44984 PIN PIN TXD 2 3 RXD RXD 3 2 TXD CTS 7 4 RTS RTS 8 5 CTS GND 5 7 GND MINICONVERTER WORKMASTER RS 232 PORT 9 PIN 9 PIN CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Note Additional adapter required Figure D 4 Miniconverter to 9 Pin Workmaster or PC XT Computer Table D 3 Miniconverter Specifications Mechanical RS 422 15 pin D shell male for direct mounting to Series 90 serial port RS 232 9 pin D shell male for connection to RS 232 serial port of a Workmaster II computer or Personal Computer Electrical and General Voltage Supply 5 VDC supplied by PLC power supply Typical Current Version A IC690ACC901A 150 mA Version B IC690ACC901B 100 mA Operating Temperature 0 to 70 C 32 to 158 F Baud Rate 38 4K Baud maximum Conformance EIA 422 Balanced Line or EIA 423 Unbalanced Line Ground Isolation Not provided Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Appendix I
62. In most applications the newer IC690ACC903 Port Isolator can be used in place of the IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater Converter IC690ACC903 Port Isolator This product was produced to fill the need created when the IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater Converter became obsolete It provides 500 volts of isolation between connected RS 485 ports It can be used in either single or multi drop applications and has a cable length working distance of 4 000 feet 1 219 meters It is physically smaller than the IC655CCMS590 For details about this product please refer to Appendix D Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Chapter System Design 12 Introduction This chapter is not intended to cover every possible aspect of designing a Series 90 30 system but it does provide you with basic product selection guidelines and with help in finding the information you need Step 1 Planning Your System Planning is an important part of designing a system The better you plan the system the less trouble you will have installing and implementing it The following list discusses some basic things to know or have when planning your system Expectations If a new system what is it expected to do If retrofitting an existing system what does it do now and what 1s it expected to do after it 1s retrofitted W Specifications preferably in writing These include such things as operating environment information spe
63. Lube Pressure OK and similar switches Use the formula Average Power Dissipation Input Voltage x Input Current in Amps x Percent expressed as a decimal of on time 120 x 012 x 1 0 1 44 watts per input Then multiply this result by 8 1 44 watts x 8 inputs 11 52 watts total for the 8 inputs Also in this example two input points on this 16 point module are for the Control On and Pump Start pushbuttons Under normal conditions these pushbuttons are only pressed once per day for about one second just long enough to start up the control and pump Therefore their effect on our power calculation is negligible and we will assume a power dissipation of zero for them 0 0 watts total for 2 inputs For the remaining six inputs of our sixteen point module it is estimated that they will be on for an average of 20 of the time So the following calculation is made for these six inputs Using the formula of Average Power Dissipation Input Voltage x Input Current in Amps x Percent expressed as a decimal of on time 120 x 012 x 0 20 0 288 watts per input Then multiply this result by 6 0 288 watts x 6 inputs 1 728 watts total for the 6 inputs Finally adding up the individual calculations we get 11 52 0 0 1 728 13 248 watts for the module s total input calculation 03560 Appendix Calculating Series 90 30 Heat Dissipation F 5 F 6 Step 5 Final Calculation Once the individual power dissipation
64. RS 232 Interface Pin Assignments Pin assignments and signal definitions for the RS 232 interface are listed below Table B 1 RS 232 Interface for Converter Hsu RD Reswipm fm s oo 77 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 RS 422 RS 485 Interface Pin Assignments GFK 0356Q Pin assignments and signal definitions for the RS 422 RS 485 interface are listed below Table B 2 RS 422 RS 485 Interface for Converter rin seme uo n ems SSS e es fx Crs trent fm 5 RT Appendix IC690ACC900 Converter Logic Diagram The following figure shows the logic diagram for the RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter RS 232 RS 485 a44539 CONVERTER RS 232 RS 485 25 PIN IC690ACC900 15 PIN SHIELD i SHIELD lt TERMINATOR RESISTOR 1200 P RD B 10 RD SD B 12 gt gt sD A MODEM 4 aa CR RTS lt 0 15 Lex CTS A k gt gt RTS gt gt RTS A DCD DCD A LOGIC x POWER sG lt lt SG DTR ATCHI RD gt gt CTS Dm DCD 2 Figure B 4 RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter Logic Diagram B 6 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Jumper Configuration
65. ST Ir PONE Connector REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN 1HOUR PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER BASE 5 SLOT NON CPU SLOTS T vo Bus Expansion CPU 1 S d vos 05 ins Sonny 1 1 L CPU Slot Slot 1 Figure 5 2 IC693CHS397 5 Slot Modular CPU Baseplate General CPU Features 03560 The microprocessor type varies by the CPU model m 80188 microprocessor for CPU models 311 313 323 331 m 80C188XL microprocessor for CPU models 340 341 m 80386EX microprocessor for CPU models 350 364 m 586 microprocessor for CPU model 374 The microprocessor provides all fundamental sweep and operation control and execution of all non boolean as used here the term boolean refers to discrete logic such as contacts and coils functions Boolean functions in the modular CPUs are handled by a dedicated VLSI Very Large Scale Integration Instruction Sequencer Coprocessor ISCP All Series 90 30 CPUs use RAM working memory CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply A 15 pin D type female connector accessed by opening the hinged door on the right front of the power supply provides the connection to a CPU serial port which is used to connect to m aprogrammer usually a personal computer running GE PLC programming software The IC690ACC901 Minicon
66. Terminal board connecting to 2 18 installing 2 5 posts 2 7 removing 2 6 with holding screws 2 7 Termination I O bus 10 31 Third party modules 8 1 Time of day clock Accuracy 5 12 Timing diagram 4 18 Troubleshooting features of hardware 13 1 multidrop problems I 7 using software 13 3 U Upgrading CPU firmware 5 6 User PROM option EPROM EEPROM selection model 331 5 8 User references description of 5 10 range and size models 311 341 5 11 types of 5 11 V Version CPU firmware 5 7 Visual inspection of new system 2 1 Volatility Memory 5 4 W Warranty claims 2 1 Web site GE 7 2 13 9 Web site GE 8 1 Weidmuller 912263 terminal block 2 19 Wire routing I O Modules 7 11 Index Index Wire size power supply wiring 2 23 Wiring Color coding 2 17 General guidelines 2 17 I O module routing 7 11 I O modules 2 18 Power supplies 2 23 Routing wires 2 17 Wiring methods 32 point modules 7 6 Analog I O modules 2 21 7 9 Standard density I O modules 7 4 Work station interface board 11 2 Workmaster computers replacing 11 3 WSI board 11 3 Workmaster serial port A 4 WSI board 11 2 WYE cable 8 34 connection to PCM modules 10 13 10 15 10 17 wiring diagram 10 35 wiring diagram for current remote baseplates 10 30 wiring diagram for earlier version baseplates 10 29 wiring diagram remote system 10 29 10 30 Index 13
67. and until the baseplate is powered back on and all modules recovered the lost I O modules are not scanned For more information on the power up and power down sequence see Chapter 2 in the Series 90 30 Programmable Controller Reference Manual GFK 0467 Series 90 30 PLC Backplane The Series 90 30 PLC backplane on all three types of baseplates has a dedicated I O communications bus The signals on the remote baseplate backplane are optically coupled and an isolated DC DC power supply converter is provided to isolate the signals from other backplanes m Power bus connects the power supply outputs to the modules in the baseplate m I O Communications bus the CPU communicates with I O modules over this bus This bus is connected to the I O busses in Expansion and Remote racks via the I O Bus Expansion connectors and cables m Special Intelligent Module bus exists only on a CPU baseplate therefore certain special intelligent option modules such as the Programmable Coprocessor Module PCM Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor ADC and CMM Communications Control Module IC693CMM311 only work in a CPU baseplate 3 12 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Rack Number DIP Switch on Expansion and Remote Baseplates 03560 Each baseplate a Series 90 30 system is identified with a unique number called Rack Number Rack Numbers for Expansion and Remote baseplates are selec
68. damage to equipment or both Automatic Data Transfers Between TCM and PLC The PLC CPU controls the TCM by automatically passing commands to it on each PLC sweep These commands are contained in Q bits and AQ words that command such things as Enable Disable Output Auto Manual Mode Do Autotuning Setpoint values and Alarm Limit values In return the TCM sends information to the PLC CPU by automatically passing bits and AI words each PLC sweep The information sent by the TCM includes Alarm and Output Short Circuit status Current Temperature PWM Period and TCM Error Code Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Comparison of TCM302 and TCM303 Modules The TCM303 an extended range TCM302 as shown in the table below For additional information about the TCM refer to GFK 1466 Temperature Control Module for the Series 90 30 PLC User s Manual Table 8 1 Comparison of TCM302 and TCM303 Temperature range K Thermocouples 0 600 C 0 1050 C 03560 Chapter 8 Option Modules 8 39 1C693PTM100 101 Power Transducer PTM 8 40 The PTM is used for measuring electrical power consumption or for monitoring voltages between an electrical generator and its power grid It connects to user supplied current and potential transformers which furnish the input signals the PTM uses to calculate its data Since one of the PTM s components is a Series 90 30 PLC module the PLC can use
69. earlier version baseplates 10 29 Remote I O scanner FIP description of 8 12 features of 8 12 Repeater converter isolated 11 4 cable diagrams C 8 complex multidrop configuration C 6 description of C 1 illustration of C 2 logic diagram C 3 pin assignments C 4 rules for using C 7 simple multidrop configuration C 6 system configurations C 5 Replacing modules 13 5 Restart pushbutton alphanumeric display coprocessor 8 35 communications control 8 34 ethernet interface 8 30 I O link master 8 26 RS 232 converter obsolete 11 3 RS 232 point to point connections A 8 RS 232 RS 485 converter A 7 RS 422 cable specs A 2 pin out A 4 Serial interface A 1 RS 422 point to point connections A 10 RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 converter cable description B 3 features B 1 functions B 1 installation procedures B 2 jumper configuration user options B 7 location in system B 2 logic diagram B 6 RS 232 interface pin assignments B 4 RS 422 RS 485 interface assignments B 5 RS 485 converter obsolete 11 3 RS 485 compatible serial port 4 19 5 3 RTU Modbus communications protocol 8 34 RTU master protocol PCM module 8 31 Scan time factors affecting 12 16 SCM State Logic Serial Module 9 2 Sequential Event Recorder 5 16 SER 5 16 instruction 13 4 Serial number Index 11 Index Index 12 Baseplates 3 2 Ethernet interface module 8 30 Serial numbers recording 2 1 Serial port 8 11 351 connec
70. from the personal computer Several standard prewired I O expansion cables are available from GE Alternately custom length cables can be built Please refer to the Cables chapter of this manual for information on standard and custom I O expansion cables These cards also provide connections to an internal watchdog supervised RUN output relay contact This contact is closed under normal operating conditions but opens 1f the computer or software application fails which makes it useful for interfacing with external safety circuits 03560 Chapter 11 Programmer Hardware Products 11 7 These cards support all Series 90 30 discrete and analog I O modules except 16 channel analog modules A variety of smart modules from Horner Electric Inc are also supported A C Language Interface software product available from Horner Electric works with both Borland Turbo C and Microsoft C The source code for this interface is available from Horner Electric catalog number HE693SRC844 Documentation Documentation for these cards is noted in the table above Additional user s documentation is available from Horner Electric Inc IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater Converter This item is no longer available The information provided in this manual is for the convenience of those still using this product This product also went by an earlier catalog number IC630CCM390 and is nicknamed the Brick Details can be found in Appendix Note
71. o DIODT DIODT o DIODT DIODT o SERIES 0 DIOCLK DIOCLK 00 90 30 0 0 DIOCLK DIOCLK 0 0 BASEPLATE AVE 0 0 DRSEL DRSEL 0 0 EXPANSION CABLE o DRSEL DRSEL 00 PORT SINGLE o DPRERR DPRERR 00 CONNECTOR o DPRERR DPRERR o OR END o DRMRUN DRMRUN 00 00 DRMRUN DRMRUN 00 WYE o9 DPFRAME DPFRAME o Sua 09 1 DPFRAME DPFRAME 00 CONNECTOR 0 ov ov 0 0 0 END o 00 0 FGND 0 J 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE METALIZED SHELL METALIZED SHELL NOTE Bold dashed line shows continuous 100 shielding when metallized shell connectors are plugged together Figure 10 17 Point To Point Cable Wiring for Continuous Shield Custom Length Cables TWISTED PAIRS SHIELDED 45527 7 PAIRS SERIES 90 30 BASEPLATE EXPANSION PORT CABLE SINGLE CONNECTOR END OR 0 0 SHIELD DRAIN WIRE 25 PIN FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE Figure 10 18 Point To Point Cable Wiring Diagram for Applications Requiring Less Noise Immunity 10 28 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 GFK 0356Q I o 1 o Diopr o9 o9 Diocukr DOWNSTREAM og DRSEL RACK 0 DRSEL OR 0 1 TERMINATION 00 DRPERR PLUG o0 DRMRUN o DRMRUN 0 DPFRAME 0 DPFRAME od 0 00 I ov 0 0
72. pum COMM STAT peu IL E 6 pin RJ 11 connector OK ce used to upgrade firmware CFG i d load i HO and load motion programs EN1 EN4 use cable IC693CBL316 Fa ml Pin 1 DEI Connector c Connector A Aux Axis 3 Servo Axis 1 Follower Master Axis o mo PORT1 RS 232 n gyro ID _8 s DEI p Connector D Connector B Aux Axis 4 gt Servo Axis 2 a eo Motion Mate DSM302 ER Grounding Tab Figure 8 12 Motion Mate DSM302 Module 03560 Chapter 8 Option Modules Features Digital Signal Processor DSP control of GE Servos Block Processing time under 5 milliseconds Velocity Feed forward and Position Error Integrator to enhance tracking accuracy High resolution of programming units Position 8 388 608 8 388 607 User Units Velocity 1 8 388 607 User Units sec Acceleration 1 134 217 727 User Units sec sec Simple and powerful Motion Program instruction set Simple 1 or 2 axis motion programs with synchronized block start Program support for a short motion program called Program 0 which can be created in the configuration software Non volatile storage for 10 programs and 40 subroutines created with the APM Motion Programming software User scaling of programming units User Units DSM firmware stored in Flash memory is updated via its front panel COMM port Generic programming using command para
73. the function of these two LEDs can be custom configured by the user Please see GFK 0255 for custom configuration details Restart Pushbutton Used to place the module in either the RUN mode or the PROGRAM mode Please see PCM Operation Modes in GFK 0255 Chapter 1 Memory Backup Battery The Lithium battery for backup of RAM memory is installed in a battery mounting clip on the inside of the PCM faceplate This battery is disconnected for shipment from the factory and must be connected prior to installation of the module When the PCM is stored for extended periods of time the battery should be disconnected unless you wish to retain the program in RAM memory Order replacement batteries using catalog number IC693ACC301 package of two Cables 1C693CBL304 305 These Wye cables split out the two PCM port connections from the single connector on the front of the PCM modules One of these cables is supplied with each PCM module The IC693CBL304 is for the PCM300 The IC693CBL305 is for the PCM301 and PCM311 Please see Chapter 10 for details on these cables 1C690CBL701 702 705 These cables provides a direct RS 232 connection between the PCM and various programmers serial ports These cables are not supplied with the PCM modules Please see Chapter 10 for details on these cables Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Programmable Coprocessor Module Documentation GFK 0255 Series 90 Progr
74. which is 10 of the time Therefore since both solenoids have equal current draws and on times our single calculation can be applied to both outputs Use the formula Average Power Dissipation Voltage Drop x Current Draw in Amps x Percent expressed as a decimal of on time 1 5 x 1 0 x 0 10 0 15 watts per solenoid Then multiply this result by 2 since we have two identical solenoids 0 15 watts x 2 Solenoids 0 30 watts total for the two solenoids Also in this example the other 14 output points on this 16 point module operate pilot lights on an operator s panel Each pilot light requires 05 Amps of current Seven of the pilot lights are on 100 of the time and seven are on an estimated 40 For the 7 lights that are on 100 of the time 1 5 x 05 x 1 00 0 075 watts per light Then multiply this value by 7 0 075 watts x 7 lights 0 525watts total dissipation for the first 7 lights For the 7 lights that are on 40 of the time 1 5 x 05 x 0 40 03 watts per light Then multiply this value by 7 0 03 watts x 7 lights 0 21 watts total dissipation for the other 7 lights Adding up the individual calculations we get 0 30 0 525 0 21 1 035 watts for the module s total output calculation Step 4 Input Calculations for Discrete Input Modules A Discrete Input Module requires two calculations one for the module s signal level circuits which was already done in Step 1 and one for the input circuits Note that the
75. 1 2 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN FEMALE MALE 44 SW zcrs 2 RD A RD SD A SD B TERM TERM 1 I 1 ISOLATED 1 1 GND 1 l 1 1 l REPEATER CONVERTER BRICK USED AS A CONVERTER ISOLATED I I REPEATER CONVERTER 1 BRICK I F z FEMALE 11 1 1 1 WHEN WIRING RS 422 485 MULTIDROP l REFLECTIONS ON THE TRANSMISSION LINE c J2 SW zon y REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN A CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN RD A MASTER CMM SLAVE 1 T RD B SD A SD B TERM TERM GND ISOLATED REPEATER 0 CONVERTER BRICK USED AS A REPEATER CPU BUILT IN PORT CMMSLAVE2 ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY MALE CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR MOUNTED ON THE CMM IT IS NOT TO OTHER DEVICES USE TERMINAL STRIPS OR OTHER TYPES MAXIMUM OF 8 DEVICES ON A MULTIDROP CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF TERMINATE THE RD SIGNAL ONLY AT END TRANSMISSION OF MULTIDROP CABLE TERMINATE CONNECTION ON FIRST AND LAST DROPS ONLY ON THE CMM INSTALL JUMPER TO CONNECT INTERNAL 120 OHM RESISTOR ON THE ISOLATED REPEATER CONVERTER INSTALL 150 OHM RESISTOR SUPPLIED ON THE CMM311 ONLY PORT 2 CAN SUPPORT RS 422 RS 485 Figure C 8 Cable C RS422 Twisted Pair GFK 0356Q Appendix 1C655CCM690 Isolated Repeater Converter C 9 C 10
76. 1 HOUR Ba Figure 5 1 Models 311 and 313 5 Slot Embedded CPU Baseplates Modular CPUs The modular CPUs consist of a CPU memory and associated integrated circuit chips soldered to circuit board which is mounted in a plug in module The modular CPUs include the model CPU331 and higher The modular CPUs have the following basic features module must be installed in Slot 1 of a modular CPU baseplate Slot 1 is a unique size and type that only fits a CPU module or special Option modules Slot 1 is labeled CPU 1 Details on modular CPU baseplates are located in Chapter 2 m Modular CPUs support expansion and remote baseplates so A 25 pin D type female expansion connector is located at the right end of the CPU baseplate for connection to an expansion or remote baseplate m Since the CPU is modular it can readily be replaced or changed to a different type if desired m Only one CPU is allowed per system and it must be mounted in a CPU baseplate If more than one baseplate is used in a system the additional ones must be either expansion or remote types that do not contain a CPU m A modular CPU baseplate is always assigned by default Rack Number 0 m All have a time of day TOD clock 5 2 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q Memory Backup URAB Warning Label gt VALUES MAY BE LOST IF POWER
77. 10 for cable data m Wire I O devices to the terminal block strip Direct Method m Connect an IC693CBL308 or 309 cable or a custom made cable to the module s faceplate connector and wire the stripped ends of the cable directly to the field devices See Chapter 10 for cable data See the Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual GFK 0898 for pin out information Installation of Discrete 32 Point Dual 24 Pin Connector Modules Using a TBQC m Mount two TBQC terminal blocks Each has a 24 pin connector and a terminal strip and mounts on a standard 35 mm DIN rail m Connect a pair of TBQC cables IC693CBL329 334 between the module s faceplate connector and the connectors on the two TBQC terminal blocks Note that both a right side and left side cable is required See Appendix H for a list of cables m Wire I O devices to the terminal blocks See the Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual GFK 0898 for pin out information The Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC Assembly is an option for certain Series 90 30 discrete I O modules See Appendix H for more information With a Generic Terminal Block Strip m Mount terminal block strip to the enclosure panel m Connect an IC693CBL327 328 cables or a custom made cables to the module s faceplate connectors and wire the stripped ends of the cables to the terminal block strip Note that both a right side and left side cable is required See Appendix H for a li
78. 10 46 IC693CBL315 I O Interface Cable 24 Pin for 32 Point Modules 10 49 Eunction oficable e cec eme DEN te Dem dates esee lees 10 49 Building Custom Length Cables for 24 Pin 10 49 Replacement Obsolescence Information essere 10 51 Connector Depth for IC693CBL315 sse 10 51 IC693CBL316 Serial Cable 9 Pin D Shell to RJ 11 10 53 D SCEIDLUOTD ie Tone teo e e e be HL Ve bd Dee edge 10 53 Typical Applications eee eee tes tite e tees anes 10 53 IC693CBL321 322 323 I O Faceplate Connector to Terminal Block Connector 24 Pin10 54 Function of ic een teet DE ene nie e ehe Es 10 54 Cable Specifications ovn er n 10 54 Connector Depth esteem I DER E i e etd 10 55 IC693CBL327 328 I O Interface Cables with Right Angle 24 Pin Connector 10 57 cet oe te ete ded m t Cte e RR OO 10 57 Application Sece ient e ree E HR ea ee eR o Mee eden eet 10 57 Specifications REDE 10 58 Connector Depth for Cables IC693CBL327 328 essere 10 58 Building Custom Length 24 pin Connector Cables sss 10 59 Connector Depth for Custom Built Cables sene 10 60 Possible Uses for These Cables Factory or Custom Built 10 61
79. 10 ms minimum Standards Refer to data sheet GFK 0867B or later version for product standards and general specifications Dependent on installation and power supply impedance characteristics Derate per Figure 2 22 at ambient temperatures above 50 C 122 F Current Derating for Higher Temperatures 4 14 6 1 6 0 e e e e 5 8 5 6 5 4 5 2 5 VDC CURRENT 48 m o 46 44 42 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 4 9 5 VDC Current Output Derating for Temperatures above 50 C 122 F Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR331 Use the following procedure to determine input power requirements for the 24 VDC High Capacity Power Supply m Determine total output power load from typical specifications listed for individual modules at the end of this chapter Multiply the output power by 1 5 to determine the input power value m Divide the input power value by the operating source voltage to determine the input current requirements m Use the lowest input voltage to determine the maximum input current m Allow for start up surge current requirements m Allow margins 10 to 20 for variations Field Wiring Connections to the DC Input Only Power Supplies 03560 DC Power Source Connections The and wires from the DC power source connec
80. 2 or compatible computer 03560 1 B 2 Location in System Installation The RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 converter is a free standing device which requires two cables as the connections between the PLC and the programmer Its location is limited only by the length of the connecting cables as listed in the interface specifications The cable at the PLC end that connects to the RS 422 RS 485 connector on the converter can be up to 10 feet in length without an external source of 5 VDC and up to 1000 feet 300m in length with an external source of 5VDC The cable from the RS 232 connector on the converter to the programming computer s serial port can be up to 50 feet 15m in length FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW GE Fanuc IC690ACC900A CABLE ADAPTER MADE IN USA Figure B 1 Front and Rear View of Converter Installation of the RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter consists of connecting two cables Select the proper cables for your installation Prewired cables see below are available from GE or if cables of different lengths are required by your application you can build your own cables Specifications for building these cables are provided later in this appendix You do not need to connect an external source of power to the converter for a cable length of 10 feet or less since the necessary power connections of 5 VDC and signal ground are derived from the PLCs backplane bus through the cable which
81. 3 16 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 03560 lt 4 00 102 1 400 102 m 1 1 M 20 DIA 5 08 5 12 TYPICAL 130 DIMENSIONS IN INCHES MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS REMOVABLE Vo TERMINAL BLOCK HINGED DOOR 5 59 i 142 LS SIDE VIEW Figure 3 15 Model 323 10 Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements Chapter 3 Baseplates 3 18 Modular CPU Expansion and Remote Baseplate Dimensions Baseplate dimensions and spacing requirements for installation for Modular CPU baseplates are shown below feet epee ee ee ee M 400 10 43 102 g _ em NOTE If the cable is used allow about 6 inch horizontal clearance on the right side of rack for access to the connector LL LL 4lowancsioLeosliDg aem mr rr M M e va TERMINAL T a i i i 3 54 9p ae oI 79 FRONT VIEW I I 20 i i NT IN INCHES MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS a REMOVABLE 5 59 BLOCK HINGED SIDE VIEW 4 00 DOOR ap Figure 3 16 Modular CPU Expansion and Remote 5 Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements I 1 amp l NOT
82. 30 Hand Held Programmer IC693PRG300 You must use one of the GE programming software packages to create or edit CPU 350 374 user programs m Series 90 Memory Card used on the Hand Held Programmer is not supported by CPUs 350 374 m only operations supported by the HHP s PROGRAM mode are writing to and reading from the CPU s flash memory m Although the HHP s CONFIG mode can be used to perform basic configuration of these CPUS it cannot handle specialized parameters such as those pertaining to the embedded Ethernet Interface in the CPU364 374 m The HHP can be used to change the Time of Day Clock unless the Mem Protect configuration parameter is set to Enabled and the keylock switch is in the ON Protect position m The HHP can be used to edit data values in R registers m The HHP can be used to invoke or clear overrides on CPUs 350 364 m The CPU374 does not support the HHP Chapter 5 CPUs 5 13 5 14 350 374 CPU Advanced Features Advanced features of 350 374 CPUs CPU350 CPU351 CPU352 CPU360 CPU363 CPU364 CPU374 Memory 32K 240K 240K 240K 240K 240K 240K fixed Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Floating Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Point Math Firmware Firmware Hardware Firmware Firmware Firmware Hardware Flash Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Memory Sequential Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Event
83. 45 I O interface cable for 32 point I O modules 10 42 10 49 10 57 pem to PC AT 10 14 to Workmaster PC XT 10 12 pcm to Workmaster II PS 2 10 16 work station interface cable 10 8 wye cable wiring diagram earlier version baseplates 10 29 wye cables 10 35 Cable for Series 90 30 Installations shield treatment 10 26 Cables APM 8 16 building I O Bus Expansion 10 22 I O Expansion Bus 3 10 picture 10 65 SNP multidrop I 2 Calculations for power supply loads examples 12 14 Catalog number CPU 5 7 Catalog number location Baseplate 3 2 Catalog numbers cables IC647CBL704 10 8 IC693CBL304 10 35 IC693CBL305 10 35 CCM 8 34 CCM communications protocol 8 34 CCM protocol PCM module 8 31 Clearance requirements PLC rack 12 17 CMM Comm Coprocessor Module 8 34 Wye cable 10 35 CNC 8 24 Color coding Wires 2 17 COM port standard serial 11 3 Comm Coprocessor Module IC693CMM311 8 34 Communications using datagrams 8 6 Compatibility User program to CPU type 5 12 Configurable Memory 5 14 Conformance to standards 2 1 Connector serial port 4 19 5 3 9 11 Converter IC690ACC900 11 3 IC690ACC901 11 4 Converter board jumper configuration B 8 Converter RS 232 RS 485 A 7 GFK 0356Q Converters IC655CCM590 C 1 IC690ACC900 B 1 IC690ACC901 D 1 IC690ACC903 11 4 CPU 350 hardware features 5 18 350 374 features 5 13 351 hardware features 5 19 352 hardware features 5 19 360 hardware featu
84. 56 VDC Run 18 to 56 VDC Input Power 50 watts maximum at full load Inrush Current 4A peak 100 ms maximum Output Power 5 VDC 15 watts maximum 24 VDC Relay 15 watts maximum 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts maximum NOTE 30 watts maximum total all three outputs Output Voltage 5 VDC 5 0 VDC to 5 2 VDC 5 1 VDC nominal 24 VDC Relay 24 to 28 VDC 24 VDC Isolated 21 5 VDC to 28 VDC Protective Limits Overvoltage 5 VDC output 6 4 to 7 V Overcurrent 5 VDC output 4 A maximum Holdup Time 14 ms minimum Standards Refer to data sheet GFK 0867B or later version for product standards and general specifications Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR322 The following graph is a typical 24 48 VDC power supply efficiency curve A basic procedure for determining efficiency of the 24 48 VDC power supply follows the figure 50 4 45W 40 AVERAGE 30 INPUT POWER WATTS 10 5 10 15 20 25 30 TOTAL OUTPUT POWER WATTS Figure 4 5 Typical Efficiency Curve for 24 48 VDC Power Supply Note Start up surge at full load is 4 amps for 250 milliseconds maximum 4 8 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Input Power Current Calculation m Determine total output load from typical specifications listed for individual modules in Chapters 2 and 3 m Use the graph to determine average input power m Divide the input power by the operating source voltage to determin
85. 7716 45mm 3 6 0 03 09 0 9 TERMINAL ee ee Figure H 3 IC693ACC329 TBQC Terminal Block Note The common row terminals labeled with the letter C are provided for wiring convenience Their use is optional They are electrically isolated from the numbered terminals You may use them as is or jumper them to a numbered terminal Refer to GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual for wiring diagrams of the modules Mounting These terminal blocks are mounted on a standard user supplied 35 mm DIN rail H 6 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q Components 1693ACC330 TBQC Terminal Block Use with the following 16 point I O modules IC693MDL740 1C693MDL742 a45587 AAAA DOO QooQOop xonoo odo Maximum wire size per terminal one 14 AWG 2 10 mm Width 4 64 117 86mm Height all blocks 2 25 57mm Depth all blocks 1 7716 45mm ORORO 0000000000 V BLOCK Figure H 4 1693ACC330 TBQC Terminal Block Note Refer to GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual for required wiring connections M
86. 8 August 9 September O October Y November Z December m Third digit shows the week of the month m Fourth digit shows the day of the week 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday 7 Sunday For example the code 7612 is interpreted as Manufactured on June 3 1997 Chapter 6 Memory Backup Battery Backup 6 7 RAM Memory Battery Backup Connection Path CMOS RAM and DRAM memory is a volatile type of memory which means that it can lose its contents ladder program configuration etc if power is removed To retain RAM memory contents under no power conditions a long life lithium battery is provided This battery is normally mounted in the rack s Power Supply module To avoid accidental disconnection of the memory backup battery it is beneficial to know the connection path between the battery and the memory circuits For embedded CPUs The battery connection path to RAM memory is through the Power Supply s baseplate connector and across the backplane board to the RAM circuits For modular CPUs The battery connection path to RAM memory is through the Power Supply s baseplate connector across the backplane board and through the CPUs baseplate connector to the RAM circuits inside the CPU module Obviously removing the Power Supply module from the PLC breaks the connection between the backup battery and the RAM memory circuits for both embedded and modular CPUs Also in a modular CPU system r
87. 90 30 State Logic CPU modules Each CPU is described in a one page data sheet which provides a quick reference to all of the available CPU models m IC693CSE311 State Logic 5 slot baseplate with embedded CPU m IC693CSE313 State Logic 5 slot baseplate with embedded CPU IC693CSE323 State Logic 10 slot baseplate with embedded CPU m IC693CSE331 State Logic CPU module 10 MHz m IC693CSE340 State Logic CPU module 20 MHz 03560 Chapter 9 State Logic Products 9 13 9 14 CSE311 Catalog Number IC693CSE311 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER asco E CAUTION SYSTEM PROM USER PROGRAM AND REGISTER VALUES MAY BE LOST IF POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN 1 HOUR 00000000000000 00000000000000 PROGRAM PROM Load Required from Power Supply Processor Type and Speed Typical Scan Rate Serial Ports Type of memory Storage Clock Program Memory Digital I O oI Q Tasks Task Groups States per task T O and Variable Names Analog Inputs and Outputs Internal Flags G Vo T S 79M R Integer Variables Floating Point Variables String Variables Characters String Character Variables Characters Write Serial Protocols Tables Table Memory Bytes Timers Timer Resolution Timer Counters Trace Size PID Loops 410 milliamps from 5 VDC supply 80188 10 MHz Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Ha
88. A backup battery is usually used to preserve the contents of RAM memory when power is off RAM Memory Backup Backup Battery Information Please see Chapter 6 for the following information m RAM memory backup recommendations m Backup battery information such as estimated life replacing determining battery age using date codes etc m Running without a backup battery m Low battery warning methods Programmable Read Only Memory PROM Types There are three types of PROM devices used in Series 90 30 CPUs EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory It is a plug in integrated circuit memory device that can be erased with an ultraviolet light EPROMs can be read when installed in the PLC however in order to write new data to them they must be removed from the PLC and written to using an external PROM burning device EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory It is a plug in integrated circuit memory device that can be erased and written to while installed in the PLC Flash Memory A variation of the EEPROM type memory It also is an integrated circuit device that can be erased and written to while installed in the PLC One advantage of CPUs having flash memory storage of firmware is that firmware can be updated by writing from a Personal Computer through a PLC serial port to flash memory No modules have to be removed for flash firmware upgrade Uses of PROM devices in the 90 30 CPUs PROM type devices are u
89. AND REGISTER VALUES MAY BE LOSTIF POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN ZO wZ wmn 000000000000 0000000000000 0 2 Vo 3 Module retainers Upper mounting holes Baseplate description Lower mounting holes The plastic cover is slotted at these two holes to facilitate a ground connection See the Baseplate Safety Grounding section of the Installation chapter for ground connection details Backplane connector for Power Supply Serial number label on bottom edge of baseplate Backplane connectors for I O or Option modules slots 2 4 Note that the slot labeled CPU 1 is the backplane connector for a CPU module however on Embedded CPU Expansion and Remote baseplates this would be another I O or Option module slot Slot number labels Compliance label Catalog number and certification UL CE etc label On an Embedded CPU baseplate this label will be located between Slots 4 and 5 Figure 3 1 Common Baseplate Features Two Baseplate Sizes 3 2 Series 90 30 baseplates come in two sizes 5 slot and 10 slot Be aware that the Power Supply slot is not numbered and is not considered to be one of the 5 or 10 slots A 5 slot baseplate has slots for a Power Supply and five other modules and a 10 slot baseplate has slots for a Power S
90. AWG 14 2 1 mm copper 90 C 194 F wire s Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires but the wires into any given terminal should be the same type both solid or both stranded to ensure a good connection Wires are routed to and from the terminals out of the bottom of the terminal board cavity The suggested torque for the I O terminal board connection screws is from 9 6 in lbs to 11 5 in lbs 1 1 1 3 Newton meters Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 For 24 volt DC input modules an internal 24 volt power connection is provided on the terminal board to supply a limited number of input devices Also 24 volt DC output is available on the power supply module s terminal board to supply a limited number of output devices Terminal Block Quick Connect Installation for 16 Point Discrete Modules The Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC Assembly is an option for certain Series 90 30 discrete I O modules See Appendix H for more information m Remove standard terminal board from module m Install TBQC faceplate it has a 24 pin connector Mount the TBQC terminal block It has a 24 pin connector and a terminal strip and mounts on a standard 35 mm DIN rail m Connect a TBQC cable between the TBQC faceplate connector on the module and the connector on the TBQC terminal block m Wire I O devices to the terminal block Installation of 32 Point Discrete 50 Pin Connector Modules T
91. An AMP connector is not supplied with M3 metric screws Hardware Kit AMP 207871 1 This kit includes two metric screws and two screw clips Multidrop Configuration Workmaster Il to Series 90 PLCs The following illustrations show the wiring diagram and requirements for connecting a Workmaster II Workmaster or compatible computer to Series 90 PLCs in an 8 wire multidrop serial data configuration The figure below is an example of the wiring configuration required for the multidrop configuration when using the RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 converter Note The connector to the PLC serial port in the Series 90 30 PLC must be a right angle connector in order for the hinged door to close properly GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 9 10 10 IC690CBL705 OR EQUIVALENT RS 232 RS 422 RS 422 RS 232 SHIELDED PAIRS CONVERTER MAKE CONNECTIONS IC690ACC900 INSIDE D CONNECTORS SLAVE STATION SERIES 90 70 CPU RS 422 PORT WORKMASTER RS 232 PORT ooooooooooooo oooooooooooooo 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE FEMALE FEMALE RS 232 RS 422 PORT PORT LAST STATION POWER 5V NOTE SOURCE WHEN WIRING RS 422 485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THE FOR SERIES TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN A CONVERTER oy DAISY CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BELOW MASTER CONVERTER SLAVESTATION LAST STATION PLC 15 PIN CONNEC
92. Catalog Number Task Publication Number All Analog Input Output and Combination Modules IC693ALGxxx Installation Configuration Specifications GFK 0898 Baseplates All Series 90 30 Baseplates IC693CHSxxx Installation GFK 0356 Configuration Options Configuration HHP GFK 0402 Configuration LM90 GFK 0466 Configuration Control GFK 1295 Configuration VersaPro GFK 1670 Configuration CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer PLC GFK 1868 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Communications Modules FIP Bus Controller Module 1C693BEM320 Installation Configuration User s Guide GFK 0631 I O Link Interface Module slave IC693BEM321 Installation Configuration User s Guide GFK 0823 I O Link Master Module IC693BEM330 Installation Configuration User s Guide GFK 1037 FIP Remote I O Scanner Related Publications Module Interfacing to Series 90 70 GFK 1038 Hand Held Programmer User s Manual GFK 0402 FIP Bus Controller User s Manual GFK 1213 IC693BEM340 Installation Configuration User s Guide GFK 1213 Related Publications Hand Held Programmer User s Manual GFK 0402 FIP Bus Interface Unit GFK 1175 FIP Remote I O Scanner GFK 1037 IC693CMM311 Installation Configuration User s Guide GFK 0582 Comm Coprocessor Module IC693CMM321 Installation Configuration User s Guide GFK 1541 Ethernet Modu
93. Fujitsu distributor Three of the largest US distributors for Fujitsu connectors are Marshall at 800 522 0084 Milgray at 800 MILGRAY and Vantage at 800 843 0707 If none of these distributors service your area contact Fujitsu Microelectronics in San Jose California USA via telephone at 408 922 9000 or via fax at 408 954 0616 for further information It is recommended that you order any necessary connector tooling with sufficient lead time to meet your assembly requirements for these connectors These tools are generally not stock items and can have significant lead times from distribution If you have any further questions about this Issue please feel free to contact the GE PLC Hotline at 1 800 GE 1 800 433 2682 or 804 978 6036 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 GFK 0356Q Cables The following tables provides wiring information for the I O Interface cables Table 10 6 I O Cable Wire Coding for IC693CBL311 and IC693CBL319 I O Connector Pin Number no connection Cable Wire Wire 1 Pair 1 25 Pin Connector Terminal Number 25 Wire 2 Pair 1 Wire 1 Pair 2 Wire 2 Pair 2 Wire 1 Pair 3 Wire 2 Pair 3 Wire 1 Pair 4 Wire 2 Pair 4 Wire 1 Pair 5 Wire 2 Pair 5 Wire 1 Pair 6 Wire 2 Pair 6 Wire 1 Pair 7 Wire 2 Pair 7 Wire 1 Pair 8 Wire 2 Pair 8 Wire 1 Pair 9 A9 Wire 2 Pair 9 Wire 1 Pair 10 Wire 2 Pair 10 Wir
94. GFK 0726 State Logic Processor For Series 90 30 PLC User s Guide GFK 0732 ECLiPS English Control Language Prog System for Series 90 30 PLC User s Guide GFK 0750 OnTOP for Series 90 30 Online Troubleshooting and Operator Prog User s Manual GFK 0771 C Programmer s Toolkit for Series 90 PCMs User s Manual GFK 0772 PCM C Function Library Reference Manual GFK 0781 Motion Mate APM for Series 90 30 PLC Follower Mode User s Manual GFK 0823 Series 90 30 I O Link Master Module User s Guide GFK 0840 Power Mate APM for Series 90 30 PLC Standard Mode User s Manual GFK 0854 Series 90 Sequential Function Chart Programming Language User s Manual GFK 0870 Host Communications Toolkit for C C Applications User s Manual GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual GFK 1026 Host Drivers amp Comm Config Software for Windows Environments User s Manual GDK 1028 Series 90 30 I O Processor Module User s Manual GFK 1034 Series 90 30 Genius Bus Controller User s Manual GFK 1037 Series 90 30 FIP Remote I O Scanner User s Manual GFK 1038 Series 90 70 FIP Bus Controller s User s Manual GFK 1056 Series 90 30 State Logic Control System User s Manual GFK 1063 Host Communications Toolkit for Visual Basic Applications User s Manual GFK 1175 Field Control Distributed I O amp Control Sys FIP Bus Interface Unit User s Manual GFK 1179 Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station
95. Input Only Power Supplies 4 15 Common Series 90 30 Power Supply 4 16 Status Indicator Lights on all Power 2 4 16 Input Overvoltage Protection Devices eessessseseeseeeeeenene enne 4 16 Output Voltage Connections to Backplane 4 17 Overcurrent Protection all Supplies eese 4 18 Timma usce core ddr ER Ua Sorel EE P be e RU ga bee de ee 4 18 CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply Supplies 4 19 CPU Serial Port Information sess 4 19 Backup Battery for RAM Memory Supplies 4 20 Lei d Ur EEEN HMM RE 5 1 CPU Types for Series 90 30 PLCS sessi nnns 5 Embedded CPUS rrt irl Ub e nd tee hy eerie e E de ee 5 Modular PUS 5 2 General CPU Features eerie teet ie et pee eR Yon 5 3 sin ia oe Hd ceo a NOR e HR RE ani tta 5 3 CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply sese 5 3 Memory Volatility sies ee ERE ERE EIER EAE 5 4 RAM Memoty ner eni Ue HR A RAD UE PEE E DERE E 5 5 RAM Memory Backup Backup Battery Information sse 5 5 Programmable Read Only Memory PROM
96. Label SUPPLY IS 99 99 29 REMOVED FOR 55 eo 5o eo 88 bo bo 88 88 88 oo oo oo 5o 88 88 88 88 88 bo eo eo eo POWER SUPPLY Figure 3 2 Models IC693CPU311 and IC693CPU313 5 Slot Embedded CPU Baseplates I J I J I I J I I J SYSTEM PROGRAM PROM PROM 1 1 gt PROGRAMMABLE le CONTROLLER BASE 10 SLOT WITH CPU CAUTION USER PROGRAM AND REGISTER VALUES MAY BE LOST IF POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN 1 HOUR 9 z N CPU SLOTS Ei loo E oo oo 9 oo oo oo oo 00 oo oo oo 9 oo oo oo oo oo oo 9 00 00 000900000000 900980000999 o H oo E o oo o oo E oo o oo E oo o oo o oo o oo o 00 POWER SUPPLY Figure 3 3 Model IC693CPU323 10 slot Embedded CPU Baseplate 4 1 L 1 ej rq cm 1 L 3 1 O 8 1 0 9 1 0 10 03560 Chapter 3 Baseplates 3 5 Modular CPU Baseplates Figures 3 4 and 3 5 A Power Supply module must be plugged into the left slot which is not numbered of these baseplates The left slot is a unique size and type that only supports a Power Supply module m
97. Motion Mate DSM302 for Series 90 30 PLCs User s Manual GFK 1466 Temperature Control Module for the Series 90 30 PLC User s Manual GFK 1541 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User s Manual Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 GFK 0356Q Contents Overview of the Series 90 30 PLC eee eee essssssseseeeeeeessssss LoL The Basic Parts of a Series 90 30 PLC sssssssssseseeeeeeneeerenrennenne nenne 1 1 Assembling a Basic Series 90 30 PLC 2 1 2 What else would be needed to make this basic system functional 1 6 What if the application requires more than five modules sss 1 6 What if the application requires more than ten modules sess 1 7 What is the Difference Between Expansion and Remote baseplates 1 8 What if I need to cover more than 700 feet 213 1 9 Installation NEM TTA 2 1 Receiving your Products Visual Inspection ccccecseeeseeeteeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeteesseeeaees 2 1 Pre installation Check iue Gates ten cele er nee ett 2 1 Warranty SENI 2 1 Working with Series 90 30 Modules es
98. Output Analog Input Analog Output If there are any special requirements such as fast response etc make a note of them on the page Also if parts of your system are physically separated from other parts requiring Expansion or Remote Racks create a separate list for each location When you have finished developing your I O lists determine how many I O modules of each type you need Although the I O Modules chapter in this manual contains brief descriptions you should refer to GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications User s Manual for complete details Additional I O Module Selection Factors Voltage Current Requirements A wide variety of possible operating voltage and current requirements can be met with Series 90 30 I O modules Positive or Negative Logic The applicable type can be selected to match sink or source signal requirements See GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications User s Manual for details Isolation Requirements Isolated discrete I O and relay output modules may be selected to meet isolation requirements Hard Contact Requirements Relay output modules can be used Cost The selection of certain modules can possibly reduce the number of racks required in your system For example 32 point discrete I O modules can save rack space compared to lower density modules Standardization Sometimes a company standardizes on particular types of modules to simplify training or stock
99. PLC I O Module Specifications Manual for details about these modules See Appendix H for information on the TBQC components 16 point modules that are equipped with the TBQC I O faceplate adapter Use the IC693CBL330 332 334 right side cables for this application See Appendix H for information on the TBQC Terminal Block Quick Connector components Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables IC693CBL340 341 Interface Cables These cables connect the PTM Processing module to the PTM Interface board The only difference between the two cables is their lengths C693CBL340 is 19 inches 0 5 meter long C693CBL341 is 39 inches 1 meter long Length Interface Cable Length of IC693CBL340 Cable is 19 0 50 meter Length of IC693CBL341 Cable is 39 1 meter Figure 10 42 Figure IC693CBL340 341 Interface Cables Series 90 30 PLC Processing Module 1C693CBL340 341 PTM Cable Interface Board Figure 10 43 PTM Component Mounting and Cable Connection The PTM Interface board connects to hazardous voltages Before installing testing or troubleshooting this board you should refer to the complete instructions in this manual Failure to follow the guidelines in the PTM User s Manual may result in personal injury equipment damage or both GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 65
100. PTM Products Ordering Information The Processing module and its Interface board are considered to be a matched set Therefore they are not sold separately The two cables however may be ordered as separate items There are four catalog numbers in the PTM product line 693 00 Contains the Processing module its matched Interface board and the 19 0 5 meter interface cable C693PTMI0I Contains the Processing module its matched Interface board and the 39 1 meter interface cable e C693CBL340 19 0 5 meter interface cable C693CBL341 39 1 meter interface cable Checking the 10693CBL340 341 Cables The following information is supplied for the purpose of troubleshooting only making continuity checks of the cable These cables have straight through connections pin 1 connects to pin 1 pin 2 connects to pin 2 etc although some pins have no connections One end is connected to a male all plastic DB 25 connector The other end is connected to a female all plastic DB 25 connector The cable is a twisted pair type connected to minimize noise and crosstalk between signals These cables connect to a circuit board that has hazardous voltages present These cables are carefully made to ensure the safety of the user and associated equipment Therefore we recommend you use only factory built cables 10 66 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 C
101. SD A Send Data Output 11 SD B Send Data Output 12 RD A Receive Data Input 13 RD B Receive Data Input 14 CTS B Clear To Send Input 15 RTS A Request To Send Output D 2 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 2 System Configurations The Miniconverter can be used in a point to point configuration as described above or in a multidrop configuration with the host device configured as the master and one or more PLCs configured as slaves The multidrop configuration requires a straight through 1 to 1 cable from the Miniconverter s RS 422 port to the first slave PLC s SNP port Other slaves will require a daisy chain connection between slaves A maximum of eight devices can be connected in an RS 422 multidrop configuration All of the devices must have a common ground If ground isolation is required you can use the GE Isolated Repeater Converter IC655CCMS590 in place of the Miniconverter When using the Miniconverter with a modem connection it may be necessary to jumper RTS to CTS consult the user s manual for your modem Cable Diagrams Point To Point GFK 0356Q When connecting the Miniconverter to IBM PC and compatible computers with hardware handshaking the following cable connections should be used 244982 PIN PIN TXD 2 2 RXD RXD 3 3 TXD CTS 7 7 RTS RTS 8 8 CTS
102. See the data sheet for these cables for details The replacement cables have right angle connectors to reduce the clearance space required in front of the PLC Function of cable This prewired cable is available for use with all Series 90 30 high density 32 point I O modules that use the Fujitsu 24 pin user I O connector Each of these modules has two of these connectors mounted side by side I O Interface cables have a 24 pin connector on one end for connection to the module and stripped and tinned wires on the other end Catalog numbers for 32 point modules having two 24 pin connectors are IC6903MDL 654 IC693MDL655 IC693MDL 752 and IC693MDL753 Connections to input circuits are made from the user s input devices to two male pin type 24 pin connectors Fujitsu FCN 365P024 AU mounted on the front of the module The connector mounted on the right of the module front view interfaces with groups A and B the connector on the left side of the module interfaces with groups C and D Ifa different length cable is required for connections to these modules you can build your own cable oc B1 A1 ee oo oo S oo x 99 B12A12 2 Length 10 3 meters Connector Fujitsu FCON 365S024 AU Figure 10 31 IC693CBL315 Cable B Building Custom Length Cables for 24 Pin Connectors GFK 0356Q Cables connecting the module to field devices can be built to l
103. Serial RS 232 port with standard RS 232 connector Connector 9 pin female D Subminiature Type Cannon DE9S solder pot with DE110963 1 hood or equivalent standard RS 232 connector IBM AT XT Serial RS 232 port with standard RS 232 connector Connector 9 pin female D Subminiature Type Cannon DEOS solder pot with DE110963 31 hood or equivalent standard RS 232 connector RS 232 RS 485 Converter one 15 pin male and one 25 pin male connector 15 pin male connector requires metric hardware same connector hood and hardware as for Series 90 PLC listed above 25 pin male D Subminiature Type Cannon DA25S solder pot with DB110963 3 hood or equivalent standard RS 232 connector Computer grade 24 AWG 22 mm minimum with overall shield Catalog Numbers Belden 9505 Belden 9306 Belden 9832 Cable These cables provide acceptable operation for data rates up to 19 2 Kbps as follows RS 232 50 feet 15 meters maximum cable length RS 422 RS 422 4000 feet 1200 meters maximum length Must not exceed the maximum RS 422 Common Mode specifi cation of 7V to 7V Isolation at the remote end may be used to reduce or eliminate Common Mode voltages For distances under 50 feet 15 meters almost any twisted pair or shielded twisted pair cable will work as long as the wire pairs are connected correctly When using RS 422 RS 422 the twisted pairs should be matched so that both transmit signals make up one twisted pair and bot
104. Specificatiofis tein eite nece ariete desee iere bee qe id 10 33 Wiring enne enne nnne 10 34 Connecting the Cable RUBRO ne teretes 10 34 IC693CBL304 305 Port Expansion WYE Cables for PCM ADC and CMM 10 35 Function of cabessa e a ai i eene een iem eee RUE 10 35 Cable Specifications ae ttp mee eee od t cete at e e oet eek cedula 10 35 Witing Information dede rte et m RP ORI eat LEUR 10 36 IC693CBL306 307 Extension Cables 50 Pin for 32 Point Modules 10 38 Function of cable ttr ede t ee enin re 10 38 Cable Specifications esses eene enne 10 38 IC693CBL308 309 I O Cables 50 Pin for 32 Point Modules 10 40 rt o e Ee ette tiere ETUR 10 40 Waring Information idee egt etate pie dettes 10 40 Contents xvii Contents Chapter 11 xviii IC693CBL310 I O Interface Cable 24 Pin for 32 Point Modules 10 42 Function of cable mer caved REPERI Speedo e ne tee Pus 10 42 Replacement Obsolescence Information sese 10 43 Connector Depth for Cable 693 3 0 10 43 IC693CBL311 317 319 320 I O Interface Cables for Power Mate APM Modules 10 45 BunctionroF cable 10 45 Specifications e eene teense 10 45 Waring Informali omeen n ee PL t ENTIRE AR
105. Unit BIU that interfaces to the applicable bus from one to eight I O modules and cabling I O modules come in various discrete analog and RTD types A local logic processor module MFP is also available For further information on Field Control see the following GFK 0826 Field Control Distributed I O and Control System I O Modules User s Manual GFK 0825 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual GFK 1175 Field Control FIP Bus Interface Unit User s Manual GFK 1291 Field Control Profibus Bus Interface Unit User s Manual VersaMax VersaMax I O modules can be used as distributed I O communicating with a Series 90 30 PLC over one of three bus types Genius Profibus or Device Net This arrangement would require an Option module for the desired bus type in the Series 90 30 PLC as well as the applicable Network Interface Module in the VersaMax system For more information on the VersaMax products please see GFK 1504 VersaMax Modules Power Supplies and Carriers Manual 03560 Chapter 12 System Design 12 7 Designing For Safety A good design should not only function properly and efficiently but must also protect personnel and equipment from harm Although some basic guidelines are found in the Installation chapter of this manual it is not possible to cover every aspect of safety because of the diversity of applications Additionally it is not practical for this manual to try to cover all the possib
106. User References for CPU Models 350 through 374 Reference Type Model 350 35 1 352 360 363 364 374 CPU Reference Range Maximum User memory Not applicable 240K Bytes configurable CPU350 32K Bytes fixed Discrete inputs 9910001 12048 2048 bits Discrete outputs Q0001 02048 2048 bits Discrete globals G0001 G1280 1280 bits Internal coils 0001 M4096 4096 bits Temporary coils T0001 T0256 256 bits System status references S0001 S0032 32 bits SA001 SA032 32 bits SB001 SB032 32 bits SC001 SC032 32 bits System register references RO0001 R32640 128 32 640 words configurable CPU350 9999 words fixed Analog inputs AI001 AI32640 128 32 640 words configurable CPU350 2048 words fixed Analog outputs 0001 032640 128 32 640 words configurable CPU350 512 words fixed System registers SRO01 SR028 28 words Depends on user defined value s of configurable memory May be viewed only with a Hand Held Programmer see the Hand Held Programmer User s Manual GFK 0402 may not be referenced in a user s logic program Application Program Compatibility Programs that have been developed on Series 90 30 CPUs 311 341 will automatically be translated by the programming software when used on CPUs 350 374 Programs created or translated for CPUs 350 374 will automatically be translated when used with CPUs 311 341 however be
107. a hate dol aie ie I ete i Rr dnd 8 28 IC693CMM321 Ethernet Interface Module essen 8 29 IC693PCM300 301 311 Programmable Coprocessor Module PCM 8 31 IC693CMM311 Communications Coprocessor Module 8 34 IC693ADC311 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor 8 35 IC693TCM302 303 Temperature Control Modules TCM esses 8 37 Connections secari E REDE e RE Tee 8 37 LED Indicators ree eee a oe Sa eet ke 8 38 Int rmal Fuses oue ete eer Boe rere itu etia 8 38 Automatic Data Transfers Between TCM and PLC sse 8 38 Comparison of TCM302 and TCM303 Modules see 8 39 IC693PTM100 101 Power Transducer PTM cccccccssccsssccescceessecessecesseceeeeeesseeeeses 8 40 Difference Between PTM100 and 101 8 40 Capabilities e teen eed e ERR ERREUR eee Mee eia 8 40 Operating Modes haee aeree ee be ie ce NE eae 8 40 Automatic Data Transfers Between PTMPM and 8 41 Compatibility kite ive ete vest veas ie ie eMe die eene te ied ebrios 8 41 Dirm etisions e t PO EH Ge E EORR Weare au 8 42 PTMPM Indicator LEDSs 5 2 1 e ede 8 42 General Mounting Information sess 8 42 Baseplate Type and Allowable Number of
108. and a cable to connect the module to the terminal block The advantage of this method is that it saves about two hours of wiring time per module compared with hand wiring from a module s removable terminal board to a user supplied panel mounted terminal block or strip m Older 32 point I O modules have one 50 pin connector on the front of the module that 1s either connected by a cable with a connector on each end to a Weidmuller panel mounted terminal block Weidmuller catalog no 912263 or is connected by a cable with stripped tinned leads to a user supplied terminal block or strip m Newer 32 point I O modules have two 24 pin connectors on the front of the module These module may be wired in one of three ways 1 Use a pair of cables IC693CBL327 328 see data sheet in Cables chapter to connect the module to a user supplied panel mounted terminal block or strip These cables have a 24 pin connector on one end and stripped tinned leads with wire markers on the other end 2 Use a pair of dual connector cables to connect the module to a Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC terminal block IC693ACC377 See Appendix H for details 3 Make your own custom cables Instructions are found in the IC693CBL327 328 data sheet in Chapter 10 Connections to I O Module Terminal Boards 2 18 Series 90 30 PLC I O terminal boards have either 10 or 20 screw terminals that will accept from two AWG 22 0 36 mm to two AWG 16 1 3 mm or one
109. and outputs on the same block Blocks configured in the programming software as having both inputs and outputs occupy the identical number of references in both I and Q memory regardless of the block s software configuration Unused references cannot be assigned to other inputs or outputs and should not be used in the application program The LEDs on the front of the GBC indicate its operating status and should be on during normal operation OK Shows the status of the GBC module This LED turns on after power up diagnostics are completed COM Shows the status of the Genius communications bus This LED is on steadily when the bus is operating properly It blinks for intermittent bus errors and is off for a failed bus It is also off when no configuration has been received from the PLC CPU Specific equipment or software versions required for compatibility with the GBC module are listed below Series 90 30 PLC CPU The GBC module can be used with CPU models IC693CPU311K 321K 331L or later or any version of the IC693CPU3 13 323 340 341 350 351 352 360 363 and 364 The CPU firmware must be release 5 0 or later Logicmaster 90 30 version 5 0 IC641SWP301L 304J 306F 307F VersaPro or Logic Developer PLC software is required Series Six PLC To exchange global data with a Genius Bus Controller the Series Six Bus Controller must be catalog number IC660CBB902F 903F firmware version 1 5 or later Chapter 8 Option Mod
110. as the SNP IDs match 03560 Appendix SNP Multidrop 1 7 Appendix Ethernet Transceivers vi IC649AEA102 Ethernet 10BASE T Transceiver e Compliant with the IEEE 802 3 Ethernet specification for IOBASE T e Connector on transceiver body is standard RJ 45 type for connection to unshielded twisted pair UTP Ethernet cable e This unit has an attached 40 1 meter cable with standard 14 pin AAUI connector for connecting to a Series 90 30 Ethernet module IC693CMM321 or CPU with Ethernet interface 1C693CPU364 CPU374 e SQE option is enabled e Power and Link Integrity LED indicator lights 1 25mm 3 5 89 mm 40 inches 1 meter EE 1 8 46mm 4 14 Pin AAUI Connector 8 Pin RJ 45 Connector Figure J 1 IC649AEA102 Ethernet 10BASE T Transceiver Power Requirement This unit draws 60 mA 5Vdc from the Ethernet interface via the AAUI connector LED Indicator Lights These are located on the end of the unit next to the RJ 45 connector The one labeled LI stays on as long as Link Integrity is maintained The one marked with a jagged arrow symbol indicates the presence of 5Vdc power to the unit GFK 0356Q J 1 IC649AEA103 Ethernet 10BASE2 Transceiver Note This transceiver replaces obsolete catalog number IC649AEA101 e Compliant with the IEEE 802 3 Ethernet specification for IOBASE2 e A standard BNC connector is mounted on the body of the transceiver
111. avoid losing CPU data See Super Capacitor Memory Backup for details External Battery Module IC693ACC302 This module provides long term battery backup for all modular Series 90 30 CPUs Its two foot cable plugs into the power supply battery connector The External Battery Module maintains RAM contents on a CPU374 for 15 months CPU models 331 364 maintain RAM contents for approximately 75 months For details see the Datasheet for the External Battery Module GFK 2124 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 5 Batteries in Power Supplies on Expansion or Remote Racks Batteries in power supplies on Expansion or Remote racks are not in use Only the battery in a CPU rack supplies backup power to RAM memory Batteries in non CPU racks may be removed and used as spares if they meet the age requirements stated previously in this chapter 03560 Chapter 6 Memory Backup Battery Backup 6 11 Chapter Input Output Modules The basics of the Series 90 30 Input and Output I O modules are covered in this chapter for your convenience A table listing these modules is located at the end of this chapter For detailed specifications and installation instructions please refer to publication GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Basic I O Module Types m Discrete Input Series 90 30 discrete input modules convert AC and DC power levels from user devices to the logic le
112. bits each Register Memory R Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16 384 words with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32 640 words with Control version 2 2 Analog Inputs AI Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16 384 words with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32 640 words with Control version 2 2 Analog Outputs AQ Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16 384 words with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32 640 words with Control version 2 2 System Registers for reference table viewing only 28 words SR cannot be referenced in user logic program Timers Counters 72 000 Shift Registers Yes Built in Ports Three ports Supports SNP SNPX slave on power supply connector On Ports 1 and 2 supports SNP SNPX master slave and RTU slave Requires CMM module for CCM PCM module for RTU master support Communications LAN Supports multidrop Also supports Ethernet FIP Profibus GBC GCM GCM option modules Override Yes Battery Backed Clock Yes Interrupt Support Supports the periodic subroutine feature Type of Memory Storage RAM and Flash PCM CCM Compatibility Yes Floating Point Mat h Support Yes firmware based in firmware Release 9 0 and later ON c Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 CPU364 Catalog Number IC693CPU364 5 0 22 milliseconds per 1K of logic boolean
113. by Genius Blocks but cannot send commands to them By selecting the applicable bus interface unit BIU you can use GE Field Control distributed I O to interface to Series 90 30 WorldFIP Profibus and Genius buses W State Logic These products allow Natural Language programming as an alternative to ladder logic This makes program creation documenting and editing easier for those not trained in ladder logic programming Industries that are required by law to thoroughly document any changes to their system find State Logic to be especially useful Cost In the case where either of two modules are capable of filling a need an Option module choice can be made based on the basis of cost W Performance Higher data transfer rate or amount of data often dictates which Option module is used For example IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius Communications Module can transmit and receive many times more data than the IC693CMM301 Genius Communications Module and it transfers data to the PLC CPU at a faster rate A comparison table for these two modules is found in Appendix A of GFK 0695 W Standardization Sometimes a company standardizes on particular types of modules to simplify training or stocking of spare parts W Display requirements Several options are available for interfacing with GE Human Machine Interface HMI devices For details see the GE web site http www ge ip com W Third party solutions Many automation solutions ar
114. by six cables IC693CBL329 IC693CBL330 IC693CBL331 IC693CBL332 IC693CBL333 and IC693CBL334 See the data sheet for these cables for details The replacement cables have right angle connectors to reduce the clearance space required in front of the PLC Function of cable These cables are used with 16 point I O modules that are equipped with a TBQC I O faceplate adapter Each cable has a straight 24 pin female connector on both ends Each cable provides a connection from the module to a connector mounted on a terminal block assembly These cables are wired pin to pin that is pin Al to pin Al pin A2 to pin 2 etc I O faceplate assembly catalog number IC693A CC334 is required which snaps onto the module in place of the module s standard 20 pin terminal block assembly Five different terminal blocks are available to allow a variety of I O modules to use this accessory see Appendix H for details on the TBQC assemblies Cable Specifications Cable Length IC693CBL321 3 feet 1 meter IC693CBL322 6 feet 2 meters IC693CBL323 1 5 feet 0 5 meters Cable Type 12 twisted pairs with overall aluminum polyester shield and 24 AWG drain wire 24 Pin Female Connectors 2 Equivalent to Fujitsu FCN 363J024 or equivalent Length of cable is measured from backs of connector shells as shown in figure on next page The connector on the I O faceplate is oriented as shown below with the rows labeled Al A12 and BI B
115. capacity power supply 12 12 Load requirements hardware components 12 12 sample calculations 12 14 table of 12 12 Local expansion system example point to point wiring 10 28 Location of modules in racks 12 18 rack 12 17 Low battery warning 4 20 6 1 MAC address for CPU374 2 2 Machine references symbol 5 10 Maintenance preventive table 13 8 Making a 100 shielded cable 10 27 Math Floating point feature 5 15 Maximum number of modules per system 12 11 Mechanical spare parts kits 13 7 Megabasic 8 31 Memory Comparing PROM devices 5 8 Configurable 5 14 CPU table 5 11 Flash 5 9 5 15 Flash protection 5 15 Maintaining during storage 6 9 PROM types 5 5 Protection strategy 6 3 RAM 5 5 User options 5 8 Volatility 5 4 Memory card HHP 11 6 Microprocessor types CPU 5 3 Index Index Miniconverter kit cable diagrams D 3 IC690ACC901 11 4 RS 232 port pin assignments D 2 RS 422 SNP to RS 232 D 1 RS 422 port pin assignments D 2 specifications D 4 system configurations D 3 Model 331 jumpers for EPROM EEPROM 5 8 Module location 12 18 Module count 12 7 maximum table 12 11 Module features 2 2 Module load requirements table 12 12 Module location Defined 3 3 figure 12 19 Module location in baseplate number of valid 12 11 Modules replacing 13 5 Motion Mate APM300 8 15 Axis Postioning Module 8 15 Motion Mate DSM DSM302 8 17 DSM31A 8 20 Motion Mate DSM302 Illustration
116. connector on the terminal block This cable is similar to IC693CBL319 except that its drain shield wire is brought outside of the connector Two cables are required per module IC693CBL321 3 1 meter I O cable connects between Used with the Terminal Block Quick Obsolete Use a 24 pin connector on the module and the connector on the terminal block Connect assemblies See Appendix H for a module list and cable selection IC693CBL329 and information IC693CBL330 IC693CBL322 6 2 meter I O cable connects between Used with the Terminal Block Quick Obsolete Use IC693CBL331 and 1C693CBL332 a 24 pin connector on the module and the connector on the terminal block Connect assemblies See Appendix H for a module list and cable selection information Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 GFK 0356Q Catalog No Description Cables Series 90 30 Cable Cross Reference Applications IC693CBL323 Obsolete Use IC693CBL333 and 1 5 0 5 meter I O cable connects between a 24 pin connector on the module and the connector on the terminal block Used with the Terminal Block Quick Connect assemblies See Appendix H for a module list and cable selection information IC693CBL334 IC693CBL324 3 1 meter cable connects between a DSM modules DSM module and either a servos axis 1C693DSM302 terminal block or an au
117. connects to the Series 90 30 or 90 70 PLC 1 Select one of the three RS 232 compatible cables 10 feet in length that will connect the programmer s or other serial device RS 232 serial port to the RS 232 port on the converter The catalog numbers of these cables are IC690CBL701 use with Workmaster industrial computer or PC XT or compatible personal computer IC690CBL702 use with IBM PC AT or compatible personal computer and IC690CBL705 use with Workmaster II industrial computer or IBM PS 2 or compatible personal computer 2 A standard 6 foot cable HHP compatible is available to connect the RS 422 RS 485 port on the converter to the RS 485 port on the Series 90 30 or Series 90 70 PLC The catalog number of this cable is IC693CBL303 Installation of these cables should be done with the PLC powered down e Connect the 25 pin male connector on the 10 foot cable to the 25 pin female connector on the converter Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 e Connect the female connector 9 pin or 25 pin on the opposite end of this cable to the male RS 232 connector serial port on the selected programming or other serial device If you build you own cable use a connector that is compatible with your serial device e Notice that both ends of the 6 foot RS 422 RS 485 compatible cable are the same a 15 pin male connector is attached at both ends Connect one end of this cable to the 15 pin
118. contacts User Memory total 240K Bytes Note Actual size of available user program memory ETHERNET depends on the amounts configured for R AI and WAQ RESTART configurable word memory types see below Internal Col Ya Output Tempora Y Register Memory R Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16 384 words with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32 640 words with Control version 2 2 Analog Inputs AI Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16 384 words with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32 640 words with Control version 2 2 Analog Outputs AQ Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16 384 words OBASE T with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32 640 words with Control version 2 2 System Registers for reference table 28 words SR viewing only cannot be referenced in logic program Built in Serial Ports 1 uses connector on PLC Power Supply Supports SNP SNPX slave Requires CMM module for SNP SNP X master RTU slave or CCM PCM module for RTU master support Communications Ethernet internal AAUI or 1OBASE T AAUI requires external transceiver 0 is direct Ethernet additional Supports Ethernet option modules LAN Requires option modules for Genius Profibus FIP Floating Point Math Support Yes firmware based Note Onsome early modules the LED labeled PS PORT may say SNP instead otherwise the modules are identical 03560 Chapter 5 CPUs 5 39
119. correct documentation to order and use Products are arranged in this appendix by categories such as Analog I O Modules Baseplates Communications Modules etc The category headings are listed in alphabetical order Modules that share common documentation are grouped under a generic catalog number such as IC693 ALGxxx for the Analog I O modules Note that you may not need every publication listed for a particular product Your need for some of the publications depends on your application For example if you intend to use Logicmaster programming software to configure and program your PLC you will not need manuals for the other programming software products or the Hand Held Programmer Or if you are going to program your Programmable Coprocessor module using the C computer language you will not need the MegaBasic language manual A list of publication titles is included at the end of this data sheet Abbreviations Used HHP Hand Held Programmer LM90 Logicmaster a DOS based programming and configuration software SFC Sequential Function Chart General System Information 90 30 PLC System Installation GFK 0356 Installation for Conformance to Standards GFK 1179 Configuration Options Configuration HHP GFK 0402 Configuration LM90 GFK 0466 Configuration Control GFK 1295 Configuration VersaPro GFK 1670 Configuration CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer PLC GFK 1868 Analog I O Modules
120. during the test by removing the terminal board strap Re enable overvoltage protection after testing by reinstalling the strap 1 247086 I T 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 y 1 1 1 3 9 Frame Ground Jumper Strap Connects I 4777 Overvoltage Protection 1 Devices to Frame Ground 49 1 1 Screw Terminals Terminal Board Figure 2 16 Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap 2 24 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Special Installation Instructions for Floating Neutral IT Systems When the AC input power supplies listed below are installed in a system where the Neutral line is not referenced to Protective Earth Ground these special installation instructions must be followed to prevent damage to the power supply IC693PWR321S or later version IC693PWR330A or later version Definition of Floating Neutral Systems A Floating Neutral System is a system of power distribution wiring where Neutral and Protective Earth Ground are not tied together by a negligible impedance In Europe this is referred to as an IT system see IEC950 In a Floating Neutral System voltages measured from input terminals to protective earth ground may exceed the 264 Volts AC maximum input voltage specified in the power supply specifications in Chapter 24in this manual Example of Floating Neutral System This system must be installed using the special inst
121. end of the cable to either the single male connector of a second I O bus expansion cable to continue the I O bus expansion chain or to an I O bus Terminator plug if this is the last cable in the expansion chain Important Notes About I O Bus Expansion Cables 1 The maximum number of cables that can be included in an I O expansion system is seven and the total maximum cable length between the CPU baseplate and the last expansion baseplate is 50 feet 15 meters The total maximum cable length between the CPU baseplate and the last remote baseplate is 700 feet 213 meters Failure to observe these maximum cable lengths could result in erratic operation of the PLC system 2 CPUs 350 374 support a maximum of seven I O expansion cables CPUs 331 341 support a maximum of four I O expansion cables 3 The 50 foot 15 meter I O bus expansion cable IC693CBL302 which has male connector on each end has the I O bus terminating resistors built into the end connector on the cable If this cable is used you would not install a separate terminator block I O Bus Expansion cables should NOT be connected or disconnected with power applied to the I O expansion baseplate s Unexpected PLC operation may result Cable Application Suggestions In general it is advantageous to use standard factory built cables where possible to save time and avoid wiring errors Using Standard Cables For connecting between baseplat
122. evt reg rite eene a etu Te nea odo e rte URS 5 27 CPU311 Catalog Number 693 11 5 28 CPU313 Catalog Number IC693CPU3 13 5 29 CPU323 Catalog Number IC693CPU323 5 30 CPU331 Catalog Number 693 331 5 31 xii Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Contents CPU340 Catalog Number IC693CPU340 5 32 CPU341 Catalog Number IC693CPU341 5 33 CPU350 Catalog Number IC693CPU350 5 34 CPU351 Catalog Number 693 351 5 35 CPU352 Catalog Number IC693CPU352 5 36 CPU360 Catalog Number IC693CPU360 5 37 CPU363 Catalog Number IC693CPU363 5 38 CPU364 Catalog Number 693 364 5 39 CPU374 Catalog Number IC693CPU374 sss 5 40 Chapter 6 Memory Backup Battery Backup eeeeeeeee eee eese eee en netten een aset en 6 1 Backup Battery for RAM Memory Supplies esse 6 1 Battery Replacement Instructions eesesseseseeeseeeeeneenennenre
123. expansion if desired Step 6 Selecting Power Supplies The following factors affect your Power Supply selection decisions See the Power Supplies chapter for additional details W Power capacity All Series 90 30 Power Supplies have three individual outputs 5VDC 24VDC Relay and 24VDC Isolated Although all of these Power Supplies are rated at 30 Watts maximum total output the rating of the 5 VDC output varies from supply to supply as shown in the following table For applications requiring heavy loading of the 5 VDC supply choose one of the High Output power supplies IC693PWR330 or IC693PWR331 W Input voltage As seen in the next table nominal input voltage choices are 24VDC 48VDC 120VAC 125VDC and 240V AC Table 12 1 Power Supply Feature Comparison Table Catalog Load Nominal Number Capacity Input Output Capacities Voltage Power IC693PWR321 30 Watts 100 to 240 VAC or 5 VDC 424 VDC Isolated 24 VDC Relay 125 VDC 15 watts 20 watts 15 watts IC693PWR330 30 Watts 100 to 240 VAC 5 VDC 24 VDC Isolated 24 VDC Relay 125 VDC 30 watts 20 watts 15 watts IC693PWR322 30 Watts 24 or 48 VDC 5 24 VDC Isolated 24 VDC Relay 15 watts 20 watts 15 watts IC693PWR331 30 Watts 24 VDC 5 VDC 24 VDC Isolated 24 VDC Relay 30 watts 20 watts 15 watts Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts 12 6 Series 90 30 PLC Insta
124. gt Pivot hook Circuit board holding tabs two on each side of module Catalog number and description section of label Includes MAC address for CPU374 Certification UL CE etc section of label Module connector plugs into baseplate backplane connector Release lever spring loaded Ventilation openings in module case top and bottom Front cover holding tabs two on each side of module Front cover shown or terminal board for I O modules Front cover faceplate or hinged cover for terminal board Lens cap some modules do not have Lens cap holding tabs one on each side of module Module label Serial Number used to determine module warranty status On some modules the Serial Number may be on a small tag on the back of the module Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q Installing a Module Do not insert or remove modules with power applied This could cause the PLC to stop or malfunction Injury to personnel and damage to the module or baseplate may result Also attempts to force a module into an improper slot type will result in damage to the module and or the baseplate Modules will mount in the correct slot type easily with a minimum of force Use the following instructions as a guide when inserting a module into a baseplate slot Check that module catalog number matches slot configuration Each slot is or will be assigned a particular
125. have the following features refer to the following figure Removable Terminal Board You can remove the terminal board from the module in order to wire it if desired Then when you are finished wiring it you can easily reinstall it on the module However some prefer to leave it on the module when wiring If you ever need to replace a module you don t have to do any rewiring if your old terminal board is still in good condition Simply remove the wired terminal board from the old module and install it on the new module The terminal board screw terminals are also convenient points for measuring voltages while testing or troubleshooting Hinged Front Cover The cover is easily opened to access the terminal board connections Normally it s kept closed to protect personnel from accidentally touching a hot terminal Note in the following figure that the back side of the front cover insert contains a schematic diagram of the terminal board connections The module catalog number IC693MDL940 in the example shown is printed on the bottom of the front cover insert The module catalog Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 number is also printed on the label on the side of the module However in order to see this side label the module has to be removed from the PLC On the front side of the front cover insert are lines that correspond to the module s I O points You can temporarily remove the insert and
126. in the PLC application program m Power Monitor Mode In this mode the PTM samples either Single Phase or 3 Phase AC voltages and currents and uses the data to calculate numerous power values For 3 Phase operation Wye or Delta can be selected m Synchro Monitor Mode In this mode the PTM samples a Single Phase or 3 Phase AC voltage produced by a generator and one voltage from the associated power grid then develops voltage frequency and relative phase information Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Automatic Data Transfers Between PTMPM and PLC The PLC CPU controls the PTM Processor Module PTMPM by sending it several Q bits and AQ words during each PLC sweep These Q bits and AQ words represent commands such as Enabled Disabled Power Synchro Mode Display Mode and Gain values In return the PTMPM provides information to the PLC CPU by sending it several I bits and AI words each PLC sweep The information sent by the PTMPM includes voltage current power and phase values as well as discrete fault status Compatibility The is compatible with all Series 90 30 CPUs and the module may be mounted in any type of baseplate CPU Expansion Remote PTMPM PTMIM on e Interface Cable Length of IC693CBL340 Cable is 19 0 5 meter Length of IC693CBL341 Cable is 39
127. later will not work with CPUs 311 341 and 351 W Single point of connection for all programming and configuration tasks including motion program creation Motion Programs 1 10 and Local Logic programming All programming and configuration is loaded through the PLC s programming communications port In turn the CPU loads all configuration motion programs and Local Logic programs to the DSM314 across the PLC backplane User scaling of programming units User Units in both Standard and Follower modes DSM314 firmware stored in Flash memory is updated via its front panel COMM port Firmware update kits provide firmware and Loader software on floppy disk Firmware is also available for download on the GE web site http www ge ip com support Recipe programming using command parameters as operands for Acceleration Velocity Move and Dwell Commands Automatic Data Transfer between PLC tables and DSM314 without user programming Ease of I O connection with factory cables and terminal blocks Electronic CAM capability starting with Firmware Release Version 2 0 Control of GE o Series and Series Digital servos SL Series servos or third party servos with analog velocity command or analog torque command interface Home and overtravel switch inputs for each Servo Axis Two Position Capture Strobe Inputs for each axis can capture axis and or master position with an accuracy of 2 counts plus 10 microseconds of var
128. necessary to remove the baseplate cover to install the bracket Figure 2 7 IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation Dimensions for rack mounting a 10 slot baseplate with the IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket are shown in the following figure 18 89 480 18 47 469 N iL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES L Figure 2 8 Dimensions for 19 inch Rack Mounting Using IC693ACC308 Adapter Bracket Chapter 2 Installation 2 9 2 10 0 160 4 06 dia x 4 0 280 7 1 4 000 101 6 1 368 34 7 0 346 8 8 Inside I 16 850 428 4 i 18 122 460 3 0 439 11 2 1 Figure 2 9 IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Grounding Procedures System Grounding Procedures In addition to the following grounding information we strongly urge that you follow all applicable codes that apply to your area For example in the United States most areas have adopted the National Electrical Code standard and specify that all wiring conform to its requirements In other countries different codes will apply For maximum safety to personnel and property you must follow these codes Failure to do so can mean injury or death to personnel damage to property or both All components o
129. non volatile memory Application programs are usually developed in a CPU s battery backed RAM memory and executed from this RAM memory But if additional program integrity or operation of the PLC without a battery is desired an optional EEPROM or EPROM can be installed in a spare socket labeled PROGRAM PROM on the embedded CPU baseplates or in a socket inside the Model 331 CPU module and inside the early versions of Model 341 CPU prior to hardware version IC693CPU341 J and firmware release 4 61 The Model 331 CPU module and the early versions of Model 341 has a jumper labeled JP1 located next to the EEPROM EPROM socket to allow you to select either EEPROM or EPROM These jumper positions are shown below Jumper Selects Comparing EPROM and EEPROM Features 5 8 For one time applications an EEPROM is the more practical of the two It can be created in the PLC itself and doesn t require any additional outside equipment An EPROM is not as convenient to create It must be created outside the PLC using an EPROM burner Because an EPROM is less expensive than an EEPROM if you need to reproduce multiple copies of a program to use on a large number of identical controls it may be cost effective to use EPROMS especially if you already have an EPROM burner Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Procedure for Creating an EPROM 1 Install an EEPROM in the PROM socket of the PLC you will use to develop
130. of 8 18 Motion Mate DSM314 Illustration of 8 21 Mounting baseplates 2 8 Multidrop configuring I 5 system limitations 1 2 Multidrop cables specification table 1 2 types I 2 Multidrop configuration 10 11 with converter 10 9 with isolated repeater converter C 6 Multidrop connections A 10 Multidrop SNP connecting I 6 examples I 4 overview I 1 setting SNP ID I 5 troubleshooting I 7 wiring diagram I 3 Multiple hosts Genius 8 6 Index 9 Index Index 10 N Nickname Compared to address 5 10 Operation without battery 6 7 Operator interface terminal 8 35 Option module list 8 1 Option modules alphanumeric display coprocessor 8 35 Comm Coprocessor 8 34 DSM302 8 17 DSM31A 8 20 enhanced genius communications 8 4 Ethernet interface 8 29 FIP bus controller 8 10 FIP remote I O scanner 8 12 Genius bus controller 8 6 Genius communications 8 2 high speed counter 8 23 I O link interface slave 8 24 I O link master 8 25 I O processor 8 27 Motion Mate APM300 8 15 personal computer interface card 11 7 Power Transducer 8 40 programmable coprocessor modules 8 31 state logic processor 9 5 Temperature Control TCM 8 37 Output module fuses 13 6 Overvoltage protection devices 4 5 4 16 jumper strap installation 2 24 P Parts kits mechanical spare 13 7 PCIF PCIF2 description 11 7 PCM Wye cable 10 35 Personal Computer Interface Data sheet
131. of PLC sss 10 44 Figure 10 30 I O Connector Cable Specifications nennen 10 45 10 3 Ls IC693C BE315 Cable Do sd f PLE D ate a E QU UP ER 10 49 Figure 10 32 Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC esses 10 52 Figure 10 33 IC693CBL316A Serial Cable Illustration and Connector Pinouts 10 53 Figure 10 34 Connector Orientation on I O Faceplate essent 10 55 Figure 10 35 I O Faceplate to Terminal Block Cable 0 0 0 ececescceseeseceseeseeeeeeseeeeeesecaeeesecseeeeeeseenneeaeeas 10 55 Figure 10 36 Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC 10 56 Figure 10237 C693CBL 327 328 Cable8 tiie casein et a Le he a E UO clan Taos ala alain 10 57 Figure 10 38 Dimension for Depth of Connector for 693 327 328 10 58 Figure 10 39 Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC for Custom Built Cables 10 61 Figure 10 40 10693CBL329 330 331 332 333 334 Cables 10 62 Figure 10 41 Dimension for Depth of Connector essent neret 10 63 Figure 10 42 Figure IC693CBL340 341 Interface Cables seen 10 65 03560 xxvii Contents Figure 10 43 Component Mounting and Cable 10 65 Figure 11 1
132. of using an IC693CBL306 or 307 cable to connect a 32 point I O module to one of these terminal blocks is shown in the following figure 10 38 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables 50 Pin 32 Point Module SERIES 90 30 PLC Extension Cable Weidmuller Terminal BlocK DIN Rail Mounted ejejejejejejete eter rejejelelelelele 2 2 22 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 lelelelejelelelelelelejelleleleleleleleleleleljele Figure 10 27 32 Point I O Module to Weidmuller Terminal Block Assembly GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 39 IC693CBL308 309 I O Cables 50 Pin for 32 Point Modules Function of cable This cable is used with 32 point High Density modules that have a 50 pin Honda connector mounted on the front of the module The modules that use these cable are IC693MDL652 IC693MDL653 IC693MDL750 and IC693MDL751 The I O cables have a female connector on one end and stripped and tinned wires on the other end Each of the stripped and tinned wires has a label attached to it for ease of identification The numbers on these labels correspond with the pin number of the connector wired to the opposite end Specifications Cable Length IC693CBL308 IC693CBL309 Connectors 3 feet 1 meter 6 feet 2 meters 50 pin female Honda on end that connects to male connector on modu
133. on the baseplate The voltage and power required by modules installed on the baseplate is supplied through the baseplate connectors POWER SUPPLY BACKPLANE USE COMMENTS USED INTERNALLY ON ANALOG INPUT SH 124V sas OUTPUT AND DC INPUT MODULES ALSO AVAILABLE ON EXTERNAL TERMINALS ON DC INPUT MODULES AND dh IGND P ON FRONT OF POWER SUPPLY FOR USER APPLICATIONS USED INTERNALLY ON RELAY OUTPUTS SINGLE POINT CONNECTION USED INTERNALLY ON CPU INPUTS OUTPUTS ETC 2 POINT CONNECTION EXTERNAL CONNECTION TO EARTH GROUND Figure 4 11 Interconnection of Power Supplies 03560 Chapter 4 Power Supplies 4 17 Overcurrent Protection all Supplies The 5V logic output is electronically limited to 3 5 amps 7 amps for high capacity supplies An overload including short circuits is sensed internally and causes the supply to shut down The supply will continually try to restart until the overload is removed An internal fuse in the input line is provided as a backup The supply will usually shut down before the fuse blows The fuse also protects against internal supply faults Timing Diagram 4 18 The timing diagram below shows the relationship of the DC input to the DC outputs and to the Power Supply OK signal PSOK generated by the power supply When power is first applied the PSOK signal goes false This line remains false for a minimum of 20 msec after the 5V bus is withi
134. panel mounted Each baseplate has standard attachment flanges for mounting on an electrical panel Baseplate dimensions and proper spacing requirements for installation purposes for both the 5 and 10 slot baseplates with embedded CPU Models 311 and Model 313 are 5 slot baseplates Model 323 is a 10 slot baseplate and the 5 and 10 slot baseplates for Modular CPUs are shown in figures 3 1 through 3 4 Note All 5 slot baseplates have the same mounting dimensions and all 10 slot baseplates have the same mounting dimensions Baseplates must be mounted in the orientation as shown in the following figures for proper cooling Embedded CPU 311 313 and 323 Baseplate Dimensions Baseplate dimensions and spacing requirements for installation for Models 311 313 and 323 baseplates are shown below RH DIMENSIONS IN INCHES cs 102 102 l MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS REMOVABLE 1 Vo 555 TERMINAL 142 BLOCK n POWER fy SUPPLY Y rj l l l _ l l l l Je l 1 20 DIA 1 an 5 08 512 TYPICAL 130 i gt 7 l l g g d d 1 l l l l T O E 7 1 FRONT VIEW HINGED SIDE VIEW 20 1 DOOR 1 4 00 1 102 ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING Figure 3 14 Model 311 and 313 5 Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements
135. pin connector on one end and a set of stripped wire ends on the other These two cables are identical except for their opposite connector orientations This difference in the cables connector orientations is for the purpose of matching the opposing connector orientations on the dual connector type of 32 point I O modules T 10 Feet 3 Meters Figure 10 37 C693CBL327 328 Cables Note Each conductor in these 24 conductor cables has a current rating of 1 2 Amps If using these cables with a 16 point Output module with a higher output current rating you must use the lower value of 1 2 for the maximum load current rating If you have field devices that require more than 1 2 Amps do not use a TBQC assembly Use the standard Terminal Board instead Applications These cables are for use with Series 90 30 I O modules that have the Fujitsu 24 pin user I O connector There are two categories of these modules 32 point modules with two 24 pin connectors IC693MDL 654 IC693MDL655 IC693MDL 752 and IC693MDL753 The IC693CBL327 cable is for the modules left side connector front view and the IC693CBL328 cable is for the modules right side connector The modules right side connector interfaces with I O circuit groups A and B the modules left side connector interfaces with groups C and D See Chapter 7 Input and Output Modules GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 57 10 58 Specifications f
136. required for a factory built cable which has a right angle connector The following figure shows the space required in front of the PLC when this cable is connected to a module The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should allow for the depth added by this connector 10 60 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q Cables PLC Side View N 1 5 2 5 Typical Figure 10 39 Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC for Custom Built Cables Possible Uses for These Cables Factory or Custom Built Connecting from the 24 pin connectors on a 32 point module to either a user supplied terminal strip block or directly to I O field devices switches lights etc Connecting from the 24 pin connector on a 16 point module that has a TBQC I O faceplate adapter to either a user supplied terminal strip block or directly to I O field devices switches lights etc Use the right side cable IC693CBL328 for this purpose See Appendix H for information about TBQC Terminal Block Quick Connect options Connecting from the 24 pin connectors on a 32 point module through a conduit to a Terminal Block Quick Connect terminal block This can be accomplished by attaching one of the optional 24 pin connectors to the stripped end after pulling the cable through the conduit See the section Building Custom Length Cables for information on the connector opt
137. reversed from those of the CPU351 and CPU352 and its LED indicator lights key switch and shield ground connector are in different locations The shield ground connector is on the front panel of the CPU363 labeled FRAME but is located on the bottom of the CPU351 and CPU352 modules PS 363 QN CPU351 1 Op2 ON RUN PIN 1 PIN 1 PIN 1 Shield Ground Connector Figure 5 4 CPUs 351 352 and 363 CPU Firmware Upgrade The CPU firmware which is stored in Flash memory is loaded through the Port 1 connector on these modules faceplate using Loader software supplied with the firmware upgrade kit The IC693CBL316 cable can be used for this purpose see Chapter 10 for data sheet on this cable Keyswitch This is a standard CPU keyswitch discussed earlier in this chapter Chapter 5 CPUs 5 19 Shield Ground Connection Tab This tab is located on the bottom of the CPU351 and 352 modules and on the front of the CPU363 module It is used to make the module s shield ground connection A wire with the applicable terminal ends is supplied with the module for this purpose Please see the section Module Shield Grounding in Chapter 2 Installation for details Serial Ports The 351 352 and 363 CPUs have three serial ports One is accessed through a connector on the PLC power supply standard serial port found on all Series 90 30 CPUs and the connectors for the other
138. s removable terminal board or any wires connected to it m Ifthe module has wiring remove the module s terminal board NOTE You do not have to unwire the terminal board or cables The procedure for removing a terminal board is described later in this section m Locate the release lever at the bottom of the module and firmly press it up towards the module m While holding the module firmly at its top and fully depressing release lever swing pivot the module upward release lever must be free of its retaining slot m Disengage pivot hook at the top rear of the module by moving the module up and away from the baseplate 243056 PIVOT HOOK M t PRESS RELEASE LEVER Figure 2 3 Removing a Module Note Modules in expansion or remote baseplates can be added removed or replaced while the PLC is in RUN mode if power is first removed from the expansion or remote baseplate I O data to from this baseplate will not be updated while power is removed 2 4 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Installing a Module s Terminal Board Note Modules IC693MDL730F and later and IC693MDL731F and later have special terminal boards that are equipped with holding screws For Installation and Removal instructions please see the section Installing and Removing Terminal Boards with Holding Screws later in this chapter To install a terminal board circled numbers refer to drawing bel
139. should be rated at 240V 100V 50V 390V Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 DC Power Source Connections DC Input Wiring to AC DC and DC Only Power Supplies DC Input power can range from 12 to 30 VDC for the 24 VDC supply 18 to 56 VDC for the 24 48 VDC supply or 100 to 150 VDC for the 125 VDC supply All Series 90 30 power supplies have DC input capabilities The following connection information applies to all of them Connect the and wires from the power source to the top terminals on the terminal board to the top terminal to the second terminal Connect the third terminal from the top to system ground 24 VDC Output All Supplies The bottom two terminals are connected to the isolated 24 volt DC output that can be used to supply power to input circuits within power limitations of the supply If the same DC input power source is used to provide power to two or more power supplies in a Series 90 30 PLC System ensure that connection polarity is identical at each rack top terminal and second terminal Do not cross the Positive and Negative lines A resulting difference in potential can injure personnel or cause damage to equipment Also each baseplate must be connected to a common system ground described earlier in this chapter 03560 Chapter 2 Installation 2 27 Basic Installation Procedure 2 28 Note Series 90 30 PLCs must be mounted in a prot
140. slot expansion rack and any mix of discrete and analog I O modules W Generic Devices such as general purpose computers that are interfaced to the bus via a FIP Interface Module 8 10 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 The FIP Bus Controller is a standard rack mounted Series 90 30 PLC module It plugs easily into the PLC s backplane The latch on the bottom of the module secures it in position Module OK Run Carrier Detect Ch 1 5 Transmit Enable Ch 1 Carrier Detect Ch 2 Transmit Enable Ch 2 15 Pin Serial Connector RS 485 9 FIP Fieldbus Connector C channel 1 9 Pin FIP Fieldbus Connector channel 2 o jo Figure 8 7 Series 90 30 FIP Bus Controller There are no DIP switches or jumpers to set on the module The Series 90 30 FIP Bus Controller has six status LEDs an RS 485 serial port and two identical FIP bus connectors Status LEDs The 6 LEDs on the front of the FIP Bus Controller display module status and communications activity Serial Port The 15 pin serial port is used to connect a computer for upgrading the operating firmware of the Bus Controller and for configuring by an external configuration tool FIP Bus Connectors The two 9 pin connectors on the FIP Bus Controller provide for attachment of one or two FIP busses The two busses provide a redundant bus capability 03560 C
141. startup and goes out when the TCM finishes its internal startup routine When there is an internal module fault this LED will alternately flash with the green Run R LED S Short This red LED is normally OFF This LED lights when there is a short on one of the output circuits 1 8 Output Status These green LEDs normally turn ON and OFF while the module is regulating their outputs The percentage of time that one of these LEDs is ON verses OFF is representative of the PWM period of that output Each of the eight LEDs corresponds to an output channel The output connector is the one on the right side of the module The channels numbers are labeled on the module next to the connector For example LED 8 corresponds to the connections labeled 8 and 8 on the right hand connector Internal Fuse The TCM s internal fuse is a 2 Amp 125V subminiature type Littlefuse Microfuse Catalog Number 273 002 or equivalent If the P External Power LED will not light the internal fuse may be open To access this fuse W Turn off power to the PLC then remove the TCM module W While gently pulling outward on the front cover release the front cover side tabs with a small pocket size standard screwdriver E Gently remove the fuse by pulling it forward out of the front of the module with a small pair of needle nose pliers Replace fuse only with the correct size and type Using an incorrect fuse can result in harm to personnel
142. the PLC so allow the use of a smaller enclosure in some applications Connector Depth for Cable IC693CBL310 Data sheets for cables IC693CBL315 and IC693CBL327 328 can be found in this chapter The following illustration shows the space required in front of the PLC when this cable is connected to a module The depth of the cabinet that the PLC 1s mounted in should allow for the depth added by this connector Chapter 10 Cables 10 43 PLC Side View pa Typical 2 187 Figure 10 29 Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC 10 44 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables 1693CBL311 317 319 320 I O Interface Cables for Power Mate APM Modules Function of cable Specifications GFK 0356Q The I O Interface Cable assembly consists of a 24 pin I O connector a cable and a 25 pin D type terminal block connector This cable is used to connect the Power Mate APM Modules 1C693APU301 and IC693APU302 to drives and machines There are two male 24 pin connectors mounted on the front of each Power Mate APM Two of these I O Interface cables are required for connections to and from the drive and machine Catalog number IC693CBL311 is 10 feet 3 meters in length and IC693CBL319 is 3 feet 1 meter in length The cable wire code list for these cables is provided in Table H 4 An I O cable assembly similar to IC693CBL311 and IC693CBL319 but with the dr
143. the power supply such as 30 watts for this calculation because the application may not require the full capacity of the power supply If you are using the 24VDC output on the power supply s terminal strip you should calculate the power drawn divide the value by 2 and add it to the total for the power supply Since each Series 90 30 rack has its own power supply each rack should be calculated on an individual basis Step 3 Output Calculations for Discrete Output Modules 03560 Discrete solid state Output modules require two calculations one for the module s signal level circuits which was already done in Step 1 and one for the output circuits This output circuit calculation is not required for the Relay Output modules Since the solid state output switching devices in these modules will drop a measurable amount of voltage their power dissipation can be calculated Note that the power dissipated by the output circuits comes from a separate power source so it is not included in the figure used to calculate PLC power supply dissipation in Step 2 To calculate output circuit power dissipation m Inthe Series 90 30 I O Module Specifications Manual GFK 0898 find the value for the Output Voltage Drop for your particular module m Obtain the required current value for each device such as a relay pilot light solenoid etc connected to an output point on the module and estimate its percent of on time To obtain the cu
144. the system has more than one baseplate Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 f PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER BASE 5 SLOT USER PROGRAM AND REGISTER VALUES MAY BE LOST IF POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN 1 HOUR 000000000000 20 0202 0 Bus Expansion Connector 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 Memory Backup Warning Label Power Supply o CPU Slot Slot 1 Figure 1 1 Five Slot CPU Baseplate Next we ll add a power supply module It mounts in the unnumbered slot on the left end of the baseplate This slot has a unique connector that will only fit a power supply module Series 90 30 POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER NIGH CAPACITY 100 240 V 50 60 HZ 100VA 125VDC 50W OUTPUT 0 8A MAX Figure 1 2 Power Supply Module 03560 Chapter 1 Overview of the Series 90 30 PLC 1 3 1 4 Then add a CPU module A CPU module can only mount in baseplate slot 1 next to the power supply Slot 1 has a unique connector that will only fit CPU or special Option modules CPU331 Figure 1 3 CPU Module To finish we will add some I O modules to baseplate slots 2 through 5 A12345678 F B12345678
145. to about two minutes thereby reducing wiring costs and errors A complete assembly consists of a terminal block an I O Face Plate and a cable Terminal Blocks Terminal blocks have three rows of terminals arranged in three levels as shown in Figure H 1 These terminal blocks feature an easy to use captive screw rising cage type connection system Catalog numbers for the terminal blocks and the modules they can be used with are listed below Table H 1 TBQC Terminal Block Selection Table Catalog Use With Module Number These Modules Description IC693ACC329 IC693MDL240 Input 120 VAC 16 points IC693MDL645 Input 24 VDC Pos Neg Logic 16 points IC693MDL646 Input 24 VDC Pos Neg Logic FAST 16 points IC693ACC330 IC693MDL740 Output 12 24 VDC Pos Logic 0 5A 16 points IC693MDL742 Output 12 24 VDC Pos Logic ESCP 1A 16 points IC693ACC331 IC693MDL741 Output 12 24 VDC Neg Logic 0 5A 16 points 1C693 ACC332 IC693MDL940 Output Relay N O 16 points 1C693 ACC333 IC693MDL340 Output 120 VAC 0 5A 16 points This Terminal Block may be used with most I O modules that have up to 16 I O points can not be used with 32 point modules Jumpers may have to be added for details of required wiring connections refer to module specifications in GFK 0898 Cable Current Rating Each conductor in these 24 conductor cables has a current rating of 1 2 Amps If using these cables with a 16 point Output module with a high
146. type cable it is for use as the last cable IC693CBL302 on the link IC693CBL315 10 3 meter I O cable connects to For High Density 32 point I O Obsolete Use of the 24 pin connectors on the module The other end has stripped tinned and modules having dual 24 pin connectors IC693MDL654 IC693CBL327and labeled leads IC693MDL655 1C693CBL328 Two cables are required per module 1C693MDL752 IC693MDL753 IC693CBL316 3 1 meter serial cable with 9 pin D For connecting to modules with an RJ shell connector that connects to a 11 communications port Personal Computer s serial port The IC693CMM321 other end has an RJ 11 connector IC693CPU351 352 363 IC693DSM302 314 IC693CBL317 Special 10 3 meter APM T O cable APM modules connects between one of the 24 pin IC693APU301 connectors on the module and the IC693APU302s connector on the terminal block This cable is similar to IC693CBL311 except that its drain shield wire is brought outside of the connector Two cables are required per module IC693CBL318 Unused or inactive number IC693CBL319 3 1 meter APM I O cable connects APM modules between one of the 24 pin connectors on IC693APU301 the module and the connector on the IC693APU302 terminal block Two cables are required per module IC693CBL320 Special 3 1 meter APM I O cable APM modules connects between one of the 24 pin IC693APU301 connectors on the module and the IC693APU302
147. wiring and Discrete Output Module wiring physically separated from low level signal wiring such as connections to DC and Analog Input modules This can be accomplished by grouping separately where practical the following categories of wiring m AC power wiring This includes the AC input to the PLC power supply as well as other AC devices in the control cabinet m Analog Input and Output Module wiring This should also be shielded to further reduce noise coupling m Discrete Output Module wiring These often switch inductive loads that produce noise spikes when switched off m DC Input Module wiring Although suppressed internally these low level inputs should be further protected against noise coupling by observing these wiring practices Grouping Modules to Keep Wires Segregated If practical grouping similar modules together in the PLC racks can help keep wiring segregated For example one rack could contain only AC modules and a different rack only DC modules with further grouping in each rack by input and output types For smaller systems as an example the left end of a rack could contain Analog modules the middle could contain DC modules and the right end could contain AC modules Where AC or Output wiring bundles must pass near low level signal wiring bundles avoid running them beside each other Route them so that if they have to cross they do so ata right angle This will minimize coupling between them 03560 Ch
148. with as many as 93 other Genius devices automatically In addition to basic global data exchange the GCM module can be used for various applications such as Data monitoring by a personal computer or an industrial computer W Monitoring data from Genius I O blocks although it cannot control Genius I O blocks Peer to peer communications among devices on the bus Master slave communications among devices the bus emulates remote I O The Genius bus connects to the terminal board on front of the GCM module ENHANCED GENIUS COMM o x EI COMMUNICATIONS MODULE 7 2 8 3 SER 1 e 2 SHD IN SHD OUT SISISISISISISISISS SISISISISISISISISIS E 44A729182 016R02 OR USE WITH F Fi 1C693CMM301 302 Figure 8 4 Enhanced Genius Communications Module Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Status LEDs The LEDs on the front of the GBC indicate its operating status and should be on during normal operation OK Shows the status of the GBC module This LED turns on after power up diagnostics are completed COM Shows the status of the Genius communications bus This LED is on steadily w
149. with the supplied jumper strap which is installed at the factory If overvoltage protection is not required or is supplied upstream this feature can be disabled by removing the jumper strap from pins 3 and 4 03560 Chapter 4 Power Supplies 4 5 4 6 If you want to Hi pot test this supply overvoltage protection must be disabled during the test by removing the terminal strip jumper strap Re enable overvoltage protection after testing by reinstalling the strap A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 3 9 Frame Ground 1 4777 1 1 Jumper Strap Connects Overvoltage Protection Devices to Frame Ground 4 Screw Terminals on Terminal Board Figure 4 3 Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap Isolated 24 VDC Supply Output Connections The bottom two terminals of the power supply terminal strip provide connections to the Isolated 24 volt DC output which can be used to provide power for external circuits within power limitations of the supply If the Isolated 24 VDC supply is overloaded or shorted the Programmable Logic Controller will stop operation Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 DC Input Only Power Supplies IC693PWR322 Standard Power Supply 24 48 VDC Input The IC693PWR322 is a 30 watt output power supply designed for 24 VDC or 48 VDC nominal inputs It will accept an input voltage range from 18 VDC to 56 VDC Although it is capable of mainta
150. write the signal name for each point on the appropriate line as shown in the example in the figure Also on the front side of the front cover insert running vertically on the left edge of the insert is a color bar that identifies the type of module Blue DC Red AC and Gray Analog m Module Lens Cap Located on the top front of the module it covers the LED Light Emitting Diode status lights These are labeled in the following figure in two groups Al through A8 and Bl through B8 Since this is a figure of a 16 Point Output module there are 16 LED status lights The number of status lights on any given module is a function of the number of circuits points on that module If you compare these status lights to the connection diagram on the back of the hinged cover you will notice that the outputs on this module are in two groups labeled A1 A8 and 8 that correspond to the A and B rows of status LEDs Note the additional LED on the right side of the lens cap that is labeled with the letter F This is a blown fuse indicator light This letter F is present on all of the discrete I O module lens caps but is only functional on certain Output Modules that have internal fuses It only lights if an internal fuse is blown A table with a list of modules having fuses as well as other details about the status LEDs 1s provided in Chapter 13 of this manual Lens Cap 43082 gt 1234 5678
151. 0 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 CPU 352 SNP P1 P2 ON RUN Model 352 CPU 03560 CPU360 Catalog Number IC693CPU360 User Program Memory maximum Starting with firmware Release 9 0 240K Bytes Note Actual size of available user program memory depends on the amounts configured for the R and AQ configurable word memory types see below For firmware prior to Release 9 0 fixed size is 80K bytes Discrete Input Points I 2 048 128 bits S SA SB SC 32 bits each Register Memory R Starting with firmware Release 9 0 configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16 384 words with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32 640 words with Control version 2 2 For firmware prior to Release 9 0 fixed size is 9 999 words Analog Inputs AI Starting with firmware Release 9 0 configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16 384 words with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32 640 words with Control version 2 2 For firmware prior to Release 9 0 fixed size is 9 999 words Analog Outputs AQ Starting with firmware Release 9 0 configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16 384 words with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32 640 words with Control version 2 2 For firmware prior to Release 9 0 fixed size is 9 999 words System Registers for reference table 28 words SR viewing only cannot be referenced in logic program Shift Registers Yes Built in Serial Ports 1 uses connector
152. 0 522 0084 Milgray at 800 MILGRAY and Vantage at 800 843 0707 If none of these distributors service your area then contact Fujitsu Microelectronics in San Jose California USA via telephone at 408 922 9000 or via fax at 408 954 0616 for further information It is recommended that you order any necessary connector tooling with sufficient lead time to meet your assembly requirements for these connectors These tools are generally not stock items and can have significant lead times from distribution If you have any further questions about this Issue please feel free to contact the GE PLC Technical Support Hotline at 1 800 GE 1 800 433 2682 or International dial direct 804 978 6036 Pin connections with color codes are shown in the following table Cables are made of 12 twisted pairs wire size is 24 AWG 0 22mm Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables Table 10 9 Wire List for 24 Pin Connectors Pin Pair Wire Color Code Pin Number Pair Wire Color Code Number Al 1 BROWN Bl 7 VIOLET A2 1 BROWN BLACK B2 7 VIOLET BLACK A3 2 RED B3 8 WHITE A4 2 RED BLACK B4 8 WHITE BLACK AS 3 ORANGE B5 9 GRAY A6 3 ORANGE BLACK B6 9 GRAY BLACK 7 4 YELLOW B7 10 PINK A8 4 YELLOW BLACK B8 10 PINK BLACK A9 5 DARK GREEN B9 11 LIGHT BLUE 10 5 DARK GREEN BLACK B10 11 LIGHT BLUE BLACK All 6 DARK BLUE Bll 12 LIGHT GREEN
153. 0 Slot Expansion 1 3 8 Figure 3 8 IC693CHS399 5 Slot Remote Baseplate essent 3 9 Figure 3 9 IC693CHS393 10 Slot Remote Baseplate eesssssesssseseeeeeeeneneneennen nennen 3 9 Figure 3 10 I O Bus Expansion 3 10 xxiv Series 901TV 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Figure 4 11 Figure 4 12 Figure 4 13 Figure 4 14 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 03560 Contents Rack Number Selection Switch Shown with Rack 2 3 13 Example of Connecting Expansion Baseplates ccsccsssessseeeceeeseeeneceeeeseeeeseesseeseeneeesees 3 14 Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates sese 3 15 Model 311 and 313 5 Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements 3 16 Model 323 10 Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing 3 17 Modul
154. 0 State Logic Processor Module Description The State Logic Processor Module SLP installs in a Series 90 30 PLC ladder logic control system to provide real time multi tasking control for machine and process applications It can be programmed to perform computations data acquisition data communications and operator interface functions Also the SLP module can provide machine or process simulation capabilities to Series 90 30 PLC ladder logic control system to help reduce debug and startup times This dual processor architecture allows a user to create both ladder logic and state logic application programs in any combination for efficient parallel processing solutions The SLP is programmed using the English Control Language Programming System ECLiPS software package It communicates with the PLC CPU over the backplane and can access user and system data Many SLPs can be supported in a single Series 90 30 PLC system and each SLP can support up to 512 inputs and 512 outputs STATE LOGIC PROCESSOR jo 900000000000 Figure 9 3 IC693SLP300 State Logic Processor Module for Series 90 30 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 SLP Features Memory Installation 03560 Natural English Language Programming using ECLiPS Structured State Logic program architecture Advanced Diagnostics Simulation
155. 0 bits Internal Coils M 1024 bits Output Temporary Coils T 256 bits System Status References S 128 bits S SA SB SC 32 bits each Register Memory R 2048 words Analog Inputs AI 128 words Analog Outputs 64 words System Registers for reference table viewing only cannot be referenced in user logic program 16 words SR Timers Counters 680 Shift Registers yes Built in Ports 1 uses connector on PLC power supply Supports SNP SNP X slave protocols Requires CMM module for SNP SNP X master CCM or RTU slave support PCM module for RTU master support Communications LAN Supports multidrop Also supports Ethernet FIP Profibus GBC GCM GCM option modules Override yes Battery Backed Clock yes Interrupts no Type of Memory Storage RAM and optional EPROM or EEPROM PCM CCM Compatibility Yes CPU331 03560 Chapter 5 CPUs 5 31 CPU340 Catalog Number IC693CPU340 Discrete Input Points I 512 only cannot be referenced in user logic program Built in Ports 1 uses connector on PLC power supply Supports SNP SNP X slave protocols Requires CMM module for SNP SNP X master CCM or RTU slave support PCM module for RTU master support Profibus GBC GCM GCM option modules es 5 32 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 03560 CPU341
156. 0726 State Logic Processor SLP Software Options Module ECLiPS English Control Language GFK 0732 OnTOP Troubleshooting Manual GFK 0750 AD693CMM301 Installation Configuration User s Information Data Sheet GFK 1529 State Logic Serial See also GFK 1056 Communications SCM Module 03560 Appendix G Catalog Number to Publication Cross Reference G 7 G 8 Publication Revision Letters When a GE publication is revised a letter is placed at the end of the publication number For example in the publication number GFK 0356Q the letter Q at the end indicates the version of the manual Manuals are revised when there are changes or additions to the products or product lines covered in the manual Since this is a continual process revision letters are not included in this appendix except in a few special cases Therefore when ordering these publications ask for the latest version Note Ifa publication number does not have an ending letter suffix such as GFK 1581 the publication has never been revised Other Sources of Information m GE InfoLink PLC CD This CD contains a collection of GE PLC manuals for Series 90 30 Series 90 70 Genius VersaMax etc m GE website This web site at http www ge ip com contains recently revised publications product revision histories and an online catalog Note The information in this appendix is based on Data Sheet GFK 1661 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware
157. 10 3 Example of Multidrop Configuration with Converter cc ccsceescssseeceeeeceeeeseceeeeaeeseeeneeas 10 10 Figure 10 4 Series 90 PLC to Programmer 8 Wire Multidrop Serial Data Configuration 10 11 Figure 10 5 PCM ADC or CMM to Workmaster or PC XT Serial Cable 10 12 xxvi Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Contents Figure 10 6 PCM to Workmaster Computer PC XT Personal Computer sees 10 13 Figure 10 7 PCM ADC or CMM to Workmaster or PC AT Serial Cable 10 14 Figure 10 8 PCM to PC AT Personal 10 15 Figure 10 9 PCM ADC or CMM to Workmaster or PS 2 Serial 10 16 Figure 10 10 PCM to Workmaster Computer or PS 2 Computer sese 10 17 Figure 10 11 Connecting Diagram for Multidrop Cable 690 7 4 10 19 Figure 10 12 Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90 30 Redundant System sess 10 20 Figure 10 13 Connecting CPU and APM to Programmer with IC690CBL 714A Cable 10 20 Figure 10 14 Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90 70 TMR Redundant 10 21 Figure 10 15 Detail of I O Bus Expansion Cables
158. 100 to 300 VDC This power supply provides three outputs m 5 VDC output m 24 VDC Relay power output which provides power to circuits on Series 90 30 Output Relay modules m Isolated 24 VDC which is used internally by some modules can also be used to provide external power for 24 VDC Input modules The load capacity for each output of this power supply is shown in the following table Table 4 2 IC693PWR321 Power Supply Capacities Catalog Load Nominal Number Capacity Input Output Capacities Voltage Power IC693PWR321 30 Watts 100 to 240 VAC or 5 VDC 24 VDC Isolated 24 VDC Relay 125 VDC 15 watts 20 watts 15 watts Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts IC693PWR321 us SYSTEM SERIES 90 30 INDICATORS OBATT STANDARD 7 POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER INPUT 100 240 VAC 50 60 2 90 VA n J 125 50W source J v INTERNAL u ot rl POWER SOURCE FOR 24 VDC MODULES REQUIRING OUTPUT _0 8A LITHIUM BACK UP BATTERY Figure 4 1 Standard AC DC Input Power Supply IC693PWR321 RS 485 COMPATIBLE SERIAL PORT BATTERY CONNECTORS Power supplies must be installed in the leftmost slot in all baseplates
159. 12 1 and are towards the top of the module faceplate 10 54 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables Top of I O Faceplate t Pin A1 12 Pin B12 Figure 10 34 Connector Orientation on I O Faceplate Je a A12 I Length B1 A1 B1 B12 B12 IC693CBL321 3 feet 1 meter IC693CBL322 6 feet 2 meters IC693CBL323 1 5 feet 0 5 meter Length is measured from backs of connector shells as shown above Figure 10 35 1 0 Faceplate to Terminal Block Cable Connector Depth The following illustration shows the space required in front of the PLC when this cable is connected to a module The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should allow for the depth added by this connector GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 55 PLC Side View 1 5 2 5 Typical Figure 10 36 Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC 10 56 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables 1C693CBL327 328 I O Interface Cables with Right Angle 24 Pin Connector Note These cables replace obsolete I O Interface cable IC693CBL315 These replacement cables have right angle connectors to reduce the clearance space required in front of the PLC These replacement cables use the same pin outs as the obsolete cables Description These cables each have a right angle 24
160. 12 12 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 System Design and Layout Catalog 24 VDC Relay 24 VDC Number Description 5 VDC Power Isolated IC693BEM320 Link Interface Module slave 205 IC693BEM321 Link Interface Master Module w o optical adapter 415 with Optical Adapter 615 IC693BEM330 FIP Remote I O Scanner 609 IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Controller 300 IC693BEM340 FIP Bus Controller maximum 12 typical 800 IC693CHS391 10 slot Modular CPU Baseplate 250 IC693CHS392 10 slot Expansion Baseplate 150 IC693CHS393 10 slot Remote Baseplate 460 IC693CHS397 5 slot Modular CPU Baseplate 270 IC693CHS398 5 slot Expansion Baseplate 170 IC693CHS399 5 slot Remote Baseplate 480 IC693CMM301 Genius Communications Module 200 1C693CMM302 Enhanced Genius Communications Module 300 IC693CMM311 Communications Control Module 400 1C693CMM321 Ethernet Interface Module 750 IC693CPU31 Series 90 30 5 Slot Embedded CPU Baseplate 410 IC693CPU313 Series 90 30 5 Slot Embedded CPU Baseplate 430 IC693CPU323 Series 90 30 10 Slot Embedded CPU Baseplate 430 IC693CPU33 CPU Model 331 350 IC693CPU340 CPU Model 340 490 IC693CPU34 CPU Model 341 490 IC693CPU350 CPU Model 350 6
161. 15 Atmel AT27C256 15DC1 Toshiba TC57256AD 15 Hitachi HN27C256AG 15 AMD AM27C256 150DC Intel TD27C256A 1 Flash Memory The Model 340 341 later versions 350 351 352 360 363 364 and 374 CPUs have Flash memory for user program storage Note that versions of the Model 341 CPU prior to firmware release 4 61 had EEPROM memory The Read Write Verify process for user programs is the same for Flash memory as it is for EEPROM operations Flash memory operations Read Write or Verify are accessed from the Program Utilities Function menu or from another Program Utilities screen in the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro programming software 03560 Chapter 5 CPUs 5 9 Series 90 30 CPU Capacities 5 10 The following table describes the maximum capacities and operating features for the Series 90 30 PLC CPU models For State Logic CPUs see System Specifications for Series 90 30 State Logic CPUs in Chapter 9 Table 5 3 Series 90 30 CPU Capacities CPU311 10 80188 160 160 1K Bytes 6K Bytes no yt yt CPU Speed Input Output Register User Program Floating Model MHz Processor Points Points Memory Memory Point Maximum Math CPU313 80188 2K Bytes 12K Bytes no CPU323 80188 2K Bytes 12K Bytes no CPU331 80188 4K Bytes 16K Bytes no CPU340 80C188XL 19 9K Bytes 32K Bytes no CPU341 80C188XL 19 9K Bytes 80K Bytes no CPU350 25 80386EX 2048 2048 19 9K Bytes 32K Bytes yes CPU374 133 586 2048 20
162. 2 IC693PWR330 Supply Littlefuse 239 002 IC693PWR322 24 48 VDC Input 5A 44A724627 114 2 Bussman MDL 5 30 Watt Power Supply Littlefuse 313005 IC693PWR328 48 VDC Input 5A 44A724627 114 2 Bussman MDL 5 30 Watt Power Supply Littlefuse 313005 5A A IC693PWR331 24 VDC Input 44A724627 114 2 Bussman MDL 5 Littlefuse 313005 30 Watt Power Supply IC693TCM302 Temperature Control 2 N A Littlefuse 273002 Module 1 Mounted in clip Accessible by removing circuit board from module housing 2 Line fuse Mounted in clip accessible by removing module front 13 6 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Spare Replacement Parts Two kits IC693ACC319 and IC693ACC320 provide mechanical spare parts for Series 90 30 modules One covers I O CPU PCM and other modules the other is for power supply modules These kits provide parts such as module levers front covers cases etc The following table describes the contents of each kit Table 13 2 Spare Replacement Parts 1C693ACC3109 10 I O CPU PCM case lever Spare parts kit for I O CPU 10 Spring pins cap and PCM modules 2 PCM module front cover 2 PCM lens cap 2 CPU module case 1C693ACC320 qty 2 Power supply lever Spare parts kit for power qty 2 Spring pin for power supply lever supplies qty 2 Spring for power supply lever qty 2 Power supp
163. 2 the Series 90 PLC Serial Communications Driver User s Manual 8 34 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 1C693ADC311 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor ADC 03560 The Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module IC693ADC311 is a coprocessor to the Series 90 30 PLC CPU and is used in a CIMPLICITY 90 ADS system It performs CIMPLICITY 90 ADS display report and alarm functions when interfaced to an Operator Interface Terminal OIT The OIT can be a variety of GE devices a VT100 compatible terminal or IBM compatible personal computer running TERMF Communications with the Series 90 30 CPU is done over the PLC system backplane ADC311 BD OK COPROC usi P10K US2 P2 OK RESTART BATTERY Figure 8 21 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module ADC Features of the Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor include m Single slot module m Runs CIMPLICITY 90 ADS System software m 8 Mhz 80C188 microprocessor m High performance access to PLC memory m Real time calendar clock synchronized to PLC m Reset pushbutton three status LEDs m Soft Configuration No DIP switches or jumpers m Easy fill in the blank system building m Pop up windows pull down menus m Fifteen User definable function keys per screen m Printer logging to a serial printer Chapter 8 Option Modules 8 35 Multiple Alphanumeric Display Coprocessors ca
164. 2 CAN SUPPORT RS 422 RS 485 Figure C 9 Cable D RS 422 Twisted Pair J2 ff SW cts ISOLATED REPEATER CONVERTER BRICK 25 PIN FEMALE 000 000 f PIN PIN 245239 SD 2 3 RD 3 2 CTS 5 5 GND 7 4 SERIES 90 CMM 8 PORT 1 2 oR 2 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN MALE MALE FEMALE Figure C 10 Cable E RS 232 Converter to CMM Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Appendix IC690ACC90I Miniconverter Kit D Description of Miniconverter The Miniconverter Kit IC690ACC901 consists of an RS 422 SNP to RS 232 Miniconverter a 6 foot 2 meter serial extension cable and a 9 pin to 25 pin Converter Plug assembly The 15 pin SNP port connector on the Miniconverter plugs directly into the serial port connector on the Series 90 30 power supply Series 90 70 CPU or Series 90 20 CPU The 9 pin RS 232 port connector on the Miniconverter connects to an RS 232 compatible device a44985 RS 422 RS 232 PORT PORT Figure D 1 Series 90 SNP to RS 232 Miniconverter When used with an IBM PC AT or compatible computer one end of the extension cable plugs into the Miniconverter s 9 pin serial port connector the other end plugs into the 9 pin serial port of the computer The Converter plug supplied with kit is required to convert the 9 pin serial port connector on the Miniconverter to
165. 21 3217 4826 India Indonesia and Pakistan Technical Support Email support cn ip 2ge com China support jp ip 2ge com Japan support in io ge com remaining Asia customers Customer Care Email customercare apo ip ge com customercare cn ip ge com China GFK 0356Q RFI Standards The Series 90 30 PLC and its associated modules have been tested and found to meet or exceed the requirements of FCC Rule Part 15 Subpart J The Federal Communications Commission FCC requires the following note to be published according to FCC guidelines NOTE This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed in accordance with this instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The following note is required to be published by the Canadian Department of Communications NOTE This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian De
166. 25 pin port zi 24 RT pp 25 RD B 13 RD A 21 SD B 9 SD A 23 CTS B 11 CTS A 22 RTS B 10 RTS A 7 GND 1 SHLD To Other Slave Devices Maximum of 8 devices on a multidrop Figure E 5 Multidrop Configuration Connecting Devices with 15 Pin Ports and 25 Pin Ports 03560 Appendix IC690ACC903 Port Isolator E 5 9 200 1sn8ny jpnupjgy 274 0 06 81495 O9C 0 N4D Jojejos 34 uBnoJu jeusa xy BurAjddng 104 ajqey 9 3 aunbi4 Terminate at first and last drops only Master PLC Make connections Terminate at first and last ports only Make connections Slave Device inside D connector inside D connector RT 9 Twisted Pair A n RT 9 fie Twisted Pair 9 RT SD B 13 Ae ym 13 RD 5 SD B 13 Try m 11 RD B SD A 12 HH 12 RD A 8 8 SD A 12 H 10 RD A RD B 11 y 11 SD B 2 5 RD B 11 ty 13 SD B RD A 10 e 10 50 4 8 6 RD A 10 12 SD A RTS B 14 e Y 14 CTS B A ts 9 RTS B 14 CY 8 CTS B RTS A 6 e t 6 5 RTS A 6 15 CTS A
167. 3 feet long with 9 pin D shell to 6 pin RJ 11 connectors IC693CBL321 322 323 I O straight connector cables faceplate to terminal block 24 pins Obsolete 1C693CBL327 328 1 O right angle connector cables faceplate to stripped leads 1C693CBL329 330 33 1 332 333 334 I O right angle connector faceplate to terminal block 24 pin Includes information on cable kits IC693CBK002 003 004 1C693CBL340 341 PTM interface cables Connect between PTMPM module mounts in Series 90 30 baseplate and PTMIM board DIN rail mounted GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 7 IC647CBL704 Workstation Interface to Series 90 CPU SNP Port Cable Includes Instructions on Building Custom Length Cables Function of cable The serial Work Station Interface cable has a 15 pin D connector on one end and a 37 pin D connector on the other end This cable connects the CPUs serial port to the Work station Interface board installed in the programming computer through an isolated shielded twisted pair Cable Specifications Cable Length 10 feet 3 meters Connectors CPU Side 15 pin male D subminiature type with M3 screws and AMP hood 207908 4 or equivalent Programmer Side 37 pin male D subminiature type with 4 40 screws and AMP hood 1 207908 0 or equivalent AMP 207871 1 Kit includes two metric screws and two screw clips Cable Type 24 AWG 21 mm 30V computer grade Extra flexible construction recommended for short lengths Connecting the Ca
168. 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual Ladder Screens Contacts connections and coils displayed on the ladder screens that are ON passing power or energized are displayed in enhance brightness allowing the tracing of signals through the program Addresses that refer to physical input I and AI and output signals Q and AQ can be checked against module status lights voltages etc to verify that the hardware is working properly Configuration Screens Normally the following information is obtained from the system documentation However if they are not available the configuration screens can be used to determine e If the software configuration matches the actual hardware Sometimes while troubleshooting a module is installed in an incorrect slot by mistake This will create a fault in one of the two fault tables The correct configuration can be determined from the Configuration Screens e The memory addresses that a particular module is using Fault Tables There are two fault tables the PLC Fault Table and the I O Fault Table The fault tables can be viewed using the PLC programming software These fault tables will not report such things as a defective limit switch but will identify system faults such as e 055 of or Missing Modules System Configuration Mismatch e CPU hardware failure Low Battery e PLC Software Failure Program Checksum Failure No User Program PLC Store Failures S
169. 30 PLC and its associated hardware components were designed primarily for use in industrial applications which are in general exempted from FCC requirements The AC power supply in those early PLCs may not comply with FCC requirements in non industrial applications for conducted EMI on AC power lines In a situation where it was desired to satisfy the FCC requirements for non industrial applications a line filter was used in series with the AC power line input Later versions of the Series 90 30 PLC meet FCC requirements and do not require a separate line filter A line filter that satisfies the FCC requirements for non industrial applications is available from GE as part number 44A720084 001 Figure L 1 provides a wiring diagram for connecting the line filter in a Series 90 30 PLC L 1 a45627 POWER TERMINAL o o SUPPLY STRIP FILTER FILTER CASE AND ENCLOSURE SHOULD ALSO BE GROUNDED IF POSSIBLE NOTE Figure L 1 44 720084 001 Line Filter Connections to Series 90 30 Power Supply The equivalent circuit for the line filter is shown below This is provided in case you wish to specify or design a line filter as an alternative to the one mentioned above K 7 06 mH aN 9095 _ 3 uf 0033 pf enm ud Figure L 2 Equivalent Circuit for 44A720084 001 Line Filter ZEN Series 90 30 PLC Installation a
170. 330 High Capacity 120 240 VAC or 125 VDC input 30 watts total output DC Input Only Power Supplies m IC693PWR322 24 48 VDC input 30 watts total output m IC693PWR328 48 VDC input 30 watts total output m IC693PWR331 High Capacity 24 VDC input 30 watts total output Power Supply Feature Comparison 03560 The following table lists the features of the Series 90 30 PLC Power Supplies Table 4 1 Power Supply Comparison Catalog Number Load Capacity Nominal Input Output Capacities Voltage Power IC693PWR321 30 Watts 100 to 240 VAC or 125 VDC 5 VDC 15 watts 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts 24 VDC Relay 15 watts IC693PWR330 30 Watts 100 to 240 VAC or 125 VDC 5 VDC 30 watts 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts 24 VDC Relay 15 watts IC693PWR322 30 Watts 24 or 48 VDC 5 VDC 15 watts 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts 24 VDC Relay 15 watts IC693PWR328 30 Watts 48 VDC 5 VDC 15 watts 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts 24 VDC Relay 15 watts IC693PWR331 30 Watts 24 VDC 5 VDC 30 watts Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts 24 VDC Relay 15 watts AC DC Input Power Supplies IC693PWR321 Standard Power Supply 120 240 VAC or 125 VDC Input The IC693PWR321 is a 30 watt supply that can operate from an input voltage source in the range of 85 to 264 VAC or
171. 334 cables for additional information IC693CBK004 Cable kit Contains both the Used with Terminal Block Quick IC693CBL333 and IC693CBL334 19 0 5 m cables Used for 32 point I O modules having dual 24 pin connectors Connect TBQC assemblies See Appendix H for a module list and cable selection information See also the data sheet for the IC693CBL329 330 331 332 333 334 cables for additional information IC693CBL300 3 1 meter I O expansion cable To interconnect CPU expansion and interconnects baseplate expansion ports remote baseplates This is a Wye type cable for daisy chaining baseplates IC693CBL301 6 2 meter I O expansion cable To interconnect CPU expansion and interconnects baseplate expansion ports remote baseplates This is a Wye type cable for daisy chaining baseplates 1C693CBL302 50 15 meter I O expansion cable To interconnect CPU expansion and interconnects baseplate expansion ports remote baseplates Note This is a special type with built in This cable is identical termination resistors It is not a Wye to cable type cable it is for use as the last cable IC693CBL314 on the link IC693CBL303 Programmer serial cable to connect For Hand Held Programmer Hand Held Programmer HHP to serial IC693PRG300 connector on PLC Power Supply IC693CBL304 Wye cable for splitting out two serial For use with port connections from one module connector IC693PCM300
172. 3560 2 Model CSE311 CSE313 CSE323 Embedded CPU Baseplates The Programmable Logic Controller with a built in State Logic CPU is available in three models The CSE311 and CSE313 with built in CPU has 5 slots available for modules and the CSE323 with built in CPU has 10 slots available for modules Each baseplate also has a power supply slot The CSE 311 313 and 323 CPUs can be programmed in the State Logic programming language using the State Logic software products The State logic software products are also used to configure the Programmable Controller and communicate on line with the State Logic CPU for debugging and troubleshooting operations The CSE311 CSE313 and CSE323 communicate with I O modules smart option modules and Third Party modules across the PLC backplane Most of the available Series 90 30 discrete analog and special purpose modules are supported with Release 3 0 of State Logic Foreign or 3rd party modules are also supported A socket labeled PROGRAM PROM is provided to install an EEPROM or EPROM This option allows the control program to be stored ina PROM instead of RAM memory It also is convenient in that it allows the PROM to be copied for installation in multiple CPUs PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER E ATE Lore PU SYSTEM PROGRAM PROM PROM USER PROGRAM AND REGISTER VALUES MAY BE LOST IF POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN i HOUR 0000000000000 0000000000000
173. 3560 Chapter 8 Option Modules 8 13 8 14 Connectors The front of the module has the following connectors CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL2 9 pin male D connectors for two FIP bus cables A bus can be disconnected from the module without disturbing the continuity of the bus The second bus is a backup for the first bus its use is optional SYNCHRO Connector for a FIP synchronization cable It requires a mating connector such as Molex 39 01 4031 The synchronization capability is not used in a Series 90 70 PLC application ground The lug below the Synchro connector is used for the module ground wire provided The other end of the ground wire must be connected to the mounting bolt on the lower left corner of the baseplate and to chassis ground LEDs There are two pairs of LEDs at the top of the module The upper pair is for channel 1 and the lower pair is for channel 2 CD1 CD2 TEN1 TEN2 The green Carrier Detected LEDs indicate the presence of a carrier detect signal on their respective channels The red Transmission Enabled LEDs indicate the module is generating transmissions on their respective channels FIP Remote I O Scanner Documentation GFK 1037 Series 90 30 FIP Remote I O Scanner User s Manual GFK 1038 FIP Bus Controller User s Manual Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 1C693APU301 302 Motion Mate Axis Positioning Module APM 035
174. 356Q Components Connector Pin Orientation and Connection to Module Terminal Module Connector SC Terminal Pin A1234 5678 pe B1234 5678 Vo eris B1 De Lt A1 deu sues B2 f 2 bande B3 up 4 Be vista m A4 m Orel CY B5 10 zs 5 O Binet CYPRESS B6 N C PinA1 aaa A6 N C ovis ee B7 N C EREA AT N C 11 5 ei B8 12 I A8 19 5 B9 14 A9 15 us B10 Pin A12 16 cess A10 Pin B12 oe B11 18 A11 12 20 ov A12 Connector Pin Orientation Figure H 2 TBQC Faceplate Terminal Block Information Terminal block data sheets are found on the next several pages GFK 0356Q Appendix H Terminal Block Quick Connect Components 5 1693ACC329 TBQC Terminal Block Use with the following 16 point I O modules IC693MDL240 IC693MDL 645 IC693MDL646 245586 METER 1 100000 0200 2 2 AIBN E 1 y d j 1 x A T 1 1 M eeopooeeopeopeee oo wire size 14 AWG 2 10 mm Width 4 44 112mm gt Height all blocks 2 25 67mm Depth all blocks 1
175. 374 have always had hardware based floating point math capabilities due to the built in math co processor chip Starting with CPU firmware release 9 0 all of the other CPUs in the 350 364 CPU group were provided with firmware based floating point math capability Although there is a speed difference between the hardware based floating point math of the CPU352 and CPU374 and the firmware based type this will not be significant to many users For applications where faster performance is important the CPU352 and CPU374 are the best choice The floating point math instructions are explained in the Series 90 30 PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual GFK 0467K or later Flash Memory All of the 350 374 CPUs have built in Flash memory which serves two purposes m It provides non volatile storage of the CPU firmware m It gives you the option of storing program configuration and register data in non volatile Flash memory Two ways of using this memory are 1 to store an on board backup copy of user memory although we still recommend that you keep a separate backup copy of your complete program folder and 2 for running in a battery less scheme For details please see Chapter 6 Keyswitch All 350 374 CPUs have a keyswitch however some versions of the CPU firmware do not support all of the keyswitch features see the section Determining CPU Revision Levels earlier in this chapter These differences are described in this secti
176. 39 Hardware features 5 23 1C693CPU374 Data sheet 5 40 Hardware features 5 25 IC693CSE311 Index 7 Index Index 8 Data sheet 9 14 IC693CSE311 baseplate drawing 9 9 1C693CSE3 13 Data sheet 9 15 1C693CSE3 13 baseplate drawing 9 9 IC693CSE323 Data sheet 9 16 IC693CSE323 baseplate drawing 9 9 IC693CSE331 Data sheet 9 17 drawing 9 10 State Logic CPU 9 10 IC693CSE340 Data sheet 9 18 drawing 9 10 State Logic CPU 9 10 IC693DSM302 Digital Servo Module 8 17 module drawing 8 17 IC693DSM314 Digital Servo Module 8 20 module drawing 8 20 IC693DVM300 connections 7 14 module drawing 7 12 specifications table 7 13 valve driver module 7 12 IC693GCM301 Genius Comm Module 8 2 IC693PCM300 301 311 Prog Coprocessor 8 31 IC693PRG300 Hand Held Programmer 11 5 IC693PTM100 101 Power Transducer 8 40 IC693PWR321 power supply 4 2 IC693PWR322 power supply 4 7 IC693PWR328 power supply 4 10 IC693PWR330 power supply 4 4 IC693PWR331 power supply 4 13 IC693SLP300 module drawing 9 4 IC693TCM302 Temperature Contol Module 8 37 IC693TCM302 303 module drawing 8 37 Illustration of the DSM302 Module 8 18 Illustration of the DSM314 Module 8 21 Indicator lights relating to I O terminals 13 1 see LED indicators also 13 2 Inspection new system 2 1 Installation 32 Point modules 2 20 baseplate adapter bracket 2 8 3 20 baseplate model 311 313 3 16 baseplate mo
177. 3ACC377 TBQC H 13 IC693ADC311 Alphanumeric Coprocessor 8 35 IC693APU300 High Speed Counter 8 23 1C693 APU301 302 Axis Positioning Module 8 15 IC693APU305 I O Processor Module 8 27 IC693BEM320 I O link slave 8 24 IC693BEM321 I O Link master 8 25 IC693BEM330 FIP Remote I O Scanner 8 12 IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Controller 8 6 IC693BEM340 FIP Bus Controller Module 8 10 IC693CBK002 003 004 cable kits for TBQC 10 63 IC693CBL300 Cable I O Bus Expansion 10 22 IC693CBL301 Cable I O Bus Expansion 10 22 IC693CBL302 Cable I O Bus Expansion 10 22 IC693CBL303 Data sheet 10 33 IC693CBL304 Wye cable 10 35 IC693CBL305 use on CMM module 8 34 use on PCM modules 8 32 8 36 Wye cable 10 35 IC693CBL306 Cable 32 point I O 10 38 IC693CBL307 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q 03560 Cable 32 point I O 10 38 IC693CBL308 Cable 32 point I O 10 40 IC693CBL309 Cable 32 point I O 10 40 IC693CBL310 Cable 32 point I O 10 42 IC693CBL311 APM cable 8 16 Cable APM I O 10 45 IC693CBL312 Cable I O Bus Expansion 10 22 IC693CBL313 Cable I O Bus Expansion 10 22 IC693CBL314 Cable I O Bus Expansion 10 22 use with DSM302 8 17 IC693CBL315 Cable 32 point I O 10 49 IC693CBL316 use on Ethernet module 8 30 use with DSM314 8 20 IC693CBL317 APM cable 8 16 Cable APM I O 10 45 IC693CBL319 APM cable 8 16 Cable APM I O 10
178. 3CBL323 1C693CBL334 20 0 5 meter right angle I O cable Used with the Terminal Block Quick connects between the right 24 pin Connect TBQC assemblies See connector on a 32 point module or the Appendix for a module list and cable single connector on a TBQC faceplate selection information and the connector on the terminal block Replaces cable IC693CBL323 IC693CBL340 interface cable 19 0 45 meter Part of IC693PTM100 assembly This length Connects between PTMPM assembly includes PTMPM module Series 90 30 PLC module and the PTMIM interface module and PTMIM DIN rail mounted interface IC693CBL340 cable This cable also module available as separate item IC693CBL341 PTM interface cable 39 1 meter Part of IC693PTM101 assembly This length Connects between PTMPM assembly includes PTMPM module Series 90 30 PLC module and the PTMIM interface module and PTMIM DIN rail mounted interface IC693CBL341 cable This cable also module available as separate item IC693CBL803 3 1 meter redundant communications cable IC800CBL001 3 1 meter Digital Servo Command Used with DSM modules cable connects between a DSM module IC693DSM302 and either a digital servo amplifier ora IC693DSM314 digital servo axis terminal block See the DSM user s manuals GFK 1464 GFK 1742 for details IC800CBL002 10 3 meter Digital Servo Command Used with DSM modules cable connects between a DSM module IC693DSM302 and either a digit
179. 4 2 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Table 4 3 Specifications for IC693PWR321 Standard AC DC Input Power Supply Nominal Rated Voltage Input Voltage Range AC DC 120 240 VAC or 125 VDC 85 to 264 VAC 100 to 300 VDC Input Power Maximum with Full Load Inrush Current 90 VA with VAC Input 50 W with VDC Input 4A peak 250 milliseconds maximum Output Power 5 VDC and 24 VDC Relay 15 watts maximum 24 VDC Relay 15 watts maximum 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts maximum NOTE 30 watts maximum total all three outputs Output Voltage 5 VDC 5 0 VDC to 5 2 VDC 5 1 VDC nominal Relay 24 VDC 24 to 28 VDC Isolated 24 VDC 21 5 VDC to 28 VDC Protective Limits Overvoltage 5 VDC output 6 4 to 7 V Overcurrent 5 VDC output 4 A maximum Holdup Time 20 milliseconds minimum Chapter 4 Power Supplies 4 3 IC693PWR330 High Capacity Power Supply 120 240 VAC 125 VDC Input The IC693PWR330 High Capacity Power Supply is rated for 30 watts output For applications requiring greater 5V current capacity than is available with the standard supply IC693PWR321 this supply allows all 30 watts to be consumed from the 5V supply It can operate from an input voltage source in the range of 85 to 264 VAC or 100 to 300 VDC This power supply provides the following outputs 5 VDC output m 24 VDC Relay power output which provides power to circuits on Series 90 30 Output R
180. 422 SERIES 90 7 OR HOST RS 232 CABLE RS 422 CABLE RS 422 CABLE RS 422 CABLE RS 232 BRICK IS THE NICKNAME FOR THE i CABLE ISOLATED REPEATER CONVERTER BRICK 5 serIesoo SW cTs Figure C 5 Complex System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater Converter C 6 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 1C655CCM590 Converter Rules for Using Repeater Converters in Complex Networks When designing a complex multidrop network including PLCs and RS 422 repeater converters bricks the following rules apply Rule 1 When using a brick as a repeater port J2 should always be directed toward the host device and Port J1 should always be directed away from the host device The switch located on the side of the brick should always be in the center position ON The only case in which Port J1 is directed toward the host is when the brick is used as a converter RS 232 at the slave The switch is in the right position CTS Rule 2 If a Series 90 CMM slave device is located downstream of a brick set the configuration of the CMM serial port to NONE flow control with a 10 ms Modem Turnaround Delay Applies to CCM SNP and SNP X protocols only Rule 3 Do not place more than three bricks in a single communication path between the host and the slave devices GFK 0356Q Appendix 1C655CCM690 Isolated Repeater Converter C 7 Cable Diagrams The cable diagrams belo
181. 45 IC693CBL320 APM cable 8 16 Cable APM I O 10 45 IC693CBL321 Cable 32 point I O 10 54 IC693CBL322 Cable 32 point I O 10 54 IC693CBL323 Cable 32 point I O 10 54 IC693CBL327 Cable 32 point I O 10 57 IC693CBL328 Cable 32 point I O 10 57 IC693CBL329 Data sheet 10 62 IC693CBL330 Data sheet 10 62 IC693CBL331 Data sheet 10 62 IC693CBL332 Data sheet 10 62 IC693CBL333 Data sheet 10 62 IC693CBL334 Data sheet 10 62 IC693CBL340 341 Cable PTM interface 10 65 checking 10 66 connecting 10 65 Index Index data sheet 10 65 lengths 10 65 ordering information 10 66 picture 10 65 pin out list 10 66 1C693CHS392 figure 3 8 1C693CHS393 figure 3 9 remote baseplate 3 9 1C693CHS398 figure 3 7 1C693CHS399 figure 3 9 1C693CMM302 Genius Comm Module 8 4 1C693CMM311 Comm Coprocessor 8 34 1C693CMM321 Ethernet Interface module 8 29 IC693CPU311 Data sheet 5 28 figure 3 5 1C693CPU313 Data sheet 5 29 IC693CPU313 figure 3 5 1C693CPU323 Data Sheet 5 30 figure 3 5 1C693CPU331 Data sheet 5 31 1C693CPU340 Data sheet 5 32 IC693CPU341 Data sheet 5 33 IC693CPU350 Data sheet 5 34 Hareware features 5 18 IC693CPU351 Data sheet 5 35 Hardware features 5 19 1C693CPU352 Data sheet 5 36 Hardware features 5 19 1C693CPU360 Data sheet 5 37 Hareware features 5 18 1C693CPU363 Data sheet 5 38 Hardware features 5 19 1C693CPU364 Data sheet 5
182. 48 Note 3 Note 4 yes N E Maximum of 160 combined I O points Maximum of 320 combined I O points Configurable from 128 to 32 640 words in 128 word increments Depends on assigned values for configurable word memory R AQ AI Maximum is 240K Bytes CPU352 and CPU374 have hardware based floating point math Other CPUs have firmware based floating point math User Memory Addresses References Data in the Series 90 30 PLC programs is referenced by its memory address A reference indicates the way that data is stored in the PLC A reference specifies both a memory type and a precise location number within that memory type For example 100001 specifies address 1 in input memory R00256 specifies address 256 in register memory Difference Between a Memory Address and a Nickname The symbol is used to distinguish memory addresses from nicknames For example 117 or 1000017 is a memory address The similar term 117 it has no sign is viewed by the PLC as a nickname and could be used with most memory addresses For example if you had a motor in your plant called Infeed No 17 and it was commonly referred to as I17 by the people in your plant you might wish to use 117 as the nickname for the output coil Q11 that turns on that motor You are allowed to do so because the PLC can distinguish between the nickname I17 your nickname for memory address 011 and memory address 117 Se
183. 5 IC693MDR390 24 VDC Input Relay Output 8 In 8 Out 80 70 IC693PCM300 Programmable Coprocessor Module 65K 425 E IC693PCM301 Programmable Coprocessor Module 85K 425 IC693PCM311 Programmable Coprocessor Module 380K 400 IC693PRG300 Hand Held Programmer 170 IC693PTMI00 Power Transducer Module 400 IC693TCM302 Temperature Control Module 150 Refer to module specifications in GFK 0898 Series 90 30 I O Module Specifications Manual for more details Note that the model 350 364 CPUs do not support the A version IC6904CC9014A of the Miniconverter Power Supply Loading Calculation Examples Following are examples of calculations for determining the total load placed on a Series 90 30 PLC power supply by the Series 90 30 PLC hardware All current figures are expressed in milliamps Note that although each output is rated at 15 or 20 watts with the exception that the 5 VDC output for the High Capacity power supply is rated at 30 watts the total combined output can be no more than 30 watts The power required by external circuits connected to the 24 VDC Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 OUTPUT terminals on the power supply terminal strip should be added to the calculation 03560 System Design and Layout Example 1 Series 90 30 Model 323 Embedded CPU 10 slot baseplate Component 5V 24V Isolated 24V Relay IC693CPU323 Embedded CPU Baseplate nae NT i
184. 60 The Motion Mate is an easy to use intelligent fully programmable one axis IC693 APU301 or two axis IC693APU302 motion control module for the Series 90 30 PLC The APM allows PLC user to combine high performance control with PLC logic solving functions in one integrated system The APM can be configured to operate in either Standard mode or Follower mode When used in Standard mode it combines high performance motion control with PLC logic solving functions in one integrated system When used in Follower mode it provides high performance electronic gearing for continuous master slave applications The desired mode is easily selected by configuring a setup parameter in the configuration software AXIS POS o9 o9 Figure 8 10 Motion Mate APM Module The Series 90 30 and APM operate together as one integrated motion control package The APM controls axis motion and handles all direct communications to the drive and machine while the PLC automatically transfers data between PLC tables and the APM The PLC also provides a means for connecting Operator Interfaces which can control and monitor system operation An example of an APM servo system showing the hardware and software used to configure program and operate the system is shown below The APM can be installed in any Series 90 30 CPU expansion or remote bas
185. 60 IC693CPU363 IC693CPU364 IC693CPU374 03560 Chapter 5 CPUs 5 slot baseplate with embedded CPU 1K Byte Register Memory 5 slot baseplate with embedded CPU 2K Bytes Register Memory 10 slot baseplate with embedded CPU CPU module 10 MHz CPU module 20 MHz 32K Bytes User Program Memory CPU module 20 MHz 80K Bytes User Program Memory CPU module 25 MHz CPU module 25 MHz with two extra serial ports CPU module 25 MHz math coprocessor two extra serial ports CPU module 25 MHz CPU module 25 MHz with two extra serial ports CPU module 25 MHz with Ethernet interface CPU module 133 MHz 240K bytes User Program Memory with Ethernet communications 5 28 CPU311 Catalog Number IC693CPU311 PROGRAMMABLE 9 3 1 gt CONTROLLER c8 9 e BASE 5 SLOT WITH 9 9 e 9 0 9 e 9 o o o 8 CAUTION SYSTEM PROGRAM PROM PROM USER PROGRAM AND REGISTER VALUES MAY BE LOST IF PONER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN i HOUR POWER 1 2 3 4 O SUPPLY Total Baseplates System Discrete Input Points I 160 maximum combined inputs outputs Output Tempora Y System Status References S Regier Memory AR System Registers for reference table viewing only cannot be referenced in user logic program Shift Registers yes Built in Serial Ports 1 uses connect
186. 693CBL312 0 5 feet 15 meters continuous shield 1C693CBL313 25 feet 8 meters continuous shield Figure 3 10 I O Bus Expansion Cables Note The 3 foot cable IC693CBL300 can be used as a Wye adapter between custom built cables and Remote baseplates 3 10 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Differences Between Remote and Expansion Racks Basically Remote racks provide the same functionality as Expansion racks but with the longer distance 700 feet 213 meters verses 50 feet 15 meters for Expansion racks capability To minimize unbalanced ground conditions Remote baseplates have extra isolation circuitry Unbalanced ground conditions can occur when systems are located long distances from each other and do not share the same ground system However distance is not always the problem even racks that are mounted near each other can experience problems if the system is not grounded properly See Chapter 2 for grounding information The use of Remote racks requires a special consideration pertaining to scan time In order to operate at long distances the I O Bus runs at a lower clock speed compared to that used for Expansion racks when communicating with Remote racks which will have an impact on performance The impact will be relatively small for discrete I O and slightly more for other modules such as the High Speed Counter or Genius Communications Module The increase in time needed to c
187. 70 IC693CPU35 CPU Model 351 890 IC693CPU352 CPU Model 352 910 IC693CPU360 CPU Model 360 670 IC693CPU363 CPU Model 363 890 IC693CPU364 CPU Model 364 1 51A IC693CSE313 State Logic CPU 5 slot baseplate 430 ES IC693CSE323 State Logic CPU 10 slot baseplate 430 z IC693CSE340 State Logic CPU Module 490 IC693DSM302 314 Motion Mate DSM302 or DSM314 Module 800 1300 with external encoder IC693MAR590 20 VAC Input relay Output 8 In 8 Out 80 70 IC693MDL230 20 VAC Isolated 8 Point Input 60 IC693MDL231 240 VAC Isolated 8 Point Input 60 IC693MDL240 20 VAC 16 Point Input 90 IC693MDL241 24 VAC DC Pos Neg logic 16 Point 80 125 IC693MDL310 20 VAC 0 5A 12 Point Output 210 IC693MDL330 20 240 VAC 1A 8 Point Output 160 IC693MDL340 20 VAC 0 5A 16 Point Output 315 IC693MDL390 20 240 VAC Isolated 2A 5 Point Output 110 IC693MDL630 24 VDC Positive Logic 8 Point Input 2 5 60 IC693MDL632 25 VDC Pos Neg Logic 8 Point Input 40 IC693MDL633 24 VDC Negative Logic 8 Point Input 5 60 IC693MDL634 24 VDC Pos Neg Logic 8 Point Input 80 125 IC693MDL640 24 VDC Positive Logic 16 Point Input 5 120 IC693MDL641 24 VDC Negative Logic 16 Point Input 5 120 03560 Chapter 12 System Design 12 13 12 14 Catalog 24 VDC Relay
188. 702 This cable provides a direct RS 232 connection between the ADC and another serial device such as a Personal Computer This cable is not supplied with the module Please see Chapter 10 for details on this cable Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module Documentation See the following manuals for detailed information on Series 90 30 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Modules GFK 0499 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual GFK 0641 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual GFK 0487 Series 90 30 PCM Development Software PCOP User s Manual Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 IC693TCM302 303 Temperature Control Modules TCM 03560 The Temperature Control Modules TCM provides temperature control for up to eight channels The two TCM models are identical except for temperature range and resolution ratings see comparison table They have the following features Can operate in either open loop or closed loop mode Each channel has a thermocouple input and a relay output RTD input 12V common mode voltage capability Open and reverse thermocouple detection and reporting Out of tolerance temperature detection and reporting PRFES Power Run Fault gt 100004 J and Short LEDs 5 Output Status LEDs 1 8 TCM RID PWR Front Cover THE SEI Location of Fuse _ Io Behind Front Cover 2
189. 90CBL701 PCM ADC CMM to Workmaster PC XT 10 12 Bun ction GP Cae ue teo aed terae ex Dat cedi 10 12 Cable Specifications acd este tta a eofdem utet eed 10 12 Wirte e e p 10 12 PCM to Programmer Cable Installation eeeeeeeeeneen 10 13 IC690CBL702 PC AT to PCM ADC CMM Cable essen 10 14 Function of cables HEURE OH HERO A 10 14 Cable Specifications sieni isiin min RUDI PE 10 14 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 03560 Contents Wiring n EE REESE ds 10 14 PCM to Programmer Cable Installation eese 10 15 IC690CBL705 Workmaster II PS 2 to PCM ADC CMM 10 16 Function f cable ende rir op teg eet HE OR e Hg 10 16 Cable Specifications dsese tenait e I e e ede 10 16 Wiring dee ERGO e dede 10 16 PCM to Programmer Cable Installation eseeeeeneneen 10 17 IC690CBL714A Multidrop Cable 10 18 Purpose Get emeret eee tent ee 10 18 Specifications t eise e Qe aree OR OT E ee edd 10 18 IC690CBL714A Multi Drop Cable Wiring Diagram eee 10 19 Connection Diagrams for IC690CBL714A Cable sse 10 20 IC693CBL300 301 302 312 313 314 I O Bus Expansion
190. A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15 PIN D SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION FOR SERIES 90 70 PLCs CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771 THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11 GROUND POTENTIAL MULTIPLE UNITS NOT CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER SOURCE MUST HAVE COMMON GROUND POTENTIALS OR GROUND ISOLATION FOR PROPER OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM Figure 7 Workmaster Il Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection Note The cable connector for the Series 90 70 serial port must be a right angle connector in order for the hinged door on the module to close properly Refer to Table A 1 Connector Cable Specification Appendix A Serial Ports and Cables A 4 11 IC690CBL701 OR EQUIVALENT RS 232 RS 422 RS 422 RS 232 SHIELDED PAIRS CONVERTER MAKE CONNECTIONS IC690ACC900 INSIDE D CONNECTORS SLAVE STATION 2 3 WORKMASTER RS 232 2 PORT 5 8 9 PIN 6 MALE 4 5 7 1 25 PIN 25 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN MALE FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE RS 232 RS 422 PORT PORT LAST STATION POWER T5V NOTE SOURCE WHEN WIRING RS 422 485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THE FOR TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE CONVERTER oy INADAISY CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BE LOW MASTER CONVERTER SLAVESTATION LAST STATION PLC 15 PIN CONNECTOR SERIES 90 30 LOCATED ON POWER SUPPLY SERIES 90 70 LOCATED 5 ON THE CPU BOARD ALSO IT IS R
191. C Conn A IC690CBL714A Cable IC690ACC901 Serial Cable Figure 10 12 Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90 30 Redundant System Conn B Conn C to APM Comm Port Series 90 30 PLC Conn A IC690CBL714A Cable IC690ACC901 Serial Cable Figure 10 13 Connecting CPU and APM to Programmer with IC690CBL714A Cable 10 20 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables Conn B Conn Conn C PLCB PLCC EE nn IC690CBL714A Conn A Conn A RS 232 422 Converter Figure 10 14 Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90 70 TMR Redundant System GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 21 1C693CBL300 301 302 312 313 314 I O Bus Expansion Cables 10 22 Includes Instructions for Building Custom Length Cables Description T O bus expansion cables 1C693CBL300 301 312 313 314 called Wye cables have a single male 25 pin D connector on one end and a two headed one male one female 25 pin D connector on the other end as shown in A of the figure The 50 foot 15m IC693CBL302 cable has a single male connector on the CPU baseplate end and a single terminated male connector on the expansion baseplate end The 3 foot cable IC693CBL300 can also be used as a WYE adapter cable to simplify building custom length cables see the section Cable Application Suggestions
192. C690ACC903 Port Isolator E The IC690ACC903 RS 485 Port Isolator replaces the IC655CMM590 Isolated Repeater Converter also referred to as the Brick The device features 500 volts of isolation in a compact package servicing all IC693 IC697 and IC200 PLC product lines The product connects directly to an RS 485 serial port or though a short extender cable provided with the device The extension cable is intended for use in applications where direct connection to the port is obstructed by surrounding equipment or when it is not acceptable for the device to protrude from a PLC module The Port Isolator can operate in either single or multi drop mode which is selected by a slide switch on the top of the module The Port Isolator provides the following features Four opto isolated signal channels SD RD RTS and CTS Electrical compatibility with RS 485 Single or multi drop operation Input termination consistent with standard for serial channels A 5V DC DC converter for power isolation Hot insertion 1s supported 94 ay 2 Multidrop y witch e G gt TOP VIEW 2 6in lt lt 0 7i0 Figure E 1 RS485 Port Isolator 03560 1 Connectors The Isolator provides two connectors one 15 pin male D type PL1 and one 15 pin female D type PL2 RS 485 Connectors Pin Pin Name Pin Type Desc
193. CED GENIUS COMM MOTION MATE APM300 DSM302 VO LINK INTERFACE GENIUS BUS CONTROLLER ETHERNET INTERFACE TEMPERATURE CONTROL DISCRETE INPUT OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT OUTPUT HIGH SPEED COUNTER PROCESSOR GENIUS COMMUNICATIONS ENHANCED GENIUS COMM MOTION MATE APM300 DSM302 VO LINK INTERFACE GENIUS BUS CONTROLLER ETHERNET INTERFACE TEMPERATURE CONTROL System Design and Layout For location of FIP modules in baseplates refer to the applicable FIP module user s manual Chapter 12 System Design 12 19 Series 90 30 PLC Layout Example 0 Figure 12 3 Series 90 30 Example Layout 1 Series 90 30 PLC 10 slot rack 2 Wireway Wire Duct 3 Field device connection terminal block 4 Motor connection terminal block 5 Motor starters 6 Circuit board 7 Power supply 8 Control transformer 9 Fusible disconnect or circuit breaker 10 Control relays 12 20 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 System Design and Layout PLC Mounting Position Power supply load rating depends on the mounting position of the baseplate and the ambient temperature Recommended Upright Mounting Ori
194. CONNECTOR pi 1 2 0 INCH 0 INCH LABEL a Su PORT 1 PORT2 V IPCM COMM CABLE IC693CBL305 PIN 858 232 RS 232 RS 485 PIN1 25 PIN MALE 25 PIN FEMALE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Figure 10 25 Wye Cable Cable Specifications GFK 0356Q Cable Length 1 foot 0 3 meters 25 Pin Male Connector Crimp Plug Amp 207464 1 Pin Amp 66506 9 Solder Plug Amp 747912 2 25 Pin Female Connector Crimp Receptacle Amp 207463 2 Pin Amp 66504 9 Solder Receptacle Amp 747913 2 Connector Shell Kit Amp 207908 7 Separate Shell Amp 207345 1 Male Screw Retainer Amp 205980 1 Cable Type 27 conductor cable 28 AWG 09 mm with overall shield extra flexible Chapter 10 Cables 10 35 Wiring Information The following figure shows the pin configuration for each of the connectors on the WYE cable SHIELD RS 232 TD RS 232 RD RS 232 RTS RS 232 CTS SIGNAL GROUND RS 232 DCD SHIELD C PORT 1 R 232 TD C PORT 1 RS 232 RD C PORT 1 RS 232 RTS C PORT 1 RS 232 CTS NO CONNECTION SIGNAL GROUND PORT 1 R 232 DCD C PORT 2 9 485 SD C PORT 2 RS 485 RTS A C PORT 2 9 485 CTS PORT 2 TERMINATION CTS PORT 2 R 485 RD A MALE CONNECTOR RS 232 TD RS 232 RD RS 232 RTS RS 232 CTS OOOO SIGNAL GROUND RS 232 DTR RS 232 DCD RS 485 SD A RS 485 RTS A RS 485 CTS TERMINA
195. CTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION LINE BNOCOUNRAWNAOS 15 PIN CONNECTOR TO OTHER PLCs MAXIMUM OF 8 PLCs ON A MULTIDROP TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA RD SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CON NECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15 PIN D SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION FOR SERIES 90 70 PLCs CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771 THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11 CAUTION GROUND POTENTIAL MULTIPLE UNITS NOT CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER SOURCE MUST HAVE GROUND POTENTIAL WITHIN 7V FOR PROPER OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM FAILURE TO PROVIDE A COMMON GROUND MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO PLC COMPONENTS Figure 10 4 Series 90 PLC to Programmer 8 Wire Multidrop Serial Data Configuration GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 11 IC690CBL701 PCM ADC CMM to Workmaster PC XT Cable Note This cable was designed for use with older computers such as PC or XT types and would not likely be used for new projects Function of cable This cable provides RS 232 signal connections between the RS 232 port on a PCM ADC or CMM module and a serial port on a Workmaster computer or IBM XT or equivalent Personal Computer Cable Specifications Cable Length 10 feet 3 meters Connectors PCM ADC CMM Side 25 pin male D subminiature
196. Chapter 10 Cables has details on these cables m Build a custom length cable This is required if you need a cable longer than 10 feet 3 meters See the IC693CBL327 328 data sheet in Chapter 10 for details on building custom length cables 03560 Chapter 7 Input Output Modules 7 7 7 8 Analog Module Features Analog Modules have the following basic features refer to the following figure Removable Terminal Board You can remove the terminal board from the module in order to wire it if desired Then when you are finished wiring it you can easily reinstall it on the module However some prefer to leave it on the module when wiring If you ever need to replace a module you don t have to do any rewiring if your old terminal board is still in good condition Simply remove the wired terminal board from the old module and install it on the new module if it is good condition The terminal board screw terminals are also convenient points for measuring voltages while testing or troubleshooting Hinged Front Cover The cover is easily opened to access the terminal board connections For normal operation it is kept closed to protect personnel from accidentally touching a hot terminal Note in the following figure that the back side of the front cover insert contains a schematic diagram of the terminal board connections The module catalog number 1C693ALG391 in this example is printed the bottom of the front cover insert Th
197. Description This module provides two additional serial ports for a Series 90 30 State Logic PLC System A model 331 or 340 State Logic CPU is required OK RESTART O COMBINED SERIAL PORT PORT1 amp PORT2 Figure 9 1 AD693CMM301 State Logic Serial Communications Module OK LED The SCM turns on its OK LED after completing its start up internal self test procedure The OK LED remains ON as long as the module is functioning properly If the OK LED turns OFF while power is applied to the system turn OFF PLC power and make sure the module is properly seated in the baseplate Turn power back ON If the OK LED remains OFF when power comes back up it indicates a probable hardware failure in the SCM and it should be returned for repair The other two LEDs on this module are not used Reset Button Pressing the Reset pushbutton when the OK LED is ON re initializes the module However if the OK LED 15 off indicating a module failure pressing the Reset button will have no effect 9 2 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 2 Serial Connector The SCM front mounted serial port connector provides all of the connections for the two SCM serial ports Separate pins on this connector are assigned for Port 1 and Port 2 Both ports support RS 232 standard Only Port 2 supports the RS 485 standard A special WYE cable descri
198. Discrete Input Points I 2 048 Register Memory R Starting with firmware Release 9 0 configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16 384 word with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32 640 words with Control version 2 2 For firmware prior to Release 9 0 fixed size is 9 999 words Analog Inputs AI Starting with firmware Release 9 0 configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16 384 word with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32 640 words with Control version 2 2 For firmware prior to Release 9 0 fixed size is 9 999 words Analog Outputs AQ Starting with firmware Release 9 0 configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16 384 word with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32 640 words with Control version 2 2 For firmware prior to Release 9 0 fixed size is 9 999 words System Registers for reference table 28 words SR viewing only cannot be referenced in logic program Built in Serial Ports Three ports Supports SNP SNPX slave on power supply connector and RTU slave SNP SNPX master slave Serial I O on Ports 1 and 2 Requires CMM module for CCM PCM module for RTU master support Profibus GBC GCM GCM option modules Yes Floating Point Math Support Yes hardware based built in math co processor The CPU352 is supported by Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro programming and configuration software Release 7 00 and later releases and Control programming and configuration software Release 2 0 and later releases 5 36 Series 9
199. Ds on this module are not used and will always stay off Chapter 9 State Logic Products 9 5 BD OK CURRENTLY INSTALLED BATTERY CONNECTOR RESTART OPEN REPLACEMENT BATTERY CONNECTOR BATTERY PORTS 1 AND 2 SLP 300 Figure 9 4 State Logic Processor Module User Details Status Light Three Status LEDs exist on the SLP module The top LED see figure above indicates the condition of the module It will blink ON and OFF while the module is booting up then will stay ON during normal operation The bottom two LEDs are not used and will always be off Pushbutton See Caution note below before operating the pushbutton One pushbutton is provided Pushing and holding the pushbutton for less than 5 seconds will simply restart the user application program if it was configured to auto run at power up Pushing and holding for more than 5 seconds will reinitialize the module and require that the user application program be reloaded Pushing and holding the pushbutton for more than 5 seconds will reinitialize the module and require that the user application program be reloaded Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 2 A lithium battery IC697ACC301 is installed as shown in the previous figure This battery maintains user memory when power is removed Be sure to instal
200. E O 20 DIA 508 1 542 TYPICAL 130 l a 79 NOTE FRONT VIEW 1 20 IF THE CABLE IS USED ALLOW ABOUT 6 INCH HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE ON THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE RACK FOR ACCESS TO THE CONNECTOR 4 00 I ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING DIMENSIONS IN INCHES MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS REMOVABLE 5 59 gt TERMINAL 142 bo CONNECTOR FOR EXPANSION CABLE N HINGED SIDE VIEW DOOR Figure 3 17 Modular CPU Expansion and Remote 10 Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q Load Ratings Temperature and Mounting Position The power supply load rating depends on the mounting position of the baseplate and the ambient temperature The load rating with the baseplate mounted upright on a panel is m 100 at 60 C 140 F TTL Power supply load ratings with the baseplate mounted horizontally are m temperature at 25 C 77 F full load m temperature at 60 C 140 F 50 of full load 03560 Chapter 3 Baseplates 3 19 Baseplate Adapter Brackets for 19 Rack Mounting Two optional Baseplate Adapter Brackets allow a 10 slot baseplate to be mounted in a 19 inch rack Each baseplate installation requires only one of the adapter brackets Be sure to follow grounding instructions in Cha
201. E THE 15 PIN D SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION FOR SERIES 90 70 PLCs CATALOG NUMBERS 1C697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771 THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Serial Ports and Cables A IC690CBL702 OR EQUIVALENT RS 232 RS 422 RS 422 44507 RS 232 CONVERTER TWISTED SHIELDED SHIELDED PAIRS IC690ACC900 PAIRS PIN PIN IBM AT COMPATIBLE 2 DD 668 SERIES 90 PLC RS 422 PORT RS 232 PORT 9 PIN MALE FEMALE 25 PIN MALE 25 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN FEMALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE RS 232 RS 422 PORT PORT POWER SOURCE FOR POINT TO POINT CONNECTION 10 FEET 3 METERS ONLY CONVERTER POWER SOURCE BEYOND 10 FEET 3 METERS AND FOR MULTIDROP CONNECTION MUST BE EXTERNAL SOURCE t TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA RD SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15 PIN D SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION FOR SERIES 90 70 PLCs CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771 THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11 Figure A 4 IBM AT compatibles Personal Computer to Series 90 PLCs IC690CBL701 OR EQUIVALENT RS 232 RS 422 RS 422 a44508 RS 232 CONVERTER TWISTED SHIELDED SHIELDED PAIRS IC690ACC900
202. ECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON THE PLC IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINAL STRIPS TO OTHER TYPES OF CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION LINE SWAB 15 PIN 15 PIN TO OTHER PLC s MALE FEMALE 1 TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA RD SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15 PIN D SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION FOR SERIES 90 70 PLCs CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771 THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11 GROUND POTENTIAL MULTIPLE UNITS NOT CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER SOURCE MUST HAVE COMMON GROUND POTENTIALS OR GROUND ISOLATION FOR PROPER OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM Figure A 8 Workmaster Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection IC690CBL702 OR EQUIVALENT RS 232 RS 422 RS 422 RS 232 SHIELDED PAIRS CONVERTER MAKE CONNECTIONS IC690ACC900 INSIDE D CONNECTORS SLAVE PIN PIN STATION A 2 IBM AT 3 COMPATIBLE 2 3 RS 232 PORT 6 4 9 PIN 5 MALE 8 5 7 1 25 PIN 25 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN MALE FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE RS 232 RS 422 PORT PORT LAST STATION POWER 5 NOTE SOURCE WHEN WIRING RS 422 485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THE FOR TRANSMISSION
203. EM321 I O LINK Master Module The Series 90 30 I O LINK Master Module IC693BEM321 allows a Series 90 30 PLC to act as a master on a proprietary I O LINK The I O LINK is a serial interface which provides high speed exchange of I O data between the master and up to 16 slaves The master can receive 1024 discrete inputs from slaves and send up to 1024 discrete outputs HHP zz Power Mate CNC pu Master E Series 90 30 PLC VO Link Master LINK Figure 8 16 Example of I O LINK Master System Configuration The illustration above shows a simple I O LINK system a Series 90 30 PLC used as a master a Series 90 30 Hand held Programmer an I O LINK and one slave In the illustration the slave is a Power Mate CNC Other devices that can be used as slaves include the Series 90 70 PLC the Series 90 30 PLC the Series 0 CNC Connection Units and Operator Panels The module can be configured using a Series 90 30 Hand held Programmer HHP or the configuration software 03560 Chapter 8 Option Modules Any number of I O LINK Master Modules can be installed in a Series 90 30 PLC When there are multiple I O LINK Master Modules in the same PLC they must be on separate I O LINKs An I O LINK Master Module can be installed in any
204. Female Subminiature converter end 9 pin 15 pin or 25 pin depending on type of connector on your serial device D type Female Subminiature programming device end Catalog numbers are provided as suggestions only Any cable having the same electrical characteristics is acceptable It is strongly recommended that you use stranded wire Since it is sometimes hard to find a cable with the desired number of twisted pairs the Belden 9309 has an extra pair you may end up with a cable with extra pairs For distances over 10 feet the 5 volt DC logic power source must be provided externally by connecting an external power supply to the 5V and SG OV connections at the converter end of the cable The 5V pin at the PLC connector end of the cable must not be connected to the cable The 5V and SG connections from the external power supply must be isolated from its own power line ground connection Ensure that there is no connection between the external supply and the PLC except the SG cable connection GFK 0356Q Appendix IC690ACC900 Converter B 9 Appendix 1C655CCM690 Isolated Repeater Converter C Note This product is no longer available This appendix is for reference by those already using this product It has been replaced by catalog number IC690ACC903 see Appendix E for details This appendix describes how to use the Isolated Repeater Converter IC655CCM590 with Series 90 PLCs The following topics are covered in this ap
205. G 6 Other Option Modules ene nd eet e d e e ER e teet de Po G 6 Power Supply Modules ico tne eee heri rp ge fet G 7 Programming Device eie eines Pese cete se TU e a E Rae eene ea G 7 State Losic Products m eed ao dieti a dei G 7 Publication Revision Letters lessen eterne ene ener ener entrent G 8 Other Sources of Information G 8 Terminal Block Quick Connect Components eee eere e eene etna H 1 Terminal Block Quick Connect Components for 16 Point Modules H 2 Terminal Blocks aret oe ho e H 2 Cable Current Rating iiie nette de iE HR edic ge H 2 Cable Selection and Cross Reference H 3 Face Plate for 16 Point Modulles ccccccccccccscccessccesseceesseceeseecesseceesecesseeeeaees H 3 Plate Installation 5 32 OR He es H 3 Module Wiring Information H 4 Cable Informiatiomn em Le ere petente t teet a ee MR H 4 Connector Pin Orientation and Connection to Module Terminal H 5 Terminal Block Information sese eene enhn enne H 5 IC693ACC329 TBQC Terminal 1 6 IC693ACC330 TBQC Terminal Block esesseeeeeeenene nennen H 7 IC693ACC331 TBQC Terminal Block es
206. GFK 0823 for details on I O Link cables I O Link modules 1C693BEM321 Master 1C693BEM320 Slave Interface A03B 0807 K803 Equivalent to catalog 1 5 0 45 meter I O Link optical adapter to module cable See I O Link modules IC693BEM321 Master number 44C741558 publication GFK 0823 for details on I O IC693BEM320 Slave Interface 002 Link cables A66L 6001 T O Link fiber optic cable available in I O Link modules 0097 ten lengths Catalog number depends on IC693BEM321 Master Note xxxxx portion of the number depends on the cable length Lengths are 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 80 90 and 100 meters length For example the 10 meter cable s catalog number is A66L 6001 0092L10R03 See publication GFK 0823 for details on these length choices 1C693BEM320 Slave Interface IC647CBL704 Programmer serial cable to connect For GE Work Station Interface Work Station Interface board to the WSI boards serial connector on the PLC Power IC647WMI310 Supply IC647WMI320 IC690ACC901 Contains RS 422 to RS 232 For connecting a computer s RS 232 Miniconverter and cable kit miniconverter a 6 2 meter serial cable and a 9 pin to 25 pin adapter serial port to a PLC RS 422 485 serial port See Appendix F for details on this product IC690CBL701 Connects a PCM CMM or ADC Use with the following modules module to a GE Workmaster I or IC693PCM300 301 311
207. HAVE COMMON GROUND POTENTIALS OR GROUND ISOLATION FOR PROPER OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM Figure A 10 IBM XT Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection 03560 Appendix Serial Ports and Cables A 13 Appendix IC690ACC900 Converter B Note This product is no longer available This appendix is for reference for those already using this converter We recommend the IC690ACC901 as a replacement for most applications see Appendix D for details This appendix provides a detailed description of the RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter IC690ACC900 for the Series 90 Programmable Logic Controllers Features m Provides the Series 90 PLCs with an interface to devices that use the RS 232 interface m Allows connection to programming computer without a Work Station Interface board m Easy cable connection to either a Series 90 70 PLC or a Series 90 30 PLC m No external power needed operates from 5 volt DC power on the Series 90 PLC backplane m Convenient light weight self contained unit Functions The RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter provides an RS 232 serial interface for the Series 90 70 and Series 90 30 PLCs which have a built in RS 422 RS 485 interface Specifically it provides a serial connection between a Series 90 30 or Series 90 70 PLC serial port and the serial port on the programming computer without the need for a Work Station Interface to be installed in the computer The programming computer can be a Workmaster II computer or IBM PS
208. I O Cables sssssssssssssseseeeeeeenneeene enne nennen 10 40 Table 10 4 Wire List for 24 Pin Connectors ccccccccsscesseeeeeenccesceeeecscecsseceseeeseeeseecnseceseesseeeseeeeseeseeenes 10 43 Table 10 5 Catalog Numbers for 24 Pin Connector Kits cccccccesseesseeeneceseeeseeeseecneeesseeeseeeseeenseenseenas 10 46 Table 10 6 I O Cable Wire Coding for IC693CBL311 and 693 19 10 47 Table 10 7 I O Cable Wire Coding for IC693CBL317 and 693 320 10 48 Table 10 8 Catalog Numbers for 24 Pin Connector Kits esses 10 50 Table 10 9 Wire List for 24 Pin Connectors ccccccccsscesseeseeetseeseessceccecsaeceseeeseecseecneeceseeeseeeneesereesneeags 10 51 Table 10 10 Catalog Numbers for 24 Pin Connector Kits essere 10 59 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q Contents Table 10 11 Wire List for 24 Pin Connectors essent nnns 10 60 Table 10 12 TBQC Cable Cross Reference Table sss eene eene enne 10 63 Table 11 1 Personal Computer Interface Card Comparison Table sese 11 7 Table 12 1 Power Supply Feature Comparison Table sese nennen 12 6 Table 12 2 Maximum Number of Modules Per System esssesssseseeeeeeeeeee nenne 12 11 Table 12 3 Load Requirements in milliam
209. I O slot in any baseplate The maximum number of I O LINK Master Modules that can be installed in the CPU baseplate is six Restart Pushbutton The LINK RESTART pushbutton provides a convenient means of restart if a failure occurs Pushing the Restart pushbutton restarts the operation of the LINK Serial Port The front of the module has one 20 pin Honda type connector used for connection to the first slave on the I O LINK Signal levels are RS422 485 compatible Compatibility The Series 90 30 I O LINK Master Module is compatible with the following devices W Host CPU O Series 90 30 CPU models 311 313 321 323 331 and 341 release 4 4 or later and all versions of the CPU models 350 351 352 360 363 and 364 O Series 90 30 Hand held Programmer HHP E Programmer Hand Held Programmer Logicmaster 90 30 Programming Software Configurator release 4 5 or later VersaPro Software Control programming software Version 2 0 or later OO aca Logic Developer PLC software W Slave Units O Power Mate models A C D and E O Series 0 CNC Operator Panel Unit Connection Unit 1 Connection Unit 2 Series 90 30 PLC with 90 30 I O LINK Slave Module O Series 90 70 PLCs with 90 70 I O LINK Interface Module set up as slave Hunc 1 0 Link Master Module Documentation For detailed information on this module refer to GFK 0823 the Series 90 30 I O LINK Master Module User s Manual Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware
210. I industrial computer RS 232 serial port is a 25 pin D type male connector and the early model Workmaster is a 9 pin male connector Figure A 2 shows the serial port connector layout for both computers Table A 3 shows the pin numbering and signal assignment for both connector types a44522 WORKMASTER II WORKMASTER EARLY MODEL Figure A 2 Workmaster RS 232 Serial Port Connector Configuration Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 GFK 0356Q Table A 3 Workmaster RS 232 Serial Port Pins out TD memi p Receive Daa N Dep pat Curier E p NEN GEN rings jv D D 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 7 1 0 1 2 L3 TD RT CT GN DC DT 1 2 2 2 ES ESI 7 Serial Ports and Cables Workmaster 9 pin connector E TD RD CTS E oND DCD TD T CT GND DCD DTR Request to Send S Clear to Send NC Signal Ground 0V DIR Data Terminal Ready NC Not Connected For more information about the Workmaster industrial computer serial port refer to the following manuals GFK 0401 Workmaster II PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation GEK 25373 Workmaster Programmable Control Information Center Guide to Operation IBM AT XT Serial Port The IBM AT IBM XT or compatible computer s RS 232 serial port is a 9 pin D type male connector as shown in the figure be
211. IBM AT compatibles Personal Computer to Series 90 PLCS sess A 9 Figure 5 Workmaster or IBM XT compatibles Personal Computer to Series 90 PLCs A 9 Figure 6 Typical RS 422 Host to PLC Connection with Handshaking ese A 10 Figure 7 Workmaster II Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection eese 11 Figure 8 Workmaster Series 90 PLC Multidrop A 12 Figure 9 IBM AT Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection A 12 Figure A 10 IBM XT Series 90 PLC Multidrop A 13 Figure B 1 Front and Rear View of Converter eene enne enne B 2 Figure B 2 Typical Configuration with Series 90 70 PLC sess B 3 Figure B 3 Typical Configuration with Series 90 30 PLC essere B 4 Figure 4 RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter Logic Diagram B 6 Figure B 5 Location of Jumpers for User Options essere enne ener B 7 Figure C 1 Isolated Repeater Converter aan ar C2 Figure C 2 RS 422 Isolated Repeater RS 232 Converter Logic Diagram eee C 3 Figure C 3 Example RS 422 Isolated Repeater RS 232 Converter Connection sess C 5 Figure C 4 Simple System Configuration Using the Isolated C 6 Figure C 5 Complex System Configuration Using the Iso
212. LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE CONVERTER oy INADAISY CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BE Low MASTER CONVERTER _ SLAVESTATION LAST STATION PLC 15 PIN CONNECTOR SERIES 90 30 LOCATED ON POWER SUPPLY SERIES 90 70 LOCATED ON THE CPU BOARD ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON THE PLC IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINAL STRIPS TO OTHER TYPES OF J CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION LINE 15 PIN 15 PIN TO OTHER PLC s MALE FEMALE 1 TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA RD SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15 PIN D SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION FOR SERIES 90 70 PLCs CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771 THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11 GROUND POTENTIAL MULTIPLE UNITS NOT CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER SOURCE MUST HAVE COMMON GROUND POTENTIALS OR GROUND ISOLATION FOR PROPER OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM Figure A 9 IBM AT Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection 4 12 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Serial Ports and Cables A IC690CBL701 OR EQUIVALENT RS 232 RS 422 RS 422 RS 232 SHIELDED PAIRS CONVERTER MAKE CONNEC
213. M Series 90 30 PLC Series 90 30 PLC Serial Cable 4 000 Feet 1 219 Meters Maximum Length Shielded Twisted Pair Cable 7 500 Feet 2 286 Meters Maximum Length Series 90 30 PLC Series 90 30 PLC OJ CPU CMM CPU GBC Figure 1 10 Connecting PLCs Using GBC or CMM Modules 03560 Chapter 1 Overview of the Series 90 30 PLC 1 9 Chapter Installation 2 This chapter discusses installation details only Other information about the products such as hardware descriptions and specifications is covered in the applicable chapters Important Note Series 90 30 PLCs must be mounted in a protective enclosure The installation instructions described in this chapter apply to PLC installations that do not require special procedures for noisy or hazardous environments For installations that must conform to more stringent requirements such as CE Mark see GFK 1179 Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards Also see GFK 0867 GE Product Agency Approvals Standards General Specifications Receiving your Products Visual Inspection When you receive your Series 90 30 PLC system carefully inspect all shipping containers for damage that may have occurred during shipping If any part of the system is damaged notify the carrier immediately The damaged shipping container should be saved as evidence for inspection by t
214. M AND REGISTER AWG 12 or VALUES MAY BE i LOST IF POWER Larger Wire SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN 1HOUR POWER SUPPLY NS Alternate location Screw Star Lock washer for Ground connection Flat Washer Ring Terminal installed in tapped hole Paint Removed From Panel Here Figure 2 11 Baseplate Grounding All baseplates must be grounded to minimize electrical shock hazard Failure to do so can result in severe personal injury 2 12 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 All baseplates grouped together in a Series 90 30 PLC system must have a common ground connection This is especially important for baseplates that are not mounted in the same control cabinet Grounding 19 Rack Mounted Baseplates There are two Adapter Brackets used for mounting a 10 slot Series 90 30 baseplate to a 19 Rack Regardless of which of the two Adapter Brackets is used the 19 Rack should be grounded as per the instructions in System Grounding Procedures including Figure 2 10 For details on the Adapter Brackets see the Mounting a Baseplate to a 19 Rack section earlier in this chapter Nineteen Inch Rack mounted PLC baseplates should be grounded according to the guidelines in the Baseplate Safety Grounding section using a separate ground wire from the PLC baseplate as shown in the previous figure Fig 2 11 m fusing the Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket IC693ACC313 the ground w
215. MDL732 IC693MDL733 IC693MDL734 1C693MDL740 IC693MDL741 IC693MDL742 1C693MDL750 IC693MDL751 IC693MDL752 IC693MDL753 IC693MDL930 IC693MDL940 IC693MDL931 1C693DVM300 1 693 590 IC693MDR390 8 8 8 8 Discrete Modules Input 120 VAC Isolated 240 VAC Isolated 120 VAC 24 VAC 24 VDC Positive Logic 125 VDC Positive Negative Logic 24 VDC Negative Logic 24 VDC Positive Negative 24 VDC Positive Logic 24 VDC Negative Logic 24 VDC Positive Logic FAST 24 VDC Negative Logic FAST 24 VDC Positive Negative Logic 24 VDC Positive Negative Logic FAST 24 VDC Positive Negative Logic 24 VDC Positive Negative Logic FAST 5 12 VDC TTL Positive Negative Logic 24 VDC Positive Negative Logic Input Simulator Discrete Modules Output 120 VAC 0 5A 120 240 VAC 2A 120 VAC 0 5A 120 240 VAC Isolated 2A 12 24 VDC Positive Logic 2A 12 24 VDC Negative Logic 2A 12 24 VDC Positive Logic 0 5A 12 24 VDC Negative Logic 125 VDC Positive Negative Logic 1A 12 24 VDC Positive Logic 0 5A 12 24 VDC Negative Logic 0 5A 12 24 VDC Pos Logic Electronic Short Circuit Protect 12 24 VDC Negative Logic 12 24 VDC Positive Logic 5 24 VDC TTL Negative Logic 12 24 VDC Positive Negative Logic 0 5A Relay 4A Isolated Relay 2A Relay Isolated N C and Form C 8A Digital Valve Driver module 1 6A 24 VDC Discrete Modules Combination Input Output 120 VAC Input Relay Output 24 VDC Input Relay Output C
216. MDL752 IC693MDL753 lo esse secs ser BS 7 OOP OODOP P OOO QoOoO0 000 00 090 00 lee QoO0O000 000O000O00 000 Hosted per terminal one 14 AWG 2 10 mm Width 4 45 112mm Height all blocks 2 15 57mm Depth all blocks 1 7716 45mm A9 A10 11 A12 B10 en e09909999999999 TERMINAL BLOCK See Note 1 B Tm Figure H 9 1693ACC337 TBQC Terminal Block Note The common row terminals labeled with the letter C are provided for wiring convenience Their use is optional They are electrically isolated from the numbered terminals You may use them as is or jumper them to a numbered terminal Refer to GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual for wiring diagrams of the modules Mounting These terminal blocks are mounted on a standard user supplied 35 mm DIN rail GFK 0356Q Appendix H Terminal Block Quick Connect Components H 13 Appendix SNP Multidrop 1 SNP Multidrop Overview As used in this appendix the term SNP Multidrop refers to a system that allows a programmer called the master or host such as a personal computer running GE programming software to connect to two or more PLCs or intelligent Option modules called slaves via a single connection In this arrangem
217. Manager Manual GFK 1213 Series 90 30 FIP Bus Controller User s Manual GFK 1295 Using GE Control GFK 1385 GE Control Using the Sequential Function Chart Editor GFK 1411 Series 90 30 System Manual GFK 1464 Motion Mate DSM 302 for Series 90 30 PLCs User s Manual 03560 Appendix G Catalog Number to Publication Cross Reference G 9 G 10 Publication No Titles of Series 90 30 Publications Cited in this Appendix GFK 1466 Temperature Control Module for the Series 90 30 PLC User s Manual GFK 1541 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User s Manual GFK 1670 VersaPro User s Guide GFK 1868 CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Getting Started GEK 90486 1 Genius I O System and Communications User s Manual GEK 90486 2 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Appendix Al 03560 Terminal Block Quick Connect Components This appendix describes the optional terminal block components for Series 90 30 discrete I O modules This system is referred to as the Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC system The advantage of this system is that it allows the listed discrete I O modules to be quickly connected to TBQC terminal blocks In this system the TBQC terminal block shown below is snapped onto a standard DIN rail Then a factory made cable is connected between the terminal block s conn
218. Manual August 2002 03560 IC693APU305 I O Processor Module 03560 The I O Processor IOP module IC693APU305 for the Series 90 30 PLC provides direct processing of rapid pulse signals for industrial control applications such as Fast response process control W Velocity measurement W Material handling marking and packaging Direct processing means that the module is able to sense inputs process the input information and control the outputs without needing to communicate with a CPU During each CPU sweep the I O Processor communicates with the CPU through 32 discrete inputs 1 15 words of analog inputs AI 32 discrete outputs Q and 6 words of analog outputs AQ The AQ outputs can be used by the CPU program to set up timer values or send other controlling parameters to the I O Processor 245380 yo PROC 1002 MODULE 3 CFG C Q OK 1 0 PROC 1 2 MODULE 3 PROCESSOR 5 12 24 VDC PROCESSOR TTT IN9 OUT5 3 iN10 0UT6 IN11 OUT7 iN12 0UT8 1 8 0 02 5 1 4 1 0 Q 12 24 __ 5 8 0 5A 12 24 4 0A MODUL 44A729182 070R01 FOR USE WITH IC693APU305 Figure 8 17 1 0 Processor Module Chapter 8 Option Modules 8 27 6 28 The I O Processor is configured using the Series 90 30 Hand held Programmer Logicmaster 90 30 VersaPro or Logic Developer PLC s
219. Manual August 2002 03560 Publication No Titles of Series 90 30 Publications Cited in this Appendix GFK 0255 Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User s Manual GFK 0256 MegaBasic Language Reference and Programmer s Guide Reference Manual GFK 0260 Programmable Coprocessor Module Quick Reference Guide GFK 0293 Series 90 30 PLC High Speed Counter User s Manual GFK 0356 Series 90 30 PLC Installation Manual GFK 0402 Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro PLC User s Manual GFK 0412 Series 90 30 Genius Communications Module User s Manual GFK 0466 Logicmaster 90 Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0467 Series 90 30 20 Micro PLC Reference Manual GFK 0487 Series 90 PCM Development Software PCOP User s Manual GFK 0499 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual GFK 0582 Series 90 PLC Serial Communications Driver User s Manual GFK 0631 Series 90 30 I O Link Slave Interface User s Manual GFK 0641 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual GFK 0655 Series 90 PCM Support Software TERMF Quick Reference Guide GFK 0657 Series 90 PCM Development Software PCOP Quick Reference Guide GFK 0664 Series 90 30 Axis Positioning Module Programmer s Manual GFK 0695 Series 90 30 Enhanced Genius Communications Module User s Manual
220. Model 340 341 Combination Input Output Module Analog 5 5 slot baseplate 21 Model 331 40 341 79 4 Ch In 2 Ch Out 10 10 slot baseplate Programmable Coprocessor Module n a 4 4 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module n a 4 4 Communications Control Module n a 9 9 State Logic Processor Module n a Refer to the State Logic User s Guide GFK 0726 Genius Communications Module 1 1 1 1 Enhanced Genius Communications Module 1 2 2 2 High Speed Counter 4 5 10 slot baseplate 8 Model 331 79 32 Model 340 341 I O Link Interface Module 5 5 10 slot baseplate 49 79 I O Processor Module 2 5 slot baseplate 8 Model 331 64 4 10 slot baseplate 16 Model 340 341 Genius Bus Controller 2 8 8 8 Ethernet Interface Module Refer to the Series 90 30 TCP IP Ethernet Communications User s Manual GFK 1084 for details Motion Mate APM300 Module Refer to the Motion Mate APM300 User s Manuals GFK 0840 or GFK 0781 for details Motion Mate DSM302 Module Refer to the Motion Mate DSM302 User s Manual GFK 1464 for details Motion Mate DSM314 Module Refer to the Motion Mate DSM314 User s Manual GFK 1742 for details Temperature Control Module Refer to the Temperature Control User s Manual GFK 1466 for details Power Transducer Module Refer to the Power Transducer Module User s Manual GFK 1734 for details 1 The Enhanced Genius Communications Module and the Genius Communications Module can
221. Modules with Shield Grounding Requirements Figure 2 14 CPU 363 CPU364 or CPU374 Attaching Ground Wire Some of the Series 90 30 Option modules such as the FIP Remote I O Scanner IC693BEM330 and DSM modules IC693DSM302 and IC693DSM314 also have shield grounding requirements These modules come equipped with suitable grounding hardware Please refer to each module s user s manual for grounding instructions Appendix G contains a product to publication cross reference to help you identify the correct manual Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 General Wiring Guidelines 03560 In addition to the following wiring suggestions we strongly urge that you follow all wiring and safety codes that apply to your area or your type of equipment For example in the United States most areas have adopted the National Electrical Code standard and specify that all wiring conform to its requirements In other countries different codes will apply For maximum safety to personnel and property you must follow these codes Failure to do so can lead to personal injury or death property damage or destruction or both Color Coding Wires These color codes are commonly used in industrial equipment manufactured in the United States They are cited here as a reference Where they are in conflict with codes that apply to your area or your type of equipment you should follow your applicable codes instead
222. NECTORS USE METRIC HARDWARE SEE CONNECTOR SPECIFICATIONS Figure A 1 Series 90 PLC RS 422 Serial Port Connector Configuration GFK 0356Q Appendix A Serial Ports and Cables A 3 A 4 Table A 2 Series 90 PLC RS 422 Serial Port Pin out Pin Number Signal Name Description Shield No Connection No Connection ATCH Hand Held Programmer attach signal 5V 5V Power for HHP and RS 232 485 Converter RTS A Request To Send Signal Ground Signal Ground OV CTS B Clear To Send RT Terminating Resistor for RD RD A Receive Data RD B Receive Data SD A Send Data SD B Send Data RTS B Request To Send CTS A Clear To Send Signals available at the Connector but are not included in the RS 422 specification SD Send Data and RD Receive Data are the same as TXD and RXD used in the Series Six PLC A and are the same as and A and B denote outputs and A and denote inputs Termination resistance for the Receive Data RD signal needs to be connected only on units at the end of the lines This termination is made on the Series 90 PLC products by connecting a jumper between pins 9 and 10 inside the 15 pin D shell with the following exception For Series 90 70 PLCs with Catalog Numbers IC697CPU73 1J and IC697CPU771G and earlier the termination for RD at the PLC is implemented by a jumper between pins 9 and 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Workmaster Serial Port The Workmaster I
223. Note Used on older IBM XT or compatible personal IC693CMM311 computers computer IC693ADC311 IC690CBL702 Connects a PCM CMM or ADC Use with the following modules module to an IBM AT or compatible personal computer IC693PCM300 301 311 IC693CMM311 IC693ADC311 10 1 10 2 Series 90 30 Cable Cross Reference Catalog No Description Applications IC690CBL705 Connects a PCM CMM or ADC Use with the following modules module to a GE Workmaster II or IC693PCM300 301 311 IBM PS 2 or compatible personal IC693CMM311 computer IC693ADC311 IC690CBL714A Dual port multi drop cable Allows the Series 90 PLCs interconnecting of individual PLCs using SNP serial ports Connections are in a daisy chain configuration IC693CBK002 Cable kit Contains both the Used with Terminal Block Quick IC693CBL329 and IC693CBL330 3 1 Connect TBQC assemblies See m cables Used for 32 point I O Appendix H for a module list and cable modules having dual 24 pin connectors selection information See also the data sheet for the IC693CBL329 330 331 332 333 334 cables for additional information IC693CBK003 Cable kit Contains both the Used with Terminal Block Quick IC693CBL331 and IC693CBL332 6 2 Connect TBQC assemblies See m cables Used for 32 point I O Appendix H for a module list and cable modules having dual 24 pin connectors selection information See also the data sheet for the IC693CBL329 330 331 332 333
224. OF CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION LINE RS 422 MAKE CONNECTIONS INSIDE D CONNECTORS DCD DCD B RD A RD B SD A 15 PIN 15 PIN FEMALE MALE PLC 15 PIN CONNECTOR SERIES 90 30 LOCATED ON POWER SUPPLY SERIES 90 70 LOCATED ON THE CPU BOARD 15 PIN MALE TO OTHER PLC s If applicable TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA RD SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15 PIN D SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION FOR SERIES 90 70 PLCs CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771 THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11 GROUND POTENTIAL MULTIPLE UNITS NOT CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER SOURCE MUST HAVE COMMON GROUND POTENTIALS OR GROUND ISOLATION FOR PROPER OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM Figure l 2 Multidrop Cable Wiring Diagram Appendix I SNP Multidrop ToFirst Slave PLC To Second Slave PLC I 3 SNP Multidrop Examples Conn Conn C to APM Comm Port X Series 90 30 PLC IC690CBL714A Cable IC690ACC90 Serial Cable Figure l 3 Connecting CPU and APM to Programmer with IC690CBL714A Cable Conn B Conn B Conn C om om RS 232 422 Converter l Figure l 4 Multi
225. Once a new version of CPU firmware is released all new CPU modules will be sold with that version The Technical Support section of the GE Web site lists CPU revision histories matching version numbers to associated features See Chapter 13 for information on the GE Web site Users who could benefit from a new firmware release may choose to upgrade their CPU by installing new firmware Upgrades come in two formats depending on the type of CPU to be upgraded The CPU Firmware and PROM Configuration table in this chapter shows which type of firmware storage device each CPU has The two types are m EPROM For CPUs with firmware stored in EPROM the upgrade is done by replacing the CPU s EPROM chips s The upgrade kit contains new EPROM chip s update labels and installation instructions To upgrade the EPROM 1n an embedded CPU system the module in slot 1 must be unplugged to gain access to the PROM socket on the baseplate In the case of a modular CPU the CPU must be unplugged and disassembled m Flash For CPUs with firmware stored in Flash the upgrade is done by copying a new firmware file to the CPU s Flash memory An upgrade kit may be purchased from GE The upgrade kit contains the necessary files update labels and instructions This method does not require disassembling the module The file downloading is done either through the port on Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 03560
226. P network permits standalone configuration using Hand Held Programmer retains its network configuration through loss of power 8 12 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 permits I O forcing from the Hand Held Programmer detects and records input transitions supports FIP messaging services responds to an external synchronization signal can provide blinking or pulsed outputs can provide input filtering and chatter detection FIP Bus Interface The Remote I O Scanner communicates at a data rate of IMHz There are two versions of the FIP communications standard FIP and WORLD FIP A DIP switch on the module is used to select the version that will be used by the Remote I O Scanner The same communications method will then be used on both bus cables The DIP switch on the module must be set to the FIP position for the Remote I O Scanner to communicate with a Series 90 70 PLC Module Description The FIP Remote I O Scanner is a standard Series 90 30 PLC module that plugs easily into the backplane of the baseplate FIPCHS2 1 0 MHz lt LEDs O CD2 N N E L 1 FIP Bus Connectors c H A N N E L 2 Ss Y Synchro Connector N R E lt Lug for Ground Wire Figure 8 9 FIP Bus Interface Module 0
227. PAIRS 9 A IBM XT o B OR 00 WORKMASTER 00 B 00 SERIES RS 232 0 90 PLC PORT o RS 422 o CTS PORT 00 00 B o 5 0 ov 00 SHLD 00 0 MALE 25 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE RS 232 RS 422 PORT PORT POWER SOURCE FOR POINT TO POINT CONNECTION 10 FEET 3 METERS ONLY CONVERTER POWER SOURCE BEYOND 10 FEET 3 METERS AND FOR MULTIDROP CONNECTION MUST BE EXTERNAL SOURCE TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA RD SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15 PIN D SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION FOR SERIES 90 70 PLCs CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771 THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11 Figure A 5 Workmaster or IBM XT compatibles Personal Computer to Series 90 PLCs GFK 0356Q Appendix A Serial Ports and Cables A 9 RS 422 Point to Point Connection If your host device is equipped with a RS 422 card you can connect directly to Series 90 PLCs as illustrated in Figure A 6 HOST PLC COMPUTER PIN 2 SHIELDED TVISTED PAIRS s PIN RD a ar or 71 sbp A e H 8068 SD A Ltt XX a Rb B SD B rd 9 RD Ld 11 6 RTS A CTS L1 Crete cane 8 A 15 CTS A RTS B X X d 3 GND RTS A 2
228. PLC Sends Global Data To Other CPU Places Global Data in these Memory Location Series 90 30 PLC Vol Q G R AI Memory type and beginning address are chosen during configuration of the receiving GBC Series 90 30 GCM 00 YQ G R AI Series 90 30 PLC GCM G memory location corresponding to Device Number 16 23 of the Series 90 30 GBC that sent the data Series Six PLC Register memory Beginning Series Six address selected during configuration of the Series 90 30 GBC that sent the data Series Five PLC Register memory Beginning Series Five address selected during configuration of the Series 90 30 GBC that sent the data Computer PCIM or QBIM Input Table Segment corresponding to Device Number of the Series 90 30 GBC that sent the data Receiving Global Data The GBC can be configured to receive or ignore Global Data from any other GBC The memory type and length for incoming Global Data are also selected during configuration The Series 90 30 CPU can place incoming Global Data in I Q G R AI or AQ memory Genius Bus Controller Documentation See the following manuals for detailed information on the Series 90 30 Genius Bus Controller and the Genius I O system GFK 1034 Series 90 30 Genius Bus Controller User s Manual GEK 90486 1 Genius I O System and Communications User s Manual W GEK 90486 2 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual GFK 0825 Field Control Distributed I O
229. Programmable Control Products GE Intelligent Platforms Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual GFK 0356Q January 2010 GFL 002 Warnings Cautions and Notes as Used in this Publication Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages currents temperatures or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment a Warning notice is used Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken Note Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment This document is based on information available at the time of its publication While efforts have been made to be accurate the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation operation or maintenance Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems GE Intelligent Platforms assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made GE Intelligent Platforms makes no representation or warranty expressed implied or statutory with respect to and assumes no responsibility for the accura
230. QC Terminal Block esses H 1 Figure H 2 TBQC H 5 Figure 3 10693ACC329 TBOC Terminal Blocks citer eee et Rein eei en tene a dude H 6 Figure H 4 IC693ACC330 TBQC Terminal Block hi hare eee br Lone es cii na Lou H 7 Figure H 5 16693460331 TBQC Terminal Block anta t e d idera aede is be Dara Lou pua H 8 Figure H 6 IC693ACC332 TBQC Terminal Block ierit pradesh sou eec d e H 9 Figure H 7 IC693ACC333 TBQC Terminal Block essere H 10 Figure H 8 IC693MDL654 32 Point sess H 11 Figure H 9 IC693ACC337 TBQC Terminal Block sees H 13 Figure 1 1 Series 90 30 Multidrop 1 essen enne enne enne enne nnne I 1 Figure 1 2 Multidrop Cable Wiring Diagram I 3 Figure 1 3 Connecting CPU and APM to Programmer with IC690CBL 7144 I 4 Figure 1 4 Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90 70 TMR Redundant System ess I 4 Figure 1 5 Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90 30 Redundant System see I 5 Figure J 1 IC649AEA102 Ethernet LOBASE T Transceiver eeseseeeeeeeeeneeneenneneere nennen J 1 Figure J 2 IC649AEA103 Ethernet LOBASE2 Transceiver eese rennen nennen J 2 Figure L 1 44A720084 001 Line Filter Connections to Serie
231. R PORT Pin 1 MAC ADDRESS LABEL FIRMWARE UPGRAD PORT SERIAL NUMBER LABEL Figure 8 18 Ethernet Interface Module 03560 Chapter 8 Option Modules 8 29 Four LEDs are located at the top of the board The Restart pushbutton is located immediately below the LEDs The RS 232 serial port with the RJ 11 connector is the Station Manager port The RS 485 serial port with the 15 pin D connector located below the Station Manager port is the module s Downloader port The 14 pin AAUI connector facing downward is the Transceiver port The Default MAC Address label is attached to the outside of the plastic housing Board Indicators There are four LEDs on the Ethernet Interface OK LAN SER and STAT These LEDs can be ON OFF BLINKING slow or BLINKING fast They indicate the state the Interface is in traffic on the Transceiver port and Downloader port and when an exception event has occurred Restart Button The Restart button serves four functions LED test Restart Restart and Reload and Restart and Enter Maintenance Utility The Restart button 1s inaccessible when the front cover of the Ethernet Interface 1s closed Serial Ports There are two serial ports on the Ethernet Interface the Station Manager Port and the Downloader Port The Station Manager Port This RS 232 port is used to connect a terminal or terminal emulator to access the Station Manager software on the Ethernet Interface This port us
232. ROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER BASE 10 SLOT EXPANSION _ 88 CLOSED Switch pushed down on right side Figure 3 11 Rack Number Selection Switch Shown with Rack 2 Selected Chapter 3 Baseplates 3 13 Expansion Rack Connection Example 3 14 The following example shows a system that includes Expansion baseplates PROGRAMMER CPU BASEPLATE SERIAL NOTE TOTAL MAXIMUM DISTANCE FROM CPU BASEPLATE TO LAST EXPANSION BASEPLATE IS 50 FEET 15 METERS DISCRETE ANALOG OPTION EXPANSION BASEPLATE V LA Y EXPANSION CABLES DISCRETE ANALOG OPTION XPANSION BASEPLATE V DISCRETE ANALOG OPTION EXPANSION BASEPLATE NOTE Each signal pair on the I O bus must be terminated at the end of the I O bus with120 ohm resistors This teination can be done with the I O Bus Terminator Plug IC693ACC307 by using the 50 foot 15 meter cable DISCRETE ANALOG OPTION IC693CBL302 with built in terminat ing resistors or by building a EXPANSION BASEPLATE cabtemrith the resistors installed MATE the connector at the end of the PLUG See NOTE bus 1C693ACC307 DISCRETE ANALOG OPTION Figure 3 12 Example of Connecting Expansion Baseplates Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q Expansion and Remote Baseplates Connection Example The following e
233. SE T 100 BASE TX cat 5 twisted pair Ethernet LAN cables Cables may be shielded or unshielded and direct or cross over Please note that the ports are connected to an embedded switch There is not a separate IP address for each port The LINK ACT LED on each port goes on when a network link is established and blinks when data is being transferred through the port The 100Mbps LED goes on if the network link has been established at 100 MBPS and goes off if the network link has been established at 10Mbps Shield Ground Connection Tab This tab is used to make the module s shield ground connection A wire with the applicable terminal ends is supplied with the module for this purpose Please see the section CPU363 364 and 374 Shield Grounding in Chapter 2 Installation for details Firmware Upgrade The CPU and Ethernet Interface firmware which is stored in Flash memory is loaded through the serial port connector on the PLC Power Supply using a personal computer that has been equipped with the loader and CPU firmware software Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q CPU Data Sheets This section provides data sheets describing each of the Series 90 30 CPU modules For information on the State Logic CPUs see Chapter 9 State Logic Products CPU Model List IC693CPU311 IC693CPU313 IC693CPU323 IC693CPU331 IC693CPU340 IC693CPU341 IC693CPU350 IC693CPU351 IC693CPU352 IC693CPU3
234. SHLD 1 pg 7 M 1 1 1 1 A qum IEEE UP TO A MAXIMUM OF 50 FEET 15 2 METERS WITHOUT ISOLATION gt TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA RD SIGNAL NEEDS TO CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES THIS TERMINATION IS ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15 PIN D SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION FOR 90 70 PLCs CATALOG NUMBERS 1C697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771 THE FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN Figure A 6 Typical RS 422 Host to PLC Connection with Handshaking Multidrop Connections In the multidrop configuration the host device is configured as the master and one or more PLCs are configured as slaves This method can be used when the maximum distance between the master and any slave does not exceed 4000 feet 1200 meters This figure assumes good quality cables and a moderately noisy environment A maximum of 8 slaves can be connected using RS 422 in a daisy chain or multidrop configuration The RS 422 line must include handshaking and use wire type as specified in the Cable and Connector Specifications section The following illustrations shows wiring diagrams and requirements for connecting a Workmaster II or IBM PS 2 Workmaster IBM AT XT or compatible computer to Series 90 PLCs in an 8 wire multidrop serial data configuration A 10 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual
235. SNP ID Communications settings may not match If the PLC s serial port communication settings and the programming software s communication settings do not match they will not be able to communicate These settings include such things as BAUD Rate Parity Stop Bits etc If you suspect this to be the problem try connecting directly to the PLC as described above in SNP ID may be incorrect If you cannot connect directly there may be a communication settings mismatch If so try setting the programming software to its default communication settings Multidrop may not be selected as the connection method The default connection method in the programming software is Direct which requires that you be connected directly to a PLC or module s programmer port If this default setting is not changed to Multidrop you will not be able to connect to a selected SNP ID over a multidrop system You may have a hardware problem Inspect the multidrop cable it may be wired incorrectly damaged or disconnected A wire may be loose on one of the connectors Also check the status of the PLC you are trying to connect to It may not be powered up it may be stopped or it may have some other problem Eliminate the PLC itself as a possible problem by connecting your programmer directly to the PLC s programmer port You should be able to communicate with a PLC using this direct connection even if the programming software is configured for Multidrop as long
236. TION CTS amp amp 6566000000690 000000 RS 485 RD A DUAL FEMALE CONNECTORS SHIELD 244157 85 232 TD PORT 2 R 232 CTS PORT 2 R 232 RD PORT 2 R 232 PORT 2 R 232 DCD PORT 2 R 232 RTS PORT 2 85 232 DTR PORT 1 85 485 SD B PORT 2 85 485 RTS B PORT 2 85 485 CTS B PORT 2 TERMINATION RD PORT 2 R 485 RD B PORT 2 PORT 2 2 Qo RS 232 DTR O RS 485 SD B RS 485 RTS B o RS 485 CTS B Qa TERMINATION RD RS 485 RD B Figure 10 26 Wye Cable Connections The WYE cable is 1 foot in length and has a right angle male connector on one end that connects to the PCM module The other end has a dual female connector with one connector for port 1 and the other for port 2 10 36 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables In order to use an RS 232 cable on port 2 of the Series 90 30 PLC either a special cable must be made following the serial port pin assignments shown above or a WYE cable must be used The WYE cable allows use of standard Series 90 70 cables IC690CBL701 702 705 for the PCM or ADC When installing the CMM module use the WYE cable in conjunction with cables that you build for the CMM module according to directions in Chapter 8 of GFK 0582 the Series 90 PLC Serial Communications Manual GFK 0356Q Chapt
237. TIONS IC690ACC900 INSIDE D CONNECTORS SLAVE STATION IBM XT COMPATIBLE RS 232 PORT BNA A ONCON250N 9 PIN 9 PIN MALE FEMALE 25 PIN 25 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN MALE FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE RS 232 RS422 PORT PORT LAST STATION 5V POWER m SOURCE WHEN WIRING RS 422 485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THE FOR TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE CONVERTER oy INADAISY CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BE LOW MASTER CONVERTER SLAVESTATION LAST STATION PLC 15 PIN CONNECTOR SERIES 90 30 LOCATED ON POWER SUPPLY SERIES 90 70 LOCATED ON THE CPU BOARD ALSO IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON THE PLC IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINAL STRIPS TO OTHER TYPES OF J CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION LINE 15 PIN 15 PIN TO OTHER PLC s MALE FEMALE TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA RD SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15 PIN D SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION FOR SERIES 90 70 PLCs CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771 THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11 GROUND POTENTIAL MULTIPLE UNITS NOT CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER SOURCE MUST
238. TOR SERIES 90 30 LOCATED ON POWER SUPPLY SERIES 90 70 LOCATED ON THE CPU BOARD ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON THE PLC IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINAL STRIPS TO OTHER TYPES OF IN J CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION LINE 15 PIN 15 PIN TO OTHER PLCs MALE FEMALE TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA RD SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15 PIN D SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION FOR SERIES 90 70 PLCs CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771 THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11 GROUND POTENTIAL MULTIPLE UNITS NOT CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER SOURCE MUST HAVE COMMON GROUND POTENTIALS OR GROUND ISOLATION FOR PROPER OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM Figure 10 3 Example of Multidrop Configuration with Converter The following figure is an example of the wiring configuration required when a Work Station Interface board is installed in the computer The 15 pin serial port connector for the 90 30 PLC is on the power supply the 37 pin serial port connector for Workmaster II and Workmaster computers is on the Work Station Interface board in the programming computer The cable type for these connections should be 24 AWG 22 mm
239. The maximum common mode voltage between each additional drop is the RS 422 standard of 7 Volts to 7 Volts The driver output must be capable of 2 V minimum into 100 ohms The driver output impedance must be at least 120 K ohms in the high impedance state The receiver input resistance is 12 K ohms or greater Receiver sensitivity is 200 millivolt Care must be taken that common mode voltage specifications are met Common mode conditions that exceed those specified will result in errors in transmission and or damage to Series 90 PLC components When the common mode voltage specification is exceeded a port isolator such as the IC690ACC903 must be used See Appendix E for details on this port isolator Cable and Connector Specifications The cable assembly presents one of the most common causes of communication failure For best performance construct the cable assemblies according to the recommended connector parts and specifications Table A 1 Connector Cable Specifications Series 90 PLC Serial RS 422 port with metric hardware Connector 15 pin male D Subminiature Type Cannon DA15S solder pot Hood AMP 207470 1 connector shell Hardware Kit AMP 207871 1 Kit includes 2 metric screws and 2 screw clips Workmaster II Serial RS 232 port with standard RS 232 connector Mating Connector 25 pin female D Subminiature Type Cannon DB25S solder pot with Connectors DB110963 3 hood or equivalent standard RS 232 connector Workmaster
240. UNTS TO PANEL MOUNT ON GROUNDED ENCLOSURE USE 2A USE 2 6 aa aoe er THREAD ROLLING SCREWS N666P13006B6 Figure 2 13 CPU 351 or 352 Mounting the Shield Grounding Bracket and Wire Note When the grounding bracket is used pin 1 of the cable connector that plugs into the Port 2 connector should not be connected A metal connector shell must be used on the cable for this port and the cable shield must be terminated at the metal shell instead of pin 1 of the connector 03560 Chapter 2 Installation 2 15 2 16 CPU363 CPU364 and CPU374 Shield Grounding The CPU363 CPU364 and CPU374 modules must be connected to frame ground at the slot where they are installed Each module comes with a grounding wire for this purpose These modules do not support or require the use of a grounding bracket If the ring terminal on the grounding wire is to be mounted to a painted surface remove the paint under the ring terminal to ensure good contact or place a star lock washer between the ring terminal and the painted surface See the next figure Note The star lock washer method is suitable for a shield ground but not suitable for a safety ground CPU363 CPU364 or CPU374 STAB ON CONNECTOR 6 TAPPED HOLE REMOVE PAINT UNDER RING TERMINAL OR INSTALL STAR LOCK WASHER BETWEEN RING TERMINAL AND BOTTOM OF CPU MODULE USE 1 6 MACHINE SCREW 44A735970 001R01 MOUNT ON GROUNDED ENCLOSURE Additional
241. WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION FOR SERIES 90 70 PLCs CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771 THE TERMI NATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11 Figure C 3 Example RS 422 Isolated Repeater RS 232 Converter Connection System Configurations GFK 0356Q The figures below show various ways you can connect the Isolated Repeater Converter to convert signals expand the number of drops and obtain greater distance Any system configuration can be reduced to a minimum number of cables each covering a part of the overall system configuration The following examples of system configurations refer to these cables as Cables A through E which are described in Cable Diagrams later in this section Downstream and Upstream Contention In this section simple multidrop configurations are those where a single Isolated Repeater Converter is used Complex multidrop configurations contain one or more multidrop sections where an Isolated Repeater Converter is included as one of the drops In both simple and complex multidrop configurations the transmitters directed downstream from the master can be on at all times There will be no contention for the communication line because only one device the master transmits downstream In simple multidrop configurations there will be no contention when transmitting upstream as long as devices tri state their drivers when idle and turn them on only when they have something to trans
242. When a discrete input device closes the corresponding input LED should light to indicate that the signal reached the module If the light does not turn ON a voltage check can be made on the module s terminal board or block m Ifthe correct voltage is present at the terminal the corresponding input bit can be checked in the PLC with your programming software If the software shows that the input bit is at logic 1 the module s LED circuit is defective m If the correct voltage level is not present at the terminal a check can be made at the input field device to determine if the device or interconnecting wiring is defective If none of an input module s inputs are working it may be that the external field input power supply is defective not powered up or not connected properly Input and output devices are powered from an external power supply not from inside the module Input modules are not fused so the Fuse Indicator LED in the previous figure does not apply to them Output Module LED Indicators When a discrete output address Q is turned on in the ladder program the corresponding output LED should light to indicate that the signal reached the module m If the light does not turn ON the module may be defective or the LED light may be bad m If the light turns on but the output device doesn t operate a voltage check can be made on the module s terminal board or block If the correct voltage level is present there the out
243. Wiring Schematic esee 8 3 Figure 8 3 Example of Genius Communications Network eese 8 3 Figure 8 4 Enhanced Genius Communications Module sess nennen 8 4 Figure 8 5 Genius Bus Controller Module seen nennen 8 6 Figure 8 6 Example of FIP I O System Configuration sees 8 10 Figure 8 7 Series 90 30 FIP Bus Controller enne nennen enter enne 8 11 Figure 8 8 Example of FIP Remote I O Scanner System Configuration sese 8 12 Figure 8 9 FIP Bus Interface Module esses 8 13 Figure 8 10 Motion Mate APM Module sss nne 8 15 Figure 8 11 Example of Motion Mate APM Servo System sssssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeee ene 8 16 Figure 8 12 Motion Mate DSM302 Module sse 8 17 Figure 8 13 Motion Mate DSM314 Module sse entente tnmen enne nnne 8 20 Figure 8 14 High Speed Counter HSC essent tnmen rne 8 23 Figure 8 15 Example of a Series 90 30 PLC in I O LINK Configuration eene 8 24 Figure 8 16 Example of I O LINK Master System Configuration sese 8 25 Figure 8 17 TO Processor Module nieto aeter cele tede te e e ie PH E aie 8 27 Figure 8 18 Ethernet Interface Module 8 29 Figure 8 19 Programmable Coprocessor Module PCM
244. a Integer Variables 250 Floating Point Variables String Variables Characters String Character Variables Characters Write Serial Protocols Tables Table Memory Bytes Timer Counters 100 Trace Size 100 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 CSE331 Catalog Number IC693CSE331 Clock us Distal TO d 0 Tasks 256 States per task 254 AT S oM R n a Floating Point Variables 497 Timer Counters Trace Size PID Loops 03560 Chapter 9 State Logic Products 9 17 CSE340 Catalog Number IC693CSE340 Total Baseplates per System 5 1 CPU baseplate 4 expansion and or remote baseplates Load Required from Power 490 milliamps from 5 VDC supply Supply Program Memory Tasks 256 States per task 254 T S oM R n a Floating Point Variables 497 Table Memory Bytes Timers Timer Counters 100 Trace Size 100 9 18 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Chapter 10 GFK 0356Q Cables The following table serves as a cable catalog number application cross reference Table 10 1 Series 90 30 Cable Cross Reference Series 90 30 Cable Cross Reference Catalog No Description Applications A03B 0807 K 802 Equivalent to catalog number 44C741558 004 33 10 meter I O Link module to module cable See publication
245. a new correction factor Also this method is affected by temperature changes so its success is based on holding the CPU s ambient temperature stable m If more accuracy is needed the PLC could be interfaced to a third party solution such as a radio link or Global Positioning System GPS satellite system Breakfree SNP Protocol Breakfree SNP became the default protocol on all serial ports on the Series 90 30 CPUs starting with Firmware Release 9 00 for CPUs 350 364 and Firmware Release 8 20 for CPUs 311 341 The breakfree feature makes the protocol compatible with a wider variety of modems This feature is compatible with existing SNP master units such as computers running PLC programming software or PCM modules In a few applications primarily where a combination of multi drop SNP communications and very short PLC sweep times are used users may desire for performance reasons to disable breakfree SNP Breakfree SNP can be disabled and re enabled via Communications Request instructions The Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User s Manual GFK 0582 documents these Communications Request instructions The 350 374 group of CPUs was developed to meet the needs of customers requiring increased memory size faster processing speed and additional features not available on the 311 341 CPUs Compatibility With Hand Held Programmer HHP and Memory Card m The user program in CPUs 350 374 cannot be viewed or edited with the Series 90
246. a revision level J Later CPU modules are produced with two revision letters such as IC693CPU351 EK The first letter stands for the hardware revision level and the second for the firmware revision level These letters can be cross referenced to the firmware version A revision history list for Series 90 30 products including CPUs can be found in the GE web site technical support area www ge ip com support that cross references revision letters firmware versions and related features Also if you have access to the progression of IPIs that were issued for the particular CPU these are available on the GE PLC InfoLink CD ROM you can find the desired cross reference Of course you can also contact your distributor or GE for help If your firmware has been upgraded in the past a small label that comes in the upgrade kit should be attached to the side of the module next to the module identification label to indicate the current firmware revision level However the label could have been forgotten so to be sure you may want to read the information from the CPU with a programmer as described in the Direct Method above On models with EPROM firmware the firmware revision level will also be printed on the EPROM EPROM and EEPROM User Program Storage Options The Model 311 313 323 331 and an earlier version of the Model 341 CPUs have a User PROM option for storing user application programs register data and configuration data in
247. ables Connector Pin Number Either End Signal Name and Function 1 VG Voltage Generator positive lead 2 IN Current Neutral positive lead 3 VA Voltage phase A positive lead 4 IA Current phase A positive lead 5 No Connection 6 VB Voltage phase B positive lead 7 IB Current phase B positive lead 8 Voltage phase C positive lead 9 IC Current phase C positive lead 10 Cable shield 11 No Connection 12 Frame Ground 13 No Connection 14 VG Voltage Generator negative lead 15 IN Current Neutral negative lead 16 VA Voltage phase A negative lead 17 IA Current phase A negative lead 18 No Connection 19 Voltage phase B negative lead 20 IB Current phase B negative lead 21 VC Voltage phase C negative lead 22 IC Current phase C negative lead 23 No Connection 24 No Connection 25 Frame Ground Documentation GFK 1734 Series 90 30 PLC Power Transducer Module User s Manual GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 67 Chapter Programmer Hardware Products 11 Products Discussed in this Chapter The following table lists the programmer hardware products discussed in this chapter Some of the items are no longer available but are documented here for the convenience of customers still using them 1C640WMI3 10 Work Station Interface WSI Board For Workmaster or IBM PC and compatibles IC640WMI320 Work Station Interface WSI Bo
248. age Select F2 CPU Configuration Put the software in the ONLINE mode Select F3 Assign PLC ID On the ASSIGN PLC ID screen the CURRENT PLC ID field will display an ID if the PLC has one If the PLC does not currently have an SNP ID this field will be blank In the OFFLINE mode it will display a series of asterisks Key in the new PLC ID For newer CPUs it may be from one to seven alpha numeric characters long For older CPUs it is limited to a maximum of six characters For example it could be APMO001 A1 B00001 etc Press the Enter key The new SNP ID will be written to the PLC and the CURRENT PLC ID field on your screen will update to show this new SNP ID Repeat the above steps for each PLC that is on the multidrop system If assigning an SNP ID to a module you must use the appropriate software See the user s manual for the module for instructions Connecting your Logicmaster Programmer to a PLC on a Multidrop System Connect your programmer to the programmer connection for the multidrop system From the Logicmaster Main Menu select F2 Logicmaster 90 Configuration Package Select F7 Programmer Mode and Setup Select F3 Select PLC Connections In the SELECTED SNP ID field enter the SNP ID of the PLC or device you wish to communicate with In the PORT CONNECTION field select MULTIDROP Press F6 setup to connect to the selected PLC You should connect to the select
249. ain shield wire disconnected from pin B12 and brought outside of the cable housing through an 8 pigtail is also available in two lengths Catalog number IC693CBL317 is 10 feet 3 meters in length and IC693CBL320 is 3 feet 1 meter in length This cable improves the Power Mate APM s noise immunity The cable wire code list for these cables is provided in Table 10 5 To make wiring to the drive and machine easier each connector on the module is typically connected by a short cable the I O Interface cable to a terminal block The cable that connects from the I O connector to an external terminal block can be shortened to meet the requirements of your installation See manuals GFK 0840 standard mode or GFK 0781 follower mode for details on APM terminal blocks E 1or3METERS um RES C WS flc Ts SS A V o oO 05 90 o 0 0 o 00 o 00 0 O Oooo Jo CD vo TERMINAL BLOCK ES CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Cable for 693 11 319 shown Cables IC693CBL317 320 have 8 external wire connected to drain shield Figure 10 30 I O Connector Cable Specifications Cable Length 10 feet 3 meters and 3 feet 1 meter 24 pin female Fujitsu part number FCN 363J024 crimp wire type Chapter 10 Cables 10 45 Wiring Information 10 46 You must purchase the mating female socket type 24 pin connectors which mate with the I O
250. al servo amplifier ora IC693DSM314d digital servo axis terminal block See the DSM user s manuals GFK 1464 GFK 1742 for details Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables Cable Data Sheets The next section of this chapter contains cable data sheets These are listed in numerical order by catalog number where possible However some data sheets cover more than one catalog number so some catalog numbers may be out of order Cable data sheets are listed in this order Cable Data Sheet Catalog Description Numbers Series 90 Multidrop 1C693CBL300 301 302 312 313 314 10 Bus Expansion cables continuous shield This data sheet also includes information on building custom length I O Bus Expansion Cables 1C693CBL303 Hand Held Programmer cable 6 feet 2 meters 1C693CBL304 305 WYE cables Port expansion cable s used with PCM 300 PCM301 PCM311 and CMM311 1C693CBL306 307 Extension cables for 50 pin connectors on high density I O modules 1C693CBL308 309 I O Interface cables for 50 pin connectors on high density I O modules IC693CBL310 I O Interface cable for 24 pin connectors on high density I O modules 10 ft 3 m Obsolete IC693CBL311 317 319 320 I O Interface cables for 24 pin connectors on APU301 302 IC693CBL315 I O Interface cable for 24 pin connectors on high density I O modules 10 ft 3 m Obsolete IC693CBL316 Station Manager Cable Serial cable
251. allation instructions on the following page Systems in which one leg of the power distribution wiring is tied to Protective Earth or a tap between two legs of the power distribution wiring 1s tied to Protective Earth are not Floating Neutral Systems Examples of Non Floating Neutral System L1 L L1 N N PE L2 PE PE These non floating neutral systems do not require these special installation instructions 03560 Chapter 2 Installation 2 25 2 26 Use These Special Installation Instructions for Floating Neutral Systems 1 The input power terminals should be wired according to the instructions in the AC Power Source Connections section of this chapter 2 The factory installed jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the Power Supply module must be removed if using one of the Power Supplies that have this feature See the Overvoltage Protection Devices section of the Power Supplies chapter for details 3 Voltage surge protection devices such as MOVs MUST be installed between the following terminals m From LI to earth ground m From L2 Neutral to earth ground The voltage surge devices must be rated such that the system 1s protected from power line transients that exceed Line voltage 100V N PE max The expression N PE refers to the voltage potential between neutral and Protective Earth PE ground For example in a 240 Volt AC system with neutral floating 50V above earth ground the transient protection
252. alled in installations with a Floating Neutral input Please see the section Special Instructions for Floating Neutral IT Systems later in this chapter for details 4 After all connections to Power Supply terminal board have been completed the protective cover plate should be carefully reinstalled 03560 Chapter 2 Installation 2 23 100 240 VAC 50 60HZ 90VA 100 240 VAC 50 60HZ 90VA Input Power 125 VDC 50W Input Power 125 VDC 50W Factory Jumper a E i 24 VDC Output For I O Modules 24 VDC OUTPUT 0 8A MAX Six Terminal Board Five Terminal Board OUTPUT 0 8A MAX 24 VDC Output E For I O Modules Figure 2 15 Power Supply Terminal Boards Power Supply Overvoltage Protection Devices The overvoltage protection devices for this power supply are connected internally to pin 4 on the user terminal board This pin is normally connected to frame ground pin 3 with the supplied jumper strap which is installed at the factory If overvoltage protection is not required or is supplied upstream this feature can be disabled by leaving pin 4 unconnected by removing the jumper strap Also this jumper must be removed and external surge suppressors installed in installations with a Floating Neutral input please see the following section Special Instructions for Floating Neutral IT Systems later in this chapter If you want to Hi pot test this supply overvoltage protection must be disabled
253. ammable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User s Manual GFK 0256 Megabasic Language Reference and Programmer s Guide Reference Manual GFK 0487 Series 90 PCM Development Software PCOP User s Manual GFK 0771 C Programmer s Toolkit for Series 90 PCMs User s Manual 03560 Chapter 8 Option Modules 8 33 IC693CMM311 Communications Coprocessor Module CMM The Communications Coprocessor Module IC693CMM311 provides a high performance coprocessor for all Series 90 30 modular CPUs cannot be used with embedded CPUs models 311 313 or 323 This module supports the GE CCM communications protocol the RTU Modbus slave communications protocol and the SNP protocol This module has two serial ports Port 1 supports RS 232 applications and Port 2 supports either RS 232 or RS 485 applications The module can be configured using the configuration software or by using a default setup Since both serial ports are wired to the module s single connector an IC693CBL305 Wye cable is supplied with this module to separate the two ports for ease of wiring A system with a 331 or higher CPU can have up to four CMMs in the CPU baseplate only 244902 OK US1 US2 RESTART COMBINED SERIAL PORT PORT1 amp PORT2 OOOOOOOOOOOO Figure 8 20 Communications Control Module Communications Control Module Documentation For more information refer to GFK 058
254. ams This section describes only a few of the many and various Point to Point and Multidrop serial port connections for Series 90 PLCs In the point to point configuration only two devices can be connected to the same communication line The communication line can be directly connected using RS 232 50 feet 15 meters maximum or RS 485 4000 feet 1200 meters maximum Modems can be used for longer distances Note The cable connector for the Series 90 70 and Series 90 30 PLCs serial port must be a right angle connector in order for the hinged door on the module to close properly Refer to Table A 1 Connector Cable Specification RS 232 Point to Point Connections The next three figures illustrate typical RS 232 point to point connection to Series 90 PLCs IC690CBL705 OR EQUIVALENT RS 232 RS 485 RS 422 244506 RS 232 CONVERTER TWISTED SHIELDED SHIELDED PAIRS IC690ACC900 PAIRS WORKMASTER RS 232 PORT 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE RS 232 RS 485 PORT PORT POWER SOURCE FOR POINT TO POINT CONNECTION 10 FEET 3 METERS ONLY CONVERTER POWER SOURCE BEYOND 10 FEET 3 METERS AND FOR MULTIDROP CONNECTION MUST BE EXTERNAL SOURCE TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA RD SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSID
255. an external transceiver and AAUI cable and to communicate with hosts and other control devices on the network The Ethernet Interface for the Series 90 30 PLC has client server capability As a client it can initiate communications with other PLCs containing Ethernet Interfaces This is done from the ladder program using the COMMREQ Function Block As a server it responds only to requests from other devices such as a Host computer running a Host Communications Toolkit application or another Series 90 30 PLC acting as a client The Ethernet Interface allows you to Directly attach your PLC to an Ethernet network Initiate transfer of data to the PLC from another device Communicate simultaneously to multiple devices with up to 16 server connections Interface with other GE devices as well as with devices from other vendors Communicate from a Host computer or other control device Diagnose and maintain your system using diagnostic and station management tools The Ethernet Interface does not support the Series 90 30 20 Micro Hand Held Programmer Either one or two Ethernet Interface modules can be installed in any Series 90 30 baseplate The Ethernet Interface connects to an Ethernet network through an external SQE enabled transceiver GE catalog no IC649AEA102 or IC649AEA103 or equivalent See Appendix J The following figure shows the layout of the Ethernet Interface CMM 321 LAN INTERFACE STATION MANAGE
256. ansion and Remote baseplates 1 8 The main factor to consider is distance How far will the baseplate be from the CPU baseplate If the cabling distance from the CPU baseplate is 50 feet 15 meters or less use an Expansion baseplate The Expansion baseplate is preferable because of its higher communication speed with the CPU baseplate However if a baseplate must be located where it requires a cabling distance from the CPU rack in excess of 50 feet an Expansion baseplate will not work a Remote baseplate must be used The limit for a Remote baseplate is a cabling distance of 700 feet 213 meters from the CPU baseplate to the farthest Remote baseplate Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 What if need to cover more than 700 feet 213 meters You can cover much greater distances by using Series 90 30 communications option modules For example Genius Bus Controller Modules GBC can communicate at distances up to 7 500 feet 2 286 meters over a shielded twisted pair cable as shown in Example 1 below Or serial communications with Communications Coprocessor Modules CMM using the RS 485 standard can cover up to 4 000 feet 1 219 meters as shown in Example 2 below And virtually unlimited communication distances can be attained with modems and telephone lines or radio transmitters Also there are numerous networking options available such as Ethernet or WorldFIP Example 1 GBC Example 2 CM
257. apter 7 Input Output Modules 7 11 IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver Module Indicator LEDs This 4 channel digital valve driver module is capable of driving loads of up to 1 6 Amps at 24 VDC Although it mounts in a standard Series 90 30 PLC slot it does not connect to the PLC backplane Its control power and output power come from an external supply The GE IC690PWR124 stand alone power supply would be a suitable choice This module is designed for TTL 5 VDC inputs OUTPUT 28V_1 6A max AUX OUT 15 AUX OUT 15 DIGITAL 1 IN ISI DIGITAL 2 IN DIGITAL 3 IN DIGITAL 4 IN DIGITAL RET VALVE 4 RET Figure 7 6 IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver Module m DIG CH 1 4 These light when their corresponding input is at a Logic 1 level m PWR Lights to indicate the presence of 26 VDC nominal input power on terminals 1 and 2 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 DVM Specifications Fuses 03560 Table 7 1 IC693DVM300 Specifications OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS Outputs Channels per Module 4 Isolation 2500 Vrms optical isolation Nominal Output Voltage 24 VDC Power Supply for Output Channels 26 VDC nominal 21 VDC minimum 35 VDC maximum Output Current 1 6 Amps maximum per channel 6 4 Amps maximum total per module Output Voltage Drop fully loaded 0 32 VDC Off state leaka
258. ar CPU Expansion and Remote 5 Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements ineo er exe bed erede oo WA cn Ri Leer ese Pe ee a a eden 3 18 Modular CPU Expansion and Remote 10 Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements te pr tee queri treat e need eti em P lead beats e end 3 18 IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation sese 3 20 Dimensions for 19 Rack Mounting Using IC693ACC308 Adapter Bracket 3 21 IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket essen 3 21 Standard AC DC Input Power Supply IC693PWR321 sse 4 2 High Capacity AC DC Input Power Supply IC693PWR330 4 4 Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper 1 4 6 Series 90 30 24 48 VDC Input Power Supply 693 22 4 7 Typical Efficiency Curve for 24 48 VDC Power Supply seen 4 8 Series 90 30 48 VDC Input Power Supply IC693PWR328 4 10 Typical Efficiency Curve for IC693PWR328 Power Supply seen 4 11 Series 90 30 24 VDC Input High Capacity Power Supply 693 4 13 5 VDC Current Output Derating for Temperatures above 50 C 122 4 14 Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap 4 17 Interconnection of Pow
259. ar CPU baseplate There can be only one CPU baseplate per system There are two types 5 slot and Chapter 12 System Design 12 5 10 slot If you only need a 5 slot size you may want to consider whether the extra slots that a 10 slot size provides would be advantageous for possible future expansion On the other hand the 5 slot size requires less space W Expansion and Remote baseplates These also come in 5 slot and 10 slot sizes In general it is best to use Expansion baseplates where possible instead of Remote baseplates because of the better speed performance of the Expansion baseplates Where a total cable distance of over 50 feet is required Remote baseplates must be used In cases where you only need a 5 slot size you may want to consider whether it would be advantageous to use a 10 slot size in order to have open slots for future expansion That factor should be weighed against the fact that the 5 slot size requires less space and costs less W Physical size For locations with size limitations one or more 5 slot baseplates may be a good choice See the Baseplates chapter for baseplate dimensions and clearance requirements W Number of Modules Required The number of modules needed at each location will have a bearing on the sizes of racks required You may choose to use a smaller rack 5 slot if possible to save cost and space However as noted below a larger rack 10 slot with unused slots will leave some room for future
260. ard For Workmaster II or IBM PS 2 and compatibles IC690ACC900 RS 422 485 to RS 232 Converter No longer available Use IC690ACC901 Miniconverter IC690ACC901 Converts RS 422 485 to RS 232 IC693PRG300 Hand Held Programmer HHP Used to configure and program Series 90 30 PLCS except for CPU374 IC693ACC303 Memory card for HHP Plugs into HHP Used for file storage IC693PIF301 Personal Computer Interface Card Installs in PC Enables PC to control PLC I O IC693PIF400 Personal Computer Interface Card More powerful than the IC693PIF301 IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater Converter also know No longer available Use 1C630CCM390 as the Brick IC690ACC903 Port Isolator IC690ACC903 Provides isolation for PLC serial port GFK 0356Q 11 1 IC640WMI310 320 Work Station Interface Boards The Work Station Interface WSI board provides an RS 485 serial interface between a Series 90 30 PLC and a PC compatible programmer running Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software This board is available in two versions IC640WMI310 serial operation only for Workmaster IBM PC XT or AT or compatible personal computers IC647WMI320 serial operation only for Workmaster or IBM PS 2 or compatible personal computers The WSI board can be ordered as part of a package with Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro programming software When a Workmaster II computer was ordered as the programming device the WSI board was installed at the factory Th
261. at opened will show a status of logic 0 at the moment of capture Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Replacing Modules Modules do not contain configuration switches The slot in each baseplate rack is configured using the configuration software to hold a particular module type catalog number This configuration information is stored in CPU memory Therefore when replacing a module you do not have to make any hardware settings on the module itself You do however have to ensure that you install the correct module type in a particular slot Be aware that some intelligent modules such as the CPU PCM APM or DSM302 may contain application programs that will need to be reloaded after the module is replaced For such modules make sure that up to date copies of the application programs are maintained in case they have to be restored later For I O modules with terminal boards you do not have to rewire a new terminal board in order to replace the module Ifthe old terminal board is not defective it can be removed from the old module and reinstalled on the new module without removing any of the wiring Procedures for removing and installing modules and terminal boards are found in Chapter 2 Series 90 30 Product Repair The Series 90 30 products are for the most part not considered to be field repairable The one major exception are the few modules that
262. ate for your application Check Chapter 5 for instructions on how to avoid loss of memory contents when replacing battery Option Module backup battery Replace annually Check user s manual for additional instructions Check Chapter 5 for instructions on how to avoid loss of memory contents when replacing battery Ventilation If using ventilation fan in enclosure check for proper operation Keep fingers and tools away from moving fans Clean or replace ventilation air filter if using one at least monthly Mechanical tightness With power OFF check that connectors and modules are seated securely in their sockets and that wire connections are secure For low vibration installations perform annually For high vibration installations check at least quarterly Enclosure Check annually With power OFF remove manuals prints or other loose material that could cause shorts or ventilation blockage or that are flammable from inside of enclosure Gently vacuum dust and dirt that has collected on components Use vacuum cleaner not compressed air for this task Program backup Do this initially after creating any application programs such as the ladder logic program motion programs etc Then any time a change is made to a program make at least one several is better new backup copy Keep old copies clearly marked for a reasonable period of time in case you need to go back to the old design Doc
263. ated Repeater Converter essen 11 8 IC690ACC903 Port Isolator eese nennen ennemi 11 8 Systen Desig osses s orsi roe v 12 1 Introd ction s sd eet t dete en atten ie tee e etre 12 1 Step 1 Planning Your System eesesssesseeeeeeeeenenenene nennen 12 1 Step 2 Determining I O Requirements 12 1 Additional I O Module Selection Factors sse 12 2 Step 3 Selecting Option Modules sss 12 2 Step 4 Selecting a Lee ete esce alert e ence a Reed 12 4 Step 5 Selecting Baseplates sess 12 5 Step 6 Selecting Power Supplies ccccssccssecsseeeteeeseceseeeeeeensecssecseeeseeeseeenseenaes 12 6 Reducing PLC Module Count by Using Other GE 12 7 Designing For 12 8 Protection From Electrical SHOCK cccescccescesseeeneeeeseeeeeeseeeeeecneeneeeeeceseeneenseees 12 8 Pire Prevention 12 8 Protection From Mechanical Hazards 22 12 8 Protection From Electrical Failure 2 12 8 Protection From Design Changes or Overrides sse 12 9 Safety Documentation iet cs ree e e poene E DUET E RR de 12 10 Guarding Against Unauthorized Operation sss 12 10 Labeling Guarding and Lighting Issu
264. ates There are two basic kinds of CPU baseplates embedded and modular The embedded types fulfill the need for a good low cost PLC but lack the power expandability and versatility of the modular systems Embedded CPU Baseplate This type has CPU and memory integrated circuit chips soldered to its backplane circuit board All of its numbered slots including slot 1 are of the same type and they accept only I O modules and standard options modules Modular CPU Baseplate This type does not have CPU and memory chips on its backplane Instead it has a connector in Slot 1 for a plug in CPU module which contains the CPU and memory chips on an internal circuit board The slot 1 connector is a special type that only mates with connectors on CPUs and a few special option modules Embedded CPU Baseplates Figures 3 2 and 3 3 3 4 There are three models of embedded baseplates the 311 313 and 323 These model numbers are based upon the CPU type that each contains This chapter discusses only the baseplate features of these products CPU specifications for the embedded CPU are located in Chapter 4 The embedded CPU baseplates have the following features m The CPU type cannot be changed m They do not support the use of expansion or remote racks so these racks do not have an expansion connector like the modular CPU baseplates do m The models 311 and 313 are 5 slot baseplates and the model 323 is a 10 slot baseplate m Since they do no
265. aware that some CPUs support features such as floating point math or larger memory sizes that are not supported by other CPUs In those cases attempting to load a program to a CPU not supporting one or more of the programmed or configured features will result in an error However in some cases it may be possible to edit the program and configuration to make them compatible with the targeted CPU CPU Time of Day TOD Clock Accuracy The accuracy of the Series 90 30 time of day clock is 9 seconds per day across the rated operating temperature range of 0 60 C The accuracy is relatively stable at any fixed temperature For applications that require greater accuracy the following suggestions are furnished m Foran installation where the temperature of the CPU is stable measure the amount of time drift for a 24 hour period then program a correction factor into the ladder program to add or subtract seconds periodically to keep the CPU time accurate The instruction to use in this case is Service Request 7 Change Read Time of Day Clock At the appropriate time a Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 350 374 CPUs 03560 Service Request would read TOD clock an ADD instruction would add correction value to it and another Service Request would write the new value to the TOD clock A possible drawback to this method is that if you replace your CPU you will have to determine
266. ays motor starters solenoids pilot lights etc Each device manufacturer publishes these values If an exact value is not available for a device you can make a close estimate by obtaining the value for a similar device from a catalog These values are also needed for selecting Output modules during the design process in order to ensure that the modules maximum ratings are not exceeded GFK 0356Q FA Procedure Step 1 Basic Method to Calculate Module Dissipation Note that this step does not apply to Power Supply Modules which are covered in Step 2 The values needed for this calculation are found in the Load Requirements table in Chapter 12 Use the following electrical power formula in these calculations Power in watts Voltage in volts x Current in Amps Assume that all input power to these modules is eventually dissipated as heat The procedure is m Look up the module in the Load Requirements for Hardware Components table Chapter 12 and obtain the current values for each of the three power supply voltages listed The voltage is printed at the head of each column modules use SVDC supply and a relatively few modules also use one or both of the two 24VDC supplies m Fora given module calculate the power dissipation for each column in the table that contains a current value by multiplying the current value in Amps times the voltage for that column For modules using more than one voltage add the calculate
267. bed below is available from GE to separate the two port connections on the connector Cable Information Cable IC693CBL305 can be used in applications that require use of both SCM serial ports This is a Wye type cable that breaks out the Port 1 and Port 2 connections on the module s single connector to two individual connectors A data sheet for this cable can be found in the Cables chapter of this manual Additional SCM cable information is found in the two documents referenced in the next section This cable wouldn t be required for applications that use only one SCM port Also this cable should not be used in a multidrop network see Caution note below The IC693CBL305 Wye cable should not be used with an SCM connected to a multidrop network because it introduces signal reflections on the network Multidrop networks should be cabled directly to the SCM serial connector 1 FOOT 2 0 INCH 0 INCH LABEL 0 CABEB3CBL305 B RS 232 25 PIN FEMALE CONNECTOR PORT1 PORT2 RS 232 PIN 1 RS 232 RS 485 25 PIN MALE 25 PIN FEMALE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Figure 9 2 IC693CBL305 WYE Cable State Logic SCM Documentation m GFK 1661 Data Sheet Serial Communications Module Series 90 30 State Logic m GFK 1056 Series 90 30 State Logic Control System User s Manual 03560 Chapter 9 State Logic Products 9 3 9 4 IC693SLP30
268. ble Attach the 15 pin D connector to the serial connector on the PLC power supply on the CPU baseplate Attach the 37 pin D connector to the 37 pin D connector on the Work Station Interface board WSI SERIAL SERIES 90 30 SERIAL CABLE Loo PROGRAMMER Figure 10 1 Serial Port to Work Station Interface Board Cable Connection 10 8 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables Building Custom Length Cables The following information is provided for those users who may want to build a serial cable with a different length for connecting a Series 90 PLC to a Workmaster II computer PIN 0 7 ov 0 0 0 i 0 11 RD B 0 d WORKSTATION 0 0 00 INTERFACE 0 144 RTS B 0 WS9A1 0 6 00 s 0 8 CTS B 0 0 0 0 15 CTS A 0 0 0 0 0 b 9 0 0 13 50 0 0 12 SD A oe 0 1 SHLD 0 37 PIN 37 PIN 1200 ETERS 15 PIN 15 PIN FEMALE MALE MAXIMUM gt MALE FEMALE D TYPE D TYPE D TYPE D TYPE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Figure 10 2 Series 90 PLC to Workmaster Il Serial Cable Cable Type 24 AWG 22 mm 30V computer grade Extra flexible construction recommended for short lengths Connectors 37 pin male D type with 4 40 screws and AMP hood No 1 207908 0 or equivalent 15 pin male D type with M3 screws and AMP hood No 207908 4 or equivalent
269. bles Connecting the Cable Attach the 15 pin male D connector to the serial port connector on the PLC power supply Attach the D connector on the other end to the mating connector on the HHP These connections are shown in the following figure HAND HELD PROGRAMMER H SERIES 90 30 c CABLE P IC693CBL303 U Figure 10 24 Hand Held Programmer Cable Connection to a Series 90 30 PLC 10 34 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables IC693CBL304 305 Port Expansion WYE Cables for PCM ADC and CMM Function of cable A WYE cable IC693CBL304 for PCM300 IC693CBL305 for PCM301 311 ADC311 CMM311 AD693CMM301 and SLP300 is supplied with each PCM ADC and CMM module The WYE cable is used to separate two ports available on a single physical connector the cable separates the RS 232 from the RS 485 signals In addition the WYE cable allows cables used with the Series 90 70 PCM to be fully compatible with the Series 90 30 PCM The WYE cable and cable connections are shown below and on the following page Each WYE cable is 1 foot in length and has a right angle male connector on one end that connects to the PCM module The other end has a dual female connector with one connector for port 1 and the other for port 2 RS 232 25 PIN FEMALE
270. c Diagram of the Isolated Repeater Converter C 3 Pin Assignments for the Isolated Repeater Converter esee C 4 System Configurations esses eene enne C 5 Simple Multidrop Configuration essent C 6 Complex Multidrop Configuration eesessesseeeeeeeeee nennen C 6 Rules for Using Repeater Converters in Complex C 7 Cable Diagrams zi certet E Ui e E e TE Pee LN ed ER a C 8 1C690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit sccsccscscdscesssscesescosssacesassosdeseseassedusssednssscennseouses D 1 Description of Miniconverter ccccceesccesseesseesceeeseceeeeeeececseeceseeeseeeeeceseseseesseeeeeeseneess D 1 Pini Assignitietts ace coe tete tee e E RD STE de ee dta D 2 Pin Assignments RS 232 D 2 Pin Assignments RS 422 D 2 System Configurations ted d orat RE eee ed Eee ede deletes D 3 Cable Diagrams Point To Point essen enne D 3 I1C690ACC903 Port Isolator eese rr arra p the e eund E 1 Connectors eene E 2 Logie EE E 3 Installation gaa UE UR een as GNE I CERERI IER E 4 Specifications cete detect ete ee I a EO M REO eae OH aso E 7 Calculating Series 90 30 Heat Dissipation
271. cable is a 3 feet 1 meter long shielded cable with a 9 pin D shell connector one end and a 6 pin RJ 11 connector on the other This cable is also known as a Station Manager Cable This cable can interconnect RS 232 ports without the need for a converter Typical Applications Connect a Personal Computer s 9 pin serial port to the RJ 11 faceplate serial port on CPUs 351 352 and 363 for programming configuring firmware updating and monitoring purposes Connect a Personal Computer s 9 pin serial port to the Station Manager port on an IC693CMM321 Ethernet module a IC693CPU364 CPU or a 1C693CPU374 CPU module Connect a Personal Computer s 9 pin serial port to an IC693DSM302 module s RJ 11 COMM port for loading motion programs 1 10 and firmware Connect a Personal Computer s 9 pin serial port to an IC693DSM314 module s RJ 11 COMM port for loading firmware motion programs for this module are loaded across the PLC backplane x RJ 11 CONNECTOR 9 PIN FEMALE CONNECTOR X 9 Pin Connector Pin Number RJ 11 Connector Pin Number 1 Red 2 Yellow 3 Green 4 Brown 5 Black 8 6 Orange Figure 10 33 1C693CBL316A Serial Cable Illustration and Connector Pinouts UO tn tA GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 53 1C693CBL321 322 323 I O Faceplate Connector to Terminal Block Connector 24 Pin Note These cables became obsolete in late 1998 They were replaced
272. capabilities PID Loop control Handles complex math easily floating point square root trig functions Allows any combination of Natural English State Logic and Ladder Logic programs in same system Configurable to operate with a Series 90 30 PLC system that uses a model 331 340 or 341 CPU Up to 512 inputs and 512 outputs Protocol 8 Mhz 80C188 microprocessor 46 Kbytes battery backed CMOS logic memory on board One RS 422 RS 485 port and one RS 232 serial port Soft configuration No DIP switches or jumpers Restart Reset Pushbutton OK Status LED Occupies a single slot in a Series 90 30 rack The SLP module has 46 Kbytes of user program memory space Additional memory exists for Input Output Register and other variable data The battery which supports this memory is located on the SLP module as shown in the following figure Installation should not be attempted without referring to the State Logic Processor User s Guide see reference 1 The Series 90 30 SLP can only be installed in a Series 90 30 PLC system that uses a model 331 model 340 or model 341 CPU Make sure rack power 15 off Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module See figure E 3 Install the SLP Module in the rack Turn on power The module should power up and blink the top LED indicating that power up diagnostics are in progress When the diagnostics have completed successfully the top LED stays on The other LE
273. cedures are listed below These grounding procedures must be properly followed for safe proper operation of your Series 90 30 PLC system Baseplate Safety Grounding The following recommendations are offered but applicable safety codes for your area or equipment type should also be consulted The baseplate s metal back must be grounded using a separate conductor the baseplate mounting screws are not considered to an acceptable ground connection by themselves Use a minimum AWG 12 3 3 mm wire with a ring terminal and star lock washer under the head of one of the baseplate s two lower mounting holes These two holes have openings to the side to allow connecting a wire and ring terminal under the head of a mounting screw Connect the other end of this ground wire to a tapped hole in the panel that the baseplate is mounted to using a machine screw star lock washer and flat washer Alternately if your panel has a ground stud it is recommended you use a nut and star lock washer for each wire on the ground stud to ensure adequate grounding Where connections are made to a painted panel the paint should be removed so clean bare metal is exposed at the connection point Terminals and hardware used should be rated to work with the aluminum baseplate material PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER BASE 5 SLOT caution Ceaunon NON CPU SLOTS USER PROGRA
274. ceive Data 23 SD A Send Data Optional Termination z4 N AB SD A Send Data NC No Connection SD Send Data and RD Receive Data are the same as TXD and RXD used in the Series Six PLC A and B are the same as and A and B denote outputs and A and B denote inputs The signal ground connections pin 7 on each connector must be made between the Isolated Repeater Converter and the PLC for and the Isolated Repeater Converter and the host computer for J2 Pin 7 of the J1 port is connected to the metal shell of the J1 connector Pin 7 of the J2 port is connected to the metal shell of the J2 connector These two signal ground connections are isolated from each other and from the power system ground green wire on the terminal block To maintain proper isolation these signal grounds cannot be tied together Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 HOST COMPUTER THIS TERMI 1C655CCM590 Converter RS 232 RS 422 ISOLATED REPEATER RS 422 844783 SHIELDED RS 232 CONVERTER TWISTED SHIELDED PAIRS IGS55CCM590 PAIRS 4 oN PIN 25 PIN MALE 15 PIN MALE FEMALE SWITCH IN CENTER POSITION 115VAC TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA RD SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES NATION IS MADE ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15 PIN D SHELL
275. ck or Strip see 2 22 Direct Method re eie ree 2 22 TBQC not Recommended for Analog Modules eee 2 22 AC Power Source Connections c ccscesccesessecsceeseeeececeeseeecesaeeeeeesecaeeceeseceeeaeeaeeeseeaeens 2 23 AC Input Wiring to AC DC Power Supplies ssseeeeeeeeneen 2 23 Power Supply Overvoltage Protection Devices 2 24 Special Installation Instructions for Floating Neutral IT Systems 2 25 Definition of Floating Neutral 2 25 Use These Special Installation Instructions for Floating Neutral Systems 2 26 DC Power Source Connections e eeseesseeseieeee eee eeee sense tns 2 27 DC Input Wiring to AC DC and DC Only Power 2 27 24 VDC Output 2 27 Basic nstall tion Procedu re ee eet edet 2 28 Donor leer 3 1 Baseplate Types 5d adt vene dete e ties Dee a t dte cioe n 3 1 Common Baseplate Features ccccccesccsseesseessecseeeeeceseeeseecseeeeseceseenseenaeeeeeenseeaees 3 1 TWO Baseplate Sizes teta tete dee er RR DLE E Le e e ia nne 32 BaSeplat Terms RP 3 3 CPU Basepl tes ie io De eae a iad oe 3 4 Embed
276. connection to other baseplates Remote baseplates are available in two sizes 5 slot IC693CHS398 and 10 slot 1C693CHS392 A Remote backplane does not support the following intelligent option modules PCM ADC BEM330 and CMM These modules must be mounted in a CPU baseplate All other I O and option modules can be mounted in any type of baseplate Remote baseplates are the same physical size use the same type power supplies and support the same I O and option modules as the Expansion baseplates Each Remote baseplate has a Rack Number Selection DIP switch 3 8 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 A DIP EXPANSION RACK A SW 1 2 34 5 6 PROGRAMMABLE x x x x x CONTROLLER S XXX CLOSED BASE 5 SLOT REMOTE EH E x P NON CPU SLOTS 1 S N el POWER 3 SUPPLY Figure 3 8 IC693CHS399 5 Slot Remote Baseplate ir EXPANSION RACK SWL12 3 4 5 67 i x ox x PROGRAMMABLE 2 x CONTROLLER X CLOSED BASE 10 SLOT REMOTE B NON CPU SLOTS POWER 1 0 1 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 10 7 1 0 8 1 0 9 SUPPLY
277. crete output and AC wiring This can be facilitated by grouping I O modules to keep Output modules separated from sensitive Input modules The PLC racks each require a 4 clearance space on all four sides 6 inches on the right end if using I O Bus Expansion Cables to ensure adequate ventilation cooling See the Baseplates chapter for baseplate size and clearance requirement information Location of Modules in the PLC Racks There are several factors to consider when laying out your PLC racks Location restrictions Although most modules can be located in any type of baseplate a few of the Option modules PCM ADC CMM SLP will only work in a CPU baseplate The next figure identifies where you can locate the modules in your system Power Supply capacity Since some modules draw considerably more power than others it is possible to overload the power supply by placing many of the modules requiring higher power in one rack Therefore before finalizing your rack layout you should calculate the power supply loading to ensure that you will not overload the power supply See the section Calculating Power Supply Loading Noise Reduction Group I O modules to keep Output modules separated from sensitive Input modules This facilitates keeping noisy wiring separated from sensitive wiring as recommended in a previous section Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Allowable Module Locations
278. ctor that mates with the cable In turn the cable plugs into a connector on the terminal block The terminal block mounts on a DIN rail in a convenient place in your enclosure The terminal block is used for connecting to field devices such as switches and relays This method saves on the average over two hours of wiring time per module when compared with the Terminal Strip method For more information see Appendix J Terminal Block Quick Connect Components Discrete Relay Output Module Protection Output points on discrete relay output modules that switch an inductive load such as a relay coil lamp filament or solenoid coil should have external protection This 1s usually in the form of an R C Resistor Capacitor network across an AC load or a reverse biased diode across a DC load Please see GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications for details High Density 32 Point Discrete Module Features m There are two types of these modules One type has a single 50 pin connector on its faceplate the other type has a pair of 24 pin connectors on its faceplate see next two figures m The dual 24 pin type has LED status indicators The 50 pin type does not The LED status indicators are arranged in four groups of eight across labeled A B C and D They are located at the top of the module see next figure m 32 point modules are only available in 5 12 and 24 VDC ratings m None ofthe 32 point modules are fused m T
279. cy completeness sufficiency or usefulness of the information contained herein No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply indicates a trademark of GE Intelligent Platforms Inc and or its affiliates All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Copyright 2009 GE Intelligent Platforms Inc All Rights Reserved Support Technical Support If you purchased this product through an Authorized Channel Partner please contact them directly General Contact Information Online Technical Support and GlobalCare www ge ip com support Additional information www ge ip com Technical Support If you have technical problems that cannot be resolved with the information in this guide please contact us by telephone or email or on the web at www ge ip com support Americas Online Technical Support www ge ip com support Phone 1 800 433 2682 International Americas Direct Dial 1 434 978 5100 Technical Support Email support ip ge com Customer Care Email customercare ip ge com Primary language of support English Europe the Middle East and Africa Online Technical Support www ge ip com support Phone 800 1 433 2682 Technical Support Email support emea in ge com Customer Care Email customercare emea ip ge com Primary languages of support English French German Italian Czech Spanish Asia Pacific Online Technical Support www ge ip com support Phone 86 400 820 8208 86
280. d a backup program Is the backup program accessible at all times to those responsible for maintaining the equipment Is a personal computer or equivalent equipped with GE programming software available at all times for use in loading the backup program Do you have a preventive maintenance program A formal program would help ensure that the battery is replaced on time Some users replace the backup battery each year during their annual shut down period How accessible is the PLC In some applications the PLC may be mounted in a remote location that is not easily accessed Safety codes Some users may have safety rules that would not allow replacing the battery with power applied How is the PLC used Is power left on all the time or is it shut down every day See the heading Factors Affecting Battery Life Some users run without a backup battery by using one of the PROM options See the section below called Operating Without a Memory Backup Battery to determine if this strategy is suitable for your application The Importance of Backing up Your Program Regardless of what strategy you use to maintain PLC memory you should always keep an up to date backup copy of your application program Other suggestions to help minimize down time Make sure the backup copy is readily accessible to those who may need to use it Train more than one person to load the backup program in case that one person is not available when needed Informati
281. d locate components while troubleshooting Reliability Proper layout promotes good heat dissipation and helps eliminate electrical noise from the system Excess heat and noise are two major causes of electronic component failure W Installation Efficiency A well designed layout allows sufficient room to mount and wire the unit This saves time and frustration W Appearance A neat and orderly layout gives others a favorable impression of your system It lets others know that careful thought went into the design of the system PLC Rack Location and Clearance Requirement 03560 The following list provides PLC rack mounting location guidelines For an example layout see the figure Series 90 30 Example Layout later in this chapter W Locate PLC racks away from other components that generate a lot of heat such as transformers power supplies or power resistors W Locate PLC racks away from components that generate electrical noise such as relays and contacts Locate PLC racks away from high voltages components and wiring such as circuit breakers and fusible disconnects transformers motor wiring etc This not only reduces electrical noise but makes it safer for personnel working on the PLC Chapter 12 System Design 12 17 12 18 Locate PLC racks at a convenient level that allows technicians reasonable access for maintaining the system Route sensitive input wires away from electrically noisy wires such as dis
282. d power values to arrive at the total for the module Example 1 The Load Requirements table shows that the IC693CPU352 module draws m 910 mA from the 5VDC supply m No current from either of the two 12VDC supplies To calculate power dissipation multiply 0 910 Amps times 5 volts The answer is m 4 55 watts of heat dissipated by this module Example 2 The Load Requirements table shows that the IC693MDL241 module draws m 80mA from the 5VDC supply m 125 mA from the 24VDC Isolated supply To calculate power dissipation from the 5VDC supply Multiply 0 08 Amps times 5 volts to arrive at a value of 0 40 watts To calculate power dissipation from the 24VDC supply Multiply 0 125 Amps times 24 volts to arrive at a value of 3 0 watts Adding the two together yields a total heat dissipation by this module of 3 4 watts F 2 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q Step 2 Calculation for PLC Power Supplies A basic rule for Series 90 power supplies is that they are 66 efficient Another way of stating this is that the power supply dissipates 1 watt of power in the form of heat for every 2 watts of power it delivers to the PLC Therefore you can calculate the total power requirement for all of the modules in the rack served by a particular power supply using the method in Step 1 above then divide that figure by 2 to arrive at the power supply dissipation value You cannot simply use the rating of
283. de cable can be purchased for applications where the PLCs are mounted in the same cabinet such as in the case of redundant systems The length of this cable is 40 inches 1 meter Custom built For PLCs that are more than 40 inches 1 meter apart it is necessary to build a custom length cable The specifications are provide below Limitations m The maximum cable length between a master programmer and slave device PLC or Option module in a multidrop system 1s 4 000 feet 1 219 meters m The maximum number of slave devices is limited to eight Cable and Connector Specifications The cable assembly presents one of the most common causes of communication failure For best performance construct the cable assemblies using the recommended connector parts and specifications Table 1 1 Connector and Cable Specifications Series 90 PLC Serial RS 422 port with metric hardware Connectors Connector 15 pin male D Subminiature Type Cannon DA15S solder pot Hood AMP 207470 1 connector shell Hardware Kit AMP 207871 1 Kit includes 2 metric screws and 2 screw clips Miniconverter For connecting to IC690ACC901 miniconverter Connector 15 pin female DB15F Hood AMP 207470 1 or equivalent M3 Latchblocks AMP 208101 or equivalent Computer grade 24 AWG 22 mm minimum with overall shield Catalog Numbers Belden 9505 Belden 9306 Belden 9832 These cables provide acceptable operation for data rates up to 19 2 Kbps as follow
284. ded CPU Baseplates Figures 3 2 and 3 3 3 4 Modular CPU Baseplates Figures 3 4 and 3 5 3 6 Expansion Baseplates Figures 3 6 and 3 7 sse 3 7 Remote Baseplates Figures 3 8 and 3 9 3 8 Bus Expansion Cables esses 3 10 Differences Between Remote and Expansion Racks sese 3 11 Mixing Expansion and Remote Baseplates in a System sss 3 11 Termination Requirement for Expansion or Remote System sss 3 12 Powering Down Individual Expansion or Remote Baseplates 3 12 Series 90 30 PEC Backplane vz hie epe e ed e eie 3 12 Rack Number DIP Switch on Expansion and Remote 3 13 Expansion and Remote Baseplates Connection Example sess 3 15 Baseplate Mounting Dimensions esssssesseeeeeeeeneeene enne enne nennen 3 16 Embedded CPU 311 313 and 323 Baseplate Dimensions 3 16 Modular CPU Expansion and Remote Baseplate 1 3 18 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 03560 Contents Load Ratings Temperature and Mounting Position eene 3 19 Baseplate Adapter Brackets for 19 Rack
285. del 323 3 17 Basic procedure 2 28 grounding procedures 2 11 I O expansion system 10 31 load requirements for components 12 12 multidrop configuration 10 9 to programmer cables 10 13 10 15 10 17 remote expansion system 3 15 10 31 Installing I O Module Term Board 2 5 Instructions for floating neutral IT systems 2 25 Internet GE site 13 9 Interposing terminal blocks 2 19 H 2 H 12 Isolated Repeater Conv overview obsolete 11 8 Isolated repeater converter 11 4 cable diagrams C 8 complex multidrop configuration C 6 description of C 1 illustration of C 2 logic diagram C 3 pin assignments C 4 rules for using C 7 simple multidrop configuration C 6 system configurations C 5 J Jumper strap for overvoltage protection devices 4 6 4 17 Jumpers for EPROM EEPROM selection 5 8 Jumpers converter board B 7 configuration of B 8 K Key CPU replacement 5 16 13 7 Keyswitch CPU 5 15 Kits spare parts mechanical 13 7 L Layout PLC system good layout benefits 12 17 Layout PLC figure 12 20 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q Layout PLC system guidelines 12 17 LED indicators CPU 13 2 Input modules 13 2 Option modules 13 2 Output modules 13 2 P1 CPU 351 352 5 20 P2 CPU 351 352 5 20 power supplies 4 16 relating to terminal board 13 1 SNP CPU 351 352 5 20 LEDs 8 11 8 30 List of fuses 13 6 Lithium battery 4 20 Load
286. dem does not require the Clear To Send CTS signal This allows the programming device to control the RTS signal 1 Jumper positions 2 and 3 are used when the attached Modem does require the CTS signal most modems require this signal Forces RTS to be continually active JP4 ATTACH 3 Default position 1 and 2 is used for most applications communicating with the PLC via a serial programming device 3 Jumper positions 2 and 3 are used if the device communicating with the PLC is intended to emulate the HHP protocol Refer to the documentation for your serial device for signal requirements Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Example of Cable Configurations Examples of cable configurations required when using the converter can be found in Appendix C Specifications for the converter are shown in the following table Table B 4 Specifications for IC690ACC900 Converter Power Requirements Voltage 5 volts DC 5 Current 170 mA 5 RS 422 RS 485 Interface Cables Maximum cable length 1000 feet 300m Cable Type 6 feet 2m Cable type Belden 9508 AWG 24 0 22 mm 30 feet 10m Cable type Belden 9309 AWG 22 0 36 mm 230 feet up to 1000 feet 300m Same cable as for 30 feet Connector Type 15 pin D type Male Subminiature both ends RS 232 Interface Cable Maximum cable length 50 feet 15m Up to 50 feet 15m Connector Type 25 pin D type
287. dition Logic Developer PLC all versions Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 03560 Additional Serial Ports CPU351 CPU352 CPU363 Although all Series 90 30 CPUs have a serial port that is accessed through the connector on the power supply the CPU351 CPU352 and CPU363 each have two additional serial ports The connectors for these additional serial ports are mounted on the front of each CPU These two built in serial ports eliminate the need for the CPU to access serial ports across the PLC backplane resulting in better system performance These two ports support the SNP SNP X master and slave protocols see Breakfree SNP Protocol on page 5 13 RTU slave protocol in Firmware Version 8 0 and later and the Serial I O feature in Firmware Version 8 0 and later that lets you create a custom serial output Instructions on how to use these ports can be found in the Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User s Manual GFK 0582C or later Floating Point Math All Series 90 30 CPUs can work with integer numbers The set of integer numbers consists of all positive and negative whole numbers including zero The floating point math feature enables a CPU to work with decimal numbers in addition to integer numbers It also provides trigonometric logarithmic exponential and radian conversion functions Floating point math is also referred to as real number math The CPU352 and CPU
288. drop Arrangement for Series 90 70 TMR Redundant System I 4 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Conn Conn Series 90 30 PLC A Series 90 30 PLC Py IC690ACC90 Serial Cable Figure l 5 Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90 30 Redundant System Configuring and Connecting a Programmer to a Multidrop Network Each slave device on a multidrop system must have its own unique SNP ID identification The SNP ID assignment is made with a programmer running GE programming software or with the Hand Held Programmer Logicmaster Control or Versa Pro software packages all can be used for this purpose The following example uses Logicmaster Please see your software user s manual or on line help screens for instructions Regardless of what software you use the basic steps are m Connect your programmer to each individual PLC or module on the multidrop system and assign each one a unique SNP ID m Connect your programmer to the multidrop system and select Multidrop for the programmer s connection method m Inthe programming software select the SNP ID of the PLC or module you wish to connect to 03560 Appendix SNP Multidrop 1 5 Assigning a PLC SNP ID to a PLC with Logicmaster Take your programmer to the first PLC to be assigned and connect directly to its programmer port From the Logicmaster Main Menu select F2 Logicmaster 90 Configuration Pack
289. ds is supplied with the module for this purpose Please see the section CPU363 and 364 Shield Grounding in Chapter 2 Installation for details Firmware Upgrade m The CPU firmware which is stored in Flash memory is loaded through the serial port connector on the PLC Power Supply using a personal computer that has been equipped with the loader and CPU firmware software m The Ethernet Interface firmware stored in Flash memory is loaded through the module s front panel Port 1 connector using a personal computer that has been equipped with the loader and Ethernet firmware software Cable IC693CBL316 is required see Chapter 10 for details on this cable 5 24 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 CPU374 Hardware Features This module has eight LED indicators an Ethernet Restart pushbutton a standard CPU keyswitch three port connectors and a shield ground connection tab labeled PS LAN STAT CPU 374 ETHERNET RESTART PIN 1 2 4 5 10 100 ETHERNET LED Indicators There are four LED Indicators Three relate to the Ethernet interface EOK LAN and STAT These can be ON OFF FLASHING slow or FLASHING fast in several different combinations The full functionality of these LEDs is detailed in GFK 1541 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User s Manual The fourth LED PS PORT
290. e oD 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 1 AWG to Metric Wire Size Conversion Since there is not an exact correspondence between American AWG wire sizes and metric sizes the metric values in the following table are close approximations If you need greater precision contact your wire supplier Table K 2 AWG to Metric Wire Size Conversion AWG to Metric Wire Size Conversion AWG Size Metric Cross Section in square millimeters K 2 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Temperature Conversion Formulas C 5 9 32 F 9 5 x 32 Table K 3 Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion to nearest degree 40 104 135 275 230 446 113 140 284 235 455 03560 Appendix Tables and Formulas K 3 Conversion Information Table K 4 General Conversions 1 ounce weight 28 35 grams 1 pound weight 453 6 grams 1 pound weight 16 ounces 1 pound force 4 448 newtons 1 short ton weight 907 2 kilograms 1 short ton weight 2 000 pounds 1 horsepower power 550 foot pounds per second 1 horsepower power 746 watts of electrical power 1 kilowatt power 1 341 horsepower 1 kilowatt hour energy or wor
291. e eese nennen nnne nne 5 18 CPU351 CPU352 CPU363 Hardware 5 19 CPU Firmware Upgrade so bee 5 19 KeyswWitchi ir met eap RR Rorate ee oe Re eee ud 5 19 Shield Ground Connection ai 5 20 Get 5 20 Serial Port Front Panel Connectors 5 20 Serial Port Status LEDs enne 5 20 Protocols Supported sse nennen 5 21 Pin Assignments for CPU351 CPU352 and CPU363 Serial Ports 1 amp 2 5 22 CPU364 Hardware Features sessi ener enne enne 5 23 LED Tndicatots tn eee E ee o RM tue E 5 23 Ethernet Restart Pushbutton esses 5 23 Keyswitch att areae ettam o defuere metes 5 24 Front Panel Tet n e ER a ew e E 5 24 Shield Ground Connection Tab essen 5 24 Firmware Upgrade nettes up tu a Eo pese odes 5 24 CPU374 Hardware Featuresz e eR eter e ee ee ee 5 25 EED IndiCators homes uve tien eve Ie cet etiem 5 25 Ethernet Restart Pushbutton sse 5 25 Keys WItCli sS ebenso teas tette ee tov rs 5 26 Front Panel Connectors 5 We eden TERT 5 26 Shield Ground Connection Tab sese 5 26 Firmware Upgrade onite ien ep Eee e P esee ted 5 26 CPU Data Sheets emeret ete het ere e
292. e Baseplate Safety Ground in this chapter 4 Mark the hole locations for module shield ground connections if any See Module Shield Ground and accompanying sections in this chapter for instructions 5 Finish laying marking hole locations out the rest of the system This includes any terminal blocks you will be using DIN rail mounted terminal blocks for some of the 32 point I O modules are manufactured by Weidmuller DIN rail mounted GE Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC assemblies are optional for some of the 16 point and 32 point discrete I O modules If using these TBQCs refer to Appendix for data Also APM and DSM modules use DIN rail mounted terminal blocks Note We recommend drilling and tapping all holes before mounting any components This will avoid getting chips and filings in the components 6 Drill and tap the marked holes For baseplate mounting use 8 32 or 4mm size 7 Mount the baseplates Use good quality 8 32 x 1 2 inch or 4 x 12mm size screws We recommend using star lock washers and flat washers under the screw heads star lock washer should be located between screw head and flat washer to ensure a tight baseplate ground connection and to keep the screws from loosening Connect each baseplate ground wire as shown in the Baseplate Safety Ground section of this chapter 8 Ifyou have Expansion or Remote racks determine the correct rack number for each one then set the rack numbers using
293. e 1 Pair 11 Wire 2 Pair 11 B11 Wire 1 Pair 12 18 A12 Wire 2 Pair 12 5 B12 Drain Wire Shield 13 Same as Terminal Block Terminal Number See manuals GFK 0840 standard mode or GFK 0781 follower mode for terminal block details Chapter 10 Cables 10 47 Table 10 7 I O Cable Wire Coding for IC693CBL317 and IC693CBL320 Emm Pin Number Cable Wire Color Codes Terminal Number Wire 1 Pair 4 Yellow Black Wire 2 Pair 4 Yellow Wire 1 Pair 5 Green Black asd Wit 2 Pair Green Bs Wirel Pair 6 Blue Black w Wire2 Pair Blu B6 Wir Pair 7 Violet Black xr Wire Pair violen B Wire 2 Pair 8 White Wire 1 Pair 9 Gray Black Wire 2 Pair 9 Gray Wire 2 Pair 10 Pink Wire 1 Pair 11 Light Blue Black Wire 1 Pair 10 Pink Black Wire 2 Pair 11 Light Bluc 2 A3 B3 A4 4 5 5 7 B7 A8 8 A9 A10 10 A12 i a12 Wire2 Pair 12 Light Green External Ring Terminal Drain Wire Shield Same as Terminal Block Terminal Number 16 gauge wire green w yellow tracer 8 length from back of connector terminates with a 10 ring terminal Wire 1 Pair 8 White Black 2 10 48 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables IC693CBL315 I O Interface Cable 24 Pin for 32 Point Modules Note This cable became obsolete in late 1998 It was replaced by two cables IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328
294. e High Speed Counter module is able to sense inputs count and respond with outputs without needing to communicate with a CPU It can be configured to count either up or down to count both up and down or to count the difference between two changing values The module can be configured to provide 1 2 or 4 counters of differing complexity a43971A HIGH SPEED COUNTER O ok HIGH SPEED COUNTER O ok CFG HIGH SPEED 5 12 24 HIGH SPEED COUNTER 1 5 12 24 VDC T z n Tey o 44A729182 FOR USE IC693APU30 Figure 8 14 High Speed Counter HSC The High Speed Counter can be installed in any Series 90 30 baseplate and is configured using the Hand Held Programmer Logicmaster 90 30 20 VersaPro software or Logic Developer PLC Many features can also be configured from the user s application program There are no jumpers to be set on the module Two LEDs at the top of the module indicate the operating status of the module and the status of configuration parameters For details on the HSC refer toGFK 0293 Series 90 30 High Speed Counter User s Manual Chapter 8 Option Modules 8 23 IC693BEM320 I O LINK Interface Slave Module The I O LINK Interface module IC693BEM320 provides an interface between a Series 90 30 PLC and a proprietary I O LINK in a CNC Computer Numerical Control or a Series 90 70 PLC Thi
295. e Terminal Block Quick connectors I O cable connects between Connect TBQC assemblies See the right 24 pin connector on a 32 point Appendix H for a module list and cable module or the single connector on a selection information TBQC faceplate and the connector on the terminal block Replaces cable IC693CBL321 IC693CBL331 6 2 meters right angle both Used with the Terminal Block Quick connectors I O cable connects between Connect TBQC assemblies See the left 24 pin connector on a 32 point Appendix for a module list and cable module and the connector on the selection information terminal block Replaces cable IC693CBL322 IC693CBL332 6 2 meters right angle I O cable Used with the Terminal Block Quick connects between the right 24 pin connector on a 32 point module or the single connector on a TBQC faceplate and the connector on the terminal block Replaces cable IC693CBL322 Connect TBQC assemblies See Appendix H for a module list and cable selection information Chapter 10 Cables 10 5 10 6 Series 90 30 Cable Cross Reference Catalog No Description Applications 1C693CBL333 20 0 5 meter right angle I O cable Used with the Terminal Block Quick connects between the left 24 pin Connect TBQC assemblies See connector on a 32 point module and the Appendix H for a module list and cable connector on the terminal block selection information Replaces cable IC69
296. e WSI resides in a full length computer slot The computer can be a Workmaster Workmaster II Cimstar industrial computer or a PC compatible personal computer 244734 SERIAL OPERATION ONLY 1C647WMI320 Figure 11 1 WSI Board for the Workmaster Il Computer WSI SERIAL SERIES 90 30 SERIAL CABLE PROGRAMMER Figure 11 2 Location of WSI in a Series Il 90 30 PLC System 11 2 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Programmer Hardware Products Replacing Workmaster Computers The Workmaster and Workmaster II computers are no longer available However the Work Station Interface boards are still sold largely to support customers still using the Workmaster and related products GE currently sells industrially hardened programming computer software packages that are updated replacements for the Workmaster computers For details please contact the GE Hotline at 1 800 GE 1 800 433 2682 or for international customers direct dial 804 978 6036 IC690ACC900 RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter 03560 This item is no longer available The information provided in this manual is for the convenience of those still using this product Note GE offers the IC690ACC901 Miniconverter kit documented in the next section of this chapter as a replacement for the IC690ACC900 Converter This Converter lets you connect a standa
297. e connector used on the standard Wye cables is not available as a separate component Item Description Belden 8107 only no substitutes Computer cable overall braid over foil shield twisted pair 30 volt 80 C 176 F 24 AWG 22 mm tinned copper 7 x 32 stranding Velocity of propagation 70 Nominal impedance 10090 25 Pin Male Connector Crimp Plug Amp 207464 1 Pin Amp 66506 9 Solder Plug Amp 747912 2 25 Pin Female Connector Crimp Receptacle Amp 207463 2 Pin Amp 66504 9 Solder Receptacle Amp 7479 13 2 Connector Shell Kit Amp 745833 5 Metal plated plastic plastic with nickel over copper Crimp ring Amp 745508 1 split ring ferrule Critical Information Vendor part numbers listed for user assembled cables are provided for reference only and do not suggest or imply that they are preferred Any part meeting the same specification can be used Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables Expansion Port Pin Assignments The following table lists the expansion port pin assignments you will need when building remote cables All connections between cables are point to point that is pin 2 of one end to pin 2 of the opposite end pin 3 to pin 3 etc Table 10 2 Expansion Port Pin Assignments 16 DIODT I O Serial Data Positive 17 DIODT I O Serial Data Negative 24 DIOCLK I O Serial Clock Positive DIOCLK I O Serial Clock Negative DRSEL Rem
298. e cover to install the bracket Figure 3 18 IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation 3 20 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Dimensions for rack mounting a 10 slot baseplate with the IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket are shown in the following figure 18 89 480 DIMENSIONS IN INCHES MILLIMETERS IN Figure 3 19 Dimensions for 19 Rack Mounting Using IC693ACC308 Adapter Bracket 0 160 4 06 dia x 4 0 280 7 1 i 4 000 101 6 1 368 34 7 1 i 0 346 88 1 it Inside i i 16 850 428 i i 18 122 460 3 X 0 439 11 2 DIMENSIONS IN INCHES MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES Figure 3 20 10693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket Chapter 3 Baseplates 3 21 Baseplate Comparison Table Table 3 2 Series 90 30 Baseplate Comparison Series 90 30 Baseplates IC693CPU311 IC693CPU313 1C693CPU323 3 22 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Chapter 4 Power Supplies Power Supply Categories Series 90 30 power supplies are modular types that plug into the left slot of all 90 30 baseplates They have been placed into two categories for the purpose of this chapter AC DC Input Power Supplies m IC693PWR321 Standard 120 240 VAC or 125 VDC input 30 watts total output m IC693PWR
299. e created by combining GE products with third party products Examples of third party Series 90 30 modules are Profibus DeviceNet SDS LonWorks Interbus S RTU Modbus ASCII Basic RTD and Millivolt Strain Gauge Input Contact your GE distributor for further information or check the GE Web site for third party product information 03560 Chapter 12 System Design 12 3 Step 4 Selecting a CPU Once you have determined how many and what type of I O and Option modules you require you can select a CPU Many of the factors that apply to selecting Option modules such as performance cost standardization etc also apply to selecting a CPU Details on CPU capabilities are found in the CPUs chapter W Number of modules required by the system Embedded CPUs come in 5 slot or 10 slot sizes and they do not support Extension or Remote baseplates Therefore if a system requires only a few modules these may be an option If more than 10 modules are required you must select a Modular CPU The CPU331 341 CPUs support up to 5 total baseplates and the CPU350 364 CPUs support up to 8 total baseplates If you need more than 49 total Option and I O modules you will need to use one of the CPU350 364 group of CPUs W Modules with Quantity Restrictions Many modules are restricted as to how many may be used in one system This number also varies by CPU For example in the case of an 8 channel Analog Output module the maximum number per system is
300. e does not support these features They are supported only in Control Version 2 2 or later all versions of VersaPro software and CIMPLICITY Machine Edition software Logic Developer PLC For details about these features please see publication GFK 1541A or later TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User s Manual 03560 Chapter 5 CPUs 5 17 5 18 Hardware Features of the 350 364 CPUs CPU350 and CPU360 Hardware Features These two modules look identical except for labeling m These modules feature an LED light labeled PS Port that indicates serial port activity through the serial connector on the PLC power supply Typically this LED will flash while data is being transferred through the port and will stay off when the port is inactive m These modules also have the keyswitch described earlier in this chapter that is standard on the 350 364 CPUs CPU Firmware Upgrade The CPU firmware which is stored in Flash memory is loaded through the serial port connector on the PLC Power Supply PS PS PORT CPU 350 CPU 360 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 CPU351 CPU352 and CPU363 Hardware Features 03560 These three modules are similar in features and functionality The CPU351 CPU352 look identical except for labeling The CPU363 has the same features as the other two but the orientation of its Port 1 and Port 2 connectors is
301. e module catalog number is also printed on the label on the side of the module However in order to see this side label the module has to be removed from the PLC On the front side of the front cover insert are lines that correspond to the module s I O points You can temporarily remove the insert and write the signal name for each point on the appropriate line to aid in testing or troubleshooting Also on the front side of the front cover insert running vertically on the left edge of the insert is a colored line that identifies the type of module Blue DC Red AC and Gray Analog Module Lens Cap Located on the top front of the module it covers the LED Light Emitting Diode OK status light This light indicates the basic status of the module For normal operation the OK LED should be on Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Lens Cap OK Module OK LED OUTPUT ANALOG Module Type E Hinged Cover Removeable Insert Removeable Terminal Board Connection Diagram OPT CONN SEE USER S MANUAL SISISISISISISSIS S ISISISISISISISISISIS _ Module Catalog 44 729182 021801 No FOR USE WITH Figure 7 5 Example of Series 90 30 Analog Current Output Module Wiring Methods for Analog Modules 03560 Twisted shielded instrumentation cable is strongly recommended for analog module input output signal connections Proper g
302. e provided in the Cables chapter of this manual For detailed information on this converter refer to Appendix B The IC690ACC903 Port Isolator is available for applications requiring ground isolation or for connection distances up to 4 000 feet For detailed information refer to Appendix E IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit The Miniconverter Kit consists of an RS 422 SNP to RS 232 Miniconverter a 6 foot 2 meter serial extension cable and a 9 pin to 25 pin adapter The 15 pin SNP port connector on the Miniconverter plugs directly into the serial port connector on the Series 90 30 power supply Series 90 70 CPU or Series 90 20 CPU The 9 pin RS 232 port connector on the Miniconverter connects to an RS 232 compatible device When used with an IBM PC AT or compatible computer one end of the extension cable plugs into the Miniconverter s 9 pin serial port connector the other end plugs into the 9 pin serial port of the computer The adapter supplied with kit is required to adapt the 9 pin serial port connector on the Miniconverter to the 25 pin serial port connector on the GE Workmaster II computer or an IBM PC XT or PS 2 Personal Computer The GE Workmaster computer requires an additional adapter not supplied with kit please contact your local PLC distributor for use with the Miniconverter The Miniconverter is shown in the following figure For more information on the Miniconverter refer to Appendix D
303. e serial port on the power supply to the serial port on the programming computer or other serial device through the RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter IC690ACC900 or RS 422 to RS 232 Miniconverter IC690ACC901 The serial port has three possible uses asa programming port for the State Logic software to download programs and to send instructions to the PLC m ASCII port providing a connection from the CPU to any ASCII device m port providing an interface connection for MMI and other host computer systems RS 485 COMPATIBLE SERIAL PORT Figure 9 8 Serial Port Connector Notes The serial port connector is functional only in a power supply that is installed in a baseplate that also contains the CPU this includes the Model CSE 311 and CSE 313 5 slot baseplates with built in CPU CSE 323 10 slot baseplate with built in CPU and the Model CSE 331 and CSE 340 single slot CPUs The serial port is not functional when a power supply is installed in a Series 90 30 expansion or remote baseplate Additionally any device connected to the serial port that uses 5 VDC power from the Series 90 30 power supply must be included in the calculation for maximum power consumption see Sample Calculations for Power Supply Loads in Chapter 3 of this manual Configuring the State Logic CPUs All of the State Logic CPUs and attached I O system are configured with the State Logic software There are no DIP switches or
304. e the input current requirements m Use the lowest input voltage to determine the maximum input current m Allow for start up surge current requirements m Allow margins 10 to 20 for variations 03560 Chapter 4 Power Supplies 4 9 IC693PWR328 Standard Power Supply 48 VDC Input The IC693PWR328 is a 30 watt output power supply designed for 48 VDC nominal input It will accept an input voltage range from 38 VDC to 56 VDC This power supply provides the following outputs m 5 VDC output m 24 VDC Relay power output which provides power to circuits on Series 90 30 Output Relay modules m Isolated 24 VDC which is used internally by some modules can also be used to provide external power for 24 VDC Input modules The load capacity for each output of this power supply is shown in the following table Table 4 8 IC693PWR328 Power Supply Capacities Catalog Load Number Capacity Input Output Capacities Voltage Power IC693PWR328 30 Watts 48 VDC 5 24 VDC Isolated 20 24 VDC Relay 15 15 watts watts watts Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts IC693PWR328 1 TER STATUS INDICATORS Series 90 30 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CONNEGTIONS DC POWER SOURCE STANDARD POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMABLE CONTROLLER INTERNAL POWER MODULES REQUIRING 24 RS 485 COMPATIBLE SERIAL PORT BATTERY CONNECTORS LITHIUM
305. e two front panel serial ports on the CPU351 CPU352 and CPU363 Note that Pin 5 provides Isolated 5 VDC power 100 mA maximum for powering external options Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 CPU364 Hardware Features This module has four LED indicator lights an Ethernet Restart pushbutton a standard CPU keyswitch three port connectors and a shield ground connection tab labeled FRAME PS Eok port LAN b CPU 364 Q STAT ETHERNET RESTART PIN 1 LED Indicators There are four LED Indicators Three relate to the Ethernet interface EOK LAN and STAT These can be ON OFF FLASHING slow or FLASHING fast in several different combinations The full functionality of these LEDs is detailed in GFK 1541 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User s Manual The fourth LED PS PORT is for the CPU s serial port and is not related to the Ethernet interface This LED will flash while data 1s being transferred through the SNP serial port connector on the PLC power supply and will stay off when the port is inactive On some early production 364 CPUs this LED is labeled SNP Series 90 30 CPUs have this standard serial port Ethernet Restart Pushbutton This pushbutton performs four functions LED test Restart Restart and enter Software Load state and Restart and enter Maintenance state These are detailed in GFK 1541 TCP IP Eth
306. eaesaeceeeseeaeeneeas 1 3 Figure 1 2 Power Supply Module sse eene enne nnne enne 1 3 Eigure I 3 CPU Module eere 1 4 Figure 1 4 7 teet edente carpere tse en e et nte qi d ite Mesa e tede bet 1 4 Figure 1 5 Assembling the System nennen enne enne nnn enne enne 1 5 Figures l 6 A Basic SySlem eee ree eae tede HE EHE e E E HER eed 1 6 Figure 1 7 Tensslot Backs tee eet Pe ade epe eset eS 1 6 Figure 1 8 I O Bus Expansion Cable cccccccccscccsseesseceseceseseseceeeecessceceseceseceseeeseesaeeceaecnseseseeeeeneeseeeeneeeags 1 7 Figure 1 9 Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates sess 1 8 Figure 1 10 Connecting PLCs Using GBC or CMM Modules eere 1 9 Figure 2 1 Features of Series 90 30 Module esses eene eren eene ener enne 2 2 Figure 2 2 Installing a 2 3 Figur 2 3 Removing a Module ie ener onim ehem o e ee e RUE a adsense 2 4 Figure 2 4 Installing an I O Module s Terminal Board esesssssssseeeeneeeeeee eene 2 5 Figure 2 5 Removing a Module s Terminal Board sse nennen 2 6 Figure 2 6 Terminal Board with Holding Screws sssessseseeeeeeeee nnne 2 7 Figure 2 7 IC693ACC308 Front M
307. ease 9 0 and is available in all of the 350 374 CPUs that have this firmware The purpose of the SER is to provide a dynamic troubleshooting and debugging tool In effect it takes snapshots of the on off status of groups of discrete points that you specify You also specify how many of these snapshots to take when and how often they will be taken and where in memory they will be stored The stored snapshots can be analyzed to see the time relationship of the bits sampled Please see the Series 90 30 PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual GFK 0467K or later for details on using this instruction Some feature highlights m An SER function block collects up to 32 contiguous or non contiguous bits per sample m Each SER function block can capture up to 1024 samples m Ifthe SER is embedded in a periodic subroutine sampling rate is determined by the periodic subroutine execution rate m Only the trigger sample is time stamped The trigger sample can be time stamped in BCD maximum resolution of 1 s or POSIX format maximum resolution of 10ms The time Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 stamp is only placed once at the trigger point The SER does not support more than one time stamp per recording The SER can be configured for pre mid or post trigger modes Embedded Ethernet Interface CPU364 and CPU374 The CPU364 and CPU374 consist of a CPU and an Ethernet Interface combined in one m
308. ective enclosure The enclosure should be capable of properly dissipating the heat produced by all of the devices mounted inside it For details on calculating heat dissipation refer to Appendix F The system design which includes producing the layout and wiring drawings should be completed before beginning the installation procedure This section offers a basic step by step approach to installing a Series 90 30 PLC system Some steps refer to earlier sections of this chapter for additional details An attempt was made to place the steps in an order that will make the process as efficient as possible However due to the wide variance in system designs this order may not be the most efficient for your system so you may wish modify this procedure to fit your needs 1 Gather the schematics layouts prints and other information for the job Warning To avoid the possibility of electrical shock to personnel or damage to your PLC we recommend that you shut off all power to the system before mounting and wiring the PLC Also keep all electronic components away from the area while drilling and tapping to keep metal chips and filings out of these sensitive components 2 From the layout drawing determine where the baseplate s will be mounted Lay out the hole locations either using the dimensions given on your layout drawing or from the Baseplates chapter of this manual 3 Mark the hole locations for the baseplate safety ground wire se
309. ector Right Side Connector Pin B1 Pin B12 Figure H 8 IC693MDL654 32 Point Module GFK 0356Q Appendix H Terminal Block Quick Connect Components 11 Terminal Block Terminal blocks have three rows of terminals arranged in three levels as shown in Figure H 1 The terminals feature an easy to use captive screw rising cage type connection system Catalog numbers for the terminal block and the modules it can be used with are listed below Catalog Use With Module Number These Modules Description 1C693ACC337 IC693MDL654 Input 5 12 VDC TTL Pos Neg Logic 32 points IC693MDL655 Input 24 VDC Pos Neg Logic 32 points IC693MDL752 Output 5 24 VDC Neg Logic 32 points IC693MDL753 Output 12 24 VDC Pos Logic 0 5A 32 points Cable Selection and Cross Reference Six cables are available for connecting between the modules faceplate connectors and the terminal blocks These cables have right angle connectors on the module end to minimize the space required in front of the modules These six cables replace three obsolete cables that had straight connectors Since the modules two connectors are oriented differently see previous figure a right side and left side cable is required Use the following table to select the correct cables The table also lists cable kits that consist of a pair of same length right side and left side cables Cable Current Rating Each conductor in these 24 conductor cables has a current ratin
310. ector and the I O module s connector An I O module that has a terminal board instead of a connector is converted into a connector type using an adapter faceplate The TBQC system is not recommended for use with Analog modules because it does not meet the shielding recommendations for Analog module connections See the Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual GFK 0898 for Analog module wiring information This appendix contains two sections one for discrete 16 point I O modules and one for discrete 32 point I O modules Connector Male Pins a45586A amp 95 8 86 1200122012000 Terminals Figure H 1 Typical TBQC Terminal Block Terminal Block Quick Connect Components for 16 Point Modules Installing a 16 point module typically takes 2 1 2 hours to wire from a PLC to a terminal blocks or strip With the TBQC you simply snap the terminal block onto a DIN rail remove the I O module s terminal assembly snap in the I O faceplate and connect the cable This reduces wiring time
311. ed accuracy repeatability size conformance to standards cost restrictions time requirements etc W Documentation If retrofitting existing equipment you can refer to its documentation layout drawings schematics etc If the documentation is lost perhaps a copy is available from the manufacturer Additional information may be gathered from discussions with the equipment operators and maintenance technicians For a new design there are probably mechanical or process drawings of the equipment Step 2 Determining I O Requirements This step comes next because other Series 90 30 component choices are dependent on the number of I O points required In particular the number of modules required and their locations determines what type and how many baseplates are needed and also is a major factor in CPU selection Note that there are some restrictions on the maximum number of certain types of modules Analog I O and Option that can be supported in one PLC system See the table Maximum Number of Modules Per System for data W To start determine how many I O points both analog and discrete are needed for your system If retrofitting an existing system use the schematic diagrams for the system If designing a new system use the mechanical drawings or specifications to determine what inputs and 03560 12 1 outputs are needed Make a list of inputs and outputs needed separating them into four types Discrete Input Discrete
312. ed PLC within a few seconds If you cannot connect see the next section 1 6 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 SNP Multidrop Troubleshooting If you are having trouble connecting to a PLC or module over the multidrop system check the following Is there a problem with all PLCs or only one Try connecting to other PLCs over the multidrop system If you cannot connect to any check for a common problem such as a defective cable If you can connect to all but one PLC use the direct connection method described in the next paragraph Also if you only have a problem with the last PLC on the multidrop link the last section of cable may have a problem Or perhaps you can connect to all PLCs up to a certain point but none beyond that point This would also strongly suggest that there is a problem in a section of cable SNP ID may be incorrect You may not be able to connect because you are specifying the wrong SNP ID If you are not sure of a PLC s correct SNP ID and would like to check it you can connect your programmer directly to the PLC s programmer port and read its SNP ID from the software s ASSIGN PLC ID screen as described in Assigning an SNP ID to a PLC with Logicmaster above Make sure you change the programming software s connection method to Direct for this test When set for Direct connection the software will communicate with a directly connected PLC without regard to its
313. elay modules m Isolated 24 VDC which is used internally by some modules can also be used to provide external power for 24 VDC Input modules The load capacity for each output of this power supply is shown in the following table Table 4 4 IC693PWR330 Power Supply Capacities Catalog Load Nominal Number Capacity Input Output Capacities Voltage Power IC693PWR330 30 Watts 100 to 240 VAC or 5 VDC 24 VDC Isolated 24 VDC Relay 125 VDC 30 watts 20 watts 15 watts Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts E IC693PWR330 SYSTEM STATUS Series 90 30 INDICATORS HIGH CAPACITY POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMMABL CONTROLLER INPUT 100 240 VAC 50 60 HZ 100VA CONNECTIONS FOR AC DC POWER SOURCE INTERNAL POWER SOURCE FO MODULES REQUIRING 24VDC RS 485 COMPATIBLE SERIAL PORT BATTERY CONNECTORS LITHIUM BACK UP BATTERY Figure 4 2 High Capacity AC DC Input Power Supply IC693PWR330 4 4 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Table 4 5 Specifications for IC693PWR330 High Capacity AC DC Input Power Supply Nominal Rated Voltage 120 240 VAC or 125 VDC Input Voltage Range AC 85 to 264 VAC DC 100 to 300 VDC Input Power 100 VA with VAC Input Maximum with Full Load 50 W with VDC Input Inrush Current 4A peak 250 ms maximum Output Power 5 VDC 30 watts maxi
314. eld Grounding 2 14 In general the aluminum PLC baseplate is used for module shield grounding On some Series 90 30 modules shield connections to the user terminal connector on the module are routed to the baseplate through the module s backplane connector Other modules such as CPUs 351 352 363 364 and 374 require a separate shield ground These are discussed in the next several sections Shield Grounding Information for CPUs with External Port Connections CPUs with external port connections the 351 352 363 364 and 374 must have a separate shield ground connection to provide shielding for these ports Because the design of the ground connection for the CPU351 and 352 is different from that of the CPU363 364 and 374 each grounding method is discussed in a separate section CPU351 and 352 Shield Grounding The CPU 351 or 352 module must be connected to frame ground at the slot where it is installed Two methods are provided for making this ground connection Each CPU comes with an EMC Grounding Kit 44A737591 G01 that contains a ground wire grounding bracket and screws 1 The connection from the CPU to frame ground can be made using the ground wire part number 444735970 001R01 that comes with the module in EMC Grounding Kit This wire has a stab on connector on one end for connection to a mating terminal on the bottom of the CPU and a ring terminal on the other end for connection to a grounded enclosure Where the rin
315. emoving the CPU module would disconnect the backup battery from the memory circuits In addition to avoid the possible problems associated with losing the contents of RAM memory we recommend that you maintain an up to date backup copy of your program folder Instructions for creating program folder backups can be found in the Logicmaster 90 Series 90 30 Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 and the online help and user s guides for the Windows based programming software products Super Capacitor Memory Backup Besides the backup battery the RAM memory circuits in both Embedded and Modular CPUs are further protected by a super capacitor which can store enough charge to maintain memory for a short time 1f the battery is disconnected The amount of protection time provided by the super capacitor depends on the following m The PLC power supply supplies 5 VDC to the memory circuits including the super capacitor Therefore when PLC power is turned off the super capacitor has an initial 5 VDC charge If the battery 1s also disconnected shortly after PLC power is turned off the super capacitor will begin discharging from the 5 VDC level until its charge reaches 2 VDC at which time memory contents will be lost When used this way the super capacitor can maintain memory contents for a minimum of 1 hour m The memory backup battery supplies 3 VDC to the memory circuits including the super capacitor Therefore if PLC power has been turned
316. energized by the application of power to its solenoid coil which magnetically pulls the contacts to their energized states When de energized the contacts move to their normal at rest states by the pull of a mechanical spring When the Reset pushbutton is pressed and if all four of the E Stop and Gate switches are closed the MCR relay will energize and latch in the energized state through its MCR contact in parallel with the Reset pushbutton Its other MCR contact applies power to the motor starter and PLC output circuits If any one of the E Stop or Gate switches opens or if a wire breaks in this circuit or if the MCR coil becomes defective MCR will de energize and open the circuit to the motor starters and PLC output circuits As shown the PLC s main power and input circuits are not controlled by the MCR since they do not directly control any outputs Keeping these circuits energized is desirable because this allows the PLC to continue gathering data recording fault information and controlling communications even if its Output module outputs are disabled by the MCR If an additional margin of safety were desired two MCR relays could be used Their coils would be wired in parallel their normally open contacts wired in series and their normally closed contacts wired in parallel This would help guard against the possibility of a welded contact on a single MCR relay Reset E Stop 1 E Stop 2 Gate 1 Gate 2 Hein eae PLC Main P
317. ength as required for individual applications You must purchase the mating female socket type 24 pin connectors The 24 pin connector kit can be ordered as an accessory kit from GE Catalog numbers for these connectors and their associated parts are listed in the following table The list includes catalog numbers for three types of connectors solder pin crimp pin and ribbon cable Each accessory kit contains enough components D connectors backshells contact pins etc to assemble ten single ended cables of the type specified for each kit Chapter 10 Cables 10 49 10 50 Table 10 8 Catalog Numbers for 24 Pin Connector Kits Vendor du Number Number Description IC693ACC316 Crimp Type FCN 360C024 B Backshell for DRE IC693ACC318 FCN 367J024 AUF Additional tools from Fujitsu are required to properly assemble the crimped contact and ribbon cable type connectors The solder eyelet connectors as provided in IC693ACC316 do not require any special tooling Crimped Contact Connectors as provided in IC693ACC317 require Hand Crimping Tool FCN 363T T005 H Contact Extraction Tool FCN 360T T001 H Ribbon Cable Connectors as provided in IC693ACC318 require Cable Cutter FCN 707T T001 H Hand Press FCN 707T T101 H Locator Plate FCN 367T T012 H These tools need to be ordered from an authorized Fujitsu distributor Three of the largest US distributors for Fujitsu connectors are Marshall at 80
318. ent Remote baseplate IC693CHS393 399 Custom Wye Cable Wiring Diagram 10 30 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables Application Examples Expansion System Cable Connections The following example shows cable connections in a system that has expansion baseplates but no remote baseplates NOTE TOTAL MAXIMUM DISTANCE FROM CPU BASEPLATE TO LAST EXPANSION BASEPLATE IS 50 FEET 15 METERS EXPANSION CABLES 1C693CBL300 3 FT 1 METER 69 301 6 FT 1 8 METERS 1C693CBL302 314 50 FT 15 METERS 1C693CBL312 0 5 FT 15 METERS 1C693CBL313 25 FT 8 METERS See NOTE NOTE Each signal pair on the I O bus must be terminated at the end of the I O bus with120 ohm resistors This trimation can be done with the I O Bus Terminator Plug IC693ACC307 by using the 50 foot 15 meter cable 1C693CBL302 314 with built in termi nating resistors or by building a vo BUS tars cable with the resistors TERMINATOR instzdlednnector at the end of the bus a PLUG See NOTE 1C693ACC307 DISCRETE ANALOG OPTION Figure 10 21 Example of Connecting Expansion Baseplates Remote and Expansion System Cable Connection Example The following example shows cable connections in system that includes both remote and expansion baseplates A system can have a combination of remote and expansion baseplates as long as the distance and cab
319. ent the programmer is able to program configure test troubleshoot etc any one of the multidropped devices from one connection point Physically a typical SNP multidrop system consists of a programmer and two or more PLCs interconnected by a daisy chain type cabling arrangement as shown in the figure below It is necessary to assign each slave device PLC or Option module a unique SNP Series Ninety Protocol address using programming software such as Logicmaster VersaPro or Logic Developer PLC The SNP address is used by the programmer to designate which PLC it will communicate with The SNP protocol uses the RS 422 communications standard Note that the PLCs or Option modules do not communicate with each other over the multidrop system They only communicate with the programmer And only one device the one designated by the programmer can communicate with the programmer at a time Multidrop Connector Multidrop Connector Multidrop Connector 15 pin Male 15 pin Male 15 pin Male Series 90 30 PLC slave Series 90 30 PLC slave Series 90 30 PLC slave pam J paw d rium d it E ar e aci e Multidrop Connector 15 pin Female L Multidrop Cable Multidrop Cable IC690ACC901 Serial Cable Programmer master Figure 1 1 Series 90 30 Multidrop Example GFK 0356Q Ll Multidrop Cables There are two sources of multidrop cables m GE cable catalog number IC690CBL714A This pre ma
320. entation The load rating with the baseplate mounted upright on a panel is 100 at 60 C 140 F Figure 12 4 Recommended PLC Mounting Orientation Derated Horizontal Mounting Orientation Power supply load ratings with the baseplate mounted horizontally are W Temperature at 25 C 77 F full load W Temperature at 60 C 140 F 50 of full load Figure 12 5 Derated PLC Mounting Orientation 03560 Chapter 12 System Design 12 21 Chapter Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13 Troubleshooting Features of Series 90 30 Hardware Indicator Lights LEDs and Terminal Board The following figure shows how the indicator LEDs correspond to the circuit connection points on an I O Module s terminal board The terminal board terminals are numbered from the top with the top terminal in the left row being number and the top terminal in the right row being number 2 The numbers alternate between rows with even numbers on the right and odd numbers on the left as shown in the circuit diagram on the back of the hinged cover A LED A6 corresponds to circuit A67 1234 5678 1234 5678 Fuse Indicator LED Circuit A6 connects to terminal 8 H Hinged Cover Indicates External Power Supply 44A726782 015 FOR USE WITH 1C693MDL940 Figure 13 1 Relationship of Indicator Lights to Terminal Board Connections 03560 13 1 Module LED Indicators Input Module LED Indicators
321. eplate For embedded CPUs 311 313 or 323 you may have up to three APM modules For a modular CPU 331 or higher you may have up to eight APM modules in one system with a maximum of three APM modules per baseplate Multiple motion programs may be created and stored in the APM maximum of 10 may be stored in the APM with the Motion Programmer software package The APM is configured and programmed with VersaPro software Version 1 1 or later or Logic Developer PLC Chapter 8 Option Modules 8 15 APM Cables The APM faceplate front panel has two 24 pin high density connectors for servo connections The connector labeled A contains connections for Axis 1 Connector B for a 1 APM contains general purpose connections Connector B for a 2 axis APM has connections for Axis 2 as well general purpose connections To make wiring easier to the drive and machine each high density connector is typically connected by a short cable to a terminal block MACHINE 1 Pn ENCODER 1 MACHINE 2 Motion Programming Configuration Software Software ENCODER 2 Figure 8 11 Example of Motion Mate APM Servo System These cables consists of a 24 pin I O connector a cable and a 25 pin D type terminal block connector Cables are documented in Chapter 10 Available cables are C693CBL311 10 feet 3 meters C693CBL319 3 feet 1 meter C693CBL317
322. er 10 Cables 10 37 1 693 306 307 Extension Cables 50 Pin for 32 Point Modules Function of cable This cable is used with 32 point High Density modules that have a 50 pin male Honda connector mounted on the front of the module The extension cables have a 50 pin male connector on one end and a 50 pin female connector on the other end This cable provides a connection from the module to a connector mounted on a DIN rail mounted terminal block assembly This cable is wired pin to pin That is pin 1 to pin 1 pin 2 to pin 2 etc The modules that use these cables IC693MDL652 IC693MDL653 IC693MDL 750 and IC693MDL 751 The connector on the module is oriented with the notch towards the top of the module with pin 1 at the top of the right row of pins as you are looking at it as shown below Cable Specifications Cable Length IC693CBL306 3 feet 1 meter IC693CBL307 6 feet 2 meters Connectors 50 pin female Honda on end that connects to male connector on module 50 pin male connector on end that connects to Connector Interface Assembly We recommend the use of a terminal block for connecting field wiring to the 50 pin high density modules The use of a connector interface provides a convenient method of terminating field wiring to the modules Weidmuller Electrical and Electronic Connection Systems makes a suitable terminal block assembly RS MR 50 B catalog number 912263 female Honda connector An example
323. er Supplies ssessesssssssseeeeeeeeneeen eene enne nnne 4 17 Timing Diagram for all Series 90 30 Power Supplies eee 4 18 Serial Port ConnectoE e edo tet e ttem oreste et 4 19 Backup Battery for RAM 4 20 Models 311 and 313 5 Slot Embedded CPU Baseplates sese 5 2 1C693CHS397 5 Slot Modular CPU Baseplate eesssssseeeeeeeeennenenenenn 5 3 CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply esee enne 5 4 CPUS 351 7352 and 363 Ls oh nee e n e ORE EGRE HE ERE ERE ER 5 19 Backup Battery for RAM Memory ccccccsscssseeesseeseeeseeesneceseceseceseecsaeceneceseesseeeeesseeenseenseesees 6 1 Installing the Battery Accessory Kit nennen ener nns 6 10 Example of Series 90 30 Standard Density Discrete Output 7 3 Example of 32 Point I O Module IC693MDL654 With Dual Connectors 7 5 Example of 32 Point I O Module IC693MDL653 With Single Connector 7 5 50 PIN 32 Point I O Module Connection Method eese 7 6 Example of Series 90 30 Analog Current Output Module seen 7 9 IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver Module sese 7 12 Contents XXV Contents Figure 8 1 The IC693CMM301 GCM Madu le ierat e eden dei le tes 8 2 Figure 8 2 Genius Bus
324. er output current rating you must use the lower value of 1 2 Amps for the maximum load current rating If you have field devices that require more than 1 2 Amps do not use a TBQC assembly use the standard Terminal Board that comes with the module instead H 2 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q Components Cable Selection and Cross Reference Three cables are available for connecting between the module s faceplate connector and the terminal block The only difference in these cables is their length These cables have right angle connectors on the module end to minimize the space required in front of the modules These three cables replace three obsolete cables that had straight connectors Use the following table to select the correct cable Cable Catalog Description Replaces Obsolete Number Cable Number IC693CBL330 CBL Assembly 24 pin 90 Deg Right Side 1 0 Meter IC693CBL321 length IC693CBL332 CBL Assembly 24 pin 90 Deg Right Side 2 0 Meter IC693CBL322 length IC693CBL334 CBL Assembly 24 pin 90 Deg Right Side 0 5 Meter IC693CBL323 length I O Face Plate for 16 Point Modules The I O Face Plate catalog number IC693A CC334 has a 24 pin connector which provides the connection to the applicable terminal block through a 0 5 1 or 2 meter cable This face plate replaces the standard terminal board on the listed modules I O Face Plate Installation Step 1 I
325. erminal board m Ground the shield at the module end only exposing a minimum amount of conductor to the noisy environment Do not connect the shield at the device end cut shield off at device end of cable and insulate with shrink tubing TBQC not Recommended for Analog Modules The Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC Assembly is not recommended for use with analog modules due to cable shielding requirements Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 AC Power Source Connections AC Input Wiring to AC DC Power Supplies If the same AC power source is used to provide AC power to other baseplates in a Series 90 30 PLC System ensure that all AC input connections are identical at each rack Do not cross Line 1 L1 and Line 2 L2 A resulting difference in potential can injure personnel or cause damage to equipment Each baseplate must be connected to a common ground Ensure that the protective cover is installed over all terminal boards During normal operation with an AC power source either 120 VAC or 240 VAC is present on the AC Power Supply The cover protects against accidental shock hazard which could cause severe or fatal injury to the operator or maintenance personnel Both the Standard IC693PWR321 and High Capacity IC693PWR330 AC DC power supplies currently have six terminals for user connections Early versions of some Series 90 30 power supplies had five terminals see next figure The wir
326. ernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User s Manual 03560 Chapter 5 CPUs 5 23 Keyswitch This is a standard CPU keyswitch discussed earlier in this chapter Front Panel Connectors The full functionality of these ports is detailed in GFK 1541 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User s Manual m Port 1 RS 232 This connector is used for two purposes 1 To connect a terminal or terminal emulator to access the Station Manager software on the Ethernet Interface 2 To connect to a Personal Computer that will be used to update the Ethernet Interface firmware the CPU firmware is updated separately through the connector on the power supply This RJ 11 connector has the same pinout as Port 1 of the CPUs 351 352 and 353 shown in Table 5 5 The IC693CBL316 cable can be used to access this port See Chapter 10 for a data sheet on this cable m AAUI port This 14 pin AAUI port connects via a user supplied IEEE 802 3 transceiver cable to an external Ethernet compatible transceiver such as the GE catalog number IC649AEA102 for 10Base T or IC649AEA103 for 10Base 2 See Appendix J for details on these transceivers m 10Base T port This 8 pin RJ 45 port provides a direct connection to a 10Base T twisted pair Ethernet network without the need for an external transceiver Shield Ground Connection Tab This tab 1s used to make the module s shield ground connection A wire with the applicable terminal en
327. es eee 12 10 Equipment Accessibility Issues eene 12 10 Number of Modules Per Series 90 30 PLC System sse 12 11 Calculating Power Supply Loading essere 12 12 Load Requirements for Hardware Components sse 12 12 Power Supply Loading Calculation Examples see 12 14 Scan Sweep Time Calculation enne 12 15 Major Design Factors Affecting Scan Time essere 12 16 Where to Find Scan Time Information ssesseseeeeeeeeenenenn 12 16 Calculating PLC Heat Dissipation sssssssssesseeeeeneeenenenen nene enne 12 17 System Layout Guidelines eerie eret E 12 17 Benefits of a Good Layout Safe Reliable and Accessible 12 17 PLC Rack Location and Clearance Requirement essere 12 17 Location of Modules in the PLC Racks esseeeeenen 12 18 Allowable Module Locations ccccccccssscesscesseesceeseeeeseceeesseeeeeensecesecnaeseeeeneeesgs 12 19 Series 90 30 PLC Layout 1 eese enne nnne 12 20 PLC Mounting Positloti i emis ened fetu des 12 21 Recommended Upright Mounting Orientation essen 12 21 Derated Horizontal Mounting Orientation essere 12 21 Contents xix Contents XX Chapter 13 Appendix A Appendix B Maintenance and Troubleshooting
328. es either between a CPU and expansion baseplate between two expansion baseplates or between two remote baseplates in the same cabinet when a standard length 0 5 1 2 8 or 15 meters will fit the need As a Wye jumper for custom built point to point cables IC693CBL300 is often used for this This combination saves time since a point to point cable can be built much faster than a Wye cable An example of this is shown in Figure 10 23 GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 23 Using Custom Built cables When you need a cable length not available in a standard size When a cable must be routed through a conduit that is not large enough for a standard cable s connector to fit through Building Custom Length I O Bus Expansion Cables 10 24 This section provides details needed to create custom length I O Bus Expansion cables Two Types of Custom Built Cables The two types are Point to Point these have a single male connector on one end and a single female connector on the other end These are usually used with the IC693CBL300 which supplies the Wye connection This combination saves time since a point to point cable can be built much faster than a Wye cable Wye these have a single male connector on one end and two connectors one male and one female on the other end Components Needed to Build Custom Length I O Bus Expansion Cables Note the special two headed Wy
329. es 90 30 PLC CPU These ISA compatible cards can be installed in any IBM PC AT ISA bus computer The cards are implemented using computer language software for example C or PC control software Table 11 1 Personal Computer Interface Card Comparison Table ITEM PCIF PCIF2 Catalog Number IC693PIF301 IC693PIF400 Amount of I O controlled 1 280 bytes 25 886 bytes Number of Series 90 30 racks Up to four Expansion or Remote Up to seven Expansion or Remote controlled racks racks Slot requirement IBM PC AT ISA 8 bit half size IBM PC AT ISA 16 bit full size Documentation GFK 0889 IPI GFK 1540 data sheet DOS BASED MICROSOFT C TURBO C WINDOWS BASED SOFTWARE PROGRAMS SOFTWARE C LIBRARY OR WINDOWS DLL MS DOS MS DOS MS WINDOWS DOS TSR ROUTINE PCIF or PCIF2 EXPANSION CABLE EXPANSION CABLE EXPANSION CABLE SERIES 90 30 I O SERIES 90 30 I O SERIES 90 30 I O 5 OR 10 SLOT 5 OR 10 SLOT 5 OR 10 SLOT 5 OR 10 SLOT BASEPLATE BASEPLATE BASEPLATE BASEPLATE SERIES 90 30 I O Figure 11 6 Example of PCIF Interface to Series 90 30 1 0 Both of these PCIF cards have a 25 pin I O expansion connector that connects to standard Series 90 30 Expansion and Remote baseplates see the Baseplates chapter via I O expansion cabling Remote racks can be located up to 700 feet 213 meters and Expansion racks up to 50 feet 15 meters
330. es a 6 pin RJ 11 connector The IC693CBL316 Station Manager cable is ideal for connecting to this port see Chapter 10 for details The Firmware Upgrade Port The 15 pin D type RS 485 port is used to connect to the PC Downloader in case the communications software in the Ethernet Interface needs to be updated Use the IC690ACC901 miniconverter cable kit for this connection see Appendix E for details AAUI Transceiver Port The 14 pin AAUI port connects to an external Ethernet compatible transceiver via an IEEE 802 3 transceiver cable GE catalog number IC649AEA102 for 10Base T or IC649AEA103 for 10Base2 are suitable transceivers see Appendix J for details Default MAC Address Label The Default MAC Address label lists the Ethernet MAC address to be used by this module Serial Number Label The Serial Number Label indicates the serial number of this Interface Ethernet Interface Module Documentation For details refer to GFK 1541 Series 90 30 TCP IP Ethernet Communications User s Manual Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 1C693PCM300 301 311 Programmable Coprocessor Module PCM 03560 The Programmable Coprocessor Module PCM is a high performance coprocessor for the Series 90 30 Modular CPUs will not work with Embedded CPU models 311 313 or 323 The PCM supports the Modbus RTU and GE CCM protocols as well as the MegaBasic and C programming languages A free p
331. es to the terminal boards or terminal blocks strips If wiring to terminal boards these can be removed for ease of wiring if desired See the section Removing a Module s Terminal Board When finished wiring the I O terminal boards if used and if you removed them for ease of wiring re install them on the modules being careful to match each one with the correct module 03560 Chapter 2 Installation 2 29 Chapter Baseplates 3 Baseplate Types A baseplate is composed of three main parts 1 a circuit board mounted to 2 a metal back plate with 3 a plastic cover The circuit board called the backplane contains sockets for plug in modules The metal back plate has four holes for mounting the baseplate and retainers for mounting the modules The plastic cover provides protection for the circuit board slotted holes for the module connectors and retainers and printed labels such as the baseplate description serial number and slot number labels There are three basic types of baseplates discussed in this chapter CPU m Expansion m Remote Common Baseplate Features The following figure shows the features that are common to all Series 90 30 baseplates Note that a modular CPU baseplate is shown GFK 0356Q 3 1 o T J I I E 2 PROGRAMMABLE 2 3 BASES SLOT CONTROLLER NON CPU SLOTS USER PROGRAM
332. esseeseeeenene nn H 8 IC693ACC332 TBQC Terminal Block essessseeeeeenee nen H 9 IC693ACC333 TBQC Terminal 1 H 10 Terminal Block Quick Connect Components for 32 Point Modules H 11 Terminal Block tte em ec nite H 12 Cable Selection and Cross Reference H 12 Cable Current Rating e eee e I ha tard na aid bas bat aes H 12 Cable D t tocsxc emnt Em IL ha siete he LU H 13 Terr inal Block Dat eter tette Neve en e desi H 13 IC693ACC337 TBQC Terminal Bl cken REEE H 13 SNP MultidrOD zusadcdidqes etate eM a Renee ea eun a E RIA EE I 1 SNP Multidrop Overview ccccsccessecssecssecssecesecsseeeesecssecsseceeceeeceeeceaeceseceseeeteeeseeenneenseesas I 1 Multidrop Cablesz a a Th e is elder e PES I 2 nist et ree toes o Ta I 2 Cable and Connector Specifications essen enne I 2 MultiDrop Cable Wiring 1 nennen enne I 3 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Appendix J Appendix K Appendix L GFK 0356Q Contents SNP Multidrop Examples I 4 Configuring and Connecting a Programmer to a Multidrop Network I 5 Assigning a PLC SNP ID to a PLC with L
333. et 500 meters Modules with serial ports communicating via modems and telephone lines or satellite links can cover unlimited distances W High speed inputs The IC693APU300 High Speed Counter can be used with encoders to count high speed pulse trains The IC693APU305 I O Processor module is an intelligent module that can satisfy high speed input and output requirements independent of the PLC scan W Motion needs The IC693APM301 302 IC693DSM302 and IC693DSM314 motion control modules work with servo motor controllers and other motion devices The IC693APU300 High Speed Counter module counts high speed pulses from encoders for use in measuring motion related data W Temperature control The IC693TCM302 Temperature Control Module TCM has thermocouple inputs and PWM outputs W Extended features Where there are two or more Option module choices for a particular application often an extended feature requirement determines which one to choose For example there are two Ethernet choices the IC693CMM321 and the IC693CPU364 but only the IC693CPU364 has Ethernet Global Data EGD capability W Remote or distributed I O needs One distributed I O solution is the use of GE s Genius Blocks which can be mounted at the point of use and connected with a PLC s Genius Bus Controller GBC module via a twisted pair cable The GBC is the only Series 90 30 module that can control Genius Blocks Other modules GCM GCM can read input data broadcast
334. f 4 2 overvoltage protection devices 2 24 4 5 4 16 specifications 4 3 Accompany Program 8 1 Acronyms and abbreviations ADC 3 12 CMM 3 12 DIP 2 28 GCM 8 2 GCM4 8 4 HHP 11 1 HMI 12 3 PCM 3 12 PLC 1 1 SLP 9 4 TBQC 2 18 TCM 8 2 AD693CMM301 module drawing 9 2 Index State Logic Serial Module 9 2 AD693SLP300 State Logic processor 9 4 Adapter bracket for 10 slot baseplate 2 8 3 20 ADC Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor 8 35 Wye cable 10 35 Address Memory 5 10 Analog I O modules Figure 7 9 Wiring methods 2 21 7 9 APM Axis Positioning Module 8 15 Cable data sheets 10 45 Appendices Ethernet transceivers J 1 isolated repeater converter C 1 Axis Positioning Module APM 8 15 B Backplane Baseplate 3 12 Definition 3 3 Backup User program 6 3 Backup battery 4 20 Baseplate Comparison table 3 22 expansion dimensions 3 18 Grounding 2 12 Modular CPU dimensions 3 18 mounting 2 8 remote 10 slot 3 9 remote 5 slot 3 9 remote dimensions 3 18 selecting 12 5 Baseplate adapter bracket for 10 slot baseplate 2 8 3 20 installation 2 9 3 20 Baseplate installation mounting requirements model 311 313 323 3 16 Baseplate remote figure 3 9 Baseplates adapter bracket 2 8 3 20 Common features 3 1 dimensions for mounting 10 slot 3 17 3 18 dimensions for mounting 5 slot 3 16 3 17 Embedded CPU dimensions 3 16 Expansion 3 7 Expansion and Remote in same system 3 11 Expansi
335. f a programmable logic control system and the devices it is controlling must be properly grounded This is particularly important for the following reasons m A low resistance path from all parts of a system to earth minimizes exposure to shock in the event of short circuits or equipment malfunction m The Series 90 30 PLC system requires proper grounding for correct operation Ground Conductors Ground conductors should be connected in a tree fashion with branches routed to a central earth ground point shown in the figure below This ensures that no ground conductor carries current from any other branch This method is shown in the following figure m Ground conductors should be as short and as large in size as possible Braided straps or ground cables typically green insulation with a yellow tracer AWG 12 3 3 mm or larger can be used to minimize resistance Conductors must always be large enough to carry the maximum short circuit current of the path being considered PROGRAMMING DEVICE SERIES 90 30 PLC CABINET RACK 0 RACK MOTOR DRIVES AND OTHER ELECTRICAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT MACHINERY Figure 2 10 Recommended System Grounding 03560 Chapter 2 Installation EARTH GROUND CENTRAL GROUND POINT NOTE SIGNAL AND POWER CONNECTIONS ARE NOT SHOWN 2 11 Series 90 30 PLC Equipment Grounding Equipment grounding recommendations and pro
336. f the Remote I O Scanner sssssssssssssseeeeeee eene 8 12 EIP Bus Interfaeec eine REP ERR LO ne HERR LO eae 8 13 Module Description eere erret enne 8 13 CONNEC COIS oce 8 14 beo tbe het taie enia ee 8 14 FIP Remote I O Scanner Documentation 8 14 1C693APU301 302 Motion Mate Axis Positioning Module APM 8 15 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Chapter 9 03560 Contents APM Cables dareel ea a 8 16 Motion Mate APM Module Documentation essere 8 16 IC693DSM302 Motion Mate Digital Servo Module 05 302 8 17 Features p E n HR nere Te PALA denen neo en 8 18 IC693DSM302 8 18 IC693DSM314 Motion Mate Digital Servo Module 05 314 8 20 Features o rd t te aar apre qe a Oe s 8 21 IC693DSM314 Documentation essere 8 22 IC693APU300 High Speed Counter HSC Module sse 8 23 IC693BEM320 I O LINK Interface Slave Module see 8 24 IC693BEM321 I O LINK Master Module sees 8 25 Compatibility i ER RERBA RI metes 8 26 IC693APU305 I O Processor Module essen 8 27 Modu l Ecat res a e pp
337. female connector on the RS 422 RS 485 connector on the converter e Connect the other end of this cable to the 15 pin female connector which interfaces to the RS 485 compatible serial port on the Series 90 30 or Series 90 70 PLC For the Series 90 30 PLC this connector is accessed by opening the hinged door on the power supply The serial port connector for the Series 90 70 PLC is on the CPU module and is accessed by opening the hinged door on the module Cable Description The serial connection to the Series 90 70 PLC see Figure B 1 is to the RS 422 RS 485 compatible serial port connector located at the bottom of the CPU module behind the hinged door through a 6 foot 2 meter serial interface cable IC693CBL303 Wiring information and recommended cable and connectors are provided for those who may want to build their own cable having a different length The serial connection to the Series 90 30 PLC is to the RS 485 compatible serial port connector located behind the hinged door on the right front of the power supply through the same 6 foot serial interface cable IC693CBL303 or equivalent Figure B 2 SERIES 90 70 U PROGRAMMER RS 485 RS 232 CONVERTER Figure B 2 Typical Configuration with Series 90 70 PLC GFK 0356Q Appendix IC690ACC900 Converter B 3 SERIES 90 30 PROGRAMMER CONVERTER Figure B 3 Typical Configuration with Series 90 30 PLC
338. fer to the section Installing Modules if you are not familiar with how to do this Connect cables to Option modules Route cables away from noise producing wires See the Wire Routing section of this chapter Be sure to follow the information in the Wiring Guidelines section of this chapter to protect the system from electrical noise Install the power wires to the Power Supply and I O modules m I O modules with removable terminal boards You can wire the terminal boards in place on the modules or remove them from the modules before wiring Although removing them may help make wiring easier a previous section Working with Removable Terminal Boards shows how to remove a terminal board care should be taken to avoid mixing them each terminal board has the catalog number of the module printed on it and the hinged cover has a wiring diagram for that module type If you are using wire duct routing each module s wires through the opening in the duct directly under the module will help to keep each terminal board in its correct position m I O Modules with terminal blocks Some modules use terminal blocks that mount to the enclosure panel This includes all 32 point modules and can include other I O modules if they are fitted with the optional Terminal Block Quick Connect Assembly Connect the terminal blocks to the connectors on the modules with the provided cables Connect the signal switches sensors solenoids etc wir
339. for connection to thin coaxial Ethernet cable e This unit has an attached 10 254 mm cable with standard 14 pin AAUI connector for connecting to a Series 90 30 Ethernet module IC693CMM321 or CPU with Ethernet interface IC693CPU364 e SQE slide switch is set to enabled position at the factory It must be in this position for proper operation with GE Ethernet products IC693CMM321 and IC693CPU364 see figure below e Power LED indicator light 3 2 inches 81 mm 10 inches 254mm 0 9 23 mm Slide Switch in this Direction to Enable SQE co yore Slide Switch recessed in housing 14 Pin AAUI Connector 7 6 5 4321 Green LED BNC Connector Power Indicator 8 9 10111213 14 Figure J 2 IC649AEA103 Ethernet 10BASE2 Transceiver Power Requirement This unit draws 400 mA 5Vdc from the Ethernet Interface via the AAUI connector LED Indicator Light Located on the side of the unit as shown in the figure This green LED turns on to indicate the presence of 5Vdc power to the unit J 2 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Appendix Tables and Formulas K 03560 Table K 1 Standard ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange Codes Dec 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CHOIDNAWNHO GHNAANVOAZZMASH TODMVADFO rvil Av Char gt NK KS lt 1 6 0 KEK Ce MH ODOR B
340. g of 1 2 Amps which is more than adequate to handle the current requirement of any of the 32 point I O modules listed in the previous table Replaces Obsolete Catalog Number Cable Description and Length Cable Number IC693CBL329 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Left Side IC693CBL321 Cable length 1 0 Meter IC693CBL330 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Right Side IC693CBL321 Cable length 1 0 Meter IC693CBL331 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Left Side IC693CBL322 Cable length 2 0 Meters IC693CBL332 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Right Side IC693CBL322 Cable length 2 0 Meters IC693CBL333 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Left Side IC693CBL323 Cable length 0 5 Meter IC693CBL334 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Right Side IC693CBL323 Cable length 0 5 Meter Cable Kits IC693CBK 002 Cable Kit Includes both the IC693CBL329 left side and IC693CBL330 right side cables IC693CBK 003 Cable Kit Includes both the IC693CBL331 left side and IC693CBL332 right side cables IC693CBK 004 Cable Kit Includes both the IC693CBL333 left side and IC693CBL334 right side cables Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q Components Cable Data Data sheets for these cables are found in the Cables chapter of this manual Terminal Block Data 1693ACC337 TBQC Terminal Block Use with the following 32 point I O modules 2 required per module IC693MDL654 IC693MDL655 IC693
341. g terminal contacts a painted enclosure panel either a star lock washer can be installed between the terminal and the panel to cut through the paint or the paint can be scraped away down to clean bare metal to ensure a good contact Note The star lock washer method is suitable for a shield ground but not suitable for a safety ground CPU351 or 352 o A e J m Wo BOTTOM OF CPU MODULE USE 1 6 MACHINE SCREW 44A735970 001R01 6 TAPPED HOLE REMOVE PAINT UNDER RING TERMINAL OR INSTALL STAR LOCK WASHER BETWEEN TERMINAL AND PANEL STAB ON CONNECTOR MOUNT ON GROUNDED ENCLOSURE Figure 2 12 CPU 351 or 352 Attaching Shield Ground Wire Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 2 The second method which can be used for systems in noisy environments consists of installing the green ground wire and the optional grounding bracket part number 44C715646 001R01 This bracket attaches to the CPU using two 4 thread rolling screws part number N666P9004B6 and to the grounded enclosure using two 6 thread rolling screws part number N666P13006B6 Two holes must be drilled in the enclosure for mounting this bracket Also if the bracket will be attached to a painted surface the paint should be removed down to bare metal under the bracket to ensure good contact between the bracket and the surface See the next figure 44C715646 001R01 PAINT REMOVED WHERE BRACKET BRACKET MO
342. ge current 26 lt A at 26 VDC operating voltage Turn on response time lt 1 S with resistive load Turn off response time lt 1 S with resistive load Output protection per channel Reversed biased zener diode for free wheeling inductive current Also 36 Volt transorb for ESD and surge protection INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Input Voltage 5 VDC TTL nominal 12Vdc Maximum Logic 1 Level Logic 1 V 3 5 VDC Logic 0 V 0 7 VDC Input Current 3 8 mA nominal Input protection 13 3 Volt transorb AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY OUTPUTS Voltage and Current 15 VDC 0 3A and 15 VDC 0 2A Isolation Not isolated MODULE POWER REQUIREMENTS Power Consumption Does not consume 5 6 Watts with all outputs on from external any power from PLC backplane supply connected to terminals 1 and 2 does not include power consumed by outputs Input Voltage 26 VDC nominal 35 VDC maximum continuous m Quantity 1 Module control power 1 Amp Buss GDB 1A m Quantity 4 One for each output 2 Amps Littlefuse 239002 Chapter 7 Input Output Modules 7 13 DVM Connections Table 7 2 1C693DVM300 Connections Signal Name Connection Description No Module Control Power input terminal common on pin 2 Supplies power to module s signal level circuits and auxiliary 15 and 15 Volt power supplies pins 2 3 and 4 Requires external 26 VDC nominal power supply 28V RET Common terminal for Module Control Power
343. gle connector on one end and stripped leads on the other see the data sheet for the IC693CBL327 328 cables for further information r Cable Length see table Figure 10 40 1C693CBL329 330 331 332 333 334 Cables Note Each conductor in these 24 conductor cables has a current rating of 1 2 Amps If using these cables with a 16 point Output module with a higher output current rating you must use the lower value of 1 2 for the maximum load current rating If you have field devices that require more than 1 2 Amps do not use a TBQC assembly Use the standard Terminal Board instead 10 62 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 GFK 0356Q Cables Table 10 12 TBQC Cable Cross Reference Table Cable Catalog Cable Description Replaces Obsolete Number and Length Cable Number IC693CBL329 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Left Side IC693CBL321 Cable length 1 0 Meter IC693CBL330 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Right Side IC693CBL321 Cable length 1 0 Meter IC693CBL331 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Left Side IC693CBL322 Cable length 2 0 Meters IC693CBL332 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Right Side IC693CBL322 Cable length 2 0 Meters IC693CBL333 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Left Side IC693CBL323 Cable length 0 5 Meter 1C693CBL334 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Right Side 1C693CBL323 Cable
344. guration someone will have to remember to write the changed information to the PROM device If that step is forgotten the change only exists in RAM memory and in a battery less system it will be lost the next time power is removed from the PLC Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 03560 5 Configuring a Battery Less System Here are the basic steps to configure a system to run battery less When configured this way the contents of PROM memory will be written into RAM memory each time the PLC powers up m Equip your CPU with a PROM device On some CPUs a PROM device is purchased as an option on others it is a standard feature For a table that identifies the standard PROM configuration for each CPU see CPU Firmware and PROM Configurations in chapter 5 m There three CPU configuration parameters involved Configure them as follows Pwr Up Mode RUN Logic Cfg PROM Registers PROM m Store your folder include Program Logic Configuration and Register Data to the PLC This places your entire folder into RAM working memory m Write PLC RAM memory to the PROM device Make sure you write all data Program Logic Configuration and Register Data to the PROM Note that the type of PROM device depends on what model CPU you have and how it is equipped m If you are using a 340 or higher CPU such as a CPU350 CPU351 etc read the next section for an additional require
345. h receive signals make up the other twisted pair If this is ignored cross task resulting from the mismatching will affect the performance of the communications system When routing communication cables outdoors transient suppression devices can be used to reduce the possibility of damage due to lightning or static discharge Care should be exercised that all connected devices are grounded to a common point Failure to do so could result in damage to the equipment A 2 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Serial Ports and Cables Series 90 PLC Serial Port The Series 90 PLC serial port is compatible with RS 422 An RS 232 to RS 422 converter is required to interface to systems that provide RS 232 compatible interfaces The Series 90 PLC RS 422 serial port provides the physical connection for SNP communication This port is a 15 pin D type female connector located as follows m Series 90 70 PLC and Series 90 20 CPU Module m Series 90 30 PLC Power Supply Figure 1 shows the serial port orientation and connector layout for the Series 90 PLC types The orientation of the connector on the Series 90 20 CPU is rotated 90 degrees from the Series 90 30 connector with pin 1 to the upper right Table A 2 shows the pin numbering and signal assignment applicable to both PLCs SERIES 90 70 PLC SERIES 90 30 PLC O NOTE SERIES 90 PLC CON
346. hapter 7 Input Output Modules 7 15 7 16 Table 7 4 Series 90 30 Analog I O Modules Catalog Number IC693ALG220 IC693ALG221 IC693ALG222 IC693ALG223 IC693ALG390 IC693ALG391 IC693ALG392 IC693ALG442 4 In 2 Out Analog Modules Analog Input Voltage Analog Input Current Analog Input Voltage High Density Analog Input Current High Density Analog Output Voltage Analog Output Current Analog Output Current Voltage High Density Analog Current Voltage Combination Input Output Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Chapter Option Modules This chapter provides an overview of Series 90 30 Option modules For detailed information the applicable user s manual should be consulted these manuals are listed for each module at the end of its section Third Party Option Modules and the Accompany Program In addition to the modules discussed in this chapter numerous third party option modules and other hardware and software products for the Series 90 30 PLC are available to meet a wide variety of needs Third party companies that meet GE s standards may apply for recognition under the GE Accompany Program Details on the Accompany Program are found in the GE Solutions Catalog or on the GE web site both listed below For information on third party modules consult the following Your GE PLC distributor or sales engineer The GE web site at hitp www ge ip com
347. hapter 8 Option Modules 8 11 IC693BEM330 FIP Remote I O Scanner Module The FIP Factory Instrumentation Protocol Remote I O Scanner catalog number IC693BEM330 is an intelligent module that interfaces Series 90 30 I O modules to a FIP bus Up to 19 I O modules can be accommodated by using two 10 slot baseplates connected by an expansion cable Together the Remote I O Scanner and the modules it serves are referred to as an I O Nest The FIP Nest can include most Series 90 30 I O modules The host CPU can be any type of CPU capable of communicating on a FIP bus A module in the host such as a FIP Bus Controller provides the necessary interface between the FIP bus and the host CPU Hand held Programmer Host CPU CPU Nest FIP 5 Bus Controller 8 in FIP Bus Expansion Cable eee up to 50 feet 15 Meters Up to 128 devices f The Series 90 30 Hand Held Programmer provides a convenient way to perform setup monitoring and control functions Figure 8 8 Example of FIP Remote I O Scanner System Configuration Features of the Remote I O Scanner The FIP Remote I O Scanner performs the following basic functions controls operation of the I O nest in the selected mode Wi scans discrete and analog I O modules and maintains I O scan timing maps I O data to FIP application variables detects module and system faults and reports them to the FI
348. have replaceable fuses The next section Module Fuse List identifies these modules and their applicable fuses GE offers a repair product warranty service through your local distributor Contact your distributor for details 03560 Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13 5 Module Fuse List Replace fuse only with the correct size and type Using an incorrect fuse can result in harm to personnel damage to equipment or both Table 13 1 Fuse List for Series 90 30 Modules Module Current Quantity on GE Fuse Third Party Sources Catalog Module Type Rating Module Part Number and Part Numbers Number IC693CPU364 CPU Module with 1A 1 44A725214 001 Littlefuse R454 001 embedded Ethernet interface 1C693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver N A Bussman GDB 1A N A Littlefuse 239002 IC693MDL310 120 VAC 0 5A 44 724627 111 1 Bussman GMC 3 Littlefuse 239003 IC693MDL330 120 240 VAC 1A 44 724627 114 1 Bussman GDC 5 Bussman 5506 5 IC693MDL340 120 VAC 0 5A 44 724627 111 1 Bussman GMC 3 Littlefuse 239003 IC693MDL390 120 240 VAC 2A 44 724627 111 1 Bussman GMC 3 Littlefuse 239003 IC693MDL730 12 24 VDC Positive 259A9578P16 1 Bussman AGC 5 Logic 2A Littlefuse 312005 IC693MDL731 12 24 VDC Negative 259A9578P16 1 Bussman AGC 5 Logic 2A Littlefuse 312005 IC693PWR321 120 240 VAC or 125 VDC 44 724627 109 2 Bussman 215 002 and Input 30 Watt Power GDC 2 or GMC
349. he carrier As the consignee it is your responsibility to register a claim with the carrier for damage incurred during shipment However GE will fully cooperate with you if such action is necessary Pre installation Check After unpacking Series 90 30 PLC racks cables modules etc record all serial numbers Serial numbers are printed on the module packaging Serial numbers are required to make a claim during the warranty period of the equipment All software product registration cards should be completed and returned to GE See Module Features in this chapter for location of module serial numbers See Common Baseplate Features in chapter 3 for location of baseplate serial numbers You should verify that all components of the system have been received and that they agree with your order If the parts received do not agree with your order call Programmable Control Customer Service at 1 800 433 2682 A Customer Service representative will provide further instructions Warranty Claims Record the serial number of the defective item and contact your distributor for instructions 03560 2 1 Working with Series 90 30 Modules 2 2 Module Features Y ELT gt IC693CPUxxx CPU MODULE 25 MHZ LISTED XXXXXXX gt 123456789 123456789 oy 1 OOO 000 a Figure 2 1 Features of Series 90 30 Module ROY UA 5 199 iN e RK OO
350. hen the bus is operating properly It blinks for intermittent bus errors and is off for a failed bus It is also off when no configuration has been received from the PLC CPU GCM Documentation For more information about the GCM refer to GFK 0695 Series 90 30 Enhanced Genius Communications Module User s Guide 03560 Chapter 8 Option Modules 8 5 8 6 IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Controller GBC The Series 90 30 Genius Bus Controller GBC catalog number IC693BEM331 provides the interface between a Series 90 30 PLC and a Genius I O serial bus The GBC receives and transmits control data of up to 128 bytes for up to 31 devices on the Genius I O bus A Genius Bus Controller can serve W Genius blocks which provide an interface to a wide range of discrete analog and special purpose field devices Note that the GCM and GCM modules described earlier cannot control Genius blocks W Remote Drops which consist of Series 90 70 I O racks interfaced to the bus through Remote I O Scanner modules Each of these drops can have any mix of Series 90 70 discrete and analog I O modules providing up to 128 bytes of input data and 128 bytes of output data W Field Control I O Station which consists of a Bus Interface Unit BIU and up to eight additional Field Control modules The BIU provides intelligent processing I O scanning and feature configuration for the I O station W Genius Hand Held Monitor HHM which is a portable device tha
351. hese 50 Pin modules are an older design and are not generally used on new systems unless to fulfill standardization requirements They are mainly used as replacements for existing installations For new installations we recommend the dual 24 pin connector style because they have additional features not found on the older modules LED indicators TBQC and it is much easier to fabricate custom length cables for them Installation information is provided here for the convenience of those still using these modules Using Weidmuller 912263 Terminal Block Note The TBQC is not available for these modules but you may purchase a Weidmuller 912263 from your electronics distributor for this application Mount the Weidmuller 912263 terminal block It has a 50 pin connector and a terminal strip and mounts on a standard 35 mm DIN rail m Connect an IC693CBL306 307 cable between the module s faceplate connector and the connector on the Weidmuller terminal block See Chapter 10 for cable data m Wire I O devices to the terminal block See the Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual GFK 0898 for pin out information 03560 Chapter 2 Installation 2 19 2 20 Using a Generic Terminal Block or Strip Mount terminal block strip to the enclosure panel m Connect an IC693CBL308 or 309 cable or a custom made cable to the module s faceplate connector and wire the stripped ends of the cable to the terminal block strip See Chapter
352. hese modules are useful in applications where a high count of DC I O points is required The maximum number of I O points for a Series 90 30 system can be obtained by using a CPU that supports a total of eight 10 slot racks and by populating the racks with 32 point modules The theoretical maximum number of I O points possible is calculated by adding the nine available slots in the CPU rack the CPU must occupy one slot to the 70 slots in the seven 10 slot expansion or remote racks to get a total of 79 slots Multiply 79 times 32 for a maximum of 2 528 I O points only CPUs 350 364 support this many I O points This assumes that every slot is populated with a 32 point I O module Most practical applications require some slots for option modules reducing the number of slots available for I O modules accordingly 7 4 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 1 ss 12 Reps Pin 12 oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo Left Side Connector Pin A1 INPUT 32 PT o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 7 5 mA Pt 24 VDC ISOL NEG POS LOGIC 000000000000000000 A1234 5678 B1234 567 C1234 5678 01234 56789 5 12 VDC POS NEG LOGIC 3 0 mA Pt at 5VDC 8 5 mA Pt at 12VDC CD Rz O O G n LED Indicators P
353. hly integrated with the logic solving and communications functions of the Series 90 30 PLC In digital mode this module controls GE digital servos In analog mode this module controls servos with an analog command input such as the GE SL Series Servos or third party analog servos COMM 6 pin RJ 11 connector Status LED s Provides RS 232 Stat OK connection for firmware CFG update EN1 EN4 Connector A Servo Axis 1 Connector C Servo Axis 3 Connector B Servo Axis 2 Connector D Servo Axis 4 Motion Mate Grounding Tab on Bottom of Module Figure 8 13 Motion Mate DSM314 Module 8 20 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 03560 Features Digital Signal Processor DSP control of GE Servos W Block Processing time under 5 milliseconds Velocity Feed Forward and Position Error Integrator to enhance tracking accuracy W High resolution of programming units Position 536 870 912 536 870 911 User Units Velocity 1 8 388 607 User Units sec Acceleration 1 1 073 741 823 User Units sec sec Simple and powerful motion program instruction set Simple 1 to 4 axis motion programs Multi axis programs using Axes 1 and 2 may utilize a synchronized block start Non volatile storage for 10 programs and 40 subroutines created with VersaPro software Version 1 1 or later W Compatible with Series 90 30 CPUs equipped with firmware release 10 0 or
354. iance 5V 24V and analog I O for use by PLC Incremental Quadrature Encoder input on each axis for Encoder Analog mode Quadrature Encoder input for Follower Master axis 13 bit Analog Output can be controlled by PLC or used as Digital Servo Tuning monitor High speed digital output four each 24V and four each 5V via on board Local Logic control Chapter 8 Option Modules 6 21 8 22 1C693DSM314 Documentation GFK 1742 Motion Mate DSM314 for Series 90 30 PLC User s Manual Related servo manuals GFK 1581 SL Series Servo User s Manual GFH 001 Beta Series Servo Products Specification Guide GFZ 65192EN Alpha Series Servo Amplifier SVU Descriptions Manual GFZ 65162E Control Motor Amplifier Alpha Series GFZ 65142E GFZ 65150E GFZ 65165E Alpha Series Servo Motor Manuals Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 IC693APU300 High Speed Counter HSC Module 03560 The High Speed Counter IC693APU300 for the Series 90 30 PLC is single slot module which can be used in applications where pulse input rates exceed the input capability of the PLC or where too large a percentage of PLC processing capability would be required The High Speed Counter provides direct processing of rapid pulse signals up to 80 KHz for industrial applications such as meter proving turbine flowmeter velocity measurement material handling motion control and process control With direct processing th
355. ied in the NEC and OSHA requirements Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 System Design and Layout Number of Modules Per Series 90 30 PLC System 03560 The following table lists the maximum number of each type of I O and option modules that can be installed in a Series 90 30 PLC system The number of modules that can be installed in a system depends on several factors including available references for each CPU model the current rating for each module to be installed in the system and other installed modules Before installing modules in a baseplate verify that the total current rating of all of those modules does not exceed the power rating of the power supply Table 12 2 Maximum Number of Modules Per System CPU CPU CPU Module Type Model 311 313 323 Model 331 340 341 Model 350 364 Input and Output Discrete 5 5 slot baseplate 49 331 340 341 79 10 10 slot baseplate Input Module Analog 4 Channel 5 5 slot baseplate 40 64 8 10 slot baseplate Input Module Analog 16 Channel 4 8 Model 331 51 12 Model 340 341 Output Module Voltage Analog 2 Channel 5 5 slot baseplate 16 Model 331 48 6 10 slot baseplate 30 Model 340 341 Output Module Current Analog 2 Channel 3 5 slot baseplate 15 Model 331 24 3 10 slot baseplate 15 Model 340 341 Output Module Analog 8 Channel 4 8 Model 331 79 32
356. if your CPU can support those changes The features and capabilities of your CPU are determined by its revision levels hardware and firmware This section discusses methods that you can use to determine your CPU s revision levels and associated features and capabilities Direct Methods m Obtain the information from the Important Product Information IPI sheet that came with your CPU However if your CPU firmware has been upgraded the IPI will not indicate the current revision level m The surest way to determine a CPU s firmware revision level is to read it from the CPU by using your programmer Your programmer must be connected to the PLC and be in Online or Monitor mode and the PLC must be powered up For example on the Logicmaster PLC STATUS and CONTROL screen is an item called SOFTWARE REVISION The data displayed in that field such as 6 04 is the firmware revision level See the Logicmaster 90 30 Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 or the user s manual for the programming software you use for additional details Indirect Method Check the catalog number printed on the module identification label on the side of the module On all Series 90 30 modules this catalog number indicates the module s revision level s For some CPUS the catalog number contains a single letter at the end to indicate the CPU s overall revision level For example Chapter 5 CPUs 5 7 IC693CPU341 J This tells us that the module has
357. igure 10 9 PCM ADC or CMM to Workmaster II or PS 2 Serial Cable 10 16 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables PCM to Programmer Cable Installation The Series 90 30 PLC baseplate that contains the PCM ADC or CMM and the programmer ground connections must be at the same ground potential Incorrect wiring will result in damage to the programmer or the module Select the WYE cable IC693CBL305 or IC693CBL304 Connect the IC690CBL705 cable s 25 pin female connector to the male RS 232 connector serial port on the selected programming device Connect the cable s 25 pin male connector to the Port 1 connector on the WYE cable Connect the 25 pin male connector on the WYE cable to the female connector on the front of the PCM ADC or CMM module WORKMASTER II IC690CBL705 RS 232 DEFAULT PORT by IC693CBL305B PORT 1 Figure 10 10 PCM to Workmaster Il Computer or PS 2 Computer GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 17 IC690CBL714A Multidrop Cable Purpose This cable has a number of possible applications with Series 90 products To interconnect Series 90 30 PLCs or redundant Series 90 30 PLCs in a multidrop configuration To interconnect a Series 90 30 PLC and APM module in a multidrop configuration with a single personal computer programmer This allows programming and troubleshooting both PLC and APM with
358. in A1 I Right Side Connector Pin A12 Connector Pin N umbering Figure 7 3 Example of 32 Point I O Module IC693MDL653 With Single Connector 03560 Chapter 7 Input Output Modules Wiring Methods for 32 Point Discrete I O Modules Modules with Single 50 Pin Connector Three choices are available for connecting these modules Connect to a Weidmuller 912263 terminal block using one of the two GE extension cables see next figure Cable IC693CBL306 is 3 feet 1meter long Cable IC693CBL307 is 6 feet 2 meters long Chapter 10 Cables has details on these cables Connect to a user supplied terminal block strip or I O field devices using one of the two GE interface cables These cables have a 50 pin connector on one end that plugs into the module and stripped tinned leads on the other for wiring to a terminal block strip or I O field devices Cable IC693CBL308 is 3 feet 1 meter long and cable IC693CBL309 is 6 feet 2 meters long These cables are useful if you have to run your wiring through conduit that is too small for a connector to fit through Build a custom length cable This is required if you need a cable longer than 6 feet 2 meters See the IC693CBL308 309 data sheet in Chapter 10 for pin out details IC693CBL306 30 50 Pin FA Extension Cable Modul Series 90 30 PLC
359. in a system there are just a few basic categories Each of these component categories is covered in detail in a separate chapter in this manual They are introduced in this chapter so you can see how they fit together Baseplates Power Supplies CPUs I O Modules Option Modules Cables Baseplates The baseplates are the foundation of the PLC system because most other components mount on them Asa basic minimum every system has at least one baseplate which usually contains the CPU in which case it is referred to as the CPU Baseplate Many systems require more modules than can be mounted on one baseplate so there are also Expansion and Remote baseplates that connect together The three categories of baseplates CPU Expansion and Remote are available in two sizes 5 slot and 10 slot named according to the number of modules they can hold Power Supply Modules Every baseplate must have its own power supply The power supply always mounts in a baseplate s left most slot There are several power supply models available to meet a variety of requirements GFK 0356Q 1 1 CPUs The CPU is the manager of the PLC Every PLC system must have one A CPU uses the instructions in its firmware and application program to direct the PLC s operation and to monitor the system to make sure there are no basic faults Some Series 90 30 CPUs are built into baseplates but most are contained in plug in modules In some cases the CPU resides i
360. inch pounds 1 Newton meter of torque 03560 Chapter 2 Installation 2 7 Baseplate Mounting Be sure to follow baseplate grounding instructions in this chapter Failure to properly ground the PLC can result in improper operation damage to equipment and injury to personnel Mounting a Baseplate to a Panel Use four good quality 8 32 x 1 2 4 x 12mm machine screws lock washers and flat washers Install the screws in four tapped holes The Baseplates chapter has the applicable dimensions and mounting clearances Alternately 10 slot baseplates can be mounted in standard 19 inch racks by using the appropriate adapter This is also discussed in the Baseplates chapter A vertical mounting orientation 1s preferred for maximum heat dissipation Other mounting orientations will require derating the Power Supply current capabilities See Chapter 12 System Design for details All baseplates must be grounded The Baseplate Safety Grounding section of this chapter has details The Rack Number Selection switch must be set on each Expansion or Remote baseplate A CPU baseplate does not require this switch Rack numbers should be assigned by the system designer Failure to set the Rack Number Selection switches properly will result in system malfunction See the Baseplates chapter for details on setting these switches Mounting a Baseplate to a 19 Rack Two optional Baseplate Adapter Brackets allow a 10 slot basep
361. information on the memory backup battery see the chapter Memory Backup and Backup Battery 4 20 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Chapter 5 CPUs CPU Types for Series 90 30 PLCs There are numerous CPU models available for the Series 90 30 PLC which differ in speed I O capacity size of user memory and advanced features This variety of models gives a system designer considerable flexibility in choosing the one best suited to the system being designed There are two basic types of CPUs Embedded and Modular The embedded types fulfill the need for a good low cost PLC but lack the power expandability and versatility of the modular systems In the embedded types the CPU is built into the baseplate In the modular types the CPU is contained inside a plug in module Embedded CPUs 03560 The embedded CPUs part of an embedded CPU baseplate In these products CPU and memory integrated circuit chips are soldered to the backplane board of the baseplate This chapter discusses the CPU features of these products Details about the baseplate features are located in Chapter 2 There are three different embedded CPUs Model 311 IC693CPU311 Model 313 1C693CPU313 and Model 323 IC693CPU323 The embedded CPUs have the following basic features m The CPU type cannot be changed It 1s soldered to the backplane board in the baseplate m They do not support the use of E
362. ing PLC memory allocation I 16 bits 94Q 16 bits V6 AI 25 words AQ 2 words The PTMPM module should be configured in the Series 90 30 PLC as a Foreign module Ordering Information 03560 PTMPM module and its interface board are considered to matched set and therefore they are not sold separately The two cables however may be ordered as separate items There are four catalog numbers in the PTM product line m 1C693PTM100 This system contains the PTMPM its matched PTMIM and the 19 0 5 meter interface cable IC693PTMI0I This system contains the PTMPM its matched PTMIM and the 39 1 meter interface cable m IC693CBL340 The 19 0 5 meter interface cable m IC693CBL341 The 39 1 meter interface cable Documentation For details refer to GFK 1734 Series 90 30 PLC Power Transducer User s Manual Chapter 8 Option Modules 6 43 Chapter State Logic Products 9 State Logic Overview State Logic unlike other Series 90 30 PLC systems does not use ladder logic type instructions Instead it uses Natural Language programming instructions For example to program a rung of logic that turns on a motor at a specific time in a State Logic system you could create a statement Tf hour is past 8 AM start the exhaust system This type of programming instruction cannot be handled currently by standard Series 90 30 CPUs so a State Logic CPU is requi
363. ing methods for both five terminal and six terminal types is similar except that step 3 below does not apply to the five terminal type The power supply terminal boards will accept one AWG 14 2 1 mm or two AWG 16 1 3 mm copper 75_ 167_ wires Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires but the wires in any given terminal should be the same type The suggested torque for the power supply terminal board is 12 in Ibs 1 36 Newton meters Open the door protecting the terminal board and make the following connections from the AC power source and ground connections system grounding requirements are described in detail later in this chapter 1 These are wide range supplies that can operate from an AC power source within the nominal range of 100 VAC to 240 VAC at 50 60 Hz This may vary 15 to 10 for a total maximum range of 85 VAC to 264 VAC These are auto ranging supplies that do not require jumper or switch settings for selection of power source voltage 2 Connect the hot and neutral wires or lines L1 and L2 to the upper two terminals on the terminal board Connect the safety ground wire to the ground terminal which is the third terminal from the top and is marked with a ground symbol 3 For power supplies with six terminals the factory jumper between the 3rd and 4th terminals see figure below should be left in place for normal installations However this jumper must be removed and external surge suppressors inst
364. ing of spare parts Response Time and Noise immunity In general higher response speed is attained at the sacrifice of some noise immunity Therefore if high response speed is not a requirement it would be better to select a slower I O module that has higher noise immunity However all I O modules regardless of their response time rating have a reasonable level of noise immunity Note that the IC693APU305 I O Processor Option module with its 500us update time can handle I O signals that are too fast for the CPU to handle directly see GFK 1028 Series 90 30 I O Processor Module User s Manual Step 3 Selecting Option Modules There are several application requirements that determine Option module selection However note that there are some restrictions on the maximum number of certain types of modules Analog and Option that can be supported in one PLC system See the table Maximum Number of Modules Per System for data Interfacing with a Particular Protocol or Standard CCM Ethernet FIP Genius RTU SNP etc Interfacing with GE CNC controls Use the IC693BEM320 and IC693BEM321 I O Link modules Distance Genius controller modules can communicate at distances up to 7 500 feet 2 286 meters Serial communications using the RS 485 standard can cover up to 4 000 feet Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 System Design and Layout 1 219 meters FIP networks are rated for 1 640 fe
365. ining all outputs within specifications with input voltages as low as 18 VDC it will not start with initial input voltages of less than 21 VDC This power supply provides the following outputs m 5 VDC output m 24 VDC Relay power output which provides power to circuits on Series 90 30 Output Relay modules m Isolated 24VDC which is used internally by some modules can also be used to provide external power for 24VDC Input modules The load capacity for each output of this power supply is shown in the following table Table 4 6 IC693PWR322 Power Supply Capacities Catalog Load Number Capacity Input Output Capacities Voltage Power IC693PWR322 30 Watts 24 or 48 VDC 5 24 VDC Isolated 20 24 VDC Relay 15 15 watts watts watts Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts IC693PWR322 bee STATUS INDICATORS Series 90 30 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STANDARD POWER SUPPLY RROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CONNECTIONS NPUE FOR DC POWER 24 48 VDC SOURCE INTERNAL POWER SOURCE FOR MODULES REQUIRING 24VDC RS 485 COMPATIBLE SERIAL PORT gt BATTERY CONNECTORS LITHIUM BACK UP BATTERY Figure 4 4 Series 90 30 24 48 VDC Input Power Supply IC693PWR322 03560 Chapter 4 Power Supplies 4 7 Table 4 7 Specifications for IC693PWR322 Power Supply Nominal Rated Voltage 24 or 48 VDC Input Voltage Range Start 21 to
366. ion capabilities of a system For example if you only need 49 total Option and I O Modules you could use one of the CPU331 341 CPUs However you would be at the maximum module limit and would not be able to add any more to the system without changing the CPU If you used instead one of the CPU360 364 CPUs you could later add up to 30 more modules while keeping the same CPU Cost If some of the other factors such as performance or extended features are not major issues one of the lower cost CPUs can be applied However sometimes purchasing a more expensive CPU with extended features can be less costly than purchasing a lower cost CPU and an additional Option module to cover the feature needed Besides the direct cost of the modules using the single CPU would save a PLC slot which could help avoid the need for and cost of an extra Baseplate Power Supply I O Bus Expansion Cable etc Since prices are subject to change it would not be practical to give an example of this Please check with your distributor for current pricing information Display requirements The CPU351 CPU352 CPU363 and CMM311 have serial ports that are often used to communicate with HMI or Operator Interface OI devices Time of day TOD clock requirements The Embedded CPUs do not have one the Modular CPUs do System size limitation If you are close to the maximum number of modules limit of your system you can use modules that have dual functions to conser
367. ion for IC693PWR328 Power Supply 4 12 Determine total output load from typical specifications listed for individual modules in Chapter 12 Use the graph to determine average input power Divide the input power by the operating source voltage to determine the input current requirements Use the lowest input voltage to determine the maximum input current Allow for start up surge current requirements Allow margins 1096 to 2096 for variations Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 IC693PWR331 High Capacity Power Supply 24 VDC Input The Series 90 30 DC input High Capacity power supply IC693PWR331 is a 30 watt wide range supply designed for 24 VDC nominal inputs For applications requiring greater 5V current capacity than is available with the standard supply this supply allows all 30 watts to be consumed from the 5 V output It will accept an input voltage range from 12 VDC to 30 VDC Although it is capable of maintaining all outputs within specifications with input voltages as low as 12 VDC it will not start with initial input voltages of less than 18 VDC This power supply provides the following outputs 5 VDC output m 24 VDC Relay power output which provides power to circuits on Series 90 30 Output Relay modules m Isolated 24 VDC which is used internally by some modules can also be used to provide external power for 24 VDC Input modules The load capacity for each out
368. ion of when to attach drain wire to pin 1 Figure 10 16 How to use Split Ring Ferrules for Foil and Braided Cable Shield For typical industrial applications all expansion and remote baseplate cables can be made with plastic shell covers and should be wired as shown in Figure 10 19 In either case pin 1 should be wired into both ends of the custom length cable and the recommendations listed below should be followed for the Wye cables treatment in the remote IC693CHS392 399 baseplates When using 100 shielded cables all local CPU and expansion baseplates in the system must be solidly referenced to the same ground point or a potential difference between baseplates could disturb signal transmission Alert for Users of Early Remote Baseplate Versions In early remote baseplates versions IC693CHS393E and earlier and IC693CHS399D and earlier it is necessary to remove pin of the mating cable where the cable plugs into the baseplate This means that when using a factory made Wye cable such as IC693CBL300 you must break pin 1 out of the male end where it plugs into the remote baseplate before using it with one of these baseplates Custom built Wye cables for these baseplates should be built using Figure 10 20 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables Remote baseplates IC693CHS393F and later and IC693CHS399E and later have a change inside the baseplate which eliminates the need to remove
369. ions See Appendix H for information about TBQC Terminal Block Quick Connect options Connecting from the connector on a 16 point module that has a TBQC I O faceplate adapter through a conduit to a TBQC terminal block This can be accomplished by attaching one of the optional 24 pin connectors to the stripped end after pulling the cable through the conduit Use the right side cable IC693CBL328 for this purpose See the section Building Custom Length Cables for information on the connector options See Appendix H for information about TBQC Terminal Block Quick Connect options GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 61 1C693CBL329 330 331 332 333 334 Cables 24 Pin I O Faceplate Connector to Terminal Block Connector Note These cables replace obsolete cables IC693CBL321 322 323 The obsolete cables had straight connectors These replacement cables have right angle connectors to reduce the clearance space required in front of the PLC They use the same pin outs as the obsolete cables Description These cables all have a right angle 24 pin connector on each end They are identical except for connector orientation right side and left side types and cable length The difference in connector orientation is to allow them to work with the dual connector type of 32 point I O modules These cables are wired pin to pin that is pin Al to pin Al pin A2 to pin A2 etc Similar cables are available in a 3 meter length that have a right an
370. ire can be installed as shown in Figure 2 11 with the ground attached to the Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket An additional ground wire connecting the Adapter Bracket to a solid chassis ground on the 19 Rack should be installed Use the same or equivalent hardware and paint removal scheme as shown in Figure 2 11 m fusing the Surface Mount Adapter Bracket IC693ACC308 the ground wire should be run from the baseplate as shown in Figure 2 11 to a solid chassis ground on the 19 Rack Use the same or equivalent hardware and paint removal scheme as shown in Figure 2 11 Programmer Grounding For proper operation the computer programmer running the PLC software must have a ground connection in common with the CPU baseplate Normally this common ground connection is provided by ensuring that the programmer s power cord is connected to the same power source with the same ground reference point as the baseplate If it is not possible to ensure this common ground scheme use a port isolator IC690ACC903 between the programmer and PLC serial connection If the programmer ground is at a different potential than the PLC ground a shock hazard could exist Also damage to the ports or converter if used could occur when the programmer serial cable is connected between the two Failure to follow programmer grounding recommendations could result in personal injury equipment damage or both 03560 Chapter 2 Installation 2 13 Module Shi
371. iring such as Genius Bus or serial cables should be kept away from noise producing wiring Chapter 2 Installation 2 17 Where AC or Output wiring bundles must pass near noise sensitive signal wiring bundles avoid running them beside each other Route them so that if they have to cross they do so at a right angle This will minimize coupling between them Grouping Modules to Keep Wires Segregated If practical grouping similar modules together in the PLC racks can help keep wiring segregated For example one rack could contain only AC modules and a different rack only DC modules with further grouping in each rack by input and output types For smaller systems as an example the left end of a rack could contain Analog modules the middle could contain DC modules and the right end could contain AC modules Discrete I O Module Connection Methods m For modules with 16 points or less the standard method is to use the removable terminal board which comes with these modules The removable terminal board makes it easy to prewire field wiring to the user supplied input and output devices and to replace modules in the field without disturbing existing field wiring m Some discrete 16 point I O modules can be used with an optional Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC assembly This assembly contains a module faceplate with built in connector that replaces the removable terminal board The assembly also contains a DIN rail mounted terminal block
372. is for the CPU s serial port and is not related to the Ethernet interface This LED will flash while data is being transferred through the SNP serial port connector on the PLC power supply and will stay off when the port is inactive All Series 90 30 CPUs have this standard serial port Ethernet Restart Pushbutton This pushbutton performs four functions LED test Restart Restart and enter Software Load state and Restart and enter Maintenance state These are detailed in GFK 1541 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User s Manual 03560 Chapter 5 CPUs 5 25 Keyswitch This is a standard CPU keyswitch discussed on page 3 15 Front Panel Connectors The full functionality of these ports is detailed in GFK 1541 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User s Manual Station Mer This connector is used to connect a terminal or terminal emulator to access the Station Manager software on the Ethernet Interface This RJ 11 connector has the same pinout as Port 1 of the CPUs 351 352 353 and 364 shown in Table 5 5 The IC693CBL316 cable can be used to access this port See Chapter 10 for a data sheet on this cable 10 100 Ethernet Port 1 and Port 2 these two 8 pin RJ 45 ports provide a direct connection to an Ethernet network via an embedded network switch The two Ethernet ports are 10 BASE T 100 BASE Tx Autonegotiating Full Duplex ports which provide direct connection to one or two 10 BA
373. issipation The amount of heat dissipated by a PLC mounted in an enclosure can be an important factor in determining the enclosure size needed for the system This is because the enclosure must be able to adequately dissipate the heat generated by all of the components mounted inside so that no components overheat PLC heat dissipation is also a factor in determining the need for enclosure cooling options such as fans and air conditioning Enclosure manufacturers generally consider enclosure heat dissipation as a factor in their enclosure selection guidelines Instructions for calculating Series 90 30 PLC heat dissipation can be found in Appendix F Series 90 30 Heat Dissipation System Layout Guidelines Because of the differences from one system to another it is not practical to try to discuss every possible layout Instead this section offers guidelines and an example to help you lay out your system Benefits of a Good Layout Safe Reliable and Accessible The layout of your system has a lot to do with how reliably your system will operate how easy it is to install how well it looks and how easy and safe it is to maintain W Safety and Maintenance A good layout helps minimize the chance of electrical shock to personnel working on the system It lets maintenance technicians easily access the unit to make measurements load software check indicator lights remove and replace modules etc It also makes it easier to trace wiring an
374. ite Y ellow Gray 49 25 White Black Blue 25 50 White Green Blue 50 GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 41 IC693CBL310 I O Interface Cable 24 Pin for 32 Point Modules Note This cable is obsolete Please use IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328 See the data sheet for these cables for details The replacement cables have right angle connectors to reduce the clearance space required in front of the PLC Function of cable This 10 3 meter prewired cable was used with all Series 90 30 high density 32 point I O modules that use the Fujitsu 24 pin user I O connector Each of these modules has two of these connectors mounted side by side I O Interface cables have a 24 pin female connector on one end for connection to the module and stripped and tinned wires on the other end Catalog numbers for 32 point modules having two 24 pin connectors IC693MDL 654 IC693MDL655 IC693MDL752 and IC693MDL753 Connections to module input circuits are made from the user s input devices to two male pin type 24 pin connectors Fujitsu FCN 365P024 AU mounted on the front of the module The connector mounted on the right of the module front view interfaces with groups A and B the connector the left side of the module interfaces with groups C and D If a different length cable is required for connections to these modules you can build your own cable information on building your own cable is found in the data sheet for cable IC693CBL315
375. ition 12 21 Power Supply slot 3 3 Power supply specifications dc supply 4 8 4 11 high capacity ac dc supply 4 5 high capacity dc supply 4 14 standard ac dc supply 4 3 Power Transducer IC693PTM100 101 8 40 Powering down Expansion and remote racks 3 12 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 03560 Preinstallation check 2 1 Preventive maintenance table 13 8 Product support customer service 2 1 technical help 2 1 Program compatibility 5 12 Programmable coprocessor modules 8 31 Programmer Hand Held IC693PRG300 11 5 PROM Configuration table 5 6 Types 5 5 Use in Series 90 30 5 5 PROM option EPROM EEPROM selection model 331 5 8 Protection devices overvoltage 2 24 4 5 4 16 Protocol CMM 8 34 RTU Modbus 8 34 SNP 8 34 PTM Power Transducer 8 40 Q Quick connect terminal block H 2 R Rack Definition 3 3 Rack number Selection switch 3 13 RAM Memory 5 5 RAM memory backup battery 4 20 6 1 Reference types user 5 11 References not used 8 7 Relay output module Protection 7 4 Remote baseplates 3 8 Remote baseplate 10 slot 3 9 Defined 3 3 1C693CHS399 3 9 Remote baseplates Features 3 8 Remote drops 8 6 8 10 Remote expansion system connections 3 15 10 31 example of using wye cables 10 30 example point to point wiring applications requiring less noise immunity 10 28 Index Index wye cable wiring diagram
376. jumpers used to configure the system The CPU verifies the actual 03560 Chapter 9 State Logic Products 9 11 module configuration at power up and periodically throughout the operation The actual configuration must match the programmed configuration Any detected deviations are reported to the CPU alarm processor function for the configured fault response Refer to GFK 1056 the Series 90 30 State Logic CPU User s Manual for more information Table 9 1 System Specifications for Series 90 30 State Logic CPUs State Logic CPU Model Pp State Logic CPUModel sn cen Demme mm Analog Inputs AI E m E mere es pe m ps Floating Point Variables uvm 1s CO Program Memory Processor eae MHz ra MHz E MHz MHz Number of Number of Baseplates Baseplate Size 5 or 10 HM 5or10 HM 5 slots M 5 10 slots CSE323 288890 SCM Table Memory Space 4K Bytes 4K Bytes 1K Bytes 1K Bytes For more detailed information on State Logic CPU specifications see GFK 1056 the Series 90 30 State Logic Control System User s Manual Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 State Logic CPU Firmware and PROM Configurations State Logic CPU Firmware and PROM Table Firmware EPROM EEPROM standard for user for user State Logic CPU Data Sheets This section provides data sheets describing each of the Series
377. k 3 412 142 Btu 1 kilowatt hour energy or work 1 000 watts hr 1 watt power 3 412 Btu hr 1 watt power 1 joule sec 1 joule sec power 1 watt 1 joule energy 1 newton meter 1 Btu 0 293 watt 1 Btu 778 2 foot pounds 1 Btu 252 gram calories 1 Btu energy 1055 joules 1 newton meter torque or work 0 7376 pound feet 1 newton meter torque or work 8 851 pound inches 1 pound foot torque or work 1 3558 newton meters 1 pound inch torque or work 0 113 newton meters 1 ounce inch torque or work 72 gram centimeters 1 degree angular 0 0175 radians 1 minute angular 0 01667 degrees 1 radian angular 57 3 degrees 1 quadrant angular 90 degrees Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 English and Metric Equivalents 03560 This section is based upon information published World Wide Web by the U S government s National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST For further information visit their web site at www nist gov Table K 5 Length Equivalents Units of Length Underlined Figures are Exact Table K 6 Area Equivalents Units of Area Underlined Figures are Exact Units Square Square Feet Square Square Square Meters Inches Yards Centimeters 1 square 1 square i
378. l a new battery before removing the old battery two connectors are provided Indication of a low battery 1s provided through the ECLiPS programming system software and Logicmaster 90 30 software Cable Information Cable IC693CBL305 can be used in applications that require use of both SLP serial ports This is a Wye type cable that breaks out the Port 1 and Port 2 connections on the module s single connector to two individual connectors A data sheet for this cable can be found in the Cables chapter of this manual Additional SLP cable information is found in publication GFK 0726 see Documentation section This cable is not required for applications that use only one SLP port Hardware Specifications Battery Shelf Life 5 years at 20 C 68 F Memory Retention 6 months nominal without applied power Internal Power Consumption 400 mA from 5V bus on backplane Two RS 232 422 485 compatible State Logic Processor SLP Documentation Please refer to the following publications for more State Logic Processor information Series 90 30 PLC State Logic Processor User s Guide GFK 0726 Series 90 30 PLC ECLiPS User s Manual GFK 0732 Series 90 30 PLC OnTOP User s Guide GFK 0747 OnTOP for Series 90 30 Online Troubleshooting and Operator Program User s GFK 0750 Manual Series 90 30 State Logic Control System User s Manual GFK 1056 03560 Chapter 9 State Logic Products 9 7 State Logic CPUs Five m
379. late to be mounted in a 19 inch rack Each baseplate installation requires only one of the adapter brackets 2 8 IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Used to mount a baseplate to the front face ofa 19 rack Install the adapter bracket by inserting the tabs at the top and bottom of the adapter bracket into the corresponding slots at the top and bottom of the plastic baseplate cover NOTE Although Figure 2 7 shows the plastic baseplate cover removed this 1s for illustration purposes only It is not necessary to remove the cover to install the bracket With the bracket in place insert and tighten the two screws included with the bracket through the back of the baseplate holes into the threaded holes in the bracket Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 m IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket Used to recess mount a baseplate inside a 19 rack A baseplate mounts on the rear panel of this adapter bracket using four 8 32 4mm screws nuts lock washers and flat washers The Adapter Bracket bolts through its four slotted holes to the face of the 19 rack using applicable hardware lock washers recommended RIGHT SIDE OF gt BASEPLATE Insert two screws 1 at top 1 at bottom from back of base unit through base unit and bracket Tighten screws to secure 1 bracket to base unit Note Baseplate is shown with cover removed for illustration purposes It is not
380. lated Repeater Converter C 6 Figure C 6 Cable A RS 232 CMM To Converter sess eene entretenir enne nnne C 8 Figure C 7 Cable B RS 422 CMM To Converter sessi nne nete C 8 Figure C 8 Cable C RS422 Twisted Pair e eE ER L EEN C 9 Pipure C 9 Cable DU RS 422 Twisted a rete ett Ree re e E alaa a C 10 xxviii Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Contents Figure C 10 Cable E RS 232 Converter to CMM eccsccssssssssseeseeeceeeeseseneesecsececeeseceeeeaeeeesesesaeeeeeneaee C 10 Figure D 1 Series 90 SNP to RS 232 Miniconverter 2 D 1 Figure D 2 Miniconverter to PCA D 3 Figure D 3 Miniconverter to Workmaster II PC XT 2 D 3 Figure D 4 Miniconverter to 9 Pin Workmaster or PC XT Computer esses D 4 Figure E 2 IC690ACC903 Block Diagram eese nnne nente E 3 Figure E 3 RS 485 Port Isolator PLC Network enne E 4 Figure E 4 Mounting Port Isolator to Panel sessssseseeeseeeeeeennennenn nennen enne E 4 Figure E 5 Multidrop Configuration Connecting Devices with 15 Pin Ports and 25 Pin Ports E 5 Figure E 6 Cable for Supplying External Power Through the Port Isolator ess E 6 Figure H 1 Typical TB
381. later in this Chapter FEMALE CONNECTOR 5 3 6 26 FOOT CABLES MALE MALE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR B Pd 50 FOOT CABLE MALE MALE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Figure 10 15 Detail of I O Bus Expansion Cables Cable Lengths IC693CBL300 3 feet 1 meter continuous shield IC693CBL301 feet 2 meters continuous shield IC693CBL302 or IC693CBL314 50 feet 15 meters continuous shield IC693CBL312 0 5 feet 0 15 meters continuous shield IC693CBL313 25 feet 8 meters continuous shield Function of Cables The I O Bus expansion cables are used to extend the I O bus to expansion or remote baseplates in a Series 90 30 I O system when additional I O slots are needed or baseplates are required some distance from the CPU baseplate The prewired I O bus expansion cables can be used for connecting either expansion or remote baseplates Where required cable length is not available in a Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables standard cable a custom cable must be built see the section Building Custom Length I O Bus Expansion Cables for detailed instructions Connecting the Cables Connect the single male connector to the 25 pin female connector on the right side of the CPU baseplate Connect the male connector on the dual connector end of the cable to the 25 pin female connector on the first expansion baseplate Connect the unused 25 pin female connector on the dual connector
382. le Opposite end has stripped and tinned labeled wires for connection to Connector Interface Assembly Wiring Information Table 10 3 Wire List for 32 Point I O Cables Label Number Loose End Label Connector Number Pin Loose End Number Connector Pin Color Code Color Code Number 10 40 1 Black 1 White Black Violet 2 Brown 2 White Black Gray 3 Red 3 28 White Brown Red 28 4 Orange 4 29 White Brown Orange 29 5 Yellow 5 30 White Brown Yellow 30 6 Green 6 31 White Brown Green 31 7 Blue 7 32 White Brown Blue 32 8 Violet 8 33 White Brown Violet 33 9 Gray 9 34 White Brown Gray 34 10 White 10 35 White Red Orange 35 11 White Black 11 36 White Red Y ellow 36 12 White Brown 12 37 White Red Green 37 13 White Red 13 38 White Red Blue 38 14 White Orange 14 39 White Red Violet 39 15 White Y ellow 15 40 White Red Gray 40 16 White Green 16 41 White Orange Yellow 41 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables Connector Label Connector Label Pin Color Code Number Pin Color Code Number Number Loose End Number Loose End 17 White Blue 17 42 White Orange Green 42 18 White Violet 18 43 White Orange Blue 43 19 White Gray 19 44 White Orange Violet 44 20 White Black Brown 20 45 White Orange Gray 45 21 White Black Red 21 46 White Yellow Green 46 22 White Black Orange 22 47 White Yellow Blue 47 23 White Black Yellow 23 48 White Yellow Violet 48 24 White Black Green 24 49 Wh
383. le The list includes catalog numbers for three types of connectors solder pin crimp pin and ribbon cable Each accessory kit contains enough components D connectors backshells contact pins etc to assemble ten single ended cables of the type specified for each kit Table 10 10 Catalog Numbers for 24 Pin Connector Kits Vendor Pp Number Number Description IC693ACC316 N 361J024 AU Solder eyelet receptacle Solder Eyelet Type Crimp Typo Additional tools from Fujitsu are required to properly assemble the crimped contact and ribbon cable type connectors The solder eyelet connectors as provided in IC693ACC316 do not require any special tooling Crimped Contact Connectors as provided in IC693ACC317 require Hand Crimping Tool FCN 363T T005 H Contact Extraction Tool FCN 360T T001 H Ribbon Cable Connectors as provided in IC693ACC318 require Cable Cutter FCN 707T T001 H Hand Press FCN 707T T101 H Locator Plate FCN 367T T012 H These tools need to be ordered from an authorized Fujitsu distributor Three of the largest US distributors for Fujitsu connectors are Marshall at 800 522 0084 Milgray at 800 MILGRAY and Vantage at 800 843 0707 If none of these distributors service your area then contact Fujitsu Microelectronics in San Jose California USA via telephone at 408 922 9000 or via fax at 408 954 0616 for further information It is recommended that you order any necessary connector tooling
384. le Programming Options Ethernet Station Manager GFK 1186 Host Communications Toolkit C C GFK 0870 Host Communications Drivers MS Windows GFK 1026 Host Communications Toolkit Visual Basic GFK 1063 CPU Modules CPU311 CPU341 Series 90 30 CPUs IC693CPU311 IC693CPU341 Installation GFK 0356 Configuration and Programming Options Configuration and Programming HHP GFK 0402 Configuration LM90 GFK 0466 Programming LM90 GFK 0467 SFC Programming LM90 GFK 0854 Configuration Programming VersaPro GFK 1670 Configuration CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer PLC GFK 1868 03560 Appendix G Catalog Number to Publication Cross Reference G 3 CPU Modules CPU350 CPU374 1C693CPU350 CPU Module Installation GFK 0356 Configuration and Programming Options Configuration Programming HHP GFK 0402 Configuration Control GFK 1295 Programming Control GFK 1411 SFC Programming Control GFK 1385 Configuration LM90 GFK 0466 Programming LM90 GFK 0467 SFC Programming LM90 GFK 0854 Configuration Programming VersaPro GFK 1670 Configuration Programming CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer PLC GFK 1868 IC693CPU351 IC693CPU352 CPU Modules Installation GFK 0356 Serial Communications GFK 0582 Configuration and Programming Options Configuration Programming HHP GFK 0402 Configuration Control GFK 1295 Programming Cont
385. le codes and regulations that may apply to your locality or type of equipment You have the ultimate responsibility to consult applicable safety codes for your locality or that pertain to the particular type of equipment you are designing and ensure that your design complies with these standards In the United States the National Electric Code NEC has been adopted by many localities The United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA regulations also contain many safety regulations that apply to all industrial equipment in the United States In the absence of local regulations the NEC and OSHA regulations should be followed when designing your system in addition to the information contained in this manual OSHA regulations can be accessed on line at www osha gov Some key safety issues are outlined below Protection From Electrical Shock Fire Prevention Proper wiring design including grounding and circuit protection issues should be followed Personnel should be prevented from accidentally coming in contact with hazardous voltages Also unauthorized personnel should be prevented from gaining access to high voltage cabinets and panels Interlock circuits are often used for this purpose The guidelines in the NEC and OSHA regulations protect against fires especially those caused by faulty electrical design Protection From Mechanical Hazards Personnel should be protected from physical hazards such as moving mechanis
386. le in 128 word increments from 128 to 16 384 word with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32 640 words with Control version 2 2 For firmware prior to Release 9 0 fixed size is 9 999 words Model 351 CPU Analog Outputs AQ Starting with firmware Release 9 0 configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16 384 word with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32 640 words with Control version 2 2 For firmware prior to Release 9 0 fixed size is 9 999 words System Registers for reference table viewing 28 words SR only cannot be referenced in logic program Timers Counters gt 2 000 Built in Serial Ports Three ports Supports SNP SNPX slave on power supply connector and RTU slave SNP SNPX master slave Serial I O on Ports 1 and 2 Requires CMM module for CCM PCM module for RTU master support Profibus GBC GCM GCM option modules The CPU351 is supported by Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro programming and configuration software Release 6 00 and later releases and Control programming and configuration software Release 2 0 and later releases 03560 Chapter 5 CPUs 5 35 CPU352 Catalog Number IC693CPU352 890 milliamps from 5 VDC supply User Program Memory maximum Starting with firmware Release 9 0 240K Bytes Note Actual size of available user program memory depends on the amounts configured for the R and AQ configurable word memory types see below For firmware prior to Release 9 0 fixed size is 80K bytes
387. le requirements are followed GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 31 CPU BASEPLATE CPU BASEPLATE i 1C693CHS391 397 EXPANSION BASEPLATE EXPANSION BASEPLATE 1C693CHS392 398 E MAXIMUM DISTANCE FROM CPU 50 FEET il 15 METERS V bn REMOTE BASEPLATE REMOTE BASEPLATE ill i 1C693CHS393 399 REMOTE BASEPLATE BASEPLATE 1C693CHS393 399 REMOTE BASEPLATE 1C693CH 393 399 MAXIMUM DISTANCE REMOTE BASEPLATE t FROM CPU 700 FEET 213 METERS Standard Wye Cable Custom Built Point to Point Cable 6 1C693CBL300 Standard Wye Cable Used as Wye Jumper 1C693ACC307 Bus Terminator Figure 10 22 Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates 10 32 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables IC693CBL303 Hand Hand Programmer and Converter IC690ACC900 Cable Function of cable The Hand Held Programmer cable provides the connections that allow the Hand Held Programmer and the Programmable Logic Controller to communicate This cable also provides the power connections for the HHP and a signal which indicates to the PLC that the HHP is attached to the PLC serial port It can also be used to connect the RS 485 serial port on the PLC to the RS
388. led in the end that connects to the expansion baseplate connector m You can also build a custom cable with termination resistors wired to the appropriate pins for installation at the end of the bus GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 25 10 26 Shield Treatment All GE factory made cables are made with a continuous or 100 shield This means that the braided cable shield is connected to the metal shell of the connector around the entire perimeter of the connector This provides a low impedance path to frame ground for any noise energy that is coupled onto the cable shield For custom length cables made per Figure 10 18 the best noise immunity is achieved when using a metallized connector cover that makes contact with the cable s braided and foil shielding and with the connector shell on the terminating end Note It is not sufficient to only solder the drain wire to the connector shell It is required that the cable s shield be continuous across the entire length of the cable including at the terminations The figure below shows the recommended method for folding the braided shield back before inserting the cable into a metallized cover Foil amp Braid to be folded back over ferrule and Split Ring Cable ground wire Ferrule Jacket Ground Wire Conductors Attach to Pin 1 for custom length cables OR Fold back for custom Wye cables See Alert for Users of Early Remote Baseplate Versions for descript
389. left side The top and bottom posts hold the terminal board cover in place The middle post keeps the terminal board wiring in place If you do not require it to hold the wiring in place the middle post can be easily snapped off Be careful that you do not inadvertently snap it off if you need it to keep your wiring in place Installing and Removing Terminal Boards with Holding Screws Discrete output modules IC693MDL730F and later and IC693MDL 731F and later have a special terminal board that is equipped with holding screws shown in the figure below These screws prevent the terminal board to module connections from deteriorating in applications where the PLC is subjected to severe vibration A12345678 B12345678 Hinged Cover Holding Screw Removeable Terminal Board Holding Screw HOHER Li Module Catalog Number Figure 2 6 Terminal Board with Holding Screws m Removing To Remove these terminal boards first loosen the two holding screws on the front of the terminal board then follow the standard removal instructions in the section Removing an I O Module s Terminal Board The holding screws are held captive in the terminal board and do not have to be completely removed m Installing To install these terminal boards follow the standard installation instructions in the section Installing an I O Module s Terminal Board then tighten the two holding screws to 8 to 10
390. length 0 5 Meter Cable Kits IC693CBK002 Cable Kit Includes both the IC693CBL329 left side and IC693CBL330 right side cables IC693CBK003 Cable Kit Includes both the IC693CBL331 left side and IC693CBL332 right side cables IC693CBK004 Cable Kit Includes both the IC693CBL333 left side and IC693CBL334 right side cables Connector Depth The following figure shows that the cable connectors extend 2 out from the face of the Series 90 30 modules they are connected to The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should allow for the 2 depth added by this connector Series 90 30 Module 20 Figure 10 41 Dimension for Depth of Connector Chapter 10 Cables 10 63 Applications 10 64 These cables connect from Series 90 30 I O modules that use the Fujitsu 24 pin I O connector to Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC blocks There are two categories of these modules 32 point modules with two 24 pin connectors IC693MDL654 IC693MDL655 IC693MDL752 and IC693MDL753 The IC693CBL329 33 1 333 cables are for the modules left side connector front view and the IC693CBL330 332 334 cables are for the modules right side connector The modules right side connector interfaces with I O circuit groups A and B the modules left side connector interfaces with groups C and D The other end of the cables connect to the TBQC IC693ACC337 terminal block See GFK 0898 the Series 90 30
391. llation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 System Design and Layout Reducing PLC Module Count by Using Other GE Products If system size limitations more than 79 modules are needed are a problem in a system using Remote racks a possible solution could be the use of GE Genius Blocks Field Control or VersaMax products These distributed I O devices can be used instead of Remote racks in remote locations in some cases and their use would not add to the Series 90 30 module count Genius Blocks These are intelligent distributed I O blocks that are panel mounted at the point of use They communicate with a Genius Bus Controller GBC module in the PLC via a shielded twisted pair cable They are not included in the PLC module count but do require I O memory allocation A single GBC module in a PLC rack can control up to 31 Genius Blocks Genius Blocks come in discrete and analog I O high speed counter RTD and thermocouple interface types For more information on using Genius Blocks see GEK 90486 1 Genius I O System and Communications User s Manual and GEK 90486 2 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual Field Control These are intelligent distributed I O units that mount at the point of use on a 35mm x 7 5mm DIN rail They can communicate over Genius FIP or Profibus buses They are not included in the PLC module count but do require I O memory allocation A Field Control unit consists of a Bus Interface
392. log numbers are provided as suggestions only Any cable having the same electrical characteristics is acceptable It is strongly recommended that you use stranded wire Since it is sometimes hard to find a cable with the desired number of twisted pairs the Belden 9309 has an extra pair you may end up with a cable with extra pairs 2 Agreater cable length between the PLC and the converter increases the possibility of noise coupling into the data and converter logic power circuits within the cable The cable should be as short as possible in noisy environments In extreme cases additional noise protection measures such as double shielded cables may be required GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 33 Wiring Diagram The following wiring diagram applies to the IC693CBL303 cable and to custom built cables RS 422 RS 232 RS 485 TWISTED SHIELDED PAIRS CONVERTER 244750 IC690ACC900 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 9 90 o9 SERIES 0 0 90PLC 00 0 0 0 RS 422 0 0 0 PORT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o9 Op 00 0 0 0 25 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE RS 232 PORT RS 485 PORT NOTE PINS 9 AND 10 ARE JUMPERED AT BOTH ENDS OF CABLE TO CONNECT TERMINATING RESISTORS FOR THE RD SIGNAL WHICH IS INSIDE THE PLC POWER SUPPLY Figure 10 23 Wiring Connections for IC693CBL303 and Custom Built Ca
393. low IBM AT XT PIN Figure A 3 IBM AT XT Serial Port Appendix A Serial Ports and Cables 44523 5 A 6 Table A 4 IBM AT XT Serial Port Pins out L3 2 Ro Resse Daw 3 mp Ressive Dae Data Terminal Ready rs ox ie ES 3 pop EJ 9 pm Lo qc 00 4 NC Not Connected Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Serial Ports and Cables RS 232 RS 485 Converter IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit This kit consists of an RS 422 to RS 232 miniconverter a 6 foot 2 meter serial cable and a 9 pin to 25 pin serial port converter plug This miniconverter is documented in Appendix D This miniconverter has replaced the older larger obsolete IC690ACC900 converter IC690ACC900 Obsolete Converter The obsolete RS 232 RS 485 Converter IC690ACC900 converts from RS 232 to RS 422 RS 485 communications The converter has one 15 pin female D type port and one 25 pin female D type port This converter is no longer available Please substitute the IC690A CC901 miniconverter Information about this converter is included in this manual for reference and troubleshooting purposes For detailed information on the converter refer to Appendix D Examples of serial cable diagrams which include the converter are provided in the remainder of this appendix GFK 0356Q Appendix A Serial Ports and Cables A 7 A 8 Serial Cable Diagr
394. lt in to its backplane circuit board embedded CPU or one that has a slot for a plug in CPU module modular CPU There can only be one CPU baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system and it will always be called Rack 0 zero A CPU module can only mount in Slot 1 of a modular CPU baseplate A few special Option modules such as the FIP Remote I O Scanner module 1C693BEM330 can also be used in Slot 1 of a modular CPU baseplate Power Supply Input Output I O and most Option modules cannot fit in a CPU slot Expansion Baseplate One that does not contain a CPU and that can be mounted up to 50 cable feet from the CPU baseplate An Expansion baseplate cannot operate on its own It must be used in a system that has a controlling CPU Remote Baseplate One that does not contain a CPU and that can be mounted up to 700 cable feet from the CPU baseplate A remote baseplate cannot operate on its own It must be used ina system that has a controlling CPU Power Supply Slot Each baseplate must contain its own Power Supply module which must mount in the Power Supply slot It is the slot located on the left end of the baseplate it is not numbered and it has a unique size and shape so that only a Power Supply module can mount in it Attempts to force a module into an improper slot type will damage the module and or the baseplate Modules will mount in the correct slot easily and with a minimum of force 03560 Chapter 3 Baseplates 3 3 CPU Basepl
395. ly lens cap qty 2 Power supply terminal cover IC693ACC301 see Note qty 2 Memory backup battery for CPU and PCM modules Memory Backup Battery Fuses See Fuse List For Series 90 30 Modules table in this chapter Modules You may wish to maintain spare PLC modules Many systems have more than one of a particular catalog number such as power supplies each rack has one and I O modules In these cases one of each type would serve as backups for several modules IC693ACC311 qty 69 Removable terminal boards used on many I O Removable Module Terminal modules and some Option modules Board 44A736756 G01 Kit contains three sets 6 keys Same key fits all applicable CPU CPU350 364 Key CPUs Note The IC693ACC301 batteries have a shelf life of 5 years see Chapter 6 for instructions on how to read battery date codes Periodically outdated batteries should be removed from stock and disposed of according to the battery manufacturer s recommendations 03560 Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13 7 13 8 Preventive Maintenance Suggestions Series 90 30 PLC Preventive Maintenance Item No Description Recommendation Safety ground and electrical system Check frequently to ensure that safety ground connections are secure and that electrical cables and conduits are secure and in good condition CPU Memory backup battery Replace annually or as appropri
396. me operation RAM Memory and Override Protection configurable This feature was introduced in CPU firmware release 8 0 This feature is by default disabled It is not functional unless the Mem Protect parameter on the CPU configuration screen is set to Enabled If this feature is enabled and the keyswitch is ON 1 user RAM memory cannot be changed 2 discrete points cannot be overridden and 3 the TOD clock cannot be changed with the Hand Held Programmer however the TOD clock can still be changed using programming software Protect your keys Each new 350 374 CPU is supplied with a pair of keys for the key switch If you use one or more of the key switch protection features described above we recommend you carefully guard your keys If they are lost misplaced or stolen you may be locked out from working on your PLC and unauthorized persons may have access to it Replacement keys can be purchased under part number 444736756 G01 This kit contains three sets of CPU keys All 350 374 CPUs use the same key Of course you can choose to not use any of the keyswitch protection features in which case you can leave the keyswitch set to the OFF position and leave the two configurable keyswitch features set at their default disabled settings Then you will not need to use a key to access the PLC Sequential Event Recorder SER Instruction This functional instruction programmed in ladder logic was introduced in CPU firmware rel
397. ment Operation Without a Memory Backup Battery Using a 340 or Higher CPU This information is applicable only to CPU model numbers 340 and higher such as CPU350 CPU351 etc In systems that do not use a memory backup battery a standard 0 1 Berg jumper should be installed across either of the two power supply battery connectors to ensure reliable restarting of the CPU after a power cycle This jumper should not be installed if a battery is plugged into either the power supply or CPU battery connector Determining Battery Age Using Battery Date Code Battery age can be determined from the date code stamped on the battery The battery manufactured by Panasonic will have a four digit date code It will be something like 5615 or 7Y34 Use the following information to determine the date of manufacture m First digit shows the year in a rotating 10 year cycle For example 0 1990 1 1991 221992 921999 0 2000 1 2001 2 2002 etc This seeming duplication should not be a problem because the shelf life of these batteries is 5 years Batteries in inventory that are older than 4 years old should be discarded according to the manufacturer s instructions since they have less than one year of life remaining we would not recommend using them in a PLC This will ensure that outdated batteries are not mistaken for newer batteries m Second digit shows the month 1 January 2 February 3 March 4 April 5 May 6 June 7 July
398. meters as operands for Acceleration Velocity Move and Dwell Commands Automatic Data Transfer between PLC tables and DSM302 without user programming Ease of I O connection with factory cables and terminal blocks as well as a serial port for connecting programming devices The serial port also allows soft upgrades to firmware which 1s stored in Flash memory Control of GE Digital servos analog SL Series Servos or third party analog servos Home and overtravel switch inputs for each Servo Axis Two Position Capture Strobe Inputs for each Position Feedback Input 5v 24v and analog I O for use by PLC A Quad B Encoder input for Follower Master axis 13 bit Analog Output can be controlled by PLC or used as Servo Tuning monitor 1C693DSM302 Documentation GFK 1464 Motion Mate DSM302 for Series 90 30PLCs User s Manual GFK 0664 Series 90 30 PLC APM Programmer s Manual Related servo manuals GFK 1581 SL Series Servo User s Manual 6 18 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 GFH 001 Beta Series Servo Products Specification Guide GFZ 65192EN Alpha Series Servo Amplifier SVU Descriptions Manual GFZ 65162E Control Motor Amplifier Alpha Series GFZ 65142E GFZ 65150E GFZ 65165E Alpha Series Servo Motor Manuals 03560 Chapter 8 Option Modules 8 19 IC693DSM314 Motion Mate Digital Servo Module DSM314 The Motion Mate DSM314 is a high performance motion control module that is hig
399. minal one 14 AWG 2 10 mm Width 5 04 128mm gt Height all blocks 2 25 57mm Depth all blocks 1 7716 45mm QU QU 49 Q9 09 55 0 09 9 0000000000 Zr O00000000000000000020 See Note 1 Below Figure H 6 1693ACC332 TBQC Terminal Block Note The common row terminals labeled with the letter C are provided for wiring convenience Their use is optional They are electrically isolated from the numbered terminals You may use them as is or jumper them to a numbered terminal Refer to GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual for wiring diagrams of the modules Mounting These terminal blocks are mounted on a standard user supplied 35 mm DIN rail Appendix H Terminal Block Quick Connect Components H 9 1693ACC333 TBQC Terminal Block Use with the following 16 point I O module IC693MDL340 245590 Cdl Meee cere eR ea ES Maximum wire size per terminal one 14 AWG 2 10 mm Width 4 64 117 86mm Height all blocks 2 25 67mm Depth all blocks 1 7716 45mm OQ O99 0 9 6G MA TERMINAL 000 09 09 C2 9 L BLOCK Q 0 O
400. mit This is the case for the Series 90 70 and Series 90 30 CMMs In complex multidrop configurations however special steps must be taken to switch the upstream transmitters of the Isolated Repeater Converter Switching Upstream Transmitters For the RS 422 drivers to be active at the J2 port of the Isolated Repeater Converter the RTS input at J1 must be true The state of the RS 422 drivers at the J1 port depends on the position of the switch on the unit When the switch is in the center position the J1 transmitters will always be turned on When the switch is in the CTS position toward the power cable then either the RS 232 or RS 422 CTS signal must be true to turn on the J1 drivers Note Note the position of the switch on the Isolated Repeater Converter in the system configurations below Appendix 1C655CCM690 Isolated Repeater Converter C 5 Simple Multidrop Configuration This configuration shows how to connect a single Isolated Repeater Converter for signal conversion or greater distance RS 232 RS 422 CABLE A CABLE B RS 422 CABLE D SERIES 90 PLC OR SERIES 90 PLC SERIES 90 PLC Figure C 4 Simple System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater Converter HOST x BRICK IS THE NICKNAME FOR THE ISOLATED REPEATER CONVERTER Complex Multidrop Configuration This configuration shows how to connect multiple Isolated Repeater Converters for signal conversion greater distance and more drops RS
401. mode conditions that exceed those specified will result in errors in transmission and or damage to Series 90 PLC components Common mode specifications are discussed in Appendix A When the common mode voltage specification is exceeded a port isolator such as the GE IC690ACC903 must be used See Appendix G for details on this port isolator Memory Volatility The term volatility refers to the issue of whether or not a certain memory type retains or loses its contents data when power is removed from it Volatile memory memory that loses its contents when power is removed RAM memory is inherently volatile Therefore when the PLC is turned off a backup battery is necessary if data loss in RAM memory is to be prevented Non volatile memory memory that retains its contents when power 1s removed The various types of PROM Programmable Read Only Memory memory are non volatile Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 03560 Every Series 90 30 CPU uses RAM memory for its working memory The RAM chips used of the CMOS type CMOS RAM is an acronym for Complimentary Metal Oxide Semiconductor Random Access Memory CMOS RAM is a relatively fast low power memory that can be easily examined read and changed written to In the embedded CPU models RAM memory is mounted on the backplane board In the modular CPU models RAM memory is mounted inside the CPU module
402. module Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q Cables Series 90 30 Cable Cross Reference Catalog No Description Applications 1C693CBL305 Wye cable for splitting out two serial For use with the following modules port connections from one module IC693PCM301 connector Use cable IC693CBL304 IC693PCM311 with the IC693PCM300 module IC693CMM311 IC693ADC311 AD693CMM301 IC693SLP300 IC693CBL306 3 1 meter extension cable connects For High Density 32 point I O between the 50 pin connector on the modules having a single 50 pin module faceplate and the connector on connector the terminal block IC693MDL652 IC693MDL653 IC693MDL750 IC693MDL751 IC693CBL307 6 2 meter extension cable connects For High Density 32 point I O between the 50 pin connector on the modules having a single 50 pin module faceplate and the connector on connector the terminal block IC693MDL652 IC693MDL653 IC693MDL750 IC693MDL751 IC693CBL308 3 1 meter I O cable connects to the For High Density 32 point I O 50 pin connector on the module modules having a single 50 pin faceplate The other end has stripped connector tinned and labeled leads IC693MDL652 IC693MDL653 IC693MDL750 IC693MDL751 IC693CBL309 6 2 meter I O cable connects to the For High Density 32 point I O 50 pin connector on the module modules having a single 50 pin faceplate The other end has stripped connector tin
403. module type during configuration A Power Supply module must be installed in the left end unnumbered slot only and a CPU module and some special Option modules can only be installed in Slot 1 of a CPU baseplate I O Modules and most Option modules install in slots numbered 2 and higher Grasp the module firmly with terminal board toward you and with rear pivot hook facing away from you Align the module with the desired baseplate slot and connector Tilt the module upwards so that top rear pivot hook of the module engages the baseplate s top module retainer Swing the module downward until the module s connector engages the baseplate s backplane connector and the release lever on the bottom of the module snaps into place in the baseplate s bottom module retainer Visually inspect the module to be sure that it properly seated PIVOT HOOK N VN 0 BACKPLANE CONNECTOR x E D gt 0 Sp KLEE ES RELEASE LEVER a43055A BOTTOM RETAINER Figure 2 2 Installing a Module 03560 Chapter 2 Installation 2 3 Removing a Module Do not insert or remove modules with power applied This could cause the PLC to stop or malfunction Injury to personnel and damage to the module or baseplate may result Also potentially dangerous voltages from user devices may be present on a module s screw terminals even though power to the rack is turned off Care must be taken any time that you are handling the module
404. ms like conveyors or index tables or mechanical pinch points The use of interlocked safety gates light curtains safety mat switches dual hand buttons physical barriers guards etc can be used for this purpose See the applicable section of the OSHA regulations for details Protection From Electrical Failure In the event of a system component failure the design should be an acceptable fail safe one in which the failure does not cause a safety hazard such as a runaway condition or a disabling of emergency stop circuits Emergency stop and other safety circuits should consist of hard wired components that tend to fail in a harmless manner For example in a Master Control Relay MCR circuit use series wired normally closed Emergency Stop pushbutton switches and interlocks to control an electro mechanical Master Control Relay see next figure This relay should directly disable motor starters PLC output Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 03560 System Design and Layout circuits etc This type of circuit tends to fail open which disables the equipment For example if a wire breaks or a contact wears out the circuit opens and the MCR drops out If solid state devices fail they tend to fail shorted which in the case of PLC output circuits would cause the controlled device to turn on or stay on In the circuit below the MCR is an electro mechanical relay It is
405. mum 24 VDC Relay 15 watts maximum 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts maximum NOTE 30 watts maximum total all three outputs Output Voltage 5 VDC 5 0 VDC to 5 2 VDC 5 1 VDC nominal 24 VDC Relay 24 to 28 VDC 24 VDC Isolated 21 5 VDC to 28 VDC Protective Limits Overvoltage 5 VDC output 6 4to7V Overcurrent 5 VDC output 7 A maximum Holdup Time 20 ms minimum Field Wiring Connections for the AC DC Input Power Supplies The two AC DC input power supplies have six terminals for user connections These connections are described below AC Power Source Connections The Hot Neutral and Ground wires from the 120 VAC power source or L1 L2 and Ground wires from the 240 VAC power source connect to the system through the top three terminals of the terminal strip on the front of the power supply DC Power Source Connections Connect the and wires from the 125 VDC nominal power source to the top two terminals on the terminal connector These connections are not polarity sensitive on an AC DC input power supply However the DC Input only type supplies which are discussed later in this chapter are polarity sensitive Input Overvoltage Protection Devices This information applies to all Series 90 30 power supplies except IC693PWR322 and IC693PWR328 The overvoltage protection devices for this power supply are connected internally to pin 4 on the user terminal strip This pin is normally connected to frame ground pin 3
406. municate with each other over a single Genius I O serial bus using a standard twisted pair shielded cable GENIUS COMM GENIUS COMMUNICATIONS MODULE i SISISISISISISISIS S SISISISISISISISS S kaki 44A729182 016R02 IL FOR USE WITH 1C693CMM301 302 Figure 8 1 The IC693CMM301 GCM Module 8 2 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Status LEDs The LEDs on the front of the GCM module indicate its operating status and should be on during normal operation OK Shows the status of the GCM module This LED turns on after power up diagnostics are completed COM Shows the status of the Genius communications bus This LED is on steadily when the bus is operating properly It blinks for intermittent bus errors and is off for a failed bus It is also off when no configuration has been received from the PLC CPU FIRST LAST DEVICE DEVICE SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL 1 1 1 1 SY R SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL R 2 2 2 2 SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD IN IN IN IN O SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD OUT OUT OUT OUT O Figure 8 2 Genius Bus Wiring Schematic
407. n If fault message has already been sent by another device during that scan a device saves its own diagnostic message until the next available bus scan For example if the communications token 15 currently at device 3 and faults occur at devices 3 and 4 at the same time device 3 can send its diagnostic message if another message has not already been sent Device 4 must wait at least one more bus scan to send its diagnostic message The GBC stores any diagnostic messages it receives They are read automatically by the Series 90 30 CPU Faults can then be displayed in the fault table using the programming software A Genius Hand held Monitor must be used to clear the faults from the fault table Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Datagrams Global Data 03560 The Series 90 30 GBC supports all Genius datagrams Refer to chapter 3 of the Genius I O System and Communications User s Manual GEK 90486 1 for details on using datagrams Global Data is data that is automatically and repeatedly broadcast by a GBC The Series 90 30 GBC can send up to 128 bytes of Global Data each bus scan It can receive up to 128 bytes of Global Data each bus scan from each GBC on its bus Sending Global Data Once set up by configuration Global Data is broadcast automatically Other devices that receive the Global Data sent by a Series 90 30 PLC place it in these memory locations Series 90 30
408. n a Personal Computer using a Personal Computer Interface Card that interfaces to Series 90 30 Input Output and Option modules Input and Output I O Modules These modules enable the PLC to interface with input and output field devices such as switches sensors relays and solenoids They are available in both discrete and analog types Option Modules These modules extend the capability of the PLC beyond the basic functions These provide such things as communications and networking options motion control high speed counting temperature control interfacing to operator interface stations etc Cables These connect the PLC components together or to other systems Many standard prefabricated cables are available from GE They are primarily used to Interconnect baseplates Connect a programmer to the CPU or to an option module W Connect option modules to field devices or other systems Assembling a Basic Series 90 30 PLC System 1 2 Let s assemble on paper a basic system using the following components Baseplate Power Supply module W CPU module Some I O modules We ll start with the baseplate To keep it simple we ll use a 5 slot size Note that a 5 slot baseplate actually has six slots but the power supply slot is not numbered Note also that this baseplate has a CPU slot which is slot number 1 and it has an expansion connector on the right end which is used for connecting to another baseplate if
409. n be supported in a single Series 90 30 PLC system with modular CPU 331 and higher and must be located in the CPU baseplate This module has a single connector which supports two serial ports with each port being dedicated to a specific operation Port is most often used to connect to an RS 232 serial COM port of a computer running GE PCM Development Software PCOP Alternately port 1 may be connected to a serial RS 232 printer see the Cables section below By default Port 2 is configured as a 19 2 Kbaud RS 232 port It can be used to interface to a terminal with keyboard input and screen output Serial port programming and configuration are done using a Workmaster II Workmaster or an IBM compatible PC XT AT or PS 2 computer with PCM Development Software PCOP installed The programming computer connects to Port 1 see the Cables section below The default setting is 19 200 bps The PCM Development Software is used to configure the serial port parameters and to install the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software onto the ADC There are no DIP switches or jumpers on this board that need to be set for configuration The ADC module must be configured with the configuration software prior to use Cables IC693CBL305 This Wye cable is used to split out the two ADC port connections from the single connector on the front of the ADC module This cable is supplied with the module Please see Chapter 10 for details on this cable IC690CBL
410. n specifications then it becomes true If input power is interrupted the 5V bus will remain within specifications and PSOK will remain true a minimum of 10 milliseconds PSOK then goes false The 5V bus will remain within specifications for an additional 4 milliseconds minimum to allow an orderly shutdown of the system INPUT INPUT POWER MOMENTARY POWER ON POWER OFF Loss je VOLTAGE VOLTAGE OVERSHOOT OVERSHOOT 5 MAX X 5V OUTPUT 5 1V TYP 97 MIN PSOK HOLD UP TIME 20 ms minimum for IC693PWR321 330 14 ms minimum for IC693PWR322 10 ms minimum for IC693PWR331 332 Figure 4 12 Timing Diagram for all Series 90 30 Power Supplies Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply All Supplies A 15 pin D type female connector accessed by opening the hinged door on the right front of the power supply provides the connection to a CPU serial port which is used to connect to m programmer usually a personal computer running GE PLC programming software m The GE Hand Held Programmer m Other serial devices 243832 COMPATIBLE SERIAL PORT Figure 4 13 Serial Port Connector m The serial port connector is only functional in a power supply that is installed in a baseplate that also contains the CPU The serial port is not functional on a power supply that is installed in an expansion or remote baseplate m Any device con
411. nch 1 square inch ona 006944 0 000 771 604 0 000 771 6049 eae 4516 000 645 16 1 square foot 0 111111 929 030 4 0 092 903 04 1 square yard 1296 Pf 8 361 273 6 0 836 127 36 1 square mile 4 014 489 600 27 878 400 3 097 600 25 899 881 103 36 2 589 988 110 336 1 square 0 155 0003 0 001 076 391 0 0001195990 0 0001 centimeter square meter square meter square meter 1 350 003 550 003 10 10229 91 1 990 w 01 Appendix K Tables and Formulas K 5 Table K 7 Volume Equivalents Units of Volume Underlined Figures are Exact Table K 8 Volume Equivalents II Units of Volume Underlined Figures are Exact Units Milliliters Liters Cubic Meters Cubic Centimeters Cubic Decimeters 1 cubic Inch 16 387 064 0 016 387 064 0 000 016 387 064 28 316 846 592 28 316 846 592 0 028 316 846 592 1 cubic yard 764 554 857 984 764 554 857 984 0 764 554 857 984 1 cubic centimeter 1 cubic decimeter 1 cubic meter Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Appendix 444420084 001 EMI Line Filter L 44A720084 001 Optional EMI Line Filter GFK 0356Q Note This product is not required on later versions of the Series 90 30 PLC This information is provided as a reference for those already using this product This item is still available for purchase from GE Early versions of the Series 90
412. nch of insulation from your custom cable to expose the shield 2 Remove the male Pin 1 from any connector plugging directly into an older version remote baseplate IC693CHS393E IC693CHS399D or earlier Put split ring ferrule over cable insulation Figure 10 17 Fold the shield back over top of the cable insulation and ferrule Place the collar of the metal hood over top of the folded shield and securely clamp the hood Quo AV ER Test your cable for continuity between both connector shells Connect an ohmmeter between the shells and flex the cable at both ends If the metallized connector hood is not making proper contact with the cable shield at either end the connection will show intermittent continuity on the ohmmeter 7 Plug the metal hooded cable onto a remote baseplate expansion port connector or into a GE WYE cable and securely tighten the two screws Installing and tightening the screws will electrically connect the shield to the remote baseplate frame ground which should in turn should be connected to earth ground as instructed in the Installation chapter under the heading Baseplate Safety Grounding GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 27 Wiring Diagrams The following wiring diagrams show the wiring configuration for I O expansion system cables Wiring diagrams are provided for both point to point cables and Wye cables TWISTED PAIRS SHIELDED a45525 7 PAIRS r T r T 4 4 o 00
413. nd 2 E 4 Installation The Isolator is packaged in a contoured plastic enclosure designed for either direct attachment to a serial port or through a 12 extender cable for panel mounted applications Two M3 thumbscrews secure the device to its mating connector The device can be easily inserted into an existing communication channel with no additional hardware In Figure E 2 the Isolator is shown connected directly to a CPU module Alternatively the Isolator can be mounted separately from the PLC system using the extender cable provided For mounting separately to a panel you will need to provide two 6 32 4 mm mounting screws Figure E 3 When installing the Isolator tighten the connector screws and panel mounting screws if used to the following torque values Connector Thumbscrews supplied with M3 8 in lbs 0 9 Newton meter Isolator Panel Mounting Screws user supplied 6 32 4 mm 12 in Ibs 1 4 Newton meters PLC 1 PS CPU RS 485 Port Isolator 4000 ft Cable PLC 2 PS CPU L Figure E 3 RS 485 Port Isolator in PLC Network 6 32 4 mm screw C Wh f 3 yZ Multidrop Switch C TOP VIEW JA S 316 32 4 mm screw Figure E 4 Mounting Port Isolator to Panel Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q
414. nd Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 44A720084 001 Line Filter Mounting Dimensions KI E AR G D Oty 2 KJ A D Kj c Mtg Holes C A i BLU BLU B GRN YEL BRN BRN V V Dimension A B C D E _ Mounting Holes Inches 2 09 1 84 1 29 2 375 2010 275 2 187 2 008 Millimeters 53 09 46 74 32 77 60 32 25 69 85 2 4 75 0 20 Figure L 3 44A720084 001 Line Filter Mounting Dimensions 03560 Appendix 444420084 001 Line Filter 1 3 1 10BASE2 Ethernet transceiver J 2 10 Ethernet transceiver J 1 3 32 Point modules figure 7 5 installation 2 20 installing 2 19 TBQC H 11 wiring 7 6 4 44 720084 001 EMI line filter L 1 A AAUI connector on CPU364 5 24 connector on transceiver J 2 AAUI transceiver port 8 30 AC DC high capacity power supply illustration of 4 4 overvoltage protection devices 2 24 specifications 4 5 AC DC power supplies overcurrent protection 4 18 status indicators 4 16 timing diagram 4 18 AC DC standard power supply ac power source connections 4 5 dc power source connections 4 5 illustration o
415. nected to the serial port that uses 5 VDC power from the Series 90 30 power supply must be included in the calculation for maximum power consumption see Power Supply Loading Calculations in Chapter 12 CPU Serial Port Information The serial port connector on the power supply accesses the CPU serial port which is a feature of all Series 90 30 CPUs See Chapter 5 CPUs for information on this serial port 03560 Chapter 4 Power Supplies 4 19 Backup Battery for RAM Memory All Supplies The long life Lithium battery IC693ACC301 used to maintain the contents of the CMOS RAM memory in the CPU is accessed by removing the cover plate located at the bottom of the power supply faceplate This battery is mounted on a plastic clip attached to the inside of this cover The battery is wired to a small Berg female connector that connects to either of the two Berg male connectors mounted on the Power Supply printed circuit board This battery can be replaced with power applied to the PLC BATTERY CONNECTORS LITHIUM BACK UP BATTERY Figure 4 14 Backup Battery for RAM Memory If a Low Battery Warning BATT LED turns ON occurs replace the battery located in the power supply before removing power from the rack Otherwise there is a possibility that data will be corrupted or the application program will be cleared from memory Additional Battery Information For additional
416. ned and labeled leads IC693MDL652 IC693MDL653 IC693MDL750 IC693MDL751 IC693CBL310 10 3 meter I O cable connects to one For High Density 32 point I O Obsolete Use of the 24 pin connectors on the module The other end has stripped tinned and modules having dual 24 pin connectors IC693MDL654 IC693CBL327and labeled leads IC693MDL655 1C693CBL328 Two cables are required per module 1C693MDL752 IC693MDL753 IC693CBL311 10 3 meter APM I O cable connects APM modules between one of the 24 pin connectors on IC693APU301 the module and the connector on the IC693APU302 terminal block Two cables are required per module IC693CBL312 0 5 152 mm I O expansion cable To interconnect CPU expansion and interconnects baseplate expansion ports remote baseplates This is a Wye type cable for daisy chaining baseplates 1C693CBL313 26 8 meter I O expansion cable To interconnect CPU expansion and interconnects baseplate expansion ports This is a Wye type cable for daisy chaining baseplates remote baseplates Chapter 10 Cables 10 3 10 4 Series 90 30 Cable Cross Reference Catalog No Description Applications IC693CBL314 50 15 meter I O expansion cable To interconnect CPU expansion and interconnects baseplate expansion ports remote baseplates Note This is a special type with built in This cable is identical termination resistors It is not a Wye to cable
417. nly RAM and optional Flash are supported CPU341 Chapter 5 CPUs 5 33 CPU350 Catalog Number IC693CPU350 Discrete Input Points I Discrete Output Points Q 128 bits 96S SA SB SC 32 bits each only cannot be referenced in user logic program Built in Serial Port 1 uses connector on PLC power supply Supports SNP SNP X slave protocols Requires CMM module for SNP SNP X master CCM or RTU slave protocol support PCM module for RTU master support Profibus GBC GCM GCM option modules Yes Firmware based in firmware releases 9 0 and later 5 34 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 CPU351 Catalog Number IC693CPU351 User Program Memory maximum Starting with firmware Release 9 0 240K Bytes Note ON RUN Actual size of available user program memory depends on the Y amounts configured for the R and AQ configurable word memory types see below For firmware prior to Release 9 0 fixed size is 80K bytes Discrete Input Points I Discrete Output Points Q Tempor Coils 9 128 bits S SA SB SC 32 bits each Register Memory R Starting with firmware Release 9 0 configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16 384 word with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32 640 words with Control version 2 2 For firmware prior to Release 9 0 fixed size is 9 999 words Analog Inputs AI Starting with firmware Release 9 0 configurab
418. nnect the shield at the module end insulate it with shrink tubing Terminal Strip Method Mount a terminal strip inside the control enclosure and run a shielded cable from the terminal strip to the module s terminal board terminals Connect the shield to the metal panel next to the terminal strip Do not connect the shield at the module end insulate it with shrink tubing Wire the field device to the terminal strip with a shielded cable grounding the shield at the device end only insulate the other end of the shield with shrink tubing Also keep the length of exposed leads at the terminal strip and device ends as short as possible Note TBQC The Terminal Block Quick Connect Assembly is not recommended for use with analog modules due to cable shielding requirements Analog Output Module Wiring Each output should be connected using a good quality shielded wire with the shield grounded at the module end only See GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications for more information Module Power Supply Current Draw These values are found in Chapter 12 of this manual which discusses how to calculate power supply loading The information is also found in GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Module Wire Routing To reduce noise coupling among PLC wires it is recommended you keep electrically noisy wiring such as AC power
419. noise problems sometimes it is beneficial to experiment with the shield grounding point location Remember the cable shield should be grounded at one end only Also it is best to keep the length of stripped cable leads as short as possible to minimize the length of unshielded conductors that will be exposed to the noisy environment See the Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual GFK 0898 for additional details Using a Generic Terminal Block or Strip m Mount a terminal strip inside the control enclosure and run a shielded cable from the terminal strip to each input circuit on the module s terminal board terminals m Connect each cable s shield to the metal panel next to the terminal strip Do not connect the shields at the module end cut shield off at module end of cable and insulate with shrink tubing m Wire the field device to the terminal strip with a shielded cable grounding the shield at the device end only cut shield off at terminal strip end of cable and insulate with shrink tubing Also keep the length of exposed outside of shield leads at the terminal strip and device ends as short as possible Direct Method m Runa shielded cable from the field device transducer potentiometer etc directly to the module m Connect the conductors to the applicable screws on the module s terminal board Chapter 2 Installation 2 21 m Ground the shield at the field device end exposing a minimum amount of conductor to the
420. noisy environment Do not connect the shield at the module end cut shield off at module end of cable and insulate with shrink tubing TBQC not Recommended for Analog Modules The Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC Assembly is not recommended for use with analog modules due to cable shielding requirements Analog Output Module Wiring 2 22 General Each output should be connected using a good quality shielded wire with the cable shield grounded at the module end See GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications for more information Using a Generic Terminal Block or Strip m Mount a terminal strip inside the control enclosure and run shielded cable from the terminal strip to each output circuit on the module s terminal board terminals m Ground each cable s shield at the module end only Do not connect the shields at the terminal strip end cut shields off at terminal strip end of cables and insulate with shrink tubing m Wire the field device to the terminal strip with shielded cables grounding the shields at the terminal strip end only cut shields off at field device end of cables and insulate with shrink tubing Also keep the length of exposed outside of shield leads at the terminal strip and device ends as short as possible Direct Method m Run a shielded cable from each field device transducer potentiometer etc directly to the module m Connect the conductors to the applicable screws on the module s t
421. not be installed in the same PLC baseplate however both modules can be present on the same bus 2 Refer to GFK 1034 Series 90 30 Genius Bus Controller User s Manual for details Chapter 12 System Design 12 11 Calculating Power Supply Loading The load placed on a power supply in a Series 90 30 PLC baseplate is the sum of the internal and external loads placed on it by all of the hardware components in the baseplate backplane modules etc as well as external loads connected to the Isolated 24 VDC supply Use of the Isolated 24 Volt power supply output is optional however this output can be used to drive a limited number of input devices The maximum total power output rating of the Power Supplies is 30 watts however the individual 5VDC outputs can be rated for either 15 or 30 Watts depending on the Power Supply catalog number See Table 12 1 Power Supply Feature Comparison Table for details Load Requirements for Hardware Components The following table shows the DC load required by each module and hardware component All ratings are in milliamps except where noted Input and Output module current ratings are with all inputs or outputs on Three voltages are listed in the table 5 VDC provides primary power to operate most internal circuits 24 VDC Relay Power provides power for circuits that drive the relays on Relay modules 24 VDC Isolated provides power to operate a number of input circuits i
422. nput modules only and any external circuits connected to the 24 VDC Output terminals on the power supply terminal strip Note that the figures listed in the following table are maximum worst case requirements not typical requirements Table 12 3 Load Requirements in milliamps Catalog 24 VDC Relay 24 VDC Number Description 5 VDC Power Isolated AD693SLP300 State Logic Processor Module 425 IC693ACC300 Input Simulator 8 16 Points 120 IC693ACC307 Expansion Bus Termination Plug 72 IC690ACC900 RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter 170 IC690ACC901 RS 422 SNP to RS 232 Miniconverter Kit Version A 150 version B or later 100 IC693ADC311 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module 400 IC693ALG220 Analog Input Voltage 4 Channel 27 98 IC693ALG221 Analog Input Current 4 Channel 25 100 IC693ALG222 Analog Input Voltage High Density 16 Channel 112 41 IC693ALG223 Analog Input Current High Density 16 Channel 120 IC693ALG390 Analog Output Voltage 2 Channel 32 120 IC693ALG391 Analog Output Current 2 Channel 30 215 IC693ALG392 Analog Current Voltage Output 8 Channel 110 IC693ALG442 Analog Current Voltage Combination 4 Ch In 2 Ch Out 95 129 IC693APU300 High Speed Counter 250 IC693APU301 Motion Mate APM300 1 Axis 800 IC693APU302 Motion Mate APM300 2 Axis 800 IC693APU305 I O Processor Module 360
423. ns GFK 0356 Configuration and Programming Options Configuration Control GFK 1295 Programming Control GFK 1411 SFC Programming Control GFK 1385 Configuration LM90 GFK 0466 Programming LM90 GFK 0467 SFC Programming LM90 GFK 0854 Configuration Programming VersaPro GFK 1670 Configuration Programming CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer PLC GFK 1868 Ethernet Station Manager GFK 1186 Host Communications Toolkit C C GFK 0870 Host Communications Drivers MS Windows GFK 1026 Host Communications Toolkit Visual Basic GFK 1063 Digital Valve Driver Module 1C693DVM300 Installation and Specifications GFK 0356P or later Configuration Options This module does not connect to PLC backplane therefore it mounts in an unconfigured slot Discrete I O Modules 03560 All Discrete Input Output and Combination Modules IC693MDLxxx Installation and Specifications GFK 0898 Configuration Options Configuration HHP GFK 0402 Configuration LM90 GFK 0466 Configuration Control GFK 1295 Configuration VersaPro GFK 1670 Configuration CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer PLC GFK 1868 Appendix G Catalog Number to Publication Cross Reference G 5 Genius Modules IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Controller Installation Configuration User Guide GFK 1034 Related Publication Genius I O System User s Manual GEK 90486 1 Genius Blocks User s Man
424. nstall terminal block assembly on DIN rail Place the terminal block over the desired location on the DIN rail and snap into place Step 2 Remove 20 pin terminal assembly from module 1 Open the plastic terminal board 2 Grasp pull tab towards you until contacts Push up on the jacking lever to release separated from module housing and hook the terminal block disengaged for full removal GFK 0356Q Appendix H Terminal Block Quick Connect Components H 3 Step 3 Snap I O Face Plate assembly on module a47118 A1234 5678 A1234 5678 B1234 5676 B1234 5676 m f F n J L1 I Installing the I O Face Plate Module with I O Face Plate Installed Step 4 Connect cable to connector on terminal block Finally connect the selected length cable from the connector on the I O Face Plate to the connector on the interposing terminal block Module Wiring Information Refer to GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual for wiring connections for each module Cable Information Data sheets for the cables are found in the Cables chapter of this manual H 4 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0
425. nstallation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Programmer Hardware Products IC693PRG300 Hand Held Programmer HHP Some models of the Series 90 30 PLC can be programmed with the GE Hand Held Programmer HHP The HHP uses the Statement List Language With the HHP you can develop debug and monitor logic programs monitor data tables and configure PLC and I O parameters Note The user logic program in Series 90 30 CPU numbers 350 and above cannot be viewed or edited with the Hand Held Programmer You must use Logicmaster 90 30 Control VersaPro or Logic Developer PLC programming software with those CPUs The HHP connects to the CPU serial port through a 15 pin D type connector on the Series 90 30 PLC power supply in the CPU baseplate The physical connection is through a 6 foot 2 meters long cable IC693CBL303 This cable also provides power connections to the HHP and provides a signal that tells the PLC that an HHP is attached The HHP can be connected or disconnected while the PLC is powered up The HHP does not require communications parameter configuration in order to communicate with a PLC This makes it useful for troubleshooting a communications problem between a PC and the PLC SERIES 90 30 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER L HAND HELD PROGRAMMER gt LD D AND AL Al SLOT FOR MEMORY CARD
426. odels of State Logic CPUs are available that support State Logic programming Three of these CPUs are of the embedded baseplate type and two are modular CPUs Data sheets for these modules are located at the back of this chapter The available State Logic CPUs for the Series 90 30 PLC are m C693CSE311 and IC693CSE313 both are 5 slot embedded CPU CPU is built in baseplates m 7C693CSE323 10 slot embedded CPU baseplate m 1C693CSE331 and IC693CSE340 single slot CPU modules can be installed in standard 1C693CHS397 5 slot CPU baseplate or standard IC693CHS391 10 slot CPU baseplate Features of State Logic CPUs m Support State Logic programming m Support Floating Point calculations m Support Clock Calendar functions CSE331 and 340 are battery backed m Support discrete and analog overrides m Programmed by State Logic software products m Provide from 10K to 98K Bytes of program memory depending on model m Program memory is battery backed m Control two Status LEDs on the power supply m Software configuration no DIP switches or jumpers to set m Serial port on power supply used as a programming port a simple ASCII interface CCM port m Password controlled access m Support Series 90 30 I O products m Alarm Processor Function for module diagnostics m Simulation mode m EPROM and EEPROM program memory m Store histogram of State Changes 9 8 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 0
427. odule IC690CBL701 RS 232 DEFAULT PORT IC693CBL305B Figure 10 6 PCM to Workmaster Computer or PC XT Personal Computer GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 13 IC690CBL702 PC AT to PCM ADC CMM Cable Function of cable This cable provides RS 232 signal connections between the RS 232 port on a PCM ADC or CMM module and a serial port on an IBM PC AT or equivalent Personal Computer Cable Specifications Cable Length 10 feet 3 meters Connectors PCM ADC CMM Side 25 pin male D subminiature type AMP 205208 1 or equivalent Programmer Side 9 pin male D subminiature type AMP 205203 1 or equivalent Cable Clamps 25 pin AMP 207908 7 or equivalent 9 pin AMP 207908 1 or equivalent Cable Type Six conductor overall shield non paired AWG 24 21 mm Belden 9536 or equivalent Wiring Diagram PIN PIN 242832 PC AT 9 PIN 9 PIN 25 PIN MALE FEMALE FEMALE Figure 10 7 PCM ADC or CMM to Workmaster or PC AT Serial Cable Note Although the IC690CBL701 and 702 cables physically look identical except for catalog number labeling the internal pin connections are different 10 14 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables PCM to Programmer Cable Installation The Series 90 30 PLC baseplate that contains the PCM ADC or CMM and the programmer ground connections must be at the same ground potential Incorrec
428. odule These modules offer Ethernet capabilities formerly available only with the separate IC693CMM321 Ethernet module The CPU364 and CPU374 offer several advantages compared to using a separate CPU and Ethernet module It only occupies one slot in the PLC baseplate compared to the two slots required by separate CPU and Ethernet modules The CPU374 has two 10 100 BASE T TX ports connected to an embedded network switch The IC693CMM321 Ethernet module requires an external transceiver The CPU364 does not require one since it has this functionality built in To use this internal transceiver connect to the 1OBASE T port However if you choose you may use an external transceiver by connecting to the CPU364 s AAUI port which bypasses the internal transceiver see Appendix J for GE transceiver information The CPU374 does not require an external transceiver for either of its 10 100 BASE T TX ports Because they both reside in the CPU module the CPU and Ethernet Interface can communicate without using the PLC backplane This provides faster communications speed compared to using separate CPU and Ethernet modules which have to use the slower path across the PLC backplane Beginning with Firmware Release 9 1 the Ethernet Global Data EGD and configurable Name Resolution features were added to the CPU364 The CPU374 supports EGD but not Name Resolution These features are not supported by the IC693CMM321 Ethernet module Logicmaster softwar
429. odule or a special Option module must be installed in Slot 1 of these baseplates Slot 1 1s a unique size and type that only supports a CPU module or a special Option module like the FIP Remote I O Scanner IC693BEM330 Slot 1 is labeled m Slots numbered 2 and above are of a unique size and type that only supports I O or Option modules m Expansion and Remote baseplates are supported so a 25 pin D type female expansion connector is located at the right end of the baseplate for connecting to an Expansion or Remote baseplate m Since the CPU is modular it can be replaced or changed to a different type 1f additional features are desired m Only one CPU baseplate is allowed per system If more than one baseplate is used in a system the additional ones must be either Expansion or Remote types m A modular CPU baseplate is always assigned by default Rack Number 0 pz l l J I J l EEN PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER BASE 5 SLOT CAUTION USER PROGRAM AND REGISTER VALUES MAY BE LOST IF POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN 1 HOUR POWER CPUA 0 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 Oy SURELY 1 jm L 3 1 Z ON CPU SLOTS ZOmnzrurk es
430. of the module case refer to Figure 2 1 for location of front cover holding tabs m After removing the front cover plug the memory backup battery into the two prong battery connector on the front of the CPU module s printed circuit board m While the battery is connected to the CPU you will have to leave the CPU s front cover off Also the battery should be temporarily secured to the module with cable ties or tape to keep it from being accidentally damaged or disconnected The Battery Accessory Kit described below may also be used on a Modular CPU baseplate if the power supply has to be removed This would require leaving the CPU module mounted in the baseplate Long term battery backup can be provided with the use of the External Battery Module described on page 6 10 Embedded CPUs Embedded CPU Models 311 313 and 323 can be stored or shipped with a power supply installed and the power supply battery connected in order to maintain the contents of RAM memory However another option that doesn t require the use of a power supply is to use the Battery Accessory Kit described next Battery Accessory Kit IC693ACC315 The Battery Accessory Kit IC693ACC315 lets you maintain RAM memory contents without using a power supply It is useful for maintaining memory contents while a baseplate is being stored or shipped The Battery Accessory Kit consists of a battery with an attached connector mounted on a circuit board The circuit boa
431. off for an hour or more and only the battery is powering the memory circuits the super capacitor has a 3 VDC charge Then if the battery 1s disconnected the super capacitor will begin discharging from the 3VDC level until Its charge reaches 2 VDC at which time memory contents will be lost When used this way the super capacitor can maintain memory contents for a minimum of 20 minutes 6 8 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 5 Maintaining RAM Memory During Storage or Shipment of a CPU 03560 Modular CPUs Modular CPUs have an internal connector for a backup battery so that RAM memory contents can be retained while the CPU is being stored or shipped This arrangement should not to be used when the CPU module is installed in the baseplate and the backup battery is installed in the power supply To use a backup battery in the CPU module it is necessary to remove the front cover of the CPU module This can be accomplished by following these steps m To avoid losing memory contents once the CPU is removed from the PLC we recommend you install the backup battery into the CPU within 20 minutes First make sure PLC power is off then remove the CPU module m Gently squeeze the front cover of the CPU module and pull it forward away from the module case while gently pressing in on the 4 front cover tabs sequentially with a small screwdriver The front cover tabs latch into holes on each side
432. oftware Many configuration parameters can be modified from the user s application program as well Each configuration parameter is set to a factory default value which is suitable for many applications There are no jumpers or DIP switches to set on the module Six green LEDs at the top of the module indicate the operating status of the module the status of configuration parameters and the state of hardware outputs 1 through 4 Module Features Module features include W Upto 12 positive logic source inputs with input voltage range selection of either 5 VDC TTL or 10 to 30 VDC non TTL Up to eight positive logic source outputs four outputs with 1 amp rating and four configurable outputs with 0 5 amp rating Outputs protected by replaceable fuse one fuse common to all outputs Dedicated processor provides 500 s I O update Counts per Timebase register for input rate measurement Total Counts register 32 bit accumulates total counts received by module Four Strobe data registers for input position capture Two Timer data registers for indicating input pulse length or input spacing in milliseconds Thirty two range comparators outputs returned in I and data Software configuration Internal module diagnostics Individual LEDs that indicate Module OK and Configured OK status Individual LEDs that indicate state of Outputs 1 through 4 A removable terminal board for connection of field wiring Inputs can be used as count
433. ogicmaster eee I 6 Connecting your Logicmaster Programmer to a PLC on a Multidrop System I 6 SNP Multidrop 1 7 Ethernet Transceivers iniri scssessedssteeavacssesncacescusecdsesnestasoesiduecbeasweseaesadeenacssead J 1 IC649AEA102 Ethernet LOBASE T 1 J 1 Power Requirement tee dece titi ida ie ee J 1 LED Indicator eights innere c tei en eee e et edi J 1 IC649AEA103 Ethernet LOBASE2 1 J 2 Power Requirement 251 eene rer nidi S ts J 2 LED Indicator Light er heh esto a Be cete O ia ae J 2 Tables and sesseesoessessoesoesoeesoesoesoeesoesosesossoesoeesossoessossossooesossosseossosso K 1 AWG to Metric Wire Size Conversion essere K 2 Temperature Conversion esses K 3 Formulas eb eC Ra UE EP Ee RUD ee e ah K 3 Conversion Information eue eie et ee et dete iere eiue ete UL eia K 4 English and Metric Equivalents esses eene K 5 44 420084 001 EMI Line Filter ceres eere eene e eee eene eene netto enean nennen L 1 44A720084 001 Optional EMI Line Filter L 1 44A720084 001 Line Filter Mounting Dimensions essseeeeeeeenene L 3 Contents xxiii Contents Figure 1 1 Five Slot CPU Baseplate 00 0 ccccesesssceeeseceeceseeseeeceeseeseceaecsecsaeeseceeeaessecececsee
434. ogram to turn on an output that controls a warning light on an operator panel as in the example rung below or to send a warning to an operator interface terminal SA011 6 4 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 5 In the rung shown above the SA011 contact will close when a low battery is detected by the PLC This will turn on the Q output coil which addresses an output module s output that will turn ona warning light An alternate method would be to communicate the status of the coil which in that case would probably be a 96M coil to a Human to Machine Interface HMI terminal such as a GE CIMPLICITY HMI unit The HMI could be programmed to display a warning message when that particular bit goes to a logic 1 For more information about System Reference bits and ladder logic programming see the Series 90 30 20 Micro PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual GFK 0467 03560 Chapter 6 Memory Backup Battery Backup 6 5 6 6 Operating Without a Memory Backup Battery Whether it would be to your advantage to use a battery less scheme depends on your application There are various advantages and disadvantages to consider in making your decision Possible Advantage The obvious advantage of operating without a memory backup battery is that you are freed from the need to maintain the battery To be able to run without a battery you need to have a PROM device eithe
435. ommunicate with modules in a remote baseplate will usually be small with respect to the overall scan time For more detailed information on scan time calculations refer to Chapter 2 of GFK 0467 the Series 90 30 20 Micro PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual Another important scan time consideration is the cable type used for communicating at longer distances Data propagation delay must be minimized to ensure proper system timing and margins Any deviation in cable type may result in erratic or improper system operation Suggested cable types are specified in the Cables chapter in the IC693CBL300 etc data sheet Mixing Expansion and Remote Baseplates in a System Expansion and remote baseplates can be used in the same system as long as certain requirements are met m Youdo not exceed the 50 foot 15 meter maximum cable distance from the CPU to the last Expansion baseplate m You do not exceed the 700 foot 213 meter maximum cable distance from the CPU to the last Remote baseplate m The cable type recommended for use with Remote baseplates must be used throughout the system The exception to this requirement is that the prewired 3 foot 1 meter cable IC693CBL300 can be used as a Wye adapter to simplify the custom cable assembly associated with the daisy chain connections between baseplates Information on building cables for use with Remote baseplates can be found in the Cables chapter in the IC693CBL300 etc data shee
436. on Note that the keyswitches on some of these CPUs are labeled ON RUN and OFF STOP and on others are just labeled ON and OFF Regardless of the labeling all of these keyswitches work as described below m Flash Memory Protection This standard hard wired feature can be used to prevent Flash memory from being changed by unauthorized people people without a key When the key switch is in the ON position Flash memory cannot be changed written to This keyswitch feature will always be in effect regardless of how the next two configurable features are set Chapter 5 CPUs 5 15 m Run Stop configurable This feature was introduced in CPU firmware release 7 0 It is by default disabled It is not functional unless the R S Switch parameter on the CPU configuration screen is set to Enabled This feature when enabled lets you stop the PLC by turning the key switch to OFF or start the PLC running by turning the key switch to ON if there are no faults If the PLC has a non fatal fault turning the key switch from OFF to ON will cause the RUN light on the power supply to flash for 5 seconds If you again turn the key switch OFF then ON during the 5 seconds the fault will clear and the PLC will go into run mode and the RUN light will stay ON If the PLC has a fatal fault you will not be able to use the keyswitch to either clear the fault or put the PLC into run mode You will have to correct the cause of the fault before being able to resu
437. on features 3 7 mounting in 19 2 9 3 21 number in FIP Nest 8 12 Index 1 Index Index 2 power supply location 4 2 Remote features 3 8 Serial number location 3 2 Sizes 3 2 Terminology 3 3 Types 3 1 Battery CPU memory backup 6 1 Date code 6 7 Determining age 6 7 installation accessory kit 6 10 Life 6 4 Low warning 6 4 Memory backup 4 20 Operating without 6 6 RAM backup path 6 8 Replacement strategy 6 3 Battery accessory kit For embedded CPUs 6 9 Blocks Genius 8 6 Bracket adapter 2 8 3 20 Break free SNP protocol 5 13 Bus connectors 8 11 Bus controller FIP 8 10 Bus interface 8 13 C Cable 32 point I O 10 42 10 49 APM 10 45 Building 32 point 10 59 cross reference table 10 1 Data sheet list 10 7 Extension for I O module 10 38 HHP 10 33 I O bus expansion 10 22 I O for 32 point modules 10 40 I O interface 10 54 10 57 IC690CBL714A multidrop 10 18 Programmer 10 12 10 14 10 16 PTM interface 10 65 WSI 10 8 Wye port expansion 10 35 Cable and connections for serial port A 2 multidrop cable I 2 Cable diagrams for isolated repeater converter C 8 Cable diagrams serial connection A 8 Cable for Series 90 30 installations extension cable for 32 point modules 10 38 10 54 10 62 hand held programmer cable 10 33 I O cable for 32 point modules 10 40 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 I O cable for Power Mate APM to terminal block 10
438. on PLC power supply Supports SNP slave and SNP X slave protocols Requires CMM module for SNP SNP X master CCM or RTU slave protocol support PCM module for RTU master support Communications LAN Supports multidrop Also supports Ethernet FIP Profibus GBC GCM and GCM option modules Override Yes Battery Backed Clock Yes Interrupts Yes Type of Memory Storage RAM and Flash PCM CCM Compatibility Yes Floating Point Math Support Yes firmware based in firmware Release 9 0 and later 03560 Chapter 5 CPUs 5 37 5 38 CPU363 Catalog Number IC693CPU363 CPU Type Single slot CPU module Total Baseplates per System 8 CPU baseplate 7 expansion and or remote Load Required from Power Supply 890 milliamps from 5 VDC supply Processor Speed 25 MegaHertz Processor Type 80386EX Operating Temperature 0 to 60 degrees C 32 to 140 degrees F ambient Typical Scan Rate 0 22 milliseconds per 1K of logic boolean contacts User Memory total 240K 245 760 Bytes Actual size of available user program memory depends on the amounts configured for R AI and AQ configurable word memory types see below Discrete Input Points I 2 048 Discrete Output Points Q 2 048 Discrete Global Memory G 1 280 bits Internal Coils M 4 096 bits Output Temporary Coils T 256 bits System Status References S 128 bits S SA SB SC 32
439. on Requirements for Conformance to Standards What s New in This Manual m Added the model 374 CPU which supports connection to an Ethernet network through two built in 10BaseT 100BaseTx auto negotiating full duplex Ethernet ports Models 364 release 9 10 and later and 374 are the only Series 90 30 CPUs that support Ethernet Global Data Note that the CPU374 is supported only by the Windows based programmers m Other corrections and clarifications as necessary Related Publications GFK 0356Q For more information on Series 90 30 products refer to these publications For a publication to product catalog number cross reference refer to Appendix G GFK 0255 Series 90 PCM and Support Software User s Manual GFK 0256 MegaBasic Programming Reference Manual GFK 0293 Series 90 30 High Speed Counter User s Manual GFK 0401 Workmaster II PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation GFK 0402 Series 907M 30 and 90 20 PLC Hand Held Programmer User s Manual GFK 0412 Genius Communications Module User s Manual GFK 0466 Logicmaster 90 Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0467 Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual GFK 0487 Series 90 PCM Development Software PCOP User s Manual GFK 0499 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual Preface viii GFK 0582 Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User s Manual GFK 0631 Series 90
440. on of 4 4 overvoltage protection devices 2 24 specifications 4 5 High capacity DC power supply specifications 4 14 High Capacity DC power supply 24 VDC illustration of 4 13 High speed counter 8 23 Horner Electric Inc 11 8 Host CPU 8 12 Hotline PLC 2 1 HSC High Speed Counter 8 23 I O bus expansion cable description of 10 22 maximum cable distance 10 23 maximum number in system 10 23 I O Bus Expansion cables Application examples 10 31 building 10 22 wiring diagrams 10 28 I O bus termination information 10 31 I O cables for 32 point modules 10 40 I O expansion bus termination 3 12 10 25 system connections 10 31 I O Expansion Bus cables 3 10 I O faceplate H 3 I O interface cables for 32 point modules 10 42 10 49 10 57 for Power Mate APM modules 10 45 I O link interface module slave 8 24 I O link master module 8 25 compatibility 8 26 restart pushbutton 8 26 serial port 8 26 I O module Figure standard density 7 3 I O Module Relay protection 7 4 I O modules 32 point figure 7 5 32 point wiring figure 7 6 basic types 7 1 inserting a module 2 3 installing a terminal board 2 5 number in FIP Nest 8 12 removing a module 2 4 removing a terminal board 2 6 Wiring 32 point modules 7 6 wiring to modules 2 18 I O Modules 32 point features 7 4 Index 5 Index Index 6 50 pin 32 point figure 7 5 Analog features 7 8 Standard density 7 2 Wire routing 7 11 I O process
441. on on creating a backup can be found in GE s software user s manuals This procedure is also covered in applicable GE programming software training courses Ensure that a suitable computer is equipped with GE PLC programming software and will be readily available to load the backup program to the PLC Create a written backup procedure Fortunately restoring your program from the backup copy is probably not something you will do very often As a result however some of the steps could easily be forgotten 03560 Chapter 6 Memory Backup Battery Backup 6 3 Factors Affecting Battery Life Replacing your battery once per year is a good rule of thumb However no one can predict precisely how long a backup battery will last because this depends upon what CPU is used what temperature it is subjected to and how it used Considering the following list of factors that affect battery life will help you decide how frequently to replace the battery in your application m battery that is not in use has an estimated life called its shelf life of 5 years at room temperature 25 degrees C or 77 degrees F m A battery that is used continuously supplying current to memory circuits with PLC power off if used at room temperature has an estimated average life as follows Model Estimated Average Life at Room Temperature CPU models 311 313 and 323 2 years CPU models 331 364 1 year CPU374 1 2 months m A
442. or a drawing of these modules See GFK 0898 the Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual for details about these modules 16 point modules that are equipped with the TBQC I O faceplate adapter See Appendix H for information on the TBQC Terminal Block Quick Connector Use the IC693CBL328 right side cable for this application If a different length cable is required you can build your own cable but only straight connector kits are currently available See Building Custom Length Cables below Cable Length 10 feet 3 meters Fujitsu FCN 3658024 AU Connector Depth for Cables C693CBL 327 328 The following figure shows that these cables extend 2 out from the face of the modules they are connected to The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should allow for the 2 depth added by this connector Series 90 30 Module n 2 0 Figure 10 38 Dimension for Depth of Connector for I1693CBL 327 328 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables Building Custom Length 24 pin Connector Cables GFK 0356Q Cables connecting the module to field devices can be built to length as required for individual applications You must purchase the mating female socket type 24 pin connectors The 24 pin connector kit can be ordered as an accessory kit from GE Catalog numbers for these connectors and their associated parts are listed in the following tab
443. or module changing configuration parameters 8 28 configuration using Logicmaster 90 configurator 8 28 using the hand held programmer 8 28 features 8 28 threshold voltage 8 28 watchdog timer circuit 8 28 Processor Module 8 27 1 O terminal block IC693ACC329 H 6 IC693ACC330 H 7 IC693ACC331 H 8 IC693ACC332 H 9 IC693ACC333 H 10 IC693ACC377 H 13 IBM AT XT serial port A 5 IC640WMI310 WSI board 11 2 IC640WMI320 WSI board 11 2 IC647CBL704 Cable WSI 10 8 IC649AEA101 Obsolete Ethernet transceiver J 2 IC649AEA102 Ethernet transceiver 5 24 8 29 8 30 J 1 IC649AEA103 Ethernet transceiver 5 24 8 29 8 30 J 2 IC655CCM590 isolated repeater converter C 1 IC655CMM590 Obsolete repeater converter 11 8 IC690ACC900 RS 232 to RS 485 Converter 11 3 IC690ACC901 Miniconverter 11 4 IC690ACC903 Port Isolator overview 11 8 IC690CBL701 Cable programmer 10 12 IC690CBL702 Cable programmer 10 14 use on PCM modules 8 32 8 36 IC690CBL705 Cable programmer 10 16 IC690CBL714A Cable multidrop 10 18 multidrop cable 1 2 IC693ACC301 Memory backup battery 6 1 IC693ACC303 HHP memory card 11 6 IC693ACC308 baseplate adapter bracket 2 8 3 20 IC693ACC308 Bracket 19 2 9 3 21 IC693ACC313 Bracket recessed 19 2 10 3 21 IC693ACC315 Battery accessory kit 6 9 IC693ACC329 TBQC H 6 IC693ACC330 TBQC H 7 IC693ACC331 TBQC H 8 IC693ACC332 TBQC H 9 IC693ACC333 H 10 1C69
444. or on PLC power supply Supports SNP slave and SNP X slave protocols Communications LAN Supports multidrop Also supports Ethernet FIP Profibus GBC GCM GCM option modules Override Battery Backed Clock Interrupts Type of Memory Storage RAM and optional EPROM or EEPROM PCM CCM Compatibility Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 CPU313 Catalog Number IC693CPU313 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER s g 3 3 2 BASE 5 SLOT 9 WITH CPU o o 2 8 3 2 28 3 CAUTION SYSTEM PROGRAM PROM PROM USER PROGRAM AND REGISTER VALUES MAY BE LOST IF POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN i HOUR D POWER O SUPPLY o Discrete Input Points I 160 maximum combined inputs outputs Output Tempora Coils Y System Status References S System Registers for reference table viewing only cannot be referenced in user logic program Shift Registers yes Built in Ports 1 uses connector on PLC power supply Supports SNP slave and SNP X slave protocols Communications LAN Supports multidrop Also supports Ethernet FIP Profibus GBC GCM GCM option modules Override Battery Backed Clock Interrupts Type of Memory Storage RAM and optional EPROM or EEPROM PCM CCM Compatibility 03560 Chapter 5 CPUs 5 29
445. ore Device Yes Total Baseplates per System 8 CPU baseplate 7 expansion and or remote Interrupt Support Supports the periodic subroutine feature Communications and Programmable Yes Coprocessor Compatibility Override Yes Floating Point Math VersaPro 2 03 or later CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer 2 60 or later Control software version 2 50 or later Programming Support Built in Serial Ports None Supports RS 485 port on power supply SNP and SNPX on power supply RS 485 port Ethernet built in 10 100 base T TX Ethernet Switch Two both are 10 100baseT TX ports with auto sensing RJ 45 Protocol Support Built in Ethernet Communications Number of Ethernet Ports Yes Hardware Floating Point Math connection Number of IP Addresses One Protocols SRTP and Ethernet Global Data EGD No channel support Web Server Support None Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F ambient Storage Temperature 40 C to 85 C Agency Approvals UL508 C UL Class I DIV II A B C D CE Mark Low Temperature LT Testing Yes The CPU374 is available for 40 to 60 C operation Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q Chapter Memory Backup Battery Backup 6 Backup Battery for RAM Memory All Supplies The long life Lithium battery IC693ACC301 used to maintain the contents of the CMOS RAM memory in the CPU is accessed by removing the cover plate located at the bottom of the
446. ot IC693CHS398 and 10 slot 1C693CHS392 An Expansion backplane does not support the following intelligent option modules PCM ADC BEM330 and CMM311 These modules must be mounted in a CPU baseplate All other I O and option modules can be mounted in any type of rack All Expansion baseplates must be connected to a common ground see the Installation chapter for details Expansion baseplates are the same physical size use the same type power supplies and support the same I O and option modules as the Remote baseplates Each Expansion baseplate has a Rack Number Selection DIP switch I A DIP EXPANSION RACK N SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 XV xc X PROGRAMMABLE 2 x X X CONTROLLER 3 XX x BASE 5 SLOT ES EXPANSION oo co tnr NON CPU SLOTS Er 2 2 gt POWER SUPPLY Figure 3 6 IC693CHS398 5 Slot Expansion Baseplate 03560 Chapter 3 Baseplates 3 7
447. ote Select Positive DRSEL Remote Select Negative Parity Error Positive Parity Error Negative DRMRUN Remote Run Positive E Em 2 DFRAME Cycle Frame Positive 3 DFRAME Cycle Frame Negative FGND Frame Ground for Cable Shield V Logic Ground m I O Expansion Bus Termination When two or more baseplates are cabled together in an expansion system the I O expansion bus must be properly terminated The I O bus must be terminated at the last baseplate in an expansion system Each signal pair is terminated with 120 ohm 1 4 watt resistors wired between the appropriate pins as follows see the above table also pins 16 17 24 25 20 21 12 13 8 9 2 3 The I O bus termination can be done one of the following ways m installing an O Bus Terminator Plug catalog number IC693ACC307 on the last expansion baseplate local expansion baseplate or remote baseplate in the system The Terminator Plug has a resistor pack physically mounted inside of a connector The I O Bus Terminator Plug is shipped with each baseplate only the last baseplate in the expansion chain can have the I O Bus Terminator Plug installed Unused I O Bus Terminator Plugs can be discarded or saved as spares m fan expansion system has only one expansion baseplate the I O bus can be terminated by installing as the last cable the 50 foot 15 meter I O Expansion cable catalog number IC693CBL302 or IC693CBL314 These cables have the termination resistors instal
448. ount Adapter Bracket Installation eee 2 9 Figure 2 8 Dimensions for 19 inch Rack Mounting Using IC693ACC308 Adapter Bracket 2 9 Figure 2 9 IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket essere 2 10 Figure 2 10 Recommended System Grounding sese eee enne 2 11 Figure 2 11 Baseplate Grounding 2 12 Figure 2 12 CPU 351 or 352 Attaching Shield Ground 2 2 14 Figure 2 13 CPU 351 or 352 Mounting the Shield Grounding Bracket and 2 15 Figure 2 14 CPU 363 CPU364 or CPU374 Attaching Ground Wire sse 2 16 Figure 2 15 Power Supply Terminal Boards sessi enne 2 24 Figure 2 16 Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap 2 24 Figure 3 1 Common Baseplate Features eee enne eene enne 3 2 Figure 3 2 Models IC693CPU311 and IC693CPU313 5 Slot Embedded CPU Baseplates 3 5 Figure 3 3 Model IC693CPU323 10 slot Embedded CPU Baseplate 3 5 Figure 3 4 IC693CHS397 5 Slot Modular CPU Baseplate essent 3 6 Figure 3 5 IC693CHS391 10 Slot Modular CPU Baseplate eese 3 6 Figure 3 6 IC693CHS398 5 Slot Expansion Baseplate esses 3 7 Figure 3 7 IC693CHS392 1
449. ounting These terminal blocks are mounted on a standard user supplied 35 mm DIN rail GFK 0356Q Appendix H Terminal Block Quick Connect Components 7 1693ACC331 TBQC Terminal Block Use with the following 16 point I O module IC693MDL741 700o 000 6 cT mE 120201000 AAAA Width 4 64 117 86mm gt Height all blocks Depth all blocks 2 25 57mm 1 7716 45mm a45588 AA Qo DD 220 Qo AA QD CAO Maximum wire size per terminal one 14 AWG 2 10 mm ans P2929 Ieeeoeoeo TERMINAL BLOCK Figure H 5 1693ACC331 TBQC Terminal Block wiring connections Mounting Note Refer to GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual for required These terminal blocks are mounted on a standard user supplied 35 mm DIN rail H 8 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 GFK 03560 Components 1693ACC332 TBQC Terminal Block Use with the following 16 point I O module IC693MDL940 245589 22 Maximum wire size per ter
450. ounting screws Recommended torque 12 in lbs 1 4 Newton meter 5VDC supplied by port 25 mA 100 mA available for external equipment 500 Volts EIA 422 485 Balanced Line 0 60 C 32 140 F Those supported by PLC Note This appendix is based on Data Sheet GFK 1663 03560 Appendix IC690ACC903 Port Isolator E 7 Appendix Calculating Series 90 30 Heat Dissipation F Overview Series 90 30 PLCs must be mounted in a protective enclosure The enclosure should be capable of properly dissipating the heat produced by all of the devices mounted inside it This appendix describes how to calculate heat dissipation for a Series 90 30 PLC The strategy is to calculate a heat dissipation value in watts for each individual module in the PLC To obtain a total heat dissipation figure for the PLC add the individual values together The procedure consists of the following steps Step 1 Basic Method to Calculate Module Dissipation F 2 Step 2 Calculation for PLC Power Supplies F 3 Step 3 Output Calculations for Discrete Output Modules F 3 Step 4 Input Calculations for Discrete Input Modules F 4 Step 5 Final Calculation F 6 Information Required m In addition to the information in this manual you will need GFK 0898 Series 90 30 I O Module Specifications Manual m You will need operating current values for the discrete output devices connected to the PLC s discrete output modules These include control rel
451. out moving connection cables To interconnect Series 90 70 or redundant Series 90 70 PLCs in a multidrop configuration Specifications Connector A DBISF 15 pin female connector with M3 latchblocks Connectors B and C DB15M 15 pin right angle male connector with spring clips Wire Cable consists of three individually shielded pairs of 22 gauge stranded conductors Belden 8777 or equivalent Jumpers All jumpers are made of 22 AWG UL1061 type individual wires Length The length from the back of Connector A to entry into Connector B is 6 inches 0 5 inch The length from the back of Connector C to entry into Connector B is 40 inches 1 0 inch Connector B Connector C Connector A M3 Latching Blocks 2 N Pin 1 M3 pan head screws 2 Screws must not protrude through the end of the Latching Blocks 10 18 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 GFK 0356Q Cables IC690CBL714A Multi Drop Cable Wiring Diagram Connector A 15 pin Female to other CPU or Adapter Connector B 15 pin male to CPU SNP Port Note Trim all drain wires flush with the jacket Connector C 15 pin male to next CPU or final term Figure 10 11 Connecting Diagram for Multidrop Cable IC690CBL714A Chapter 10 Cables 10 19 Connection Diagrams for IC690CBL714A Cable Conn B Conn Series 90 30 PLC N Series 90 30 PL
452. ow Hook the pivot hook located on the bottom of the terminal board to the lower slot on the module m Push the terminal board toward the module until it snaps into place m Open the terminal board cover and ensure that the latch on the module is securely holding the terminal board in place Caution Compare the module catalog number on the label on the back of the hinged door see Figure 2 6 and the label on the side of the module see below to ensure that they match If a wired terminal board is installed on the wrong module type damage to the module may occur when the system is powered up a43062 Module Label REFER TO TEXT FOR INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Figure 2 4 Installing an I O Module s Terminal Board 03560 Chapter 2 Installation 2 5 Removing a Module s Terminal Board To remove a terminal board m Open the plastic terminal board cover m Push up on the jacking lever to release the terminal block m Grasp pull tab and pull it towards you until contacts have separated from module housing and bottom pivot hook has disengaged PULL 243715 TAB Figure 2 5 Removing a Module s Terminal Board 2 6 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Module Terminal Board Posts The terminal board has three posts on the
453. ower and Input Power Circuits MCR To Motor Starters PLC Output Module Circuits etc Figure 12 1 Hard Wired MCR Circuit Example Protection From Design Changes or Overrides Only authorized personnel should be allowed to make changes that could impact the safe operation of the equipment Passwords and lockout circuits may be used to accomplish this Some Series 90 30 CPUs have keylock switches to protect against program changes see CPUs chapter for keylock switch details Chapter 12 System Design 12 9 12 10 Safety Documentation PLC Program Documentation Thorough documentation will help you and others who work on the equipment remember and understand how the safety circuits and features work In some industries applicable regulations may require this type of documentation The PLC programming software gives you extensive documentation abilities For example you can create Nicknames such as PSTOP Descriptions such as Program Stop Coil and Comments such as This coil is used to stop the program cycle but it does not turn off power to the main hydraulic circuit However if the operator opens the safety gate the Safety Gate Interlock switch will open and shut off the hydraulic pump These Nicknames Descriptions and Comments become part of the PLC program and can be viewed with the applicable software As an alternative to ladder logic programming the State Logic programming language makes it easier
454. partment of ae The following statements are required to appear in the Series 90_ 30 Installation Manual and the Series 90_ 30 I O Specifications Manual for Class I Div 2 Hazardous Locations 1 EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO CLASS I GROUPS A B C and D DIV 2 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I DIVISION 2 GROUPS A B C DOR NON HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY 2 WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS 1 DIVISION 2 3 WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON HAZARDOUS 4 ALL UNUSED SLOTS IN ALL BASEPLATES MUST BE POPULATED WITH FILLER MODULES IC693ACC310 OR EQUIVALENT Preface This manual describes the GE Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller PLC It contains a description of hardware components and provides basic hardware installation procedures The Series 90 30 PLC is a member of the Series 90_ family of Programmable Logic Controllers from GE For a list of product standards refer to data sheet GFK 0867B or later GE Approvals Standards General Specifications which lists all of the standards for GE products Installation instructions in this manual are provided for installations that do not require special procedures for noisy or hazardous environments For installations that must conform to more stringent requirements such as CE Mark see GFK 1179 Installati
455. pendix m Description of the Isolated Repeater Converter m System Configurations m Cable Diagrams Note The catalog number for the Isolated Repeater Converter was previously IC630CCM390 Description of the Isolated Repeater Converter The Isolated Repeater Converter IC655CCM590 can be used for the following purposes m provide ground isolation where a common ground cannot be established between components m To boost RS 422 signals for greater distance and more drops m convert signals from RS 232 to RS 422 or RS 422 to RS 232 The figure on the next page shows the appearance of the unit and the locations of key features 03560 1 TOP VIEW ISOLATED ADAPTOR o o oo 0 FUSE 1AMP C Figure C 1 Isolated Repeater Converter Items of interest to the user on the Isolated Repeater Converter are described below Two 25 pin female D type connectors Two 25 pin male D type connectors solder pot are included for user cabling 115 230 VAC power connection internal 4 position terminal block Fused 1 Amp power protection Power ON green indicator LED Three position toggle switch recessed in the back of the unit is set according to the system configurations shown later in this appendix C 2 Series 90 30 PLC I
456. pin 1 AUX OUT 15 15 VDC 0 3A Auxiliary power output for external circuits Not isolated Developed from input power on pins 1 and 2 AUT XOUT 15 VDC 0 2A Auxiliary power output for external circuits Not isolated 15 Developed from input power on pins 1 and 2 DIGITAL 1 IN Channel 1 TTL input connection common on pin 9 DIGITAL 2 IN Channel 2 TTL input connection common on pin 9 DIGITAL 4 IN Channel 4 TTL input connection common on pin 9 DIGITAL RET Common connection for Digital Input Channels 1 4 pins 5 8 DIGITAL 3 IN Channel 3 TTL input connection common on pin 9 28V IN Power Supply connection for Output Channels 1 and 2 common on pin 12 Required external 26 VDC nominal power supply 28V2 IN Power Supply connection for Output Channels 3 and 4 common on pin 12 Required external 26 VDC nominal power supply 28V1 amp 2 RET connection for both Output Channel Power Supply inputs pins 10 and 11 7 14 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Table 7 3 Series 90 30 Discrete I O Modules Catalog Number 1C693MDL230 IC693MDL231 IC693MDL240 IC693MDL241 IC693MDL630 IC693MDL632 IC693MDL633 IC693MDL634 IC693MDL640 IC693MDL641 IC693MDL643 IC693MDL644 IC693MDL645 IC693MDL646 IC693MDL652 IC693MDL653 IC693MDL654 IC693MDL655 IC693ACC300 IC693MDL310 IC693MDL330 IC693MDL340 IC693MDL390 IC693MDL730 IC693MDL731 IC693
457. pin 1 from the mating cable When using factory made Wye cable with these baseplates it is not necessary to remove pin from the cable Custom built Wye cables for these baseplates can be made using either Figure 10 20 or Figure 10 21 Figure 10 21 shows how the standard factory made Wye cables are made By removing pin in custom built Wye cables made for the earlier versions of remote baseplates the pin 7 OV signal reference originates in the main CPU baseplate In these earlier versions of the remote baseplates pin 1 was tied to pin 7 OV and also AC coupled to the remote frame ground When using these baseplates in combination with the 100 shielded Wye cables the pin 7 OV reference would be improperly DC coupled to the remote frame ground through the D subminiature connector shell which is DC coupled to the remote frame ground In the remote baseplates IC693CHS393F and later and IC693CHS399E and later the pin 1 shield signal is DC coupled to the remote frame ground and not attached to pin 7 OV This allows the best noise immunity by providing a good continuous cable shield and still allows the pin 7 OV signal reference to originate in the CPU baseplate without the need for removing pin in any factory or custom built cable The D subminiature connector shell is still DC coupled to the remote frame ground Making a 100 Shielded Cable Use the following steps to build a 100 shielded cable 1 Strip approximately 5 8 i
458. power supply faceplate This battery is mounted on a plastic clip attached to the inside of this cover The battery is wired to a small Berg female connector that connects to either of the two Berg male connectors mounted on the Power Supply printed circuit board This battery can be replaced with power applied to the PLC Low Battery Warning LED BATTERY CONNECTORS LITHIUM BACK UP BATTERY Battery Cavity Battery Cover Removal Notch Figure 6 1 Backup Battery for RAM Memory If a Low Battery Warning BATT LED turns ON occurs replace the battery located in the power supply before removing power from the rack Otherwise there is a possibility that data will be corrupted or the application program will be cleared from memory 03560 6 1 Battery Replacement Instructions 6 2 To avoid the chance of losing the contents of RAM memory you can carefully perform the following steps with PLC power ON This procedure should only be performed by qualified electrical personnel who are trained in applicable electrical safety rules and procedures Failure to follow standard electrical safety practice can result in injury or death to personnel damage to equipment or both Carefully insert the tip a small pocket size screwdriver approximately 1 4 inch 6 mm into the battery cover removal slot located beneath the battery cover see previous figure Gently rotate
459. power dissipated by the input circuits comes from a separate power source so are not included in the figure used to calculate PLC power supply dissipation in Step 2 We will assume that all input circuit power delivered to these modules is eventually dissipated as heat The procedure is m Find the value for the Input Current in the Specifications table for your input module in the Series 90 30 I O Module Specifications Manual GFK 0898 m Multiply the input voltage times the current value times the estimated percent of on time to arrive at average power dissipation for that input Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 m Repeat for all inputs on the module To save time you could determine if several inputs were similar in current draw and on time so that you would only have to make their calculation once m Repeat these calculations for all Discrete Input modules in the rack Discrete Input Module Example The Specifications table for the IC693MDL240 16 Point Discrete 120 VAC Input Module in the Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specification Manual GFK 0898 gives the following information Input Current 12 mA typical at rated voltage Use this value for all of the input calculations for this module In this example eight of the Input Module s points are used for switches that for normal operation stay on closed 100 of the time These include the Emergency Stop Over Temperature
460. ps sees 12 12 Table 13 1 Fuse List for Series 90 30 Modules 222 13 6 Table 13 2 Spare Replacement Parts sess nente 13 7 Table 1 Connector Cable Specifications 2 Table 2 Series 90 PLC RS 422 Serial Port Pin out esee A 4 Table 3 Workmaster RS 232 Serial Port Pins out essen eene A 5 Table 4 IBM AT XT Serial Port Pins out essesssssseseeeeeeeeeeennenn enne nennen innen enne nnns A 6 Table B 1 RS 232 Interface for Converter esses enne enne nennen enne B 4 Table B 2 RS 422 RS 485 Interface for Converter eese enne enne nnns B 5 Table B 3 Jumper Configuration for RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter see B 8 Table B 4 Specifications for IC690ACC900 Converter esses enne B 9 Table C 1 Isolated Repeater Converter Pin Assignment essere nenne C 4 Table D 1 Miniconverter RS 232 Port eese eene enne nnne enne nennen enne D 2 Table D 2 Miniconverter RS 422 Port ccccccsccssccssscesscessceseecesecsseceseeeeeeeeesseceaeceseeeeesseeseeeceaeeeseseeseeesgs D 2 Table D 3 Miniconverter Specifications D 4 RS 485 Connectors cenam ete itte e ede tut e ims E 2 Table H 1 TBQC Terminal Block Selection
461. pter 2 when using these adapter brackets Failure to properly ground the PLC can result in improper operation damage to equipment and injury to personnel 1C693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Used to mount a baseplate to the front face ofa 19 rack Install the adapter bracket by inserting the tabs at the top and bottom of the adapter bracket into the corresponding slots at the top and bottom of the plastic baseplate cover NOTE Although the figure below shows the plastic baseplate cover removed this is for illustration purposes only It is not necessary to remove the cover to install the bracket With the bracket in place insert and tighten the two screws included with the bracket through the back of the baseplate holes into the threaded holes in the bracket m 1C693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket Used to recess mount a baseplate inside a 19 rack A baseplate mounts on the rear panel of this adapter bracket using four 8 32 4mm screws nuts lock washers and flat washers The Adapter Bracket bolts through its four slotted holes to the face of the 19 rack using applicable hardware lock washers recommended IGHT SIDE OF LL P BASEPLATE Insert two screws 1 at top 1 at bottom from back of base unit through base unit and bracket Tighten screws to secure bracket to base unit 0 Note Baseplate is shown with cover removed for illustration purposes It is not necessary to remove the baseplat
462. put device or wiring should be checked If none of an output module s outputs are working it may be that the external field output power supply is defective is not powered up or is not connected properly Input and output devices are powered from an external power supply not from inside the module If the output module is a type that has built in fuses some have electronic short circuit protection instead the Fuse Indicator LED labeled F shown in the previous figure will light if a fuse blows Power Supply LED Indicators The power supplies have four LED indicators Their functions are explained in the Power Supplies chapter CPU LED Indicators There are several different LED arrangements on the various CPUs These are explained in the CPUs chapter Option Module LED Indicators There are numerous LED arrangements on the various option modules The Option Modules chapter has some information on this subject It also directs you for each module to further information in the Documentation heading for each module Also Appendix G contains a catalog number to documentation cross reference Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Features of Programming Software Detailed information about the following items are found in GFK 0467 Series 90 30 20 Micro PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual and GFK 0466 Series 90
463. put of this power supply is shown in the following table Table 4 10 IC693PWR331 Power Supply Capacities Catalog Load Number Capacity Input Output Capacities Voltage Power IC693PWR331 30 Watts 12 to 30 5 24 VDC Isolated 20 24 VDC Relay 15 VDC 30 watts watts watts Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts IC693PWR331 SYSTEM STATUS J INDICATORS HIGH CAPACITY POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMMABL CONTROLLER CONNECTIONS FOR DC POWER SOURCE r INTERNAL POWER SOURCE P MEXIRJLES REQUIRING 24VDC RS 485 COMPATIBLE SERIAL PORT BATTERY LITHIU CONNECTORS BACK UP BATTERY Figure 4 8 Series 90 30 24 VDC Input High Capacity Power Supply IC693PWR331 03560 Chapter 4 Power Supplies 4 13 Table 4 11 Specifications for IC693PWR331 Power Supply Nominal Rated Voltage 24 VDC Input Voltage Range Start 18 to 30 VDC Run 12 to 30 VDC Input Power 50 watts maximum at full load Inrush Current Output Power 5 VDC 30 watts maximum 24 VDC Relay 15 watts maximum 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts maximum NOTE 30 watts maximum total all three outputs Output Voltage 5VDC 5 0 VDC to 5 2 VDC 5 1 VDC nominal 24 VDC Relay 19 2 to 28 8 VDC 24 VDC Isolated 19 2 VDC to 28 8 VDC Protective Limits Overvoltage 5 VDC output 6 4 to 7 V Overcurrent 5 VDC output 7 A maximum Holdup Time
464. r IC649AEA102 J 1 IC649AEA103 8 29 J 2 Expansion baseplates 3 7 bus termination 3 12 10 25 extension cables description of 10 38 10 54 10 62 port pin assignments 10 25 Expansion baseplate defined 3 3 1C693CHS392 figure 3 8 1C693CHS398 figure 3 7 Expansion system example 3 14 remote connections 3 15 10 31 requirements of 12 16 Extension cables I O 10 38 10 54 10 62 External battery module 6 10 F Faceplate I O H 3 Fax Link system 13 9 FBC FIP Bus Controller 8 10 Features of the DSM302 Easy to Use 8 18 8 21 High Performance 8 18 Field control 8 10 Field Control using with PLC 12 7 Field wiring to AC DC power supplies 2 23 Field wiring connections to dc input power supply 4 15 to standard ac dc power supply 4 5 FIP bus 8 12 FIP bus controller 8 10 description 8 11 FIP nest description 8 12 FIP remote I O scanner 8 12 connectors 8 13 ground lug on module 8 13 LEDs 8 13 Firmware CPU 5 6 CPU table 5 6 CPU upgrade 5 6 CPU Version 9 0 5 14 Upgrading 350 364 CPUs 5 14 Firmware upgrade procedure for flash memory 5 7 Flash Memory protection 5 15 Flash memory 5 5 5 9 5 15 firmware upgrade procedure 5 7 Floating neutral IT systems 2 25 Floating point math 5 15 G GBC Genius Bus Controller 8 6 GCM Example figure 1 9 Genius Comm Module 8 2 GCM Enhanced Genius Comm Module 8 4 Genius blocks 8 6 Genius Blocks using with PLC 12 7 Genius bus controller
465. r an EPROM EEPROM or Flash PROM installed in your system These devices can store program logic configuration and register values without the need for a backup battery and you can configure your CPU to read the contents of PROM into RAM memory each time the PLC is powered up Possible Disadvantages Information is not stored to your PROM device automatically To store information you must stop the PLC then use a programming device to tell the CPU to write the current PLC RAM memory contents to the PROM device This requirement may make battery less operation undesirable for many users For example in many applications important data is gathered and stored in RAM register memory data such as the current level of material in a tank that is being filled or a running count of parts produced etc This constantly changing data is not being copied automatically to the PROM device It only exists in RAM memory Therefore if power is lost and there is no RAM memory backup battery this data will be lost However one way to preserve data in a battery less system is to send it over a network to a computer that can store the data on its hard drive Also static data data that doesn t change contained in RAM memory such as mathematical constants or look up table type information can be stored initially in PROM and automatically written back to RAM each time the PLC powers up Another consideration is that if you change your program or confi
466. rd RS 232 serial port such as found on a PC compatible computer to the RS 422 RS 485 ports in a Series 90 30 PLC If using a Workmaster II computer this converter eliminates the need to have a Work Station Interface board This converter is a small self contained device that requires only a cable connection to the Series 90 30 RS 422 RS 485 port on one end and a cable connection to the RS 232 port on the opposite end SERIES 90 30 PROGRAMMER Figure 11 3 Example of IC690ACC900 Converter Connection The converter operates from a 5 VDC source which is provided from the PLC backplane 5 VDC bus through the cable connection The pin assignments for the connections on the cable required for the RS 232 connection are compatible with available PCM compatible serial cables IC690CBL701 PCM to Workmaster IC690CBL705 PCM to Workmaster II and IC690CBL702 PCM to PC AT The RS 422 RS 485 connection at the Series 90 30 serial port on the power supply can be made with an available cable same cable that is used with the Hand Held Programmer IC693CBL303 The three PCM compatible cables IC690CBL701 702 705 are 10 feet 3 meters in length and the HHP compatible cable IC693CBL303 is 6 feet 2 meters in length For those user s who may want to build their own cables pin assignments and recommended cable types for both cables Chapter 11 Programmer Hardware Products 11 3 required for use with the converter ar
467. rd has a connector that plugs into the power supply backplane connector see the figure below The Battery Accessory Kit can be used on either Embedded or Modular Series 90 30 CPU baseplates Chapter 6 Memory Backup Battery Backup 6 9 SUPPLY CONNECTOR Figure 6 2 Installing the Battery Accessory Kit Battery Accessory Kit Installation 1 Insert the plug on the end of the battery cable into the 2 pin connector on the Battery Accessory board The battery plug is normally not plugged into the accessory connector This prevents accidental discharge of the battery during storage and handling 2 Align the backplane connector on the Battery Accessory board with the power supply connector on the baseplate backplane Push the Battery Accessory board toward the baseplate until it is fully seated See the figure above 3 Ifthe baseplate is to be shipped with the Battery Accessory board installed ensure that the board is held in place by packing material or cable ties The cable ties can be installed in holes provided on both ends of the accessory board and secured to the baseplate To avoid losing CPU data the Battery Accessory must be installed within 1 hour after turning off PLC power or 20 minutes after removing the memory backup battery See Super Capacitor Memory Backup for details When the Battery Accessory is removed a power supply module with a good battery must be installed and or input power applied within 20 minutes to
468. rdware Manual August 2002 03560 CSE313 Catalog Number IC693CSE313 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER SYSTEM PROGRAM PROM PROM USER PROGRAM 5 AND REGISTER VALUES MAY BE LOST IF POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN i HOUR 0000000000000 0000000000000 Load Required from Power Supply 430 milliamps from 5 VDC supply Processor Type and Speed 80188 10 MHz Program Memory Digital I O I Q Tasks Task Groups States per task T O and Variable Names Analog Inputs and Outputs Internal Flags Vo T S 79M R Integer Variables Floating Point Variables String Variables Characters String Character Variables Characters Write Serial Protocols Tables Table Memory PID Loops 03560 Chapter 9 State Logic Products 9 15 CSE323 Catalog Number IC693CSE323 9 16 LJ L Lj SS ey a gt A PROGRAMMABLE 1 A CONTROLLER o o o o o o o o o o o o 00000000000000 SYSTEM PROGRAM Fn Meo ROM AND REGISTER VALUES MAY BE LOST IF POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN 1 HOUR POWER SUPPLY Program Memory Digital 1O C41 40 Tasks 256 States per task 254 T O and Variable Names 3000 Analog Inputs and Outputs 128 64 AQ Internal Flags 500 YS YM R n
469. red This chapter only provides an overview of State Logic products For details please see GFK 1056 Series 90 30 State Logic Control System User s Manual State Logic Products The State Logic product line consist of just a few key hardware and software items To complete a State Logic system standard Series 90 30 products are used The primary State Logic products are m State Logic CPUs There are five models 311 313 323 331 and 340 m State Logic Processor Module ICG93SLP300 This module can reside in a Series 90 30 PLC system containing a standard CPU providing the user with both standard ladder logic and State Logic capabilities m Serial Communications Module AD693CMM301 Provides two additional serial ports for the State Logic system Requires a 331 or 340 State Logic CPU m ECLiPS software Provides Natural Language programming and online debugging functions m OnTOP software A debugging tool it provides operator interface maintenance or troubleshooting functions It has all the capabilities of the ECLiPS debugging function Baseplates and Power Supply I O and Option Modules The State Logic CPUs and modules work with most standard Series 90 30 baseplates power supplies input and output modules discrete and analog and option modules Please see GFK 1056 Series 90 30 State Logic Control System User s Manual for details GFK 0356Q 9 1 AD693CMM301 State Logic Serial Communications Module SCM
470. res 5 18 363 hardware features 5 19 364 hardware features 5 23 374 hardware features 5 25 capacities 5 10 Compatibility with HHP 5 13 Data sheets contents 5 27 9 13 Embedded features figure 5 2 Embedded overview 5 1 Firmware 5 6 Firmware upgrade 5 6 jumpers for EPROM EEPROM selection model 331 5 8 Keyswitch 5 15 Memory size table 5 11 Microprocessors 5 3 Modular features figure 5 3 Modular overview 5 2 Revision level 5 7 selecting 12 4 serial port connector 4 19 5 3 9 11 Serial ports 5 15 speed 5 10 State Logic 9 8 state logic model CSE 331 9 10 state logic model CSE 340 9 10 Time of day clock accuracy 5 12 Types 5 1 CPU 350 374 features table 5 14 CPU 351 grounding information 2 14 CPU baseplate Defined 3 3 Types 3 4 CPU baseplates Embedded 3 4 Modular 3 6 CPU data sheets CPU311 5 28 CPU313 5 29 CPU323 5 30 CPU331 5 31 CPU340 5 32 CPU341 5 33 CPU350 5 34 CPU351 5 35 CPU352 5 36 CPU360 5 37 Index Index CPU363 5 38 CPU364 5 39 CPU374 5 40 CSE 311 9 14 CSE 313 9 15 CSE 323 9 16 CSE 331 9 17 CSE 340 9 18 Current draw module 12 12 Customer service telephone number 2 1 D Data global 8 9 Datagrams 8 6 Date code Battery 6 7 DC high capacity power supply 5 vdc current derating diagram 4 14 calculating input power requirements 4 15 capacities 4 13 illustration of 4 13 output voltages to backplane 4 17 specifications 4 14 DC power
471. ries 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 User Memory Reference Types The user references referred to in the following tables are explained in the Series 90 30 PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual GFK 0467 Table 5 4 Range and Size of User References for CPU Models 311 341 Reference Memory Type Model 311 313 323 Model 331 340 341 Reference Range Reference Range User program logic Not applicable 6K bytes Not applicable CPU331 16K bytes CPU340 32K bytes CPU341 80K bytes 10001 10320 512 bits 10001 9610512 512 bits System status references 9980001 S0032 32 bits 9980001 9680032 32 bits 8 001 SA032 32 bits 8 0001 SA0032 32 bits 8 001 SB032 32 bits 8 0001 SB0032 32 bits SC001 SC032 32 bits SC0001 SC0032 32 bits System register references R0001 RO512 311 512 words RO001 R2048 2K words 331 Analog inputs 1001 1064 64 words 10001 AI0128 128 words 331 Analog outputs AQ001 40032 32 words 09001 AQ064 64 words 331 AQ001 AQ256 256 words 340 341 160 physical I O maximum with 16 point modules installed 320 maximum with 32 point modules installed May be viewed only with a Hand Held Programmer see the Hand Held Programmer User s Manual GFK 0402 may not be referenced in a user s logic program 03560 Chapter 5 CPUs 5 11 5 12 Table 5 5 Range and Size of
472. ription Chassis Ground s emos Signal Ground In s ut ut NC 3 NC NC 5V 1 1 EBEN PHP 0 SD A Send data In fin Read ta 13 RD B In Read data cm m is mms EE EZ a 5V power Remetosmd i P Signal Ground m oero Terminating Resistor mo mo Ow ow Send data SIS RTS m Gerosm Use the terminating resistor if the Port Isolator is used in port to port mode or at the end of a multi drop configuration To terminate the RD balanced line place a jumper wire from pin 9 to pin 10 Out In In In Out Out Out In A denotes and B denotes A and B denote outputs and A and B denote inputs Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q Logic Diagram 15 pin male D connector PL1 SD B lt 11 RD B 13 RD A 12 Figure 2 IC690ACC903 Block Diagram 03560 Appendix IC690ACC903 Port Isolator lt Optical Isolation 15 pin female D connector PL2 H RD B 10 RD A 9 RT 121 ohms 13 SD B 12 SD A Output Enable Always on single port mode 5V E Multidrop Switch RTS Driven multidrop moda Output Enable 14 RTS B 6 RTS A 8 CTS B 15 CTS A DC DC 5Vdc Converter N GND lt Grou
473. rogram for using this module as an RTU Master can be downloaded from the GE website The PCM has two separate ports both accessed on one front panel connector The PCM is available in three versions Each version is listed below with the total memory on the board and the nominal user available MegaBasic program memory size PCM Catalog Number Total Memory User Megabasic memory IC693PCM300 IC693PCM301 IC693PCM311 a43734 BD OK P1 OK P2 OK RESTART BATTERY PORTS 1 amp 2 CONNECTOR o9 Figure 8 19 Programmable Module PCM Chapter 8 Option Modules 8 31 8 32 Applications These modules are used for communicating with programming terminals CRTs bar code readers scales printers ASCII devices RTU master devices etc PCM Module Location A PCM can be installed in any slot in the CPU baseplate only except slot 1 labeled CPU 1 which must contain the CPU module A PCM will not work in Expansion or Remote racks or in an Embedded CPU CPU311 313 or 323 rack Protocols Supported Modbus RTU and GE CCM LED Indicator Lights W Normally ON Indicates the basic condition of the module 051 and US2 By default LED USI flashes to indicate activity on Port 1 and LED US2 flashes to indicate activity on Port 2 Both LEDs stay OFF when there is no port activity However
474. rol GFK 1411 SFC Programming Control GFK 1385 Configuration LM90 GFK 0466 Programming LM90 GFK 0467 SFC Programming LM90 GFK 0854 Configuration Programming VersaPro GFK 1670 Configuration Programming CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer PLC GFK 1868 IC693CPU360 CPU modules Installation GFK 0356 Configuration and Programming Options Configuration Programming HHP GFK 0402 Configuration Control GFK 1295 Programming Control GFK 1411 SFC Programming Control GFK 1385 Configuration LM90 GFK 0466 Programming LM90 GFK 0467 SFC Programming LM90 GFK 0854 Configuration Programming VersaPro GFK 1670 Configuration Programming CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer PLC GFK 1868 G 4 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 1C693CPU363 CPU Module Installation GFK 0356P or later Configuration and Programming Options Configuration and Programming HHP GFK 0402 Configuration Programming Control GFK 1295 SFC Programming Control GFK 1385 Configuration LM90 GFK 0466 Programming LM90 GFK 0467 SFC Programming LM90 GFK 0854 Configuration Programming VersaPro GFK 1670 Configuration Programming CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer PLC GFK 1868 Serial Communications GFK 0582 1C693CPU364 1C693CPU374 CPU Module Installation Configuration User s Guide GFK 1541 Specificatio
475. rounding of the shield is also important For maximum electrical noise suppression the cable shield should only be grounded at one end of the cable For Input modules ground the end that is in the noisiest environment which often is at the field device end For Output modules ground at the module end See GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications for more shield grounding information Analog Input Module Wiring Methods Correcting electrical noise problems can sometimes be a trial and error routine However in general it is generally best to ground the cable shield as close to the source of the noise as possible which is usually at the device end In troubleshooting noise problems sometimes it is beneficial to experiment with the shield grounding point location Remember the cable shield should be grounded at one end only Also it is best to keep the length of stripped cable leads as short as possible to minimize the length of unshielded conductors that will be exposed to the noisy environment See the Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual GFK 0898 for additional details Chapter 7 Input Output Modules 7 9 Direct Method Run a shielded cable from the field device transducer potentiometer etc directly to the module Connect the conductors to the applicable screws on the module s terminal board Ground the shield at the field device end exposing a minimum amount of conductor to the noisy environment Do not co
476. rrent values check the device manufacturer s documentation or an electronics catalog The percent of on time can be estimated by someone familiar with how the equipment operates or will operate m Multiply the Output Voltage Drop times the current value times the estimated percent of on time to arrive at average power dissipation for that output m Repeat for all outputs on the module To save time you could determine if several outputs were similar in current draw and on time so that you would only have to make their calculation once m Repeat these calculations for all Discrete Output modules in the rack Discrete Output Module Example The Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual GFK 0898 lists the following for the IC693MDL340 16 Point Discrete 120VAC Output Module Output Voltage Drop 1 5 Volts maximum Use that value for all of the calculations for this module In this example two of the Output module s output points drive solenoids that control the advance and retract travel of a hydraulic cylinder The solenoid manufacturer s data sheet shows that each Appendix F Calculating Series 90 30 Heat Dissipation F 3 solenoid draws 1 0 Amp The cylinder advances and retracts once every 60 seconds that the machine is cycling It takes 6 seconds to advance and 6 seconds to retract Since the cylinder takes equal time to advance and retract both solenoids are on for equal lengths of time 6 seconds out of every 60 seconds
477. s RS 422 RS 422 4000 feet 1200 meters maximum length Must not exceed the maximum RS 422 Common Mode specification of 7V to 7V Isolation at the remote end may be used to reduce or eliminate Common Mode voltages When using RS 422 RS 422 the twisted pairs should be matched so that both transmit signals make up one twisted pair and both receive signals make up the other twisted pair If this is ignored cross task resulting from the mismatching will affect the performance of the communications system When routing communication cables outdoors transient suppression devices can be used to reduce the possibility of damage due to lightning or static discharge Care should be exercised that all connected devices are grounded to a common point Failure to do so could result in damage to the equipment I 2 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q MultiDrop Cable Wiring Diagram 03560 Miniconverter Programmer Serial Cable NOTE WHEN WIRING RS 422 485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THE TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN A DAISY CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BELOW MINI CONVERTER FIRST SLAVE LAST SLAVE STATION PLC PROGRAMMER STATION PLC ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON THE PLC IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINAL STRIPS TO OTHER TYPES
478. s 90 30 Power Supply L 2 Figure 1 2 Equivalent Circuit for 44A720084 001 Line Filter eese L 2 Figure L 3 44A720084 001 Line Filter Mounting Dimensions eese L 3 03560 Contents xxix Contents Table 3 1 Rack Number Selection Switch 3 13 Table 3 2 Series 90 30 Baseplate Comparison sse 3 22 Table 4 1 Power Supply 4 1 Table 4 2 IC693PWR321 Power Supply 2 4 2 Table 4 3 Specifications for IC693PWR321 Standard AC DC Input Power 4 3 Table 4 4 IC693PWR330 Power Supply 4 4 Table 4 5 Specifications for IC693PWR330 High Capacity AC DC Input Power Supply 4 5 Table 4 6 IC693PWR322 Power Supply 4 7 Table 4 7 Specifications for IC693PWR322 Power Supply sese 4 8 Table 4 8 IC693PWR328 Power Supply Capacities esses eene nnn 4 10 Table 4 9 Specifications for IC693PWR328 Power 1 4 11 Table 4 10 IC693PWR331 Power Supply Capacities essen ennemis 4 13 Table 4 11 Specifications for IC693PWR331 Power
479. s being transferred through Port 2 the RS 485 port It remains off when the port is inactive Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Protocols Supported Starting with Firmware Release 9 00 breakfree SNP became the default protocol on the three Serial Ports on these modules See Breakfree SNP Protocol on page 5 13 for details SNP Port Through Power Supply Connector m SNP slave m SNP X slave Port 1 and Port 2 Through Module s Front Panel Connectors m SNP master and slave m SNP X master and slave m RTU slave starting with Firmware Release 8 0 m Serial I O Limited functionality write only starting with Firmware Release 8 0 will have full functionality read and write starting with Firmware Release 10 0 Used with autodialer feature to call a pager To use this feature configure protocol as Custom See GFK 0582 Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User s Manual for details 03560 Chapter 5 CPUs 5 21 5 22 Table 5 6 Port 1 RS 232 Pin Signal Number Name Number Name Description ww ww sewGmmi s s ms i Table 5 7 Port 2 RS 485 Pin Signal Number Name Description s Dien Request Sd 3 crs 8 __ Dierentat Tosd 5 et Pin Assignments for CPU351 CPU352 and CPU363 Serial Ports 1 amp 2 The following two tables describe the pin assignments for each of th
480. s have been calculated add them all to obtain total PLC heat dissipation Note that the PLC baseplate analog input modules and analog output modules have been ignored in this procedure because their power dissipation values are negligible when compared with the total Also since each Series 90 30 rack has its own power supply each rack should be calculated on an individual basis The following table summarizes the final calculation Series 90 30 Rack Heat Dissipation Calculation Summary Step Description Value Watts Calculate total of dissipation values for all modules in the rack Divide value obtained in Step 1 by 2 to obtain Power Supply value Calculate total of all Output modules output dissipation values Calculate total of all Input modules input dissipation values Add the above four values to obtain the total dissipation of the rack Other Information Related to Enclosure Sizing The Baseplates chapter of this manual contains rack dimensions and minimum ventilation clearance distances required around the racks The Cables chapter contains clearance dimensions for cables that mount on the front of modules Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Appendix Catalog Number to Publication Cross Reference 03560 Manuals not shipped with many of Series 90 30 products they must be ordered separately This appendix can help you identify the
481. s long as a PLC is powered up its battery is not being used so how often you power down your PLC has a direct affect on battery life Some users keep their PLC powered up all of the time while others turn theirs off every night m Temperature has a relatively large affect on battery life Temperatures considerably above room temperature 25 degrees C or 77 degrees F or below freezing 0 degrees C or 32 degrees F will appreciably shorten battery life m The type of CPU has a small affect on battery life Some CPUs have more memory than others Some memory types require more power Also some CPUs have a clock and some do not More memory requires more battery current to maintain its contents and a clock requires battery current to maintain its operation Low Battery Warning Methods There are three basic ways that the PLC warns of a low battery m The red BATT LED on the Power Supply module lights when the battery is low The disadvantage of this method is that the PLC is often mounted in an enclosure so this LED might not be easily seen m The PLC Fault Table is updated with a battery low message Viewing the PLC Fault Table requires that a programmer be connected to the PLC m Certain System Reference bits are set to logic 1 when the battery is low These are SA011 LOW BAT SC009 ANY FLT S010 SY_FLT and SC012 SY PRES The most specific is SA011 LOW BAT This bit could be used as a contact in your ladder logic pr
482. s module is configured as a slave device only see the IC693BEM321 for master applications The I O LINK is a serial interface which provides high speed exchange of data between a master and up to 16 slaves An example of a Series 90 30 PLC in a I O LINK system configuration is shown in the following illustration HHP MASTER SERIES 90 30 VO LINK PROGRAMMER Figure 8 15 Example of a Series 90 30 PLC in a I O LINK Configuration The Series 90 30 I O LINK Interface module is configured as a slave device only and allows the Series 90 30 PLC to send either 32 or 64 I O points to the I O LINK The I O LINK module must be configured as either a 32 or 64 point I O module during installation by setting a jumper plug inside of the front cover of the module to either 32 I O or 64 I O An I O LINK Interface module can be installed in any model of Series 90 30 PLC and any number of I O LINK Interface modules can be installed in a system within the current limits of the baseplate and other I O modules installed in the baseplate For more details see Load Requirements for Hardware Components in Chapter 12 of this manual 1 0 Link Interface Documentation For detailed information on this module refer to GFK 0631 the Series 90 30 I O LINK Interface Module User s Manual 6 24 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 IC693B
483. safety of personnel and equipment Normally the machine should not be cycling and all conditions should be such that the output device can be turned on without any harm being done This method can be used to check an output circuit from the ladder screen all the way to the device being controlled For example when overriding and toggling a Q output to an ON state the relay solenoid or other device being controlled should turn on or pick up If it does not the status light on the output module could be checked then voltage checks could be made at the module terminal board the system terminal strip the machinery terminal strip the solenoid or relay connections etc until the source of the fault is found Sequential Event Recorder SER DOIO functional instruction These can be set up to capture the status of specified discrete addresses upon receiving a trigger signal They may be used to monitor and capture data about certain portions of the program even when unattended They can be useful for locating the cause of an intermittent problem For example a contact in a string of contacts that maintain power to a coil may from time to time momentarily open and interrupt normal operation However when maintenance personnel attempt to locate the problem all of these contacts may test OK By using the SER or DOIO instruction the status of all of these contacts can be captured within milliseconds of the time the fault occurs and the contact th
484. sed in two ways in the 90 30 CPUs m To store CPU firmware m To store user data which consists of program configuration and register data The following table shows the types of PROM devices each CPU uses Chapter 5 CPUs 5 5 5 6 Table 5 1 CPU Firmware and PROM Configurations Firmware EPROM EEPROM Flash standard for user memory for user memory for user memory CPU311 EPROM Optional Optional N A CPU313 EPROM Optional Optional N A CPU323 EPROM Optional Optional N A CPU331 EPROM Optional Optional N A CPU340 EPROM N A N A Optional CPU341 EPROM Optional Optional Optional CPU350 Flash N A N A Standard CPU351 Flash N A N A Standard CPU352 Flash N A N A Standard CPU360 Flash N A N A Standard CPU363 Flash N A N A Standard CPU364 Flash N A N A Standard CPU374 Flash N A N A Standard Early versions of the CPU341 support optional EPROM and optional EEPROM only Starting with hardware version IC693CPU341 J and Firmware version 4 61 only optional Flash is supported CPU Firmware The CPU firmware contains the basic operating instructions for the PLC Firmware is developed by a GE product engineering group It is stored in either EPROM or Flash memory depending on the particular CPU CPU Firmware Upgrade Update From time to time new firmware is released A new firmware version may contain support for new features or improvements to existing features
485. sen 2 2 Modul Features dr e i e e RE Rd RH e 2 2 Installing Module censet esae e REV EEAEUe Dn 2 3 Removing a Module ies RR Pe E RARE ERE 2 4 Installing a Module s Terminal Board essen 2 5 Removing Module s Terminal Board essen 2 6 Module Terminal Board Posts cccceseesceesceeseeeseeeseceeeceeeeseeeseeesecneecnseeseeesneesees 2 7 Installing and Removing Terminal Boards with Holding Screws 2 7 Baseplate Mounting theta e a ee eoo da ev i a EHE GG 2 8 Mounting a Baseplate to a 1 2 2 8 Mounting a Baseplate to 19 Rack sse 2 8 Grounding Procedures eret tete staat eee ete eis eve endete ode aa 2 11 System Grounding Procedures sse ene 2 11 Ground KETTE LELE EEE AE T EE A 2 11 Series 90 30 PLC Equipment 2 12 Baseplate Safety essere 2 12 Grounding 19 Rack Mounted Baseplates c ccescessessseeseeeseeeeeeeeeseeeteeeeenseeaes 2 13 Programmer Grounding sese nnne 2 13 Module Shield Grounding sse eene nennen 2 14 Shield Grounding Information for CPUs with External Port Connections 2 14 CPU351 and 352 Shield Grounding esee 2 14 CPU363 CPU364 and CPU374 Shield Grounding
486. ser s manual GFK 1734 for instructions See Warning note below Series 90 30 PLC ge ieee O 1C693CBL340 341 PTM Cable Figure 8 24 1693PTM100 101 Component Mounting The PTMIM board connects to hazardous voltages Before installing testing or troubleshooting this board you should read the complete instructions in the PTM User s Manual GFK 1734 Failure to follow the guidelines in the PTM User s Manual may result in personal injury equipment damage or both 6 42 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Baseplate Type and Allowable Number of PTMPM Modules The PTMPM module may be installed in any type of Series 90 30 baseplate CPU Expansion or Remote There are no restrictions as to the maximum number of PTMPM modules per PLC system or per PLC baseplate as long as the PLC power supply has sufficient capacity and there is sufficient I Q AI and AQ memory available However as noted in the Mounting Information section it is beneficial to keep the PTMIM power wiring physically separated from PLC signal wiring in order to reduce noise coupling this can have a bearing on which baseplate slots to choose when mounting PTMPM modules Power Supply Requirement The PTMPM module requires 400 mA 5 VDC from the PLC power supply The PTMIM does not require a control power input Memory Requirement Configuration Each PTMPM requires the follow
487. signals or edge sensitive strobe signals Outputs can be used to drive indicating lights solenoids relays and other devices Power to operate the module s logic circuitry is obtained from the 5 VDC bus on the baseplate backplane Power sources for the input and output devices must be supplied by the user or by the 24 VDC isolated output of the Series 90 30 power supply The I O Processor module provides a selectable threshold voltage to allow the inputs to respond to either a 5 VDC signal level or a 10 to 30 VDC signal level The threshold is selected by configuration All configuration parameters for the module are downloaded from the PLC to the I O Processor after it passes its internal diagnostics Once the module has been successfully configured the CONFIG OK LED will turn on Configuration parameters can be changed using the programming configuration software or the Hand Held Programmer Operation of the I O Processor module is monitored by a watchdog timer circuit If the watchdog timer detects a module failure it will force all outputs off and turn off the MODULE OK LED I O Processor Module Documentation Please refer to publication GFK 1028 Series 90 30 I O Processor User s Manual Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 IC693CMM321 Ethernet Interface Module The Ethernet Interface module 1693CMM321 provides an interface that allows you to attach the Series 90 30 PLC to an Ethernet LAN via
488. st of cables See Chapter 10 for cable data sheets m Wire I O devices to the terminal block strip See the Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual GFK 0898 for pin out information Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Direct Method m Connect an IC693CBL327 328 cable or a custom made cable to the module s faceplate connectors and wire the stripped ends of the cable directly to the field devices See Chapter 10 for cable data See the Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual GFK 0898 for pin out information General Wiring Methods for Analog Modules Twisted shielded instrumentation cable is strongly recommended for analog module input or output signal connections Proper grounding of the shield is also important For maximum electrical noise suppression the cable shield should only be grounded at one end of the cable For Input modules ground the end that is in the noisiest environment which often is at the field device end For Output modules ground at the module end See GFK 0898 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications for more shield grounding information Analog Input Module Wiring Methods 03560 Correcting electrical noise problems can sometimes be trial and error routine However general it is generally best to ground the cable shield as close to the source of the noise as possible which is usually at the device end In troubleshooting
489. supply dc power connections 4 15 input power requirements calculating 4 8 4 11 4 15 isolated 24 vdc supply connections 4 6 4 15 overcurrent protection 4 18 specifications 4 8 4 11 status indicators 4 16 timing diagram 4 18 DC power supply 24 48 VDC illustration of 4 7 DC power supply 48 VDC illustration of 4 10 Default station address label 8 30 Diagram timing 4 18 Digital Servo Module DSM302 8 17 DSM31A 8 20 Dimensions 19 inch Rack Mounting w IC693ACC308 Adapter Bracket 2 9 baseplates embedded CPU 3 16 baseplates modular 3 18 for 19 inch rack mounting w IC693ACC308 adapter bracket 3 21 IC693ACC313 recessed mount adapter bracket 3 21 IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket 2 10 Direct processing definition 8 27 DOIO instruction 13 4 Index 3 Index Index 4 Drops remote 8 6 DSM Digital Servo Module DSM302 8 17 Digital Servo Module DSM314 8 20 E EEPROM 5 5 Embedded baseplates State Logic 9 9 Embedded CPU baseplates 3 4 Features figure 3 5 EMI filter requirement L 1 EMI line filter 44A720084 lt 106 gt 001 L 1 Enclosure 2 1 F 1 Enhanced Genius Comm Module 8 4 EPROM 5 5 Creating 5 9 EPROM EEPROM catalog numbers 1C693ACC305 5 9 1C693ACC306 5 9 Ethernet CPU364 374 embedded 5 17 transceiver J 1 J 2 transceiver obsolete J 2 Ethernet interface restart pushbutton 8 30 Ethernet interface module 8 29 board indicators 8 30 Ethernet transceive
490. t 03560 Chapter 3 Baseplates 3 11 Termination Requirement for Expansion or Remote System When two or more baseplates are connected via the I O Bus Expansion System the I O Expansion Bus must be properly terminated The most common method of terminating the I O Expansion Bus is by installing a termination resistor pack IC693ACC307 on the open connector on the last most distant from the CPU Expansion or Remote baseplate in the system The resistor pack is physically mounted inside of a connector Although a termination resistor pack is shipped with each baseplate only the last baseplate in the chain needs to have this termination connector installed Unused termination packs can be discarded The prewired 50 foot 15 meter cable 1C693CBL302 has termination resistors wired inside the connector on one end of the cable This cable can be used if only one expansion rack is needed in a system and a 50 foot cable link is required the IC693ACC307 resistor pack is not needed in this case Also a custom built cable with built in resistors would eliminate the need for the IC693ACC307 resistor pack Powering Down Individual Expansion or Remote Baseplates Expansion or Remote baseplates can be powered down individually without affecting the operation of other baseplates however powering off a baseplate generates a loss of module LOSS_OF MODULE fault in the PLC Fault Table for each module in the baseplate When this fault condition occurs
491. t can also be permanently mounted The HHM provides a convenient operator interface for block setup data monitoring and diagnostics W Multiple hosts for communications using datagrams and Global Data GENIUS BUS CONTROL 44A729182 068R01 FOR USE WITH 1C693BEM331 Figure 8 5 Genius Bus Controller Module A bus may feature I O control enhanced by communications commands in the program Or a bus can be used entirely for I O control with many I O devices and no additional communications A bus can also be dedicated to CPU communications with multiple CPUs and no I O devices More Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 complex systems can also be developed with dual CPUs and one or more additional CPUs for data monitoring Number of Genius Bus Controllers Status LEDs Compatibility 03560 Up to eight Genius Bus Controllers or Enhanced Genius Communications Modules can be included in a Series 90 30 PLC system that has release 5 0 or later CPU firmware A GBC cannot be installed in a system with a GCM The I O devices on a bus may be Genius I O blocks or standard Series 90 70 I O modules in one or more remote drops The total number of I O circuits that can be served by one Genius bus depends on the types of I O devices that are used and the memory available in the CPU Many Genius I O blocks have both inputs
492. t require a plug in CPU module all numbered slots including Slot 1 can be used for I O or Option modules m The memory back up battery is located in the Power Supply module so if the Power Supply is unplugged from the baseplate the battery will be disconnected from the memory circuits which are located on the backplane circuit board However the backplane circuit board contains a high value capacitor sometimes called a super capacitor that can store enough charge to maintain the memory circuits for about 1 hour if the Power Supply is removed or its battery is disconnected Chapter 6 discusses the IC693ACC315 Battery Accessory kit that can be used to maintain memory contents when the Power Supply is removed from an embedded CPU baseplate m There are no configuration switches or jumpers on the Model 311 313 or 323 baseplates m An embedded CPU baseplate is always assigned by default Rack Number Zero 0 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Replaceable System firmware PROM Socket for Optional Program PROM LONGER THAN 1 HOUR SYSTEM PROGRAM PROGRAMMABLE 8 CONTROLLER inti o Description Label BASE 5 SLOT Says With CPU WITH CPU aS 8 8 o CAUTION ER NON CPU SLOTS USER PROGRAM 55 VALUES MAY BE 2 EB EH EB Be VALUES MAY BE Memory Backup LOST IF POWER 2 es es es 98 98 Warning
493. t to the top two terminals on the terminal strip The wire should be connected to the top terminal screw and the wire to the second screw counting from the top down The ground connection connects to the third screw This connection scheme 15 clearly marked on the front of these power supplies Isolated 24 VDC Supply Output Connections The bottom two terminals of the power supply terminal strip provide connections to the Isolated 24 volt DC output which can be used to provide power for external circuits within power limitations of the supply If the Isolated 24 VDC supply is overloaded or shorted the Programmable Logic Controller will stop operation Chapter 4 Power Supplies 4 15 Common Series 90 30 Power Supply Features Status Indicator Lights on all Power Supplies Four LEDs are located on the upper right front of the power supply faceplate The purpose of these LEDs is as follows PWR The top green LED labeled PWR provides an indication of the operating state of the power supply The LED is ON when the power supply has a correct source of power and is operating properly and OFF when a power supply fault occurs or power is not applied OK The second green LED labeled OK is steady ON if the PLC is operating properly and OFF if a problem is detected by the PLC RUN The third green LED labeled RUN is steady ON when the PLC is in the RUN mode BATT The bottom red LED labeled BATT will be ON if the memory backup bat
494. t wiring will result in damage to the programmer or the module Select the WYE cable IC693CBL305 or IC693CBL304 Connect the IC690CBL 702 cable s 9 pin female connector to the male RS 232 connector serial port on the selected programming device Connect the cable s 25 pin male connector to the Port 1 connector on the WYE cable Connect the 25 pin male connector on the WYE cable to the female connector on the front of the PCM ADC or CMM module PC AT IC690CBL702 RS 232 DEFAULT PORT by o IC693CBL305B PORT 1 um BA Figure 10 8 PCM to PC AT Personal Computer GFK 0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10 15 IC690CBL705 Workmaster Il PS 2 to PCM ADC CMM Cable Function of cable This cable provides RTS 232 signal connections between the RS 232 port on a PCM ADC or CMM module and a serial port on a Workmaster II or an IBM Personal System 2 PS 2 or equivalent Personal Computer Cable Specifications Cable Length 10 feet 3 meters Connectors PCM ADC CMM Side 25 pin male D subminiature type AMP 205208 1 or equivalent Programmer Side 25 pin female D subminiature type AMP 205207 1 or equivalent Cable Clamps 25 pin AMP 207908 7 or equivalent Cable Type Six conductor overall shield non paired AWG 24 21 mm Belden 9536 or equivalent Wiring Diagram PIN PIN WORKMASTER II AND IBM PS 2 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE F
495. tage Analog GFK 0356Q 7 1 7 2 output modules are provided in three versions 1 a 2 channel current module 2 a 2 channel voltage module and 3 a high density current voltage module with 8 analog output channels Analog Combination Module An analog combination module provides four A D input channels and two D A output channels on one module Each of the input and output channels can be configured individually for current or voltage mode Third Party Modules In addition to the modules discussed in this chapter numerous third party I O modules and other hardware and software products for the Series 90 30 PLC are available to meet a wide variety of needs For information on third party modules consult the following Your GE PLC distributor or sales engineer The GE web site at http www ge ip com Discrete I O Modules Discrete I O Module Point Density There are two density categories for these modules Standard Density Modules Standard density modules have up to 16 circuits also called points per module These modules are equipped with a removable terminal board See the following figure High Density Modules High density modules have 32 circuits per module These modules have either a 50 pin connector or two 24 pin connectors mounted on their faceplates Connection choices are discussed later in this chapter Standard Density Discrete I O Module Features Standard Density 16 points or less Modules
496. te racks to this system Some CPUs can support up to seven additional racks If you added seven additional 10 slot racks you could have 70 more modules Racks are interconnected in a daisy chain cabling arrangement This interconnection system is called the I O Expansion Bus The connections are made from one baseplate s I O Bus Expansion Connector shown in the figure above to the next one s The I O Bus Expansion Cables shown below have a double connector on one end to facilitate these connections Female Connector Male Connector Male Connector Figure 1 8 Bus Expansion Cable 03560 Chapter 1 Overview of the Series 90 30 PLC 1 7 The next figure shows a system that has a CPU baseplate one Expansion rack and three Remote racks Notice that the last rack the one at the end of the I O Expansion Bus must be terminated A convenient way of terminating the bus is with an IC693ACC307 I O Bus Terminator Plug as shown CPU BASEPLATE EXPANSION BASEPLATE e MAXIMUM DISTANCE FROM CPU 50 FEET 15 METERS ES e REMOTE BASEPLATE jJ 7 t REMOTE BASEPLATE gt ey REMOTE BASEPLATE MAXIMUM DISTANCE FROM CPU 700 FEET 213 METERS n VO BUS TERMINATOR PLUG IC693ACC307 Figure 1 9 Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates What is the Difference Between Exp
497. te solutions can be designed into the system up front 03560 Chapter 12 System Design 12 15 Major Design Factors Affecting Scan Time 12 16 Size of ladder program Type of CPU Some CPUs have faster clock speeds and architecture than others Types of instructions used in ladder program Number of modules Types of modules Some modules such as several of the Option modules have a much greater impact than others such as discrete I O modules Location of modules This refers to the type of rack CPU Expansion or Remote that they are installed in Connections to other devices such as an HMI or to other systems via communications modules or ports Cable types Cable type can have a significant impact on scan time especially when connecting Remote racks or communicating over long distances Propagation time of data should be minimized to ensure proper system timing and margins Suggested cable types for I O Bus Expansion and communication cables are documented in the Cables chapter Any deviation in cable types from those recommended may result in erratic or improper system operation Where to Find Scan Time Information For information on calculating scan time please refer to the Sweep Time Calculation section of GFK 0467 Series 90 30 20 Micro PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 System Design and Layout Calculating PLC Heat D
498. ted by setting a DIP switch located on each baseplate directly above the connector for Slot 1 Rack number 0 must always be present and is assigned by default to the CPU rack the CPU baseplate does not have this DIP switch Racks do not need to be contiguously numbered although for consistency and clarity it is recommended that rack numbers not be skipped use 1 2 3 not 1 3 5 Rack numbers must not be duplicated within a system The following table shows the DIP switch positions for rack number selection Table 3 1 Rack Number Selection Switch Settings Rack Number DIP Switch _ 5 eed esed esed open open open open Rack numbers 5 6 and 7 only valid for CPUs 350 and higher The particular CPU module used determines how may expansion and remote baseplates are allowed m The 331 340 and 341 CPUs support a total of four Expansion and or Remote racks m The 350 351 352 360 363 364 and 374 CPUs support a total of seven Expansion and or Remote racks Each baseplate has a label above the DIP switch that shows the settings for each rack number The following figure shows this DIP switch package with an example of rack 2 number selected Note Use a ball point pen to set the DIP switches In general it is best to avoid using a pencil to set DIP switches since graphite from the pencil can damage the switch EXPANSION RACK N GEFanuc SW 1 234567 SERIES 90 30 P
499. tery voltage is too low to maintain the memory under a loss of power condition otherwise it remains OFF If this LED is ON the Lithium battery must be replaced before removing power from the rack or PLC memory may be lost Input Overvoltage Protection Devices This information applies to all Series 90 30 power supplies except IC693PWR322 and IC693PWR328 The overvoltage protection devices for this power supply are connected internally to pin 4 on the user terminal strip This pin is normally connected to frame ground pin 3 with the supplied jumper strap which is installed at the factory If overvoltage protection is not required or is supplied upstream this feature can be disabled by removing the jumper strap from pins 3 and 4 If you want to Hi pot test this supply overvoltage protection must be disabled during the test by removing the terminal strip jumper strap Re enable overvoltage protection after testing by reinstalling the strap 4 16 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 9 Frame Ground Jumper Strap Connects 1 Overvoltage Protection Devices to Frame Ground 4 9 1 Screw Terminals on Terminal Board Figure 4 10 Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap Output Voltage Connections to Backplane All Supplies The following figure illustrates how these three output voltages are connected internally to the backplane
500. tes IC693CHS393F and later and IC693CHS399E and later have a change inside the baseplate which alleviates the need to remove pin from the mating cable When using factory made Wye cable with these baseplates it is not necessary to remove pin from the cable Custom built Wye cables for these baseplates can be made using either Figure 10 20 or Figure 10 21 Figure 10 21 shows how the factory made Wye cable are made TWISTED SHIELDED PAIRS PIN 0 DIODT I 0 DIODT 0 DIOCLK CABLE 0 DIOCLK TO DOWNSTREAM 0 ibaa RACK 0 REMOTE 1 OR 0 I DRPERR 12 DRPERR EXPANSION TERMINATION DRPERR 13 DRPERR BASEPLATE i PLUG 3 DRMRUN CONNECTOR i 0 DRMRUN DRMRUN o9 2 DPFRAME rrrame 3 DPFRAME 0 0011 7 ov 9 I FGND 1 FGND lam eee ee 0 Ne SS ee 25 PIN 25 PIN RUN ee MALE FEMAL Metallized Shell Metallized Shell Metallized SHIELD DRAIN CONNECTED DIODT DIOCLK DIOCLK 1 DRSEL 1 DRSEL DRPERR CABLE 1 FROM UPSTREAM DRMRUN RACK I DRMRUN 1 1 DPFRAME I DPFRAME I 2d I FGND meN J 25 PIN 25 PIN MALE FEMALE Metallized Shell Metallized Shell NOTE Bold dashed line shows continuous 100 shielding when metallized shell connectors are plugged together Figure 10 20 Curr
501. the 25 pin serial port connector on the GE Workmaster II computer or an IBM PC XT or PS 2 Personal Computer The GE Workmaster computer requires an additional adapter not supplied with kit please contact your local GE PLC distributor for use with the Miniconverter 03560 D 1 2 Pin Assignments The pinouts of the Miniconverter are shown in the following two tables The first table shows the pinout for the RS 232 port the second table shows the RS 422 port Pin Assignments RS 232 Port Table D 1 is for the RS 232 port The direction of signal flow is with respect to the Miniconverter Table 0 1 Miniconverter RS 232 Port Pin Signal Name Direction 2 SD Send Data Output 3 RD Receive Data Input 5 GND Ground n a 7 CTS Clear To Send Input 8 RTS Request To Send Output The pinouts were chosen to allow direct connection using a straight through or 1 to 1 cable as provided with kit to the IBM PC AT Most IBM compatible computers equipped with an RS 232 port will provide a pinout compatible with the one shown above Pin Assignments RS 422 Port Table D 2 is the pinout for the Miniconverter s RS 422 serial port The direction of signal flow is also with respect to the Miniconverter Table D 2 Miniconverter RS 422 Port 1 SHLD Shield n a 5 5 VDC Power Input 6 CTS A Clear To Send Input 7 GND Ground n a 8 RTS B Request To Send Output 9 RT Receive Termination Output 10
502. the Rack Number Selection dual in line package DIP switch on Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q 10 11 12 13 14 15 the baseplate Please refer to the Baseplates chapter for details on setting these DIP switches Rack numbers should be assigned by the system programmer because they correspond to system configuration settings and program memory addressing If you have more than one baseplate rack connect the I O Bus Expansion Cables between the I O Bus Expansion Connectors which are located on the right end of the baseplates The cables are connected in a daisy chain arrangement from one baseplate to the other This is made possible by the fact that the cables have a dual connector on one end Therefore when the cable is plugged into a baseplate connector the second connector on that end of the cable provides a socket for connecting to the next cable The data sheet for the I O Bus Expansion cables IC693CBL300 etc in the Cables chapter has sample wiring figures On the last I O Bus Expansion Connector plug in an I O Bus Expansion Terminator Catalog Number IC693ACC307 unless using a cable with built in terminator resistors which would either be GE cable IC693CBL302 or your own custom built cable Install the modules in their correct slots using your system layout drawings The label on the side of each module identifies the module type and catalog number Re
503. the application program 2 Develop and debug the program in RAM memory then write it to the EEPROM 3 Remove the EEPROM from the PLC and install it in the EPROM burner as a master to make one or more EPROMs 4 Install the blank EPROM in the EPROM burner and copy the program on the EEPROM to the blank EPROM 5 Install the EPROM in the PLC s PROM socket then copy its contents into RAM memory The EPROM then serves as an on board backup to RAM memory Note Your CPU can be configured to load the application program stored in the PROM device automatically into RAM memory when the CPU is powered up See Running Without a Memory Backup Battery in Chapter 6 for details If PROM is configured on the CPU configuration screen as the power up program source and a PROM device is not present in the PROM socket or a blank PROM is in the socket on a power up cycle a blank program will be copied into the CPU s RAM memory and the program in RAM memory will be lost Always keep a backup copy of your current program files in case of an emergency EEPROM and EPROM devices listed in the following table are available from GE Table 5 2 EPROM and EEPROM Catalog Numbers GE Third Party Source Catalog Number Description Part Number Vendor Part Number IC693ACC305 Qty 4 28C256 EEPROM 350ns 44A725999 000 XICOR X28C256P XICOR X28C256P25 XICOR X28HC256P 15 IC693ACC306 Qty 4 32Kx8 UV EPROM 150ns_ 44A723379 000 NEC PD27C256AD
504. the data gathered by the PTM for data reporting fault monitoring generator control or demand charge reduction load shedding applications The PTM consists of three parts which are all included under one catalog number W PTM Processing Module PTMPM a module that mounts in a Series 90 30 Rack W PTM Interface Module PTMIM a panel mounted circuit board This board interfaces between the PTMPM module and the input transformers current and potential W Interface cable connects the PTMPM module to the PTMIM circuit board Difference Between PTM100 and PTM101 The only difference between the IC693PTM100 and IC693PTM101 is in the length of their interface cables The PTM100 comes with a 19 0 5 meter cable and the PTM101 comes with a 39 1 meter cable Capabilities A single PTM is capable of performing any one of the following tasks as selected by the appropriate Q bit W Measure power parameters for three individual single phase circuits W Measure power parameters for one 3 wire single phase circuit 120 240 VAC Measure power parameters for one 3 phase circuit selectable between Wye or Delta type Measure and compare power parameters between a 3 phase generator s output phases and one power grid phase W Measure and compare power parameters between one generator output phase and one power grid phase Operating Modes The PTM can operate in either of the following two modes which are selectable by a Q bit
505. the power supply or through a port on front of CPU module if it has The applicable method will be documented in your upgrade kit instructions Downloadable firmware upgrade files are also found in the Technical Support area of the GE Web site See Chapter 13 for Web site information To order an upgrade kit write down the full catalog number of your module from the module identification label on the side of the module determine your current firmware revision level then call your PLC distributor If you are not sure what firmware version you currently have see the heading on the next page Determining CPU Revision Levels Versions Flash Firmware Upgrade Procedure The operating system firmware is updated by connecting a PC compatible computer to the applicable PLC serial port and running the PC Loader software included with the firmware floppy disk The computer used for this task should be an IBM AT compatible or better PC with a minimum 640K of RAM one 3 5 or high density 5 25 floppy drive MS DOS version 3 3 or later a hard drive and an RS 232 serial port In addition a miniconverter serial cable is required The following miniconverter serial cable kit 1s available m IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit RS 232 RS 485 with cable and 9 pin to 25 pin adapter This product is documented in Appendix D Determining CPU Revision Levels Versions If you plan to make changes to your system you will need to know
506. the screwdriver about 45 degrees to loosen the cover Remove cover with fingers The battery is mounted in a clip on the back of the cover It has a pair of leads with a connector that is plugged in to a connector on a circuit board inside the power supply Carefully reach into battery cavity with your fingers do not use a metal object to do this and unplug the battery connector Remove the old battery from the clip on the battery cover and set it aside Be careful not to mix it up with the new battery Carefully reach into battery cavity with your fingers do not use a metal object to do this and plug in new battery connector Clip new battery into clip on battery cover Snap battery cover back onto power supply Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 5 Battery Replacement Memory Protection Factors Since there are differences in each PLC application each user will have to determine on an individual basis what strategy to use There are several factors to consider when planning a battery replacement memory protection strategy How critical is the application Will considerable loss be sustained if the PLC goes down If so frequent replacement of the battery would be a wise choice For critical applications the cost of a battery would be quite low in comparison to the cost of a PLC shut down How readily can a backup program be loaded Are there technicians on site who know how to loa
507. to document PLC program design because it uses Natural Language expressions instead of ladder logic symbols Electrical and mechanical prints should contain notations pertaining to safety issues Written operating and maintenance instructions as well as training should be provided to operators and maintenance personnel These should address any applicable safety issues Guarding Against Unauthorized Operation Keylock switches and passwords are frequently used for this purpose Labeling Guarding and Lighting Issues Labeling Operator devices such as pushbuttons switches or on screen software buttons should be clearly labeled as to their function Guarding Operator devices should be guarded where applicable to prevent them from being activated accidentally Recessed pushbutton designs or pushbuttons with surrounding guard rings might help prevent the pushbutton from being depressed if for example a tool were dropped or laid upon it Mounting pushbutton stations to vertical surfaces also may help avoid this problem Lighting Illumination levels in the working area should be adequate so that all labels can be clearly seen Equipment Accessibility Issues The equipment should be laid out so as to give operators sufficient room to perform their tasks safely Also sufficient clearance should be provided so that maintenance personnel have safe access to electrical panels control boxes etc These minimum clearances are specif
508. tors 5 20 352 connectors 5 20 363 connectors 5 20 T O link master module 8 26 IBM AT XT A 5 LED indicators 5 20 pin out IBM AT XT 6 pin out Workmaster 5 Series 90 A 3 Workmaster A 4 Serial Port ethernet interface 8 30 Serial port and cables workmaster serial port A 4 Serial port and cables appendix A cable and connector specifications A 2 IBM AT XT serial port 5 multidrop connections A 10 RS 232 point to point connections A 8 RS 232 RS 485 converter A 7 RS 422 interface A 1 RS 422 point to point connection A 10 serial cable diagrams A 8 Serial port connector location of 9 11 on power supply 4 19 5 3 when functional 4 19 5 4 9 11 Serial Port Pin Assignments CPU351 352 363 5 22 Serial ports CPU 5 15 Series 90 30 125 vde supply 4 2 4 4 24 48 VDC supply 4 7 48 VDC supply 4 10 high capacity 24 VDC supply 4 13 high capacity ac dc supply 4 4 power supplies 4 2 4 4 standard ac dc supply 4 2 Series 90 30 PLC backplane 3 12 CPU capacities 5 10 recording serial numbers 2 1 user references 5 10 visual inspection of new system 2 1 Series Six PLC 8 7 Shield ground CPU351 352 figure 2 14 Shield grounding CPUs 351 and 352 2 14 CPUs 363 and 364 2 16 general information 2 14 Shield treatment cables 10 26 Shielded cable making a 10 27 Slot number Defined 3 3 SLP State Logic Processor 9 4 SNP communications protocol 8 34 SNP ID for multidrop I 5 SNP multidrop over
509. two additional built in serial ports which eliminate the need for a separate serial communications Option module The CPUs 350 364 have extra features and capabilities that the other CPUs do not have such as Floating Point Math Sequential Event Recorder and Memory Protect Key Switch Also CPUs 351 364 have larger total memory size as well as configurable analog and register memory W Memory requirements The CPU351 364 CPUs have configurable analog and register memory This makes them more capable of meeting the needs of Option modules that require this type of memory and user programs that require larger amounts of register or analog memory The CPU360 does not have configurable memory and has a lower base memory size than the CPU351 364 CPUs The CPU360 364 CPUs have standard Flash PROM for user 12 4 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 System Design and Layout data storage This is not available in some of the other CPUs See the CPU Firmware and PROM Configurations table in the CPUs chapter for details Expansion and Upgrade The Embedded CPUs do not support Expansion or Remote racks and do not allow changing CPU type Therefore they have limited options for expansion or upgrade Modular CPUs can usually be upgraded to more powerful CPUs The type of modular CPU determines whether a system can have a total of 5 or 8 baseplates which can have a direct bearing on the future expans
510. two are on the modules front panel labeled Port 1 and Port 2 The CPU351 352 and 363 serial ports are configurable using the programming software configuration function Each port can also be configured using a COMM REQ For details about using these ports and about the COMM REQ instruction please see publication GFK 0582 Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User s Manual Serial Port Front Panel Connectors m Port 1 the top port is RS 232 compatible This port has a 6 pin RJ 11 connector This connector has female contacts and is similar to modular jacks commonly used for telephones and modems The IC693CBL316 can be used to access this port providing a direct connection to an RS 232 device without the need for a converter See Chapter 10 for a datasheet on this cable m Port2 the bottom port is RS 485 compatible Access to Port 2 is through a 15 pin D connector that has female contacts Serial Port Status LEDs The CPU351 and CPU352 have three LEDs that indicate the status of serial port activity on the CPU m The SNP LED on the CPU351 and CPU352 is called PS Port on the CPU363 This refers to the port that uses the serial connector on the PLC s power supply This LED flashes when data is being transferred through the port It remains off when the port is inactive m The P1 LED will flash when data is being transferred through Port 1 the RS 232 port It remains off when the port is inactive m The P2 LED will flash when data i
511. type AMP 205208 1 or equivalent Programmer Side 9 pin male D subminiature type AMP 205203 1 or equivalent Cable Clamps 25 pin AMP 207908 7 or equivalent 9 pin AMP 207908 1 or equivalent Cable Type Six conductor overall shield non paired AWG 24 21 mm Belden 9536 or equivalent Wiring Diagram PIN PIN CON 0 0 2 3 0 0 3 TI 2 0 4 l1 5 WORKMASTER 0 0 5 J20 0 0 T 7 d U 9 PIN 9 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE Figure 10 5 PCM ADC or CMM to Workmaster or PC XT Serial Cable Note Although the IC690CBL701 and 702 cables look identical except for catalog number labeling the internal pin connections are different 10 12 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Cables PCM to Programmer Cable Installation The Series 90 30 PLC baseplate that contains the PCM ADC or CMM and the programmer ground connections must be at the same ground potential Incorrect wiring will result in damage to the programmer or the module Select the WYE cable IC693CBL305 or IC693CBL304 Connect the IC690CBL701 cable s 9 pin female connector to the male RS 232 connector serial port on the selected programming device Connect the cable s 25 pin male connector to the Port 1 connector on the WYE cable Connect the 25 pin male connector on the WYE cable to the female connector on the front of the PCM ADC or CMM m
512. ual GEK 90486 2 IC693CMM301 Genius Comm Module Installation Configuration User Guide GFK 0412 Related Publication Genius I O System User s Manual GEK 90486 1 IC693CMM302 Genius Comm Module Enhanced Installation Configuration User Guide GFK 0695 Related Publication Genius I O System User s Manual GEK 90486 1 Motion Modules Axis Positioning Modules IC693APU300 Installation Configuration User Guide GFK 0293 High Speed Counter IC693APU301 Installation Configuration User s Guide IC693APU302 Standard Mode GFK 0840 Follower Mode GFK 0781 Motion Programming GFK 0664 1C693DSM302 Digital Servo Module Installation Configuration User s Guide standard and follower modes GFK 1464 Motion Programming GFK 0664 1C693DSM3 14 Digital Servo Module Installation Configuration Local Logic Motion Programming User s Guide standard and follower modes GFK 1742 Other Option Modules IC693ADC311 Installation Configuration User s Guide GFK 0499 Alphanumeric Coprocessor Programming Options Module Programming PCOP Development Software GFK 0487 ADS Display System Reference Manual GFK 0641 IC693TCM302 Installation Configuration User s Guide GFK 1466 Temperature Control Module IC693APU305 Installation Configuration User s Guide GFK 1028 I O Processor Module G 6 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002
513. uding program logic reference data and configuration information The use of this function is optional however it is convenient in that it allows you to protect parts of the PLC system from accidental or deliberate modification Protection is provided through four levels of passwords assigned by the user Data Mode Allows you to view and optionally alter values in various reference tables Several display formats can be selected in which to view this data binary hexadecimal signed decimal and timer counter Configuration Mode Allows you to define the types of I O modules installed in the PLC system You can also assign I O module addresses to these modules This feature is convenient in that it allows you to write and test logic programs using discrete references assigned to I O modules that are not yet installed In this mode you can also configure CPU data such as real time clock coil check and HHP characteristics such as keyclick on or off Documentation For detailed information about the Hand Held Programmer refer to GFK 0402 the Series 90 30 20 Micro Hand Held Programmer User s Manual Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Programmer Hardware Products 1C693PIF301 400 Personal Computer Interface PCIF Cards These two Personal Computer Interface cards PCIF and PCIF2 provide an alternative method of controlling Series 90 30 I O Either card can be used in place of a Seri
514. ules 8 7 8 8 Diagnostics Genius Hand Held Monitor The Genius Hand Held Monitor can be used to display the GBC bus address its software version and the Series Six register address configured for global data HHM version IC660HHMS501H revision 4 5 or later is required There is no Hand Held Monitor connector on the GBC module but a Hand Held Monitor can communicate with the GBC while connected to any other device on the bus Optionally an additional HHM mating connector can be installed on the bus near the GBC Hand Held Programmer The GBC can be configured using a Series 90 30 Hand Held Programmer IC693PRG300 Genius I O Blocks Genius I O blocks can be present on the same bus as the GBC However because the Bus Controller is not compatible with older phase A blocks they should not be installed on the same bus Genius Bus The Genius bus is a shielded twisted pair wire daisy chained between devices and terminated at both ends Proper cable selection is critical to successful operation of the system Suitable cable types are listed in GEK 90486 1 the Genius I O System and Communications User s Manual Genius blocks and other devices on the bus automatically report faults alarms and certain other predefined conditions to the PLC INPUTS AND FAULT MESSAGE FROM BLOCK 3 9 TOKEN Fautt 7 Only one diagnostic message can be sent during any bus sca
515. ument each backup copy as to what equipment it is for date it was created or modified version number if any and author s name Keep master backup copies in a safe place Make working copies available to those responsible for maintaining the equipment See Factors Affecting Battery Life in Chapter 5 Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 GFK 0356Q Appendix A Serial Ports and Cables This appendix describes the serial port converter and cables used to connect Series 90 PLCs for Series 90 Protocol SNP This information is included for reference and for those users who have applications that require cable lengths different than the factory supplied cables This appendix contains the following information Communications Interface m Cable and Connector Specifications m Serial Port Configuration m RS 232 RS 485 Converter Catalog No IC690ACC900 m Serial Cable Diagrams O Point to Point Connection LH Multidrop Connection RS 422 Interface 03560 The Series 90 PLC family of products are compatible with EIA RS 422 specifications RS 422 drivers and receivers are utilized to accomplish communications between several system components using multiple driver receiver combinations on a single cable with five twisted pairs The cable length between master and any slave cannot exceed 4 000 1 219 meters feet A multi drop system of eight drivers and receivers can be configured
516. upply and ten other modules Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 Baseplate Terms Backplane Refers to the circuit board in the baseplate It contains the baseplate circuitry and sockets for plug in modules Rack This term applies to an assembly consisting of a baseplate power supply and other modules Rack Number In systems that require more than one rack each rack is given its own unique number which enables the CPU to distinguish one rack from another The CPU rack always has a rack number of 0 zero Slot Number Each module location called a slot on a baseplate has a unique number except for the unnumbered left slot which is for the Power Supply The slot to the right of the Power Supply slot is always called Slot 1 These slot numbers are marked on the baseplate s plastic cover Each slot has a connector for module connections and top and bottom retainers for holding the module in place Module Location Since each rack is assigned a unique number and since each slot in a rack s baseplate has a unique slot number each individual module s location in a system can be identified by its rack and slot numbers For example a module could be referred to as the module in Rack 1 Slot 4 This numbering method enables the CPU to correctly read from and write to a particular module and report the location of a faulted module CPU Baseplate A baseplate that either has a CPU bui
517. us LBDSs iba se OB 8 3 GCM Documentation aa 8 3 IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius Communications Module GCM7 8 4 ul D 8 5 GEM Documentation eee tr ORG a venta 8 5 IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Controller GBC sese 8 6 Number of Genius Bus Controllers sss ene 8 7 Status B vi DE 8 7 Compatibility sns nandneu ende e metodi dT SERA 8 7 Series 90 20 PEG s t ROO EDD IMS 8 7 Serles oEX PEG 8 7 Genius Hand Held 8 8 Hand Held Programmer nee eene eere e eere eda 8 8 Genius VTO Blocks eR REESE I Ev ON UTE 8 8 Genius BUS p RU S ed REPE VOR nue da 8 8 TVA COSI ERI 8 8 Datagrams Ludo ee bean 8 9 Globa bl BF Ieee E 8 9 Sending Global tenets ea eee RS 8 9 Receiving Global Data ee merit eGR ele Bie eid 8 9 Genius Bus Controller Documentation sese 8 9 IC693BEM340 FIP Bus Controller FBC Module senes 8 10 Status IBEDSs ded aed ter etd edd td ded ele 8 11 Serial PONa Gee medendi er ol inte 8 11 FIP Bus Connectors eer me e I i I e II fe el aii ae 8 11 IC693BEM330 FIP Remote I O Scanner Module sese 8 12 Features o
518. ve rack slots For example the CPU364 has CPU and Ethernet communications capability in one module The CPUs 351 352 and 363 have CPU and Serial Communications capability in one module There are discrete and analog combination I O modules that provide a limited number of both inputs and outputs in one module Also the 32 point discrete I O modules conserve rack slots compared with lower density 16 point and less I O modules You may also be able to use Genius Blocks or Field Control distributed I O to accommodate the need for additional I O since these do not require a PLC slot they communicate with the PLC over a communications bus Protection against unauthorized changes CPUs 360 364 have a keylock switch that can be locked to protect against unauthorized changes to the PLC CPUs 311 341 do not have a keylock switch However all CPUs have the capability of password protection for the application program Step 5 Selecting Baseplates 03560 The requirements determined in the previous steps will largely dictate what baseplates to select Please refer to the Baseplates chapter for additional details W Embedded CPU baseplate If the previous selections dictate the use of an Embedded CPU you have three choices The CPU311 and CPU313 are 5 slot sizes and the CPU323 is a 10 slot size The CPU311 has 6K Bytes of memory and the CPU313 has 12K Bytes W Modular CPU Baseplate If you need a modular CPU you must use a Modul
519. vels required by the PLC An optical coupler provides isolation between the incoming power and the logic circuitry Discrete input modules with 8 16 or 32 points are available m Discrete Output Series 90 30 discrete output modules convert logic levels into AC or DC power levels required for driving user supplied devices Either a power semiconductor or an electromagnetic relay switches each output point The discrete output semiconductor switched modules are available with 5 8 12 16 or 32 output points Relay output modules are available with either 8 or 16 Normally Open relay contact outputs m Discrete Input Output Combination discrete input output modules combine AC inputs and relay outputs or DC inputs and relay outputs on one module Each of these modules have 8 input circuits and 8 relay output circuits on one board m Analog Input Series 90 30 analog input modules provide A D Analog to Digital conversion by converting an analog input signal into a scaled digital number which will be transferred into the PLC s AI memory Analog input modules are provided in four versions 1 a 4 channel current module 2 a 4 channel voltage module 3 a 16 channel high density current input module and 4 a 16 channel high density voltage input module m Analog Output Series 90 30 analog output modules provide D A Digital to Analog conversion by converting a scaled digital number from the PLC s AQ memory into an analog output vol
520. verter cable kit is a convenient way to access this port See Appendix D for details m the IC693PRG300 GE Hand Held Programmer CPU374 does not support the HHP See Chapter 11 for details m the IC200ACC003 EZ Program Store device See GFK 1811 for details CPU374 only m other serial devices Chapter 5 CPUs 5 3 5 4 COMPATIBLE SERIAL PORT Figure 5 3 CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply This serial port is RS 485 compatible and uses the GE SNP Series Ninety Protocol protocol slave only Breakfree SNP became the default protocol on all serial ports on the Series 90 30 CPUs starting with firmware release 9 00 for CPUs 350 364 and firmware release 8 20 for CPUs 311 341 For details see page 5 13 The serial port connector is only functional in a power supply that is installed in a baseplate that also contains the CPU It is not functional on a power supply that is installed in an expansion or remote baseplate Any device connected to the serial port that uses 5 VDC power from the Series 90 30 power supply must be included in the calculation for maximum power consumption see the heading Power Supply Loading Calculations in Chapter 12 All Series 90 30 CPUs have this serial port arrangement The 351 352 and 363 CPUs have additional serial ports described in a later section of this chapter Care must be taken that common mode voltage specifications are met for connections to this serial port Common
521. view I 1 SNP port connection 4 19 5 3 Spare parts kits 13 7 Spare parts kits mechanical 13 7 Specifications 24 vdc high capacity power supply 4 14 24 48 vdc power supply 4 8 48 vdc power supply 4 11 high capacity ac dc power supply 4 5 IC690ACC900 converter B 9 serial port cables A 2 standard ac dc power supply 4 3 SQE Ethernet products J 1 J 2 Standard AC DC power supply ac power source connections 4 5 dc power source connections 4 5 illustration of 4 2 overvoltage protection devices 4 5 4 16 specifications 4 3 Standard serial COM port 11 3 State Logic CPU table 9 12 CPUS 9 8 Processor module SLP 9 4 product listing 9 1 Serial Comm module 9 2 Sweep time factors 12 15 factors affecting 12 16 Symbol use of 5 10 System design baseplate selection 12 5 CPU selection 12 4 I O requirements 12 1 Option module requirements 12 2 power supply selection 12 6 T TBQC cables and kits 10 63 for 32 point modules H 11 TCM Temperature Control Module 8 37 TCM comparison table 8 39 Technical support telephone number 2 1 Telephone numbers Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 03560 GE help 13 9 Terminal Block Quick Connect 32 point cables H 12 cables H 3 face plate H 3 installation H 3 terminal blocks H 2 H 12 Terminal block quick connect assembly for 16 Point modules 2 19 Terminal blocks interposing H 2 H 12
522. w are referred to as Cables A E from the system configurations in the previous figures These diagrams show the principles for constructing your own cables and can be modified to fit your specific application 244929 J2 PIN PIN sw ON vant LI LI e RD 3 RTS 4 Il e 5 pg SERIES 90 Dre 20 11 11 ISOLATED CMM REPEATER PORT GND f CONVERTER TOR SHLD 1 II Il BRICK bg bog e A LI AJ 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE Figure C 6 Cable A RS 232 CMM To Converter 44930 2 SW ON J1 SD A SD B RD RD B SERIES 90 RTS A ISOLATED MM REPEATER PORT CONVERTER 10R2 CTS B BRICK GND SHLD 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE TERMINATE CONNECTION ON THE CMM INSTALL JUMPER TO CONNECT INTERNAL 120 OHM RESISTOR ON THE ISOLATED REPEATER CONVERTER INSTALL 150 OHM RESISTOR SUPPLIED Figure C 7 Cable B RS 422 CMM To Converter Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual August 2002 03560 1C655CCM590 Converter SUBSTITUTE APPROPRIATE UP STREAM DEVICE WITHIN DOTTED BOX PER SYSTEM DIAGRAMS MAKE CONNECTIONS TWISTED INSIDE D CONNECTORS PAIRS Coss SSS RD A RD SERIES 90 SD A CMM SD B PORT TERM 10R2 4 TERM RTS A CTS A RTS B SERIES 90 CMM PORT
523. with sufficient lead time to meet your assembly requirements for these connectors These tools are generally not stock items and can have significant lead times from distribution If you have any further questions about this Issue please feel free to contact the GE PLC Technical Support Hotline at 1 800 GE 1 800 433 2682 or International dial direct 804 978 6036 Pin connections with color codes are shown in the following table Cables are made of 12 twisted pairs wire size is 24 AWG 0 22mm Chapter 10 Cables 10 59 Table 10 11 Wire List for 24 Pin Connectors Pin Pair Wire Color Code Pin Number Pair Wire Color Code Number Al 1 BROWN Bl 7 VIOLET A2 1 BROWN BLACK B2 7 VIOLET BLACK A3 2 RED B3 8 WHITE A4 2 RED BLACK B4 8 WHITE BLACK AS 3 ORANGE B5 9 GRAY A6 3 ORANGE BLACK B6 9 GRAY BLACK A7 4 YELLOW B7 10 PINK 8 4 YELLOW BLACK B8 10 PINK BLACK 9 5 DARK GREEN B9 11 LIGHT BLUE 10 5 DARK GREEN BLACK B10 11 LIGHT BLUE BLACK All 6 DARK BLUE B11 12 LIGHT GREEN A12 6 DARK BLUE BLACK B12 12 LIGHT GREEN BLACK d CONNECTOR NOTE Each wire pair has a solid color wire and that same color wire with a black tracer For example Pair 1 has a solid brown wire paired with a brown wire with a black tracer Connector Depth for Custom Built Cables Because custom built cables use a straight connector they require more space in front of the PLC than is
524. x axis terminal IC693DSM314 block See the DSM user s manuals GFK 1464 GFK 1742 for details IC693CBL325 10 3 meter cable connects between a DSM modules DSM module and either a servo axis 1C693DSM302 terminal block or an aux axis terminal IC693DSM314 block See the DSM user s manuals GFK 1464 GFK 1742 for details IC693CBL326 Unused or inactive number IC693CBL327 10 3 meter right angle I O cable For High Density 32 point I O connects to the left side 24 pin modules having dual 24 pin connectors connector on a 32 point module The IC693MDL654 other end has stripped tinned and IC693MDL655 labeled leads Replaces straight cable IC693MDL752 IC693CBL315 on the left side of the IC693MDL753 module IC693CBL328 10 3 meter right angle I O cable For High Density 32 point I O connects to the right side 24 pin modules having dual 24 pin connectors connector on a 32 point module The IC693MDL654 other end has stripped tinned and IC693MDL655 labeled leads Replaces straight cable IC693MDL752 IC693CBL315 on the right side ofthe IC693MDL753 module IC693CBL329 3 1 meter right angle I O cable Used with the Terminal Block Quick connects between the left side 24 pin Connect TBQC assemblies See connector on a 32 point module and the Appendix H for a module list and cable connector on the terminal block selection information Replaces cable IC693CBL321 IC693CBL330 3 1 meter right angle both Used with th
525. xample shows cable connections in system that includes both remote and expansion baseplates A system can have a combination of remote and expansion baseplates as long as the distance and cable requirements are followed CPU BASEPLATE CPU BASEPLATE 4 i l U 1C693CHS391 397 _ EXPANSION O BASEPLATE EXPANSION BASEPLATE 1 693 5392 398 Maximum Cable Distance from CPU 50 Feet i t 15 meters REMOTE BASEPLATE w REMOTE BASEPLATE ill i 1C693CHS393 399 n REMOTE BASEPLATE REMOTE BASEPLATE 4 1C693CHS393 399 x REMOTE E V BASEPLATE 1C693CHS393 399 REMOTE BASEPLATE Maximum Cable Distance from CPU 700 Feet 4 213 meters Standard Wye Cable Custom Built Point to Point Cable IC693CBL300 Standard Wye Cable Used as Wye Jumper 1C693ACC307 Bus Terminator Figure 3 13 Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates 03560 Chapter 3 Baseplates 3 15 Baseplate Mounting Dimensions Note Series 90 30 PLCs must be mounted in a protective enclosure The enclosure should be capable of properly dissipating the heat produced by all of the devices mounted inside it For details on calculating heat dissipation refer to Appendix F Series 90 30 PLC baseplates are designed to be
526. xpansion or Remote racks so an embedded CPU baseplate does not have an expansion connector like the modular baseplates do This means that if you have an application that requires more than 10 modules you will have to use a modular CPU system m The models 311 and 313 5 slot baseplates and the model 323 is 10 slot baseplate Since they do not require a plug in CPU module all numbered slots including Slot 1 can be used for I O or Option modules m The memory back up battery is located in the Power Supply module so if the Power Supply is unplugged from the baseplate the battery will be disconnected from the memory circuits which are located on the backplane circuit board However the backplane circuit board contains a high value capacitor called a super capacitor that can store enough charge to maintain the memory circuits for a short period of time if the Power Supply is removed or its battery is disconnected See the section Super Capacitor Memory Backup in Chapter 6 m These CPUs do not have a time of day TOD clock 5 1 a44563A Replaceable System firmware PROM Socket for Optional Program PROM PROGRAMMABL CONTROLLER Description Label BASE 5 Says With CPU WITH CPU SYSTEM PR z o 00000000000000 00000000000000 a NON CPU SLOTS USER AND REGISTER VALUES MAY BE Memory Backup LOST IF POWER Warning Label REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN
527. ystem Status References These discrete references S SA SB and SC can be viewed in the System Reference Status Table or on screen if used in the ladder program for determining the status of various conditions and faults For example the SC0009 bit turns on if a fault is logged in either fault table Another example is that bit SA0011 will turn on if the CPU memory backup battery is low The Series 90 30 PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual GFK 0467 includes a System Status Reference Table 03560 Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13 3 Reference Tables There are two types of reference tables standard and mixed These tables show groups of memory addresses and their status For discrete addresses the status of these will be shown as either logic 1 or logic 0 For analog and register addresses values will be displayed Standard tables display only one type of memory address such as all of the I bits Mixed reference tables are created by the user who selects what addresses to display in the tables These mixed tables can contain discrete analog and register references all in one table This makes them useful for gathering numerous related addresses on one screen where they can all be viewed or monitored at the same time This saves time compared with searching or scrolling through the ladder logic screens to find these addresses Override feature This feature must be used with caution to ensure the

Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual, GFK

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents